vAlLIBRARYQ^^ ,^WE•ll^llVERV/) 
 
 v^lOSANCElfX;* 
 
 o 
 
 ^^mmyi^^. ^smm-m^ '^•^mK\m^ 
 
 .^OFCALIFO% 
 
 
 AmUNIVERJ/Zi 
 
 AvlOSANCElfJV. 
 
 <rii3DNVsoi^ "^aaAiNH-JWV 
 
 ^lOSANCElfx> 
 
 %a3AiNa3WV^ 
 
 o 
 
 ■^aHAINrtJWV 
 
 ^^^lllBRARY^/r 
 
 ^tllBRARY^/ 
 
 -^ Oe 
 
 ^OJUVDJO"^ 
 
 ^OFCAllFOftfc 
 
 %0JnV3JO^ 
 
 ^OFCAllFOff^ 
 
 
 ^OAavaan-^^ 
 
 ^>^UIBRARYGr 
 
 aWEUNIVERS'//- 
 
 ^lOSANCElfjVx 
 
 o ^^^ ' 
 
 ^<!/ojnv3jo^ "^XiiaoNVsoi^"^ ^/^aaAiNrt-Jwv' 
 
 .^.QFCAllFOfiU^ 
 
 .^WE•UNIVER% 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj-^ 
 
 ^(?AavaaiH^ ^TinONVSOl^ %a3AIN(13WV
 
 
 
 II^S^ '^OAilViiaiH^ 
 
 A\^EUNIVERS'//i 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 <rjl33NVS01^'^ %}13AINn]WV^ 
 
 ^W^UNIVER5•/A ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 <riiaoNvsov'^ %a3AiNa]Wv 
 
 .>;WSANCElfj> 
 o 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 ^IIIBRARYQ^. 
 
 A^llIBRARYQ^^ 
 
 "^AaaAiNfljwv^ ^aojiTVD-jo-'^ ^«ifOJnv3JO'S 
 
 ^OFCALIFO/?^ 
 
 ^OFCALIFORj^ 
 
 ioi^"^ %a3AiNn3y^^ "^^AHvaaii^ "^^AavaaiH^ 
 
 '^YOc. -^^IIIBRARYQ^^ 
 
 ^ X, ^ ^ ^ ' JC 
 
 •JO'^ %0JI1V3J0^ 
 "O/iV ^OFCAtlFOff^ 
 
 ^AWEUNIVERVa 
 
 _ o 
 
 ^^WE•UNIVE^/^ 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj> 
 
 '%a3AiNn-3v\v 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj^ 
 o 
 
 
 <rii30NVsoi^ "^aaAiNn-awv
 
 y/ —^f ■ f ^^L. ft^ ^ ^ ^^
 
 :^^ 
 
 /^f 
 
 GRE GOBl vow FEIW AaOlLE.
 
 THE NEW 
 
 Bvt of 0itm0vp, 
 
 FOUNDED UPON THE PRINCIPLES 
 TAUGHT BY 
 
 M. GREGOR VON FEINAIGLE: 
 
 AND APPLIED TO 
 
 Chronology, History, Geography, Languages, Systematic 
 Tables, Poetry, Prose, and Arithmetic. 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 
 
 SOME ACCOUNT OF THE PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS 
 
 OF 
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY, 
 
 FROM THE EARLIEST PEKiOD TO THE PRESENT TIME ; 
 AND 
 
 INSTANCES OF THE EXTRAORDINARY POWERS 
 
 OF 
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 Illustrated by Engravings. 
 
 WITH NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. 
 
 Constat memorinm halere quiddam artificii et non omnem d 
 natura proficisci, Cic, 
 
 %tm^on : 
 
 PRINTED FOR SHERWOOD, NEELY, AND JONES, 
 PATERNOSTER-ROW ; 
 
 M.Keene and J. Cumming, Dublin; Bell and Bradfute, Edinburgh ; 
 and Brash and Held, Ulaigow. 
 
 1813.
 
 '[^terta at €)t3tiojur0'=i^atC] 
 
 J, Fawcett, Printer, 
 Newcastle Street, Loudon.
 
 stack 
 Annex 
 
 5 
 
 PREFACE ^^.^ 
 
 TO THE -^Q^ 
 
 FIRST EDITION. 
 
 As the art which forms the subject of 
 this volume is sufficiently discoursed on, 
 in the introductory matter prefixed to the 
 system contained in the present work, 
 it remains only to give an account of the 
 origin of this publication. 
 
 The system, here presented to the pub- 
 lic, is that taught by M. Von Fein- 
 aigle; who, by the public exhibitions 
 which he has given of the proficiency of 
 some of his pupils, has excited a very ge- 
 neral interest and curiosity as to the mne- 
 monic art. The following pages contain, 
 amidst various other matter, the sub- 
 stance of fifteen of the Professor's lec- 
 tures, on the application of the art to 
 Chronology, Geography, History, Lan- 
 guage, Systematic Tables, and Poetry and 
 Prose; being the whole of one course, 
 with the exception of one lecture on 
 Arithmetic and Algebra. This was omit- 
 ted because the subject to which it relates, 
 is so complicated in itself, as to render it
 
 IV PREFACE TO 
 
 impossible to give an intelligible account 
 of it within the compass necessarily pre- 
 scribed to this publication ; and because 
 the subject was not of such general in- 
 terest or utility, as those which are here 
 treated of. 
 
 The Editor is not aware that any apo- 
 logy is due to the Professor on account of 
 this publication. The principal peculia- 
 rities of his system had found their way 
 into pretty general circulation, by oral 
 communication, before this work was con- 
 templated : and the accounts which were 
 thus circulated, like most traditions, were 
 by no means calculated to give satisfac- 
 tory or creditable notions on the subject. 
 
 The Editor attended one course of 
 lectures, and, after the example of several 
 of his friends, took very copious notes. 
 Finding, however, that the materials 
 which he had thus collected, were so 
 confused and disorderly, as to be nearly, 
 if not wholly, useless ; and being unwil- 
 ling that the time he had bestowed on the 
 subject should become entirely without 
 profit, he applied himself to draw up 
 these lectures in a more intelligible form, 
 for his oivn vse ; supplying, at length, the 
 analogies and other illustrations to which 
 the lecturer had very cursorily and dis- 
 tantly alluded. In this attempt, parum 
 Claris dare lucent., the matter swelled it-
 
 THE FIRST EDITION, V 
 
 self nearly to the contents of the followmg 
 pages. 
 
 Several of his friends who had attend- 
 ed the Lectures, were pleased to think 
 that the subject had profited much in 
 his hands ; and that the science, thus il- 
 lustrated and explained, was much moret 
 intelligible than it was in its original state 
 of communication. They accordingly 
 urged him to publish this improved ac- 
 count of the system, as well for the be- 
 ne fit of those persons who had actually at- 
 tended courses of Lectures, as of those 
 who wonld be satisfied with such an ac- 
 count of it as is herein contained. With 
 this request he has complied, whether 
 rightly or erroneously, it is not, perhaps, 
 for him to determine. On this subject 
 he only wishes to add, that, however se- 
 condari) and derivative tiiis undertaking 
 may, at first sight, appear to those who 
 have not attended the Lectures, — they 
 who have attended them, will be able, (the 
 Editor is confident,) to give him ample 
 credit for oriqiuaUly . 
 
 No expense has been spared in sup- 
 plying this volume with appropriate en- 
 gravings, together with the diagrams ne- 
 cessary to illustrate the work, and which 
 have been chiefly furnished to him by tlm 
 kindness of his friends. 
 A 3
 
 Ml PREFACE. 
 
 In order to render this work as com- 
 plete as possible, an account has been 
 inserted of the Principal Systems of Ar- 
 tificial Mevnory : and, accordingly, the 
 public and private repositories of curious 
 literature have been diligently searched 
 for- scarce books on this subject. 
 
 Some instances of the extraordinary 
 powers oi Natural Memory conclude the 
 volume: they have been inserted from 
 a persuasion that they will be new to 
 many persons, and agreeable to all. In 
 short, nothing has been omitted, which 
 was thought capable of illustrating or 
 giving interest to the subject; and it is 
 hoped, nothing has been inserted, which 
 the curious reader would wish to be sup- 
 pressed. 
 
 Under these circumstances, the Editor 
 takes leave of his readers, in full conli- 
 dence, that w hatever may be the success 
 of his publication, he has at least deserv- 
 ed well of them, in his intentions and en- 
 deavours to promote their advancement 
 in useful knowledge. 
 
 London, 
 
 August, 1812.
 
 ADVERTISEMENT 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 If the sale of a book b6 any criterion of 
 its merit, the present work must stand 
 high in the opinion of the public, as a 
 large impression fms been disposed of, in 
 the short space o^four months. The ge- 
 neral utility, indeed, of this * New Art of 
 Memory,' needed only to be known to 
 be properly estimated and successfully 
 practised. 
 
 The appearance of such a system 
 as this, has produced (as miglit na- 
 tuVally be expected) many imitators. 
 The merit of having improved upon the 
 original plan of M. Feinaigle, does not, 
 however, appear to belong to any of these 
 persons; for the editor is enabled to state, 
 without fear of refutation, that either an 
 attendance upon M. Feinaigle's lectures, 
 or indeed the former edition of this book.
 
 "Vlll ADVERTISEMENT TO 
 
 has furnished more than the outlines of 
 those systems which were so recently 
 taught in the metropolis. The diagrams, 
 indeed, distributed to the pupils who 
 attended these lectures were, evidently, 
 copied from those of M. Feinaigle. The 
 hieroglyphics, it is true, were exchanged 
 for others of a different nature, but the 
 principles and the practice of the art were 
 precisely the same. 
 
 The chief peculiarities which distin- 
 guish this edition from that which pre- 
 ceded it, are the following : — 
 
 1. The editor has adopted a more con- 
 venient and connected disposition of his 
 materials, and has given an introduction 
 to mnemonics partly new, together with 
 several additions and illustrations calcu- 
 lated to extend the knowledge of this art, 
 and to accelerate the progress of the stu- 
 dent. Among the additions may be named 
 tlie application of the art to Arithmetic, 
 which was not inserted in the former 
 edition, for the reasons stated in another 
 part of this volum e. 
 
 2. Some new and interesting notices 
 of hooks have been inserted in the ac-
 
 THE SECOND EDITION. ix 
 
 count of the Principal Systems of Artifi- 
 cial Memory. This sketch contains no- 
 tices of more than sixty* works on the 
 subject, including copious extracts from 
 many books of great curiosity and value. 
 A small portion of extraneous matter has 
 also been omitted, and the whole of 
 LiQwe's Mnemonics has been introduced. 
 This change was made for two reasons ; 
 (1.) on account of the extreme scarcity of 
 Lowe's original tract, and (2.) because 
 some persons, perhaps, may be inclined 
 to practise this system, and yet be un- 
 willing to purchase the last edition of 
 Grey for this purpose. 
 
 3. To the account of instances of the 
 extraordinary powers of natural memory, 
 is appended an interesting narrative of 
 Zerah Colbium, the young American who 
 is so well known for his wonderful pow- 
 ers in extemporary calculation. This 
 extraordinary youth seems, indeed, to ri- 
 
 • It is, perhaps, worthy of remark, that oue of the most cele- 
 brated bibliographers of the present day, Brunet, — in his 
 Manuel du Libraire, {Paris 1810,) notices one work only on Ar- 
 tiBcial Memory, viz. that oH Grataroli translated by Hope — tiie 
 same solitary book inserted by De Bure, in his Bibliogra- 
 pliie Jnsttuctive.
 
 Xll ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 of common life, it would be endless and 
 useless to specify; the editor will, there- 
 fore, conclude in the words oi GrataroU^ 
 an eminent writer on mnemonics: — 
 
 ' It sufliceth therefore, that we have 
 expressed a methode or compendious 
 waye, the whiche whosoever foloweth 
 shall easel ye (^o tijjat CjCCrd,BC ht tlOt !acft^ 
 pngc) get and attayne the certeine and 
 sure remembraunce, of manye and sun- 
 drye thinges, as due occasion shall re- 
 quire : imt ai3f for tf|e ^luggi^l) miti gstik, 
 \tt tljcin ^luggc aitti ^itti^t ^till, to tDjjome 
 an t^iitgc^ arc ijiisfjrtca^mg/ 
 
 London, 
 January, 1813.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 I. NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 INTRODUCTION ^^S^ 1 
 
 CHAP. I. Principles 31 
 
 II. Chronology 55 
 
 III. Geography 63 
 
 Sect. 1. Principles 63 
 
 2. General Geography 68 
 
 S. Particular Geography 76 
 
 4. Statistics 81 
 
 IV. History 88 
 
 V. Language 98 
 
 Sect 1. On learning Languages 98 
 
 2. Sketch of the origin of Language . . 10^ 
 
 3. Account of sonic attempts towarJs 
 
 a universal cliaracter or alphabet 109 
 4.Proposed philosophical arrangement 
 of the alphabet as applied to lan- 
 guages in general 12? 
 
 5. The derivation of French from La- 
 
 tin, shown to consiit, principally, 
 in the change of certain letters 
 according to established rules. . . . 1S3 
 
 6. Mode of learning the conjugations 
 
 and declcn.xions of a language, ex- 
 emplified in the Latin 146 
 
 7. Particular directions for tlie acqui- 
 
 sition of a language 151 
 
 b
 
 ^T CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. VI. Systematic Ta^bles PageI53 
 
 VII. Poetry and Prose 162 
 
 VIII. Arithmetic 173 
 
 II. PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF ARTIFICIAL MEMORY, 
 
 CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 Thomas Bradwardin 182 
 
 Matheolus Perusinus 183 
 
 Jacobus Publicius ib. 
 
 John Priis 184 
 
 Baldwin of Savoy 185 
 
 Peter of Ravenna ib. 
 
 Jacobus Colinseus 1 85 
 
 Nicholas Chappusius ib, 
 
 John Romberch 187 
 
 Lodovico Doici 188 
 
 William Grataroli •.... 189 
 
 William Fulwod ib. 
 
 Stephen Cope 206 
 
 John Spangenberg 208 
 
 Cosmus Rosselius ib, 
 
 Jordano Bnmo 208, 2 1 1 
 
 Thomas Watson 20.9 
 
 John Michael Albert • ib. 
 
 Philip Gesvaldi ib. 
 
 John Baptist Porta 212 
 
 F. H.Marafioti 213 
 
 Lambert Schenckel 214 
 
 Anon. ib. 
 
 Joh.Paep. (ialbaicus 214 
 
 Arnold Backhusy 215 
 
 Martin Sommcr 217 
 
 Seinpronius Lancioni 227 
 
 Jolui Henry Alsted • ••• »b.
 
 CONTENTS. XV 
 
 AdaraBrux Page 227 
 
 Fr. Mart. Ravellin • -V. •• - 234 
 
 Robert Fludd ..V..?. 236 
 
 Apsines (Graec. Rhet.) 237 
 
 Adam Naulius ib. 
 
 John Willis • 238 
 
 Anon 281 
 
 Joaun. Velasquez >b. 
 
 Hugo Car'Jbnnell 282 
 
 RaymundLully 282,283 
 
 Andrew Valieri 282 
 
 Adrian le Cuirot ib. 
 
 Joh. Conrade Dannliawcr 283 
 
 Meyssonerus • ib. 
 
 Hejiry Herdson 286 
 
 John Belot 307 
 
 Anon. ib. 
 
 Athanasius Kirchcr ib. 
 
 Johannes Austriacus 308 
 
 John Shaw 309 
 
 Simon Wastell ib. 
 
 Anon. 328 
 
 Jo. Brancaccio 239 
 
 Marius D'Assigny ' 330 
 
 Thomas Erhardt 338 
 
 Claude de Buffier ib. 
 
 Richard Grey 340 
 
 Solomon Lowe 363 
 
 Dan. Geo. Morhof 404 
 
 Fr. B. J. Feyjoo -405 
 
 Anacardina, Aguilera, Epiphanius de Moirans, 
 Conti, Mesji'^orus A. Ferreya de Vera 406
 
 XVI CONTENTS. 
 
 III. INSTANCES OF THE EXTRAORDINARY 
 POWERS OF NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 Hortensius Page 407 
 
 Seneca 408 
 
 Aviceima ib. 
 
 Joseph Scaliger 409 
 
 Bishop Jewell ib. 
 
 Lipsius 410 
 
 Muret ^ 411 
 
 Famianus Strada 412 
 
 Thomas Fuller 413 
 
 Humphry Burton 414 
 
 Dr. Wallis 415 
 
 Antonio Magliabechi , , 4l6 
 
 William Lyon 419 
 
 Jedediah Buxton 420 
 
 Zerah Colburn 437 
 
 Directions respecting the Plates. 
 
 Portrait to face the Title. 
 Plate I p. 38 
 
 II 53 
 
 III 64 
 
 IV 69 
 
 V ibid. 
 
 %• Before the reader uses Plates II. III. IV, and V. it will be 
 mdvisable to fake them out 0/ the volume and paste them on stiff 
 paper. If the white paper be cut aunty, it will fold up, so as accu- 
 rately to represent the floor, four walls, and deling of a room.
 
 Mti of i$temor». 
 
 fntro&uction. 
 
 ]\t EMORY, in the sense in which it is to be 
 understood in the present work, (for it is not 
 employed always in the same precise sense) can- 
 not, perhaps, be better defined than in the words 
 of Mr. DuGALD Stewart, " It is that fa- 
 culty which enables us to treasure up, and pre- 
 serve for future use, the knowledge we acquire ; 
 a faculty (he adds) which is obviously the great 
 foundation of all intellectual improvement, and 
 without which, no advantage could be derived 
 from the most enlarged experience." 
 
 With the various metaphysical theories con- 
 cerning Memory which have been advanced by 
 different philosophers, we shall not pretend to 
 meddle; as such an investigation would not 
 much assist our present purposes. Whatever 
 may be the relation in which the Memory stands 
 to the other principles of our constitution, it is 
 B
 
 2 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 beyond all controversy, a most necessary and ex- 
 cellent faculty : so much so, that, as Dr. 
 Watts observes, " all other abilities of the 
 mind borrow from hence their beauty and per- 
 fection ; for other capacities of the soul are al- 
 most useless without this. To what purpose (as 
 the same eminent author inquires) are all our 
 labours in knowledge and wisdom, if we want 
 Memory to preserve and use what we have ac- 
 quired ? What signify all other intellectual or 
 spiritual improvements, if they are lost as soon 
 as they are obtained ? It is Memory alone that 
 enriches the mind, by preserving what our labour 
 and industry daily collect. In a word, there can 
 be neither knowledge, nor arts, nor sciences, 
 without memory ; nor can there be any improve- 
 ment of mankind in virtue or morals, or the 
 practice of religion, without the assistance and 
 influence of this power. Without memory, the 
 soul of man would be but a poor, destitute, 
 naked being, with an everlasting blank spread 
 over it, except the fleeting ideas of the present 
 moment." 
 
 This faculty exists, however, in very difi^erent 
 degrees, indiff'erent men. Some persons possess 
 astonishing vigour of memory,* while others are 
 
 * For many remarkable instances of the extraordinary 
 powers of natural memory, the reader is referred to the 
 conclusion of this volume.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 deplorably deficient in this faculty; or, as Mr. 
 Locke has beautifully expressed the same idea, 
 ** in some persons, the mind retains the charac- 
 ters drawn on it like marble, in others like free- 
 stone, and in others, little better than sand."* 
 Theniistocles, the Athenian, indeed, is saidf to 
 have been oppressed by the strength and tenacity 
 of his memory, and to have wished for the pos- 
 session of the faculty of oblivion, rather than an 
 increase of the powers of remembrance ; but it is 
 
 * IMr. Locke, speaking of the continual decay of our 
 ideas, says, " The ideas, as well as cliildren, of our youth, 
 often die before us : and our minds represent those tombs, 
 to which we are approaching; wiiere though the brass 
 and marble remain, yet the inscriptions are effaced 
 by time, and thp imagery moiiUI/^rs awoy. The pictures 
 drawn in our minds are laid in fading colours, and if 
 not sometimes refreshed, vanish and disappear. How 
 much the constitution of our bodies, and the make of our 
 animal spirits are concerned in this, and whether the tem- 
 per of the brain makes this dift'erence, that in some it re- 
 tains the characlers drawn on it like marble, in others like free- 
 stone, and in others, little belter than sand ; I shall not here 
 inquire : though it may seem probable, that the constitu- 
 tion of the body does sometimes influence the memory j 
 since we oftentimes find a disease quite strip the mind of 
 all its ideas, and the flames of a fever in a few days calcine 
 all those images to dust and confusion, which seemed to 
 be as lasting as*if graved in marble." IVorks, vol. i. p. 76. 
 ed. 4to. 1777. 
 
 t Plutarch Apophtl).
 
 4 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 more than probable that, in this respect, if the 
 anecdote be true, he stands an exception from 
 all the re.n of mankind. Plenus rimanim sum, 
 may be truly, and without reproach, said by al- 
 most every man, with regard to his memory : 
 and that not only concerning matters difficult to 
 be retained, but even concerning the most ordi- 
 nary occurrences of life. 
 
 To remedy this inconvenience, and provide as 
 effectually as possible against the mischiefs of 
 forgetful ness, various artifices have, at different 
 times, been resorted to. Of these, the topical 
 memory of the antients stands first, both in point 
 of date and of celebrity ; and as its principles 
 are very analogous to those of the present system, 
 we shall give some account of the origin and 
 general plan of that invention. And, as PRO- 
 FESSOR Barron, has Jilread trodden this 
 path, ho apology will be offered to the reader 
 for presenting to him, that author's very excellent 
 account of the subject, prefaced by some of the 
 ingenious remarks with which he has introduced 
 it. 
 
 '" The recollection* which ordinary memo- 
 ries possess, appears to be resolvable into two 
 principal sources, the vivacity of the impression 
 and association. ***** 
 
 * Barron's Lect. on Belles Lettres and Logic, v. 1. p. 609.
 
 INTRODUCTIyON. 5 
 
 " But the principal expedient for assisting the 
 memory is derived from association. For in- 
 stance, when I see a house, I naturally recollect 
 the inhabitants, their manner of life, and the in- 
 tercourse I have had with them. The sight of a 
 book prompts the memory of its contents, and 
 the pleasure, or profit, I have received from the 
 perusal of it. A view of the sea may suggest the 
 idea of a storm, and the painful recollection of 
 the loss of property, or of the life of a friend, 
 by shipwreck. The act, then, of aiding recol- 
 lection by association, is to connect thoughts re- 
 mote, or abstract, with others more obvious and 
 familiar, that the recurrence of the latter may 
 bring along with it the memory of the former. 
 Thus the sight of my ring, which I cannot miss 
 to observe, reminds me of the action, to suggest 
 the remembrance of which I moved it from one 
 finger to another. The ringing of the bell, or 
 the sounding of the clock, prompts the recollec- 
 tion of the business [ had resolved to perform 
 at these times. A glimpse of the first words of 
 a paragraph, or a page, introduces the recollec- 
 tion of the whole. In a word, we must connect 
 the things we wish to remember with the imme- 
 diate objects of our senses, tiiat offer themselves 
 daily to our attention, but particularly with the 
 objects of our sight, the most vigorous and lively 
 of all our senses, and of which the objects are, 
 B 3
 
 6 NEW AIIT OF MEMORY. 
 
 perhaps, more numerous than those of all our 
 other senses put together. 
 
 " This theory is the foundation of all contri- 
 vances which have been, or, perhaps, can be, 
 employed to help recollection. It is the ground- 
 work of the famous artificial memory of Simo- 
 NiDES, a lyric poet, of the island of Ceos, one 
 of the Cyclades, who flourished in the sixty-first 
 olympiad, about five hundred and thirty-five 
 years before the birth of Christ, and [who] is ce- 
 lebrated by Cicero and Qu ;NCTi LI AN. Both 
 these authors relate the folkvving mythological 
 incident, on the occasion which suggested the. 
 invention. Simonides was employed by Scopas, 
 a rich Thessalian, to compose a panegyric on 
 him for a ce; iu; sum of money ; was invited to 
 a festival, given by Scopas to his fi lends, in 
 order to rehearse it, but was sordidly refused 
 more than iialf the stipulated compensation, — be- 
 cause puzzled; perhaps, with the sterilify of the 
 principal subject, he had introduced a long epi- 
 sode, amounting to half the poem, in praise of 
 Castor and Pollux. Simonides so'»n found an 
 avenger of the insult. He was immediately sum- 
 moned froMi the company by two young men on 
 horseback, supposed to be Castor and Polhix in 
 disguise, who appeared to protect their favourite 
 poet ; and who, as soon as they had saved Simo- 
 nides, made the roof fall on Scopas and his
 
 INTRODUCtlON. 7 
 
 company, bruising them so to death that not a 
 lineament of them could be known. Simonides, 
 by recollecting the manner in which they sat at 
 table, was enabled to distinguish them, and to 
 deliver them to their friends for burial. The aid 
 which the recollection of the poet received, on 
 this occasion, is said to have suggested the idea 
 of an artificial memory. 
 
 " The principle of the scheme of Simonides, 
 is to transfer a train of ideas, the archetypes of 
 which are not the objects of sense, and are, 
 therefore, of difficult recollection, to another 
 train which we cannot miss to recollect, because 
 the archetypes are not only objects of sense, but 
 objects of sight, with which archetypes we are 
 perfectly familiar; or which may be placed ac- 
 tually before our eyes. Suppose then Simo- 
 nides were to commit to memory a discourse, 
 consisting of speculations concerning govern- 
 ment, finance:!, naval affairs, or wisdom, none 
 of the archetypes of which could be made objects 
 of sense, at least, at the time of delivery ; and 
 to assist his recollection, he were to connect the 
 series of ideas, in that discourse, with a series of 
 objects, which he could either place in sight, or 
 with which he was so familiar, that he could not 
 fail to recollect them ; he would proceed in the 
 following manner. He would take a house, for 
 instance, either the one in which he might deli- 
 ver the discourse, or another ; with every part of
 
 8 NEW AltT OF MEMORY. 
 
 which he was perfectly acquamted. He would 
 begin at some fixed point of that house, suppose 
 the right side of the door, and he would proceed 
 round it in a circular line, till he arrived at the 
 point from which he set out. He would divide 
 the circumference of the house into as many 
 parts as there were different topics, or para- 
 graphs, in the discourse. He would distinguish 
 each paragraph by some symbol of the subject it 
 contained ; that on government, by the symbol 
 of a crown, or a sceptre ; that on finances, by 
 the symbol of some current coin ; that on naval 
 affairs, by tiie figure of a ship ; that on wisdom, 
 by the figure of the goddess who presided over 
 it. He would either actually transfer, or sup- 
 pose transferred, these symbols to the different 
 compartments of the house, and then all he had 
 to do, in order to recollect the subject of any 
 paragraph, was, either to cast his eye on the 
 symbol during delivery, or to remember upon 
 what division the symbol was placed. The 
 memory, by this contrivance, easily recalled the 
 discourse. The orator eidier saw, or could not 
 fail to remember the compartments, because he 
 was perfectly familiar with them. Neither could 
 he forget the symbols of each paragraph, because 
 they were no more than hieroglyphical paintings 
 of the sense. 
 
 "In the place of a house, we may assume, 
 according to Quinctilian, a public building, the
 
 INTKODUCTION. 9 
 
 walls of a city, a well known road, or a picture, 
 to divisions of which we may refer our symbols. 
 Metrodorns assumed the circle of the zodiac, 
 which he divided into 360 compartments, equal 
 to the number of degrees of which it consists, 
 making a compartment of each degree. 
 
 " Some people carried this art so far as to 
 comprehend the words of a discourse, by con- 
 structing symbols for each of them, and refer- 
 ring, in like manner, these symbols to compart- 
 ments. This seems to have constituted nearly 
 what we call short-hand writing, except that our 
 short-hand writers oblige themselves to commit 
 to memory the meaning of their symbols, and 
 pretend not to refer these to any more familiar 
 objects. Quinctilian accordingly observes, that 
 this pretended improvement terminated in confu- 
 sion, and embarrassed, much more than it assisted, 
 recollection. However much, therefore, he might 
 prize the scheme of Simonides, he rejected this 
 supplement as nugatory, or detrimental." 
 
 This system of Mnemonics was a favourite 
 pursuit with the Greeks ; — and was cultivated 
 with success by the Romans, among whom Cras- 
 sus, Julius Cagsar, and Seneca, are said to have 
 particularly excelled in this art 
 
 Such were the origin and principles of tiie cele- 
 brated topical memori/ of the antients : from 
 which source are derived all the various modern 
 systems of local and symbolical memory, that
 
 It) NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 have been promulgated from the thirteenth to the 
 eighteenth century. We shall here briefly reca- 
 pitulate the names of the principal zcriters on the 
 subject, referring our readers lO another part of 
 this volume for an acj^count of the different sys- 
 tems. 
 
 That luminary of science, Haymund Lully, 
 born in 1236, seems to have been the first mo- 
 dern who brought the art of memory into notice, 
 after it had lain dormant for so many ages. This 
 art was termed transcendental, aiid distinguished 
 by his name. 
 
 In the Jifteenth century mnemonics seem to 
 have occupied the attention oi PnhliciuSy Priis, 
 Peter of Cologne, and Peter of Ravenna, who 
 successively published systems of local and sym- 
 bolical memory. 
 
 In the year 15S3, Romberch published his 
 Congcstorium Artijiciosct Memorici, which con- 
 tains a very complete view of his predecessors' 
 labours, with many important additions. Gra~ 
 taro/i, an Italian physician, was the next writer 
 on this subject, who in 1555, put forth a trea- 
 tise, * de memoria reparanda etc.* This was 
 translated into English by William Fulwod, 
 under the title of ' the Castel of Memorie ;' and 
 afterwards rendered into French by Stephen Cope. 
 The treatise of Grataroli contains nuich curious 
 matter. 
 
 The works of Spangenberg, Rosselius, Bruno,
 
 INTRODUCTION. U 
 
 Albert, Porta, Marajioti, and others, appear- 
 ed about the close of the sixteenth century, but 
 they contained nothing very materially new on 
 the mnemonic art. 
 
 The seventeenth century was remarkable for 
 the number and variety of mnemonistic works 
 which issued from the presses of the continent. 
 England also had her share in this honour, anil 
 produced one or two books worthy of examina- 
 tion. The system of Schenckel occupied the 
 greatest share of attention in France and Ger- 
 many. Schenckel was followed by Alsted, Brux, 
 RaveUin, and Nau/uis. Brux also wrote an 
 essay upon the * art of forgetfulness,' and gave 
 numerous rules for acquiring perfection in this 
 useful science. 
 
 The principal work published in Englayid, on 
 the subject of the local memory, appeared in 
 16 18, under the title oiMnenionica; shears 
 Meminiscendi, etc. by John Willis ; and was trans-^ 
 lated in I66I, by one Sowersby, a bookseller. 
 This curious and rare volume is replete with in- 
 formation respecting- mnemonics, and discourses 
 at large concerning every particular which re- 
 quires the attention of the student. 
 
 In the year l651, Henri/ Herdson, who styles 
 himself a Professor by Public x\uthority in the 
 University of Cambridge, published his Ars 
 MnemonicOfSive Herdsonus Bnixiatus, etc. in
 
 12 NEW AKT OF MEMORY. 
 
 Latl» and Euglish. It is merely a republication 
 of part of Brux's Simonides Redivivus. 
 
 The mnemonical essays published on the con- 
 tinent from 1620 to 1702, were principally by 
 Azevedo, Carbonel, Cuirot, Dannhazver, Belotf 
 and Brancaccio : — several anonymous systems 
 were put forth also during this period. Er- 
 hardt's Ars Memoriae, appeared in 1715, and 
 Morhof^wdi Father Feyjoo, have, both, disserta- 
 tions expressly upon the subject ; the one in his 
 Polyhistor, and the other in his Cartas Eruditas 
 y Curiosas. 
 
 From the time of Feyjoo (1781) to I8O6, 
 (if we except a German translation of Schenckel 
 by Kliiber) the local and symbolical memory 
 seems to have lain completely dormant. In the 
 Philosophical Magazine for December, I8O6, 
 there is the following notice : — 
 
 " A new branch of science is begun to be stu- 
 died in Germany. It is the science called by the 
 antients mnemonica, or the art of memory. We 
 find in Herodotus, that it was carefully taught 
 and practised in Egypt, whence it was trans- 
 planted into Greece. This historian attributes 
 the invention of it to Simonides ; but this opi- 
 nion is refuted in a dissertation published by M, 
 Morgenstern, of Dorpat, upon mnemonica. He 
 there asserts, that this science is more intimately 
 connected with the Egyptian hieroglyphics than
 
 INTRODUCTION. 13 
 
 is generally thought, and that this connection 
 may help to explain them. However the case 
 may be, this singular art, so long neglected, has 
 reappeared in Germany with some eclat. M. 
 Aretin, who may be accounted the restorer of it, 
 has recently had M. Kaestner, a clergyman, as 
 his pupil, whom he has permitted to teach his 
 new doctrine at Leipzic ; at the same time exact- 
 ing a promise from him not to suffer his pupils 
 to write down his lectures. M. Kaestner travels 
 about like Dr. Gall. 
 
 " According to a book written, it is said, by 
 a child of twelve years of age, and mentioned in 
 the Leipzic catalogue for the last September 
 fair, mnemonica is a true science, and may be 
 taught by means of seventeen different rules, and 
 which will give a memory to individuals of every 
 age." 
 
 In March 1807, M. Gregor Von Fein- 
 AiGLE, a native of Baden, visited Paris, and 
 delivered Lectures on his ' New System of 
 Mnemonics and Methodics.' In the PhilosO' 
 phical Magazine for June, 1807,* there is the 
 following extract from a letter written by M. 
 FiCHTEL, at Paris, to a friend in London, 
 giving some account of M. Von Feinaigle's 
 exhibitions there. 
 
 * Vol. xxviii. p. 92. 
 C
 
 14 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 " Paris, 2d March, l807. 
 " During my residence in this metropolis I 
 heard a great deal of a new method of mnemo- 
 nique, or of a method to assist and fix our me- 
 mory, invented by Gregor de Feinaigle. Not- 
 withstanding the simplicity with which he an- 
 nounced his lectures in the papers, I could not 
 determine myself to become a pupil of his, as I 
 thought to find a quack or mountebank, and to 
 be laughed at by my friends for having thrown 
 away my cash in such a foolish manner. Per- 
 haps I should hesitate to this moment about the 
 utility of this new invented method to assist our 
 natural memory, had I not had the pleasure of 
 dining at his excellency's the Count of !RIetter- 
 nich, the Austrian ambassador, who followed, 
 with all his secretaries, the whole course of lec- 
 tures : they all spoke very advantageously of it, 
 likewise several other persons of the first rank I 
 met there: in consequence of this I was inserted 
 into the list of pupils, and I follow, at this mo- 
 ment, the lectures. All I can tell you about 
 this method is : it is a very simple one, and easy 
 to be learned, adapted to all ages and sexes : all 
 difficulties in such sciences as requiie an extraor- 
 dinary good memory, for instance, the names 
 and epochs in history, are at once overcome and 
 obviated. There is not one branch of science to 
 which this method cannot be applied. It is easy
 
 Introduction. 15 
 
 to be perceived that such an invention cannot 
 pass without some critique, and even sarcasms, 
 in the public prints : some of them were very 
 injurious, and plausible enough to mislead the 
 public, who, knowing nothing of the method, 
 are always more ready to condemn than to assist. 
 Mr. Feinaigle, to answer all these critics at 
 once, adopted a method not less public for Paris 
 than the public papers, but less public for the 
 rest of Europe : he gave, the 22d of last month, 
 a public exhibition to about 2000 spectators, in . 
 which he did not appear at all, only about 12 
 \)r \5 of his pupils : each of them made such an 
 t!pplication of the method as his situation in life 
 required. The principal parts were the follow- 
 ing : history about names and years ; geography, 
 with respect to longitude, latitude, number of 
 inhabitants, square miles, &c. &c.; grammar 
 in various languages, about different editions of 
 the same work ; pandects, their division, and 
 title of each book, title, &.c. ; different systems 
 of botany, poetry, arithmetic, &c. &c. At lait 
 one desired the company to give him one thou- 
 sand words, without any connection whatsoever, 
 and without numeric order ; for instance, the 
 word astronomer, for No. 6*2 ; zvood, for No. 
 188; loveli/, for No. 370; dj/nasti/, for No. 
 23 ; David, for No. 90, &c. Sec. till all the
 
 16 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 numbers were filled : and he repeated the whole 
 (notwithstanding he heard these words, without 
 order, and but once,) in the numerical order ; 
 or he told you what word was given against any 
 one number, or what number any one word 
 bore. It is still more striking, but certainly, 
 likewise, more difficult, to retain as many num- 
 bers however great they may be. For words 
 and numbers I could venture myself, with the 
 greatest safety, as far as one hundred of each ; 
 and I am sure, after having fixed them once, 
 which is done in less than ten minutes, I could 
 repeat tliem to you at any period, without ever 
 thinking any more of them. 
 
 *' M. Feinaigle is about to visit England." 
 
 To the testimony of M. Fichtel may be added 
 that of the celebrated French astronomer, M. 
 Lalande, who says, " I have witnessed the 
 extraordinary effects produced on the memory, 
 by the method of M. de Feinaigle : one of his 
 pupils is able to repeat, in any order, without 
 the least mistake, a table of fifty cities in all 
 parts of the world, with the degrees of longitude 
 and latitude in which they are situated ; the same 
 is the case with chronology : in the Annuaire, I 
 have inserted 240 dates from antient and modern 
 history, and M. de Feinaigle's Scholars repeat
 
 INTRODUCTION. 1? 
 
 them all — an astonishing aid in the study of geo- 
 graphy and history !" 
 
 In the Monthly Magazine for September, 
 1 807,* there is a letter under the signature of 
 Common Sense, which, though somewhat illi- 
 beral in its remarks, displays considerable know- 
 ledge of tha principles of the * local and symbo- 
 lical Memory.' 
 
 " Any person (says this writer) who wishes to 
 try an experiment on the powerof association, need 
 only make use of the succession of rooms, closets, 
 stair-cases, landing-places, and other remarkable 
 spots or divisions, of his own house, with all the 
 parts of which he may be supposed to be very fa- 
 miliar. Let him apply any word or any idea to the 
 sevorul parts of the house, in any. determined order 
 of their succession, and he will find it almost 
 impossible, in recalling the same order of the 
 parts of the house, not to associate the idea or 
 word which he had previously annexed to each 
 part. Thus, for' example, a person may learn 
 the succession of the Kuigs of England in ten 
 minutes, by annexing the names of each suc- 
 ceeding monarch to the successive rooms, clo- 
 sets, and principal parts of his own house, 
 beginning at the upper story, and regularly de- 
 
 * Vol. xxiv. p. lOj. 
 € 3
 
 18 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 scending ; or, at the lower story, and regularly 
 ascending. 
 
 " Any other permanent and familiar class of ob- 
 jects will, in general, answer the purpose better 
 than the rooms of a house. I was myself edu- 
 cated in the vicinity of Oxford-street, and the 
 streets running out of that street south and north 
 (beginning at Charles-street, Soho-square, and 
 proceeding to Dean-street, Chapel- street, and 
 so on to Park-lane, and down on the other side 
 to Rathbone-place and Hanway-yard) are the 
 permanent and familiar set of objects, which I 
 make use of for my own purpose of successive 
 association. Tiie counties in England, the king- 
 doms and the countries throughout the world, 
 the villages, and other objects on a great road, 
 or the streets of a city, are all well suited to this 
 business of association ; and either of them may 
 be taken indiflferently by various persons, accord- 
 ing to their acquaintance with them. The greater 
 the variety of ideas connected with this set of 
 objects, which may be called the associating 
 key, the more easy, and the more certain is -the 
 power of recollection. 
 
 " If I do not hazard a charge of egotism, I 
 shall mention, as illustrative facts, that by this 
 new art I once committed to memory, in a sin- 
 gle murning, the whole of the propositions con- 
 tained in the three first books of Euclid, and
 
 INTUODUCTION. ly 
 
 with such perfection, that I could for years after- 
 wards specify the number of the book on hearing 
 the proposition named, and could recite the 
 proposition on hearing the number and the book; 
 and I have frequently, in mixed companies, re- 
 peated backwards and forwards from fifty to au 
 hundred unconnected words, which have been 
 but once called over to me. 1 may also add, to 
 prove the simplicity of the plan, that I taught 
 two of my own children to repeat fifty uncon- 
 nected words in a first lesson, of not more than 
 half an hour's continuance." 
 
 M. VoN Feinaigle visited England some 
 time in the early part of 181 1. In order to exhi- 
 bit a detail of his progresses in this country, we 
 have made some extracts from the Periodical 
 Works and Public Papers which gave an account 
 of his various experiments. 
 
 " On the22d of June, 181 1, M.VouFeinaigle* 
 gave at the Royal Imtitulion, a public experi- 
 ment of the efficacy of his Method of facili- 
 tating and ai>sisting Memory. The Managers 
 of lite Institution, in consequence of the appli- 
 cation of the Committee of Literature and Sci- 
 ence, granted permission for this public display 
 of the art, without, however, making themselves 
 in any way responsible as to Us character. The 
 
 * Gent. Mag. vol. Ixxxi. part 1. p. .281.
 
 dlO NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 exhibition took place before an assembly of se- 
 veral hundred Ladies and Gentlemen, who were 
 astonished and delighted with the result of the 
 experiment. Four children, two boys and two 
 girls, all under 14 years of age, had been put 
 under Mr. Feinaigle's care but two or three 
 days before : he had one of the girls but an hour 
 and a half; and the longest tuition that any of 
 them had received was but four hours and a 
 half. — One of them repeated Goldsmith's Her- 
 mit backward and forward, and stated the stanza, 
 the line, and the order of any remarkable word 
 required of him. — One liille girl answered to 
 questions in t!ie chronology of tlie Roman Em- 
 perors ; and another multiplied, without slate or 
 paper, two sums of eight rig,ures by eight, and 
 declared that she had not previously been taught 
 arithmetic. — A boy determined the geographical 
 situation by degrees and minutes, of 50 different 
 cities; and on a planisphere chalked out on a 
 board, marked down the true situation of places 
 named to him. — Mr. Fincher, of the Institution, 
 also recited the Mineialogical Tables of Ilauy, 
 tiie second part of which he had taught himself 
 on Mr. Feinaigle's system, together with the fust 
 part of Brisson's Ornithologic System ; and he 
 declared, from his own experience, that the 
 principles of Mr. Feinaigle's art were equally 
 calculated to give facility in the acquisition, and
 
 INTRODUCTION. 21 
 
 certainty in the retention, of the tables of any 
 other science — a fact which was confirmed by 
 several Gentlemen present, who have attended 
 the private courses of the Professor. — ^The exa- 
 minations were carried on by Mr. Disney, Chair- 
 man of the Literary and Scientific Committee ; 
 and for a great part of the time, Mr. Feinaigle 
 retired from the Lecture-room. Nothing could 
 be more satisfactory than the result of the expe- 
 riments ; and the company returned Mr. Fein- 
 aigle their thanks. — The Professor, Aug. 26, 
 repeated the experiment at Liverpool, where the 
 Rev. Jonathan Brookes, at the request of the 
 Mayor, selected from the diflferent charity- 
 schools of the town, children upon whom the 
 experiment might be made. The exhibition took 
 place before a very numerous assembly. Four 
 children had been put under Mr. Feinaigle's tui- 
 tion but three days before, two boys and two 
 girls, and none of them had received more than 
 two hours' instruction; neither of the girls could 
 make or read a figure when first presented to 
 him. The examinations (which were carried on 
 by the Rev. Jonathan Brookes) were precisely 
 of the same nature as those at the Royal Insti- 
 tution ; and the results were equally satisfac- 
 tory. 
 
 " On the 6th of April, 1812, the effects of M. 
 Von Feinaigle's system were exemplified at
 
 22 NEAV ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 the Surry Institution, before a numerous as- 
 sembly of Proprietors and Subscribers, by the 
 examination of five young persons, who had 
 previously been committed to the care of M. 
 Von Feinaigle.* 
 
 " 1. Master H. S. (13 years of age) deter- 
 mined the geographical situation oi Jifty princi- 
 pal towns in different parts of the globe, assign- 
 ing to each its longitude and latitude in degrees 
 and minutes, and named the country in which it 
 is found. He also marked on a blank plani- 
 sphere the true situation of the towns named to 
 him. 
 
 2. Miss P. K. (11 years of age) repeated 
 fifty stanzas of four lines each, from the second 
 part of Mrs. More's ' Sir Eldred of the Bower.' 
 These she repeated consecutively, and in any 
 order desired. On any remarkable word being 
 mentioned, she determined the stanza, the line, 
 and the place of the line, in which it was to be 
 found ; and also how many times the same word 
 occured in the Poem. 
 
 " 3. Miss M. A. K. (15 years of age) an- 
 SM'ered to all the decleiisions, as well of sub- 
 stances as of adjectives, of the Latin Language ; 
 and gave a full account of all the conjugations. 
 
 • Tlie whole of this report is 1,iken from the Mvrnin^- 
 Post of April 18th, 1812.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 23 
 
 both active and passive, witliout any previous 
 knowledge of that language. 
 
 ** 4. Miss S. S. (of the same age with the 
 preceding pupil) answered to the declensions and 
 conjugations of tlie Greek Language, and de- 
 clined and conjugated several regular nouns and 
 verbs proposed to her. This pupil had never 
 seen a Greek character till put under the care of 
 the Professor, 
 
 " The whole instruction received hij th^ 
 above pupils consisted oj" Jive lessons only, of 
 one hour each. 
 
 " Master S. H. explained the physical, ma- 
 thematical, and chemical characters of minerals, 
 after Hauy's system, assigning the systematical 
 order of any character v.hatever proposed to him, 
 and showing in what manner any mineral ought 
 to be examined and tried, to ascertain its nature. 
 This pupil received only two hours' instruction 
 from M. Feinaigle. 
 
 " Master S. H. afterwards requested the audi- 
 ence to give twenty words, or names, without 
 any order or connection whatever. These words 
 were written on a board, and numbered from one 
 to twenty as follows : — 
 
 1. Tower. 5. Chapel. 
 
 2. Gate. G. Institution. 
 
 3. Steeple. 7. Crotch. 
 
 4. Church. 8. Grey.
 
 24 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 9. Regent. 15. Hill. 
 
 10. Feinaigle. 16. Nelson. 
 
 11. Syracuse. 17. Archimedes. 
 
 12. Wellington, 18. Palestine. 
 
 13. Graham. 19. Button. 
 
 14. Ten. 20. Reform. 
 
 " After inspecting the number and words for 
 a space of time, not exceeding three minutes, 
 the pupil named every word in the series, both 
 forward and backwards : to any number that m as 
 proposed to him, he assigned the proper word, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 " A series of twenty-eight figures, named pro- 
 miscuously by the audience, was then written 
 down, as, 8. 5. 1. 0. 5. 0. 2. 9- 6. 8cc. &c. &c. 
 These the pupil surveyed attentively, for about 
 five minutes, and then repeated them forwards 
 and backwards. He afterwards declared how- 
 many 8s. 2s. 93. &.C. occurred in the series, and 
 the relative situation of each figure. 
 
 " In consequence of the disappointment of 
 many of the Proprietors and Subscribers, who 
 could not obtain admittance into the Lecture 
 Room on the 6th instant, the above experiments 
 were repeated on Wednesday evening last to a 
 crowded auditory. On this evening the follow- 
 ing additional evidences of the utility and uni- 
 versality of M. Feinaigle's System were ad- 
 duced.
 
 I'NTRODUCTION. 85 
 
 ''' 1. Master J. C. answered to two sums in 
 multiplication of 8 numbers, by 8 numbers each. 
 Each sum containing 8 separate products, be- 
 sides the total product ; he repeated any pro- 
 duct required of him. The separate operations 
 being represented on a board, by cyphers — on 
 any one cypher, or line of cypliers, on either 
 sum being effaced, he replaced them by the ap- 
 propriate figures. This pupil was employed for 
 ten minutes only, in committing the figures to 
 memory. 
 
 " 2. Miss S. T. answered to the Chronology 
 of the Kings of England, from William the Con- 
 queror, down to his present Majesty, in any 
 order that was desired. She also named the 
 predecessor and successor of any King pointed 
 out to her. This pupil received four lessons of 
 one hour each. 
 
 *' Master S. H. after one hour's appIicatioUf 
 repeated a Greek word from Aristophanes, con- 
 sisting of seventy-six syllables and \65 letters, 
 both forwards and backwards ; he also named 
 any syllable in any order desired, determining its 
 numerical situation."* 
 
 At these public experiments, M. Von Fei- 
 
 • Similar experiments liave been given at the Russell 
 Institution, Freemasons' Hall, the London Tavern, 
 etc, etc. etc. 
 
 D
 
 26 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 NAIGLE distributed a syllahuSy in which the 
 nature of the pupil's examination was stated ; 
 and the six following notes, or explanations, of 
 the objects of his * New System of Mnemonics 
 and Methodics,' were subjoined. 
 
 *' 1. Sijstematic Tables. A method that is 
 at once speedy and effectual for acquiring the 
 perfect knowledge of systematical tables, is an 
 object of higher value and greater importance 
 than at first it might appear. How often are we 
 attending courses of lectures upon particular 
 sciences, without being able to form a clear idea 
 of the whole, or to give ourselves an account of 
 what we are learning ! When, by the means here 
 recommended, we are enabled to know previously 
 the great divisions and subdivisions of a system, 
 it is not difficult to refer to those fixed points all 
 our ideas, and at once to secure our knowledge 
 aheady attained, and to accelerate our progress 
 in the science. A system acquired by this me- 
 thod is not a dry and sterile series of words ; h 
 is a well-arranged classification of real know- 
 ledge. We learn in like manner all the systems 
 of any science, whatever ; however complicated 
 they may appear. 
 
 " 2. Languages. The learning and teaching 
 of languages are not only facilitated by the sys- 
 tem of Mnemonics, but acquire more light and 
 more solidity than ever they were thought sus-
 
 INTRODUCTION. 5? 
 
 ceptible of. It is a fact well known to all my 
 pupils, that, almost in any language whatever, 
 the declensions may be learnt in a single hour, 
 and all the conjugations in another. It can 
 easily be conceived, that all the rest may be ac- 
 quired with the same facility : but this is not 
 all the advantage of my system : anomalies, irre- 
 gularities of verbs, and similar difficulties which 
 have been hitherto the torment of the scholars, 
 become, by this system, the most pleasing and 
 most instructive part of the language. My pu- 
 pils are convinced, by the most satisfactory ex- 
 perience, that grammar is to be learned in the 
 language, not the language in the grammar ; and 
 when the true way is once known, it becomes 
 delightful to them to go on with ease and promp- 
 titude, by themselves, from one language to ano- 
 ther. 
 
 *' 3. Prose atid Poetry. When we know pieces 
 of prose or of poetry in such perfection that we 
 are able to answer at pleasure to any single word, 
 it is not to be imagined that in learning them we 
 have to fix one word after another ; but what- 
 ever we commit to our memory is there in such 
 an order that we are sure to find it again when- 
 ever we may wish fur it. The matter and the 
 diction are necessarily distinguished, and every 
 thing treated after its own nature, and we are 
 therefore sure neither to omit any thing that is
 
 S9 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 to be said, nor any word by which it ia to be ex- 
 pressed. Persons who could never before get by 
 heart either prose or poetry, have, by a short 
 practice of this method, acquired the greatest 
 readiness and facility. 
 
 " 4, Geography, Tliis part of geography* 
 has only been learned by ray common manner of 
 fixing in the memory proper names in general, 
 and that of noting the arithmetical figures wher- 
 ever we meet them. The true system of geo- 
 graphy is the object of more than one of my 
 lectures ; and by this new system the study ac- 
 quires a degree of facility, and the science itself 
 a degree of perfection, of which it was never 
 thought susceptible, and yet without which it 
 can never be essentially what it ought to be. 
 Those who w ould think it needless, or of no use, 
 to know the situation of every remarkable point 
 of the globe by degrees of longitude and latitude, 
 have to consider, if without these degrees, geo- 
 graphy itself, or any geographical chart, could 
 ever exist ; and, if not, they surely cannot main- 
 tain that what is essential to geography itself may 
 be neglected in the study of geography. This 
 perfection is not only given to the science by my 
 system, but is also attained with greater facility 
 
 • This refers to the longitude and latitade of the fifty 
 cities repeated by the pupil.
 
 INTRODUCTION. 29 
 
 and certainty than even the former imperfect 
 knowledge could be acquired by any other method 
 whatever. The same principles are applicable 
 with equal efficacy to all th^i subsidiary parts' of 
 a perfect geographical knowledge, and it is 
 shown how to fix in the memory, for instance, 
 the government, the extent, the population, and 
 the military power, the products, the commerce, 
 the manufactures, the arts and sciences, 8cc. of 
 every state. Those who are acquainted with the 
 principles of the present arrangement, cannot but 
 feel how much easier it must be to compare, 
 according to this plan, one kingdom with another 
 by simple memory, than after any other plan, 
 with all the assistance of books and systematic 
 tables. 
 
 ** 5. Chronology. What is done with regard 
 to the kings of England may be done with any 
 chronological series of sovereigns ; and though 
 such a series presented nothing more than what 
 may be consideied as great epochs of history, 
 even of those the present system offers a greater 
 number than any other system of chronology, 
 and fixes them more easily than it has ever been 
 possible to do by all those ingenious historical 
 tables which have been invented to assist the 
 memory in this interesting sivv\y. But the high- 
 est perfection of historical knowledge is cejrtainly 
 
 to know the whole history, not only by great 
 D 3'
 
 so NEW ART OF MEMOllY. 
 
 epochs, but year by year, and fact by fact ; and 
 this perfection no other system has ever been 
 able to afford. 
 
 " 6. Multiplication. To make a multiplica- 
 tion, consisting of a greater number of figures in 
 the multiplier as well as in the multiplicand, 
 only by memory, without writing any thing, may 
 certainly in many cases be desirable, or of great 
 utility, and is at least a certain proof that the 
 prmciples of the present method reach every 
 where, and that to its means nothing is too dif- 
 ficult or too complicated. It is undoubtedly of 
 the highest importance to be able to fix in our 
 minds the numbers in general. Statistic geo- 
 graphy, history, mathematics, in short, almost 
 evei7 science is full of numerical figures. Mul- 
 tiplication tables, square and cube numbers, loga- ' 
 rithms, algebraic formulae, and all the mathema- 
 tics can be submitted to those rules." 
 
 Since the period of M. Von Feinaigle's 
 arrival in this country, he has been delivering a 
 variety of courses of fifteen or sixteen lectures 
 each, for which the charge of five guineas has 
 been made ; but the pupil is at liberty to attend 
 any particular lecture, a second time, 'should he 
 not sulficicntiy comprehend it at the first hearing. 
 M. Von J'einaigle has not confined his visits to 
 the metropolis: Edinburgh, Glasgow, Liver- 
 pool, etc. etc. have, in the summer season, been, 
 successively, the theatre of his exertions.
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 ^rinctple0* 
 
 Xhe memory may be compared to a ware- 
 house* stored with merchandise. A methodical 
 arrangement of the contents of such a repositor}', 
 enables its owner to find any article tliat he may 
 require, with the utmost readiness. With a 
 general knowledge of the contents of a library, and 
 of the manner in which the books are distributed, 
 a person may, even when absent from the spot, 
 determine, with certainty, the situation of any 
 particular book.-j- " ^Medallists," says Mr. 
 
 * Memory is, as it were, thcstorchor.se of our ideas; 
 for the narrow'niind of man not bting capable of having 
 many ideas under view an<l contemplation at ouce, it was 
 necessary to have a repository to lay up those ideas, which 
 at another time it might make use of. Lock on tlu Human 
 Understanding, vol. i. p. 111. 
 
 t The well known anecdote of Magliabeciii, librarian 
 to the Grand Duke of Tuscany Cosmo III. will suffici-
 
 32 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Addison,* " upon the first naming of an em- 
 peror, will immediately tell you his age, family, 
 and life. To remember where he enters in the 
 succession, they only consider in what part of the 
 cabinet he jies; and by running over in their 
 thoughts such a particular drawer, will give you 
 an account of all the remarkable parts of his 
 reign." If our ideas were ananged with equal 
 method and order, the mind would turn to them, 
 with the like facility. 
 
 Sensible objects have a powerful effect in re- 
 calhng to the mind the ideas with which it was 
 occupied when those ideas were presented. Thus 
 the sight of any remarkable scenes in the course 
 of a second journey, will frequently remind a per- 
 son of the subject of which he was thinking or 
 talking when he last travelled that road ; or, to 
 adopt the elegant language of Mr. Foster,*!* 
 " Places and things which have an association 
 
 ently illustrate and continTi this fact. The Grant! Duke 
 having asked Mugliabcchi whether he could procure a 
 book that was particularly scarce, he replied, ' no, sir, it is 
 impossible, for there is hut one iu the world, that is in the 
 Grand Siguier's library at Constantinople, and is the se- 
 venth book on the second shelf, on the right hand side as 
 yon go in.' 
 
 * Dialogue upon the usefulness of ancient Medals, pp. 
 21, 22, Vl,no. 1726. 
 
 t Essays, p. 12. For a very pretty illustration of this 
 sulycct, see also Spectator, No. 417.
 
 PRINCIPLES. 53 
 
 ifvith any of the events or feelings of past life, 
 will greatly assist the recollection of them. A 
 man of strong associations finds memoirs of 
 himself already written on the places where h« 
 has conversed with happiness or misery. If 
 au old man wished to animate, for a moment, 
 the languid and faded ideas which he retains of 
 his youth, he might walk with his crutch across 
 the green where he once played with companions 
 who are now probably laid to repose in another 
 spot not far off. An aged saint may meet again 
 some of the effects of his early piety in the place 
 where he first thought it happy to pray. A walk 
 in a meadow, the sight of a bank of flowers, per- 
 haps even of seme one flower, a landscape with 
 the tints of autumn, the descent into a valley, the 
 brow of a mountain, the house where a friend 
 has been met, or has resided, or has died, have 
 often produced a much more lively recollection of 
 our past feelings, and of the objects and events 
 which caused them, than the most perfect de- 
 scription could have done." 
 
 Indeed, it will be found upon investigation, 
 that locality is the most efficacious medium of 
 reminiscence : and that system of memory will 
 be the most serviceable, which brings this prin- 
 ciple into the most extensive operation. For 
 this reason, local'dxj (or, the connection of our 
 ideas with places) is made the foundatign of the
 
 S4 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 present system. In this respect, it is analogous 
 to the scheme of Mnemonics practised by th^ 
 antients, but it is here applied much more exten' 
 sively and advantageously than it was by them. 
 
 A rdom having generally four walls, the most 
 obvious division of it is, into four sides, and each 
 wall or side may be subdivided into panneis or 
 compartments. Accordingly, the antient system 
 xlivided a wall into five spaces. Thus, suppose 
 the letter M to be represented on a wall as 
 under ; 
 
 Five spaces are thus gained in the places 
 marked by the figures 1, 2, etc. Every wall of 
 the room was, in imagination, divided in this 
 manner ; and this plan was applied to as many 
 rooms as were found necessary to the extent of 
 each particular scheme — every room being simi- 
 larly divided into four sides, — and every side 
 being subdivided into five compartments. Thus, 
 any idea which, according to this method, had 
 been associated in the mind with the forty-eighth 
 compaitment, would be placed in the third com- 
 partment of the second wall, in the third room.
 
 PRINCIPLES. 
 
 3ii 
 
 But as fevv compartments could be obtained on 
 each wall by these means, the calculation of high 
 numbers would be exceedingly difficult. To 
 remedy this defect, each wall might be divided 
 into nine or ten compartments, thus.- 
 
 If a wall be divided into nine parts, there will 
 be 36 compartments in every room. In order to 
 ascertain the situation of any particular number> 
 it is to be considered in relation to the total num- 
 ber of the subdivisions. For example, if the 
 situation of number 48 be required ; according 
 to the last mentioned division of the rooms, it is 
 ^o be found by considering the projxortion which 
 that number bears to 36, the total number of the 
 compartments in this arrangement. If the num- 
 ber in question be less than this total, the place 
 inquired after will be obvious; thus 12 being 
 within the number o6, must, of necessity, be in 
 the first room : being above 9, it is equally clear 
 that it cannot be on the'first wall ; and being less 
 than 18, it must, necessarily, be on some part of 
 the second wall : and as it exceeds the number of 
 the first wall by 3, it follows, of course, that its
 
 S6 NEW ART OF MEkORY. 
 
 place must be in the third compartment of the 
 second wall. If the number in question be higher 
 than the number of the compartments in one 
 room, its place will be readily found by dividing 
 it by that number. Thus, suppose 48 to be the 
 number whose place is required : 
 
 36)48(1. 2 
 
 9)12(1. 2 
 
 3 
 
 As 48 exceeds 36, we know that it cannot be- 
 in the first room, the 1 is therefore changed into 
 2 ; and the fraction remaining, shows it to be in 
 the twelfth compartment. There being nine 
 compartments on every wall, this remainder, or 
 number of the compartment, is dfvided by 9? for 
 the purpose of ascertaining the wall. Now, as 
 the divisor is contained more than once, but not 
 twice, in the dividend, it follows that the com- 
 partment sought must be on the second wall; tlie 
 remainder gives the specific compartment. This 
 operation, then, shows that 48 is in the third 
 compartment, on the second wall, in the second 
 room. This was the plan adopted by the antients 
 when they divided their rooms into parts ; bu! 
 being both complicated and difficult, it has been 
 rejected in the present system, and another scheme 
 has been introduced in its place, which is more 
 simple in its construction — less difficult in its appli- 
 cation — and much more extensive in its powers.
 
 PRINCIPLES. 37 
 
 We shall now proceed to explain the mode of 
 dividing a room according to the New System of 
 Memory, and to develop the principles of the 
 art. It is, however, necessary to premise, that 
 the pupil must not attempt too much at first, but 
 should proceed gradually in the acquisition of 
 this system ; for his ultimate success in it will 
 greatly depend upon a perfect knowledge of the 
 first principles.* As in mathematics no problem 
 can be demonstrated without understanding all 
 the preceding demonstrations, — so every advance 
 in this art, must be grounded on the full posses- 
 sion of all the antecedent doctrines. 
 
 We shall divide a wall in the following manner: 
 
 1 t 2 1 3 
 
 4 1 5 1 6 
 
 7 1 8 1 9 
 
 These figures are arranged from left to right, 
 in the usual manner of writing ; and for the more 
 easily remembering their situation, it will be 
 found that if two lines be drawn diagonally, from 
 the four corners of the figure, they will intersect 
 
 * Assumcudus usns paulatim, ut pauca primum complcc* 
 tanmr animo, quae reddi fideliter possint : mox per iucre- 
 menta tarn modica, ut onciaii se labor ille non sentiat, 
 augenda usu, et exercitatione innlta contincnda est, quae 
 quidem maxima ex parte meraoria constat. — Qidnct. Inst, 
 Orat. lib. X, Opera, tom^ II. p 253. Ed. Bipont, 1784. 
 £
 
 58 
 
 NEW AKT OF MEMORY. 
 
 all the odd numbers. (See Plate I. fig. 1 .) There 
 is now a single wall divided into nine squares or 
 compartments ; these we shall name places, and 
 say, the first place, second place, third place, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 The same mode must be pursued with the 
 three remaining walls in this room ; by these 
 means, four walls are obtained — each being 
 divided into nine places. In order to find the 
 number 36 in this room, we should naturally say 
 four times nine will be 36, and should, of course, 
 conclude that 36 would be in the last place of 
 the last side or fourth wall of the room : but this 
 calculation is erroneous ; 6 must ever be in the 
 same situation, which will be that occupied by 
 the point in the following figure : 
 
 The place occupied by the number 6, in all the 
 four walls, would be thus designated ; 
 
 16 
 
 26 
 
 I L 
 
 "FT 
 
 36
 
 / 
 
 
 J , 
 
 
 '■■ 
 
 
 - 
 
 ." 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 
 '• 
 
 '' 
 
 /•"ff 
 
 - 
 
 y 
 
 ,A^i' 
 
 » 
 
 ^ 
 
 v- 
 
 
 
 V/i 1 \ \^X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 'w ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / / \ \, 
 
 
 / \ 
 
 ^^\ 
 
 
 ^ / \ \l 
 
 c 
 
 luni ii'vvi vnvniK xxixn 
 
 
 
 ■> 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 .' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 s 
 
 ' 
 
 1 
 
 J 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 J 
 
 '•' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 « 
 
 11 
 
 
 ' 
 
 /< 
 
 
 » 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 " 
 
 " 
 
 " 
 
 " 
 
 
 '■/ 
 
 " 
 
 
 •3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 — 
 
 " 
 
 '■-" 
 
 " 
 
 i-l 
 
 •) 
 
 <s 
 
 '1 
 
 •i 
 
 111 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 '" 
 
 •9 
 
 •J 
 
 •' 
 
 'i> 
 
 
 ,1 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 "~ 
 
 ■a 
 
 „ 
 
 V 
 
 12 
 
 •■-' 
 
 >J 
 
 " 
 
 „ 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 ~ 
 
 u 
 
 « 
 
 rf 
 
 
 w 
 
 ..<! 
 
 -•< 
 
 « 
 
 >6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bj 
 
 «« 
 
 — 
 
 ii 
 
 ff. 
 
 A 
 
 kJ 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 Li_ 
 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 Ai
 
 PRINCIPLES. 59 
 
 It must now be determined how we are to 
 reckon these walls : if we stand in a room with 
 our back to the windows, the first wall is on our 
 left, the second before us, the tliird on our right, 
 and the fpurth behind us. We shall, however, 
 commence with the floor, and divide it into nine 
 parts in the same manner as the walls. Where 
 are 10, 20, 30, 40, etc. to be placed ? Every 
 decade begins a new spries, and the decimal is 
 placed on the cieling of the room ovei its proper 
 wall ; thus, the first decimal, or 10, will be over 
 the first wall ; the second decimal, or 20, will be 
 over the second wall ; the third decimal, or 30, 
 will be over the third wall ; the fourth decimal, 
 or 40, will be over the fourth wall ; the fifth de- 
 cimal, or 50, as its tenth part exceeds the num- 
 ber of walls, will be assigned to the cieling of 
 the room, and will consequently be the highest 
 number in the first room, forming the connecting 
 link betw.eeu this room and the second.
 
 40 
 
 NEW AUT OF MEMORY. 
 
 FIRST ROOM. 
 
 Second mill. 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 ~o 
 
 a> 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 •a 
 
 •{^ 
 
 H» 
 
 
 o 
 
 s-> 
 
 ifi' 
 
 00 
 
 4 
 
 Floor 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 00 
 
 Ul 
 
 tc 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■* 
 
 t^ 
 
 7 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 -o 
 
 Oi 
 
 u> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 f- 
 
 
 
 € 
 
 6 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 Of 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 Fourth Wall. 
 rSOCieling 
 
 As one room will not supply us with suffi- 
 cient numbers, a second room must be provided. 
 The floor of the second room is denominated the 
 yifth wall, the wall on the left, tlie sixth ; the wall 
 before us, the seventh ; that on our right, the 
 eighth ; and the one behind us, the ninth ; and as 
 the number 50 was upon the cieling of the first, 
 so the number 100 will be upon the cieling of 
 the second room.
 
 PRINCIPLES. 
 
 41 
 
 SECOND ROOM, 
 
 Seventh Wall. 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 
 
 -id 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 
 6, 
 
 
 
 7'; 
 
 8;^ 
 
 c? 
 
 
 
 C-5 
 
 O 
 
 C-. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 •s 
 
 rf^ 
 
 M 
 
 te- 
 
 o 
 
 0» 
 
 >« 
 
 c© 
 
 4 
 
 5* 
 
 6 
 
 05 
 
 u. 
 
 ^o 
 
 ar 
 
 © 
 
 '••a-- 
 1 
 
 
 TH 
 
 '^ 
 
 i> 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 •-0 
 
 C-. 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 9 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 G 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 06 
 
 
 
 Ninth fPull. 
 I 100 Cieling. | 
 
 Numbers, probably, originated . from holding 
 wp the fingers of tlie haad thus : | , [ | , [ | J ,j 
 j I I I ; live was made by holding up the 
 thumb and little finger, with the ether fingprs. 
 down, tlms/'"^"'':;V^'"«'''; forming the numeral V ; 
 six was made by, erecting another finger and cou-. 
 linuing the former position ; thus VI and VII, 
 
 * Floor or fifth Wall. 
 E 3
 
 42 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 VIII and Vim, in the same way, by adding a 
 
 finger each time : ten was formed from two fives, 
 
 y 
 thus, making X. 
 
 A ° 
 
 The learner should now exercise himself in 
 
 finding the situation of the diiferent numbers in 
 the two rooms. Where, for example, are QQ, 
 47, 35, 21, 62, 82, 99, etc. The room must be 
 first ascertained ; as to this there can be no diffi- 
 culty, for as 50 is the lesser number in the first 
 room, all the numbers exceeding 50, and as far 
 as 100, will be found in the second room. 
 
 Having found the room, the left hand figure 
 will denote the zcall, and the right hand figure 
 will show the place ; thus, 29 is in the first 
 room, second wall, and ninth place; 47, fourth 
 wall, seventh place ; by cutting off the left hand 
 figure, the numerical order of the wall is given, 
 and the remaining figure acquaints us with the 
 place. 
 
 In order to remember a series of words, they 
 are put in the several squares, or places, and 
 the recollection of them is assisted by asso- 
 ciating some idea of relation between the objects 
 and their situation ; and, as we find by expe- 
 rience, that whatever is ludicrous, is calculated 
 to make a strong impression upon the mind, 
 the more ridiculous the association the better. 
 Being provided with two rooms, we will take 
 the floor of the first room, and place some-
 
 PRINCIPLES. 43 
 
 thing in each of the nine squares. In illustra- 
 tion of this experiment, sensible objects will be 
 given, as the association of ideas between them 
 and the places is most striking. 
 
 1 
 Apple 
 
 2 
 Monkoy 
 
 3 
 Man 
 
 4 
 Ship 
 
 3 
 Pipe 
 
 6 
 Cap 
 
 7 
 Tankard 
 
 3 
 Boat 
 
 9 
 Tree 
 
 The ideas of these images must be connected 
 together, and it will then be almost impossible 
 to forget the order in which they are arranged. 
 The first is an apple, the second a monkey; 
 this monkey, takes the apple, eats, and offers it 
 to the man who is in the third place ; the man 
 is just going to embark on a long voyage, and 
 for this purpose a ship will be in the fourth place ; 
 but he will smoke his pipe before he leaves his 
 native country ; — pipe is in the fifth place ; — and 
 when he has finished smoking, he calls for his 
 jiight'Cap, which will be found in the sixth 
 place ; before he retires to rest, he wishes for 
 another tankard of ale ; tankard occupies the 
 seventh place. In the morning when this man 
 awakes, a boat is ready to convey him to the 
 ship ; this boat is in the eighth place ; a tree 
 a found in the ninih place— it shall be a
 
 44 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 willow-tree, and iDust grow by the water-side, 
 on the very identical bank from which the man 
 embarks in the boat. Any different objects 
 may be taken promiscuously, and the connec- 
 tion made between them, at the moment, as 
 chance or fancy bids. The chief use of this 
 example is to induce a habit of fixing certain ob- 
 jects in a regular order, that we may always 
 know where to find them. For this purpose the 
 pupil should exercise himself iu the numerical 
 situation of the different objects, and be enabled 
 to determine it quickly. 
 
 The floor and the walls are localities on 
 which the figures and words must be arranged, 
 in the several places or squares, iii the order 
 above described. Were a series of twenty -six 
 figures to be taken, for instance, the following : 
 
 , .Uj^';n.^.A.^ ^2, 6 3 1, 4.5 2 
 "8 796.578964314 
 
 Or a series of consonants thus : 
 
 f I I m n g m fprsti'srn 
 (Full many a gem of purest ray, serine.) • 
 
 or any other series of figures, or consonants, it 
 would be found very difficult to remember them. 
 The figures, and the letters^ are merely signs of
 
 PRINCIPLES. 45 
 
 signs, and cannot easily be fixed in the memory ; 
 the understanding having no exercise. The ele- 
 ments of words must, therefore, be sought for. 
 Dr. Grey changed figures into letters, and 
 thus made words ; but these words could not be 
 fixed in the memory without constant repeti- 
 tion, and strenuous application ; the different 
 words required to be remembered in his MeDio- 
 via TechnicUf being almost equally burthensome 
 with the facts and dates which they were intend- 
 ed to imprint upon the memory. The mode 
 of changing figures into letters was known long 
 before the time^of Dr. Grey. The substitution 
 of letters for figures was practised by most anti- 
 ent nations ; in the Hebrew and Greek languages, 
 there are no arithmetical signs, but the letters of 
 the alphabet are used in iheir place. Shop- 
 keepeis and others, from an early period, had 
 been in the habit of marking the articres which 
 they had to sell, with certain letters, as arbitrary 
 symbols, for the prices in pounds, shillings, and 
 pence. 
 
 We now take the consonants, and attach one 
 or more to the series of figures, 1, 2, 3, 4* 
 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, ; each figure having its ap- 
 propriate consonant, (^ee Plate 1. fig. 2.) The 
 consonants only are resorted to, for ihey com- 
 pose, like the skeleton of the human body, the
 
 4G 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 principal parts ; the vowels are but the liga- 
 ments. 
 
 The letters appropriated to the figures are not 
 merely arbitrary, but are adapted as nearly as 
 possible to the form of the figures,* 
 
 t, like the figure 1, is a perpendicular, or 
 down stroke, and differs only from it, in the ad- 
 dition of the small horizontal line drawn across 
 the upper part of it ; t is more like the figure 1, 
 than any other consonant, if perhaps, we ex- 
 cept the letter /. An additional reason for as- 
 signing the letter Mo 1 is, that it occurs in the 
 word uni^. 
 
 71, is the appropriate letter to represent 2, 
 there are two down strokes in it. 
 
 7n, furnishes us with three down strokes, it 
 will then give the idea of 3 : if we place a 3 
 thus CO > it will afford a tolerable outline of the 
 letter m. 
 ,,,,r, is to represent 4: r when written, (See 
 
 * Dr. Grey who assigned both vowels and consonants 
 to figures, in a manner perfectly arbitrary, lias the fol- 
 lowing scale : 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 (tU 
 
 oi 
 
 ei 
 
 ou 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 d 
 
 t 
 
 ,/' 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 
 P 
 
 k 
 
 n 
 
 z 
 
 Here a and h stand for l, e and d for 2, i and t for 3, etc.
 
 PRINCIPLES. 47 
 
 Plate T. fig. 2.) resembles somewhat a 4. The 
 letter r occurs also in our word foia- ; in the 
 German ybA/-; in the Dutch vier ; in the Latin 
 quatuor; in the French quatre; in the Spanish 
 and Portugueze, quatro ; in the Italian quattrch; 
 in the Greek TBj<ra^is ; in the Russ, chety'ire ; 
 and in a variety of other languages. 
 
 The English L was borrowed from the Ro- 
 mans ; they had it from the Greeks, and they again 
 from the Hebrews, whose famed is much like 
 ©ur L, excepting that the angle is somewhat 
 more acute.. L was used as a numeral letter 
 ioxjifty, and may, therefore, be assigned to the 
 figure 5. d, in writing is the reversed form of 
 this figure. (See Plate I. fig. 2 ) 
 
 Ci k, g, q- The figure 7, with a slight curvature, 
 may be made to resemble a crooked stick, and as 
 we shall remember this stick the better, if some- 
 thing be hung upon it, a cage slirtll be suspended 
 there. In the word cage we obtain the conso- 
 nants c and g ; k also is added to the number, 
 for c is more frequently pronounced hard {ka) 
 than it is soft (se); q being a gutteral and a 
 crooked letter, shall go along with the cage and 
 the stick. For the figure 7 there are then 
 f, k, g, and q. 
 
 b, h, V, TO. In the figure 8 there are two 
 noughts, or two round things : these may be
 
 48 
 
 NEW AET OF MEMORY. 
 
 converted into beehives, and if one be placed 
 upon the other, there will be a tolerably accu-^ 
 rate idea of the figure 8. In the word beehive, 
 are obtained b, k, v ; and w may be added, for 
 it is compounded of vv. 
 
 p,f. The figure 9 is not unlike a pipe, and 
 as a pipe is seldom used without a piiff' of smoke 
 issuing from it, we have the p and J" in these two 
 words ; they are inseparably connected, and can- 
 not easily be forgotten. 
 
 s, X, z. The o being a round body, it may 
 be compared to a wheel or grinder in a mill; this 
 wheel, when in swift rotation, gives out a hissing 
 sound, and the hissing consonants *, x, z, are at- 
 tached to the cipher, x is formed from two half 
 circles ; and z is the first letter of the word zero. 
 
 These letters, and the figures which they arc 
 intended to represent, should be impressed strong- 
 ly upon the memory, as the letters must be con- 
 verted into words, by the introduction of vowels 
 
 8 1 
 b t 
 
 5 
 
 m s 
 
 7 9 
 c p 
 
 2 6 
 n d 
 
 3 1 
 m t 
 
 4 5 
 r I 
 
 1 8 
 t b 
 
 9 
 s p 
 
 6 5 
 d I 
 
 7 8 
 c b 
 
 9 6 
 p d 
 
 4 3 
 r m
 
 PRINCIPLES. 
 
 49 
 
 The two consonants representing two figures 
 must be converted into a word, to which should 
 be affixed some striking idea ; and the images 
 represented, connected together. Tlie objects 
 when selected, each beijig a word, must be 
 arranged in the different places, beginning with 
 the floor, and proceeding to the first, se- 
 cond, and third walls, etc. In making these 
 words, it is necessary that the two consonants re- 
 quired should be the two Jirst in the word ; if 
 there be more than two it is of no importance, 
 as the two first only will be needful. It will not 
 be difficult to make a perfect figure from the ske- 
 leton we have just seen. 
 
 Floor of the First Room. 
 
 BaT 
 
 NeeDle 
 
 MouSe 
 
 CaP 
 
 MuTton 
 
 RoLl 
 
 TuB 
 
 SoaP 
 
 DoLl 
 
 First Wall of the First Room. 
 
 CaBbage 
 
 PnDding 
 
 RnM 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 50 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 A bat is seen flying after a mouse, -which shel- 
 ters itself under a cap, stuck full of Jieeclles. 
 There is some mutton for dinner, and a roll to 
 eat with it. The tub and soap show that it is 
 washing-day ; the servants playing with the chil- 
 dren and their do/l, have forgotten to boil the 
 cabbage and the pudding. As a rompensation 
 for this loss, a large bottle of rum is produc- 
 ed. By this method, it will be easy to commit 
 to memory a long series of figures, to repeat 
 them backwards or forMards, to name the first, 
 fourth, fifth, eighth, etc. or to say how many 
 fours, fives, noughts, etc. are contained in the 
 series. 
 
 The converting of figures into letters, and 
 making sense by the introduction of vowds, will 
 be found applicable to many of the purposes of 
 common life. If we purchase any articles, and 
 would remeiiiljer the mt-tt'iui-e or weight of thera, 
 and thus prevent ftaud in the shop-keeper, it is 
 only necessary to change the figures into a word 
 or words, and connect them with some strange or 
 ludicrous idea. Should we buy 3*2 yards of cloth, 
 muslin, etc. it is easy to say, that a wa/j brought 
 home the cluih, and the measure is given to us : 
 if 30lbs of cheese, a 77iouse that had been gnaw- 
 ing the cheese, would fix the weight imme- 
 diately. The number of a hackney-coach, or of
 
 PRINCIPLES. 51 
 
 a house, may be preserved in the same manner. 
 The purposes in domestic life to whicli this sys- 
 tem is applicable, are almost infinite, and need 
 no further specification. 
 
 We have already learned to divide a room into 
 parts, as the floor and walls, — to subdivide these 
 into places, — to change figures into letters, — and 
 to form worcte ; and, by these means, to remember 
 series of figures, or of things. It would be a 
 material advantage to us, to have some fixed or 
 certain rooms : we may take, for instance, those 
 with which we are best acquainted, and fix the 
 different places upoji the various articles of fur- 
 niture, as a chair, a chest of drawers, etc. What 
 we have learned, hitherto, is not sufficient : as 
 yet, an intellectual order only has been obtained; 
 nwnheis have been localised, but there is still a 
 deficiency, — the realities are wanting. 
 
 If the reader has practised our instructions in 
 a room in which he is accustomed to spend the 
 greater part of his lime, and this room should 
 have been hung with pictures, engravings, or 
 plans, or ornamented with busts, etc. he will 
 have been very materially assisted in the remem- 
 brance of his places, or localities. We can, after 
 a little practice, ascertain the order of different 
 things placed in a room which we hnve long fre- 
 quented. The transition is slight, but the im-
 
 59. NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 pression w\\\ be permanent. Let \is fill the 
 squares or places with some pictures of our o\Vn 
 drawing : the two rooms will be then furnished, 
 and it will be as easy to remember the symbols, 
 or hieroglyphics, as to remember the situation or 
 place of any picture, or article of furniture in a 
 room. Instead of having a carpet on the floor, 
 ■\ve can suppose that the floor is inlaid or con- 
 structed of mosaic. This will allow us to put 
 sjmbols there. 
 
 The outlines of the symbols are intended to 
 represent, as accurately as possible, the various 
 figures in the two rooms, so that they may 
 be permanently fixed in the memory. (See 
 Plates II. and III.) And here we dismiss the 
 pupil for a season, giving a general hint, tliat 
 it will be advisable to make himself perfect- 
 ly familiar with the situations of the different 
 symbols, before he diinks of looking into the 
 next chapter. Until a knowledge of these 
 symbols be obtained, no further progress can 
 be made hi the system. It is, at least, indis- 
 pensably necessary, that the pupil should answer 
 with facility to any questions put to him respect- 
 ing the j^Vs^ room, containing fifty symbols; the 
 second room may be acquired at leisure.
 
 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 •
 
 PRINCIPLES. 
 
 53 
 
 The following are the names attached to the 
 difterent symbols : 
 
 fit^t iHooni. 
 
 1 Tower of Babel. 
 ,2 Swan. 
 
 3 Mountain, or Parnassus.' 
 
 4 I.ooking-glass. 
 
 5 Throne. 
 
 6 Horn of Plenty. 
 
 7 Gln.ssi-blower. 
 
 8 Midas. 
 
 9 Flower, or Narcissus. 
 
 10 Goliatu, or Mars. 
 
 11 Pillars of Hercules. 
 
 12 David with the Lion. 
 
 13 Castle, or Nelson's Mo- 
 
 nunient. 
 
 14 Diogenes, or Watchman. 
 Ij jEsculapius, or Serpent. 
 
 16 Ceres, or GJesuier. 
 
 17 Archimedes, or Carpen- 
 
 ter. 
 
 18 Apollo. 
 
 19 Robinson Crusoe. 
 
 20 Peacock. 
 
 21 Vaulter, or Rider. 
 
 22 Cocktijfhtiug. 
 
 23 Pegasus. 
 21 Elephant. 
 
 25 Sanclio Panza. 
 
 26 Charioteer. 
 
 27 Don Quixote. 
 
 28 Pa^-k-horse. 
 
 29 S tandard-bearer. 
 
 30 Sysiphus. 
 
 31 Capid. 
 
 32 Diana. 
 
 33 Clouds, or Sky. 
 
 34 Noah's Ark. 
 
 35 Curtius. 
 36j Kermitage. 
 
 37 Miner. 
 
 38 Moses. 
 
 39 Vesuvius. 
 
 40 Pleauire Garden. 
 
 41 Monument. 
 
 42 Golden Calf. 
 
 43 Staie Ued. 
 
 44 Piano-Forte. 
 
 45 Bajazet. 
 
 46 Fount lin, or Square. 
 
 47 Vulcan. 
 
 48 Apis. 
 
 49 Orange-Trcc. 
 40 Bacchus. 
 
 F 3
 
 54 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMOllY, 
 
 dScconti i!!o 
 
 51 Pigmalion. 
 
 52 Jupiter. 
 
 53 Neptune. 
 
 54 Toilette, or Penelope. 
 
 55 Fleet. 
 
 56 Guitar Player, 
 
 57 Conjurer. 
 
 58 Orpheus. » 
 
 59 Samson. 
 
 60 Still. 
 
 61 Bagpipes. 
 
 62 Phoenix. 
 
 63 Temple of Glory. 
 
 64 Fame. 
 
 65 Schoolmaster. 
 
 66 Tents. 
 
 67 Mutius Sccevola. 
 
 68 Mercui-y. 
 
 69 Mausokum. 
 
 70 Lottery, or Fortune. 
 
 71 Saturn. 
 
 72 Ceutaur. 
 
 73 Pedlar. 
 
 74 Thresher. ' 
 
 75 Garden Engine. 
 
 % 
 
 76 Gardener. 
 
 77 Mowers. 
 
 78 Pagan Priest. 
 
 79 Direction-Post, 
 
 80 Apothecary. 
 
 81 Cymbal-Player. 
 
 82 Trojan Horse. 
 
 83 Actason. 
 
 84 Cabriolet. 
 
 85 Europa. 
 
 86 Brewer. 
 
 87 Hunter. 
 
 RR Bullfighting. 
 
 89 Hercules. 
 
 90 Burning-Glass. 
 
 91 Tantalus. 
 
 92 Hawker, or Sportsman, 
 
 93 Golden Fleece. 
 
 94 Lime-Tree. 
 
 95 Shepherd. 
 
 96 Cap of Lil)erty. 
 
 97 Solomon. 
 
 98 Trophy. 
 
 99 Avenue. 
 100 Justice.
 
 r 
 
 • 
 
 v^ 
 
 J 
 
 G
 
 CHAP. n. 
 
 C|)ronclogp* 
 
 .JLhe pupil is, by this time, supposed to have 
 iixed all the symbols in the first room, and to be 
 enabled to tell readily the first, seve?:;th, thir- 
 tieth, forty-ninth, etc. and also to say wliat place 
 is occupied by Midas, Sisyphus, etc. In making 
 the application tt) chronology, we shall confine 
 ourselves to the succession of the kings of Eng- 
 land since the conquest. 
 
 1. William the Conqueror. A word 
 must be now made from William ; the first half 
 wil is taken, and to this is added low, by which 
 willozi) is obtained ; this enaliles us to remember 
 William. The willow is fixed upon the Tower 
 of Babel, our first symbol ; we have then fVil- 
 Uam I, but another circumstance remains ; he 
 was the conqueror : — we hang some laurel, the 
 reward of valour, and the crown of conquest, 
 upon the willow tree. The date is yet wanting ;
 
 56 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 we say the laurel is dead ; in the word dead, 
 are d, d for 66 ; the 1000 being understood, 
 through the whole series.* 
 
 2. William Rufus, or William II. 
 There must be tzi)o willows, one on each side of 
 the swan; the swan is put into a red (bag): by 
 making the bag red, we preserve tiie meaning of 
 the Latin word Rufus. 
 
 3. Henry I. There is one hen upon the 
 mountain tossing up the ground ; (toss). 
 
 4. Stephen. The looking-glass is very 
 much stiffened ; there is a watch placed before 
 the glass ; this is (timely ). The word stiffened 
 will recal to the mind the name of Stephen. 
 
 5. Henry II. A (taylor) sitting upon the 
 throne, with two hens, one under each arm. 
 
 6. Richard I. This was the Jirst rich 
 man, — the hornoi plenttj is before him. The 
 first rich man, probably, pilfered from other peo- 
 ple ; he must have been a (thief). 
 
 7. John. The glass-blower's name was 
 John (Taffi^). 
 
 * As the reader will find at p. 60, a tabular view of 
 this application, we shall merely explain the manner of 
 connecting the different images, inclosing the word which 
 gives tlie datc'ia a parenthesis.
 
 CRONOLOOY. 57 
 
 8. Henry ril. Midas, or the man with 
 the loMg ears, has just received a present of three 
 hens ; he puts one in each ear, and one in his 
 mouth, the hens are so near to eacli other, they 
 are ahiiost (united). 
 
 9. Edward I. To fix the name of Edward, 
 we convert the verb to zcard, that is, to watch, 
 into a substantive, and say here is one weirdy 
 guard, oi- soldier, watering Narcissus, or the 
 flower, with an (engine). 
 
 10. Edward II. There are two wards, or 
 guards, behind Goliath, each in a (mask). 
 
 11. Edward III. Three soldiers as guards 
 between the Pillars of Hercules, playing with a 
 (mo7ikei/). 
 
 1^. Richard H. This is the second rich 
 man, who meets David putting his hand into 
 the lion's mouth ; David is mocking at the lion's 
 strength, (inock.) 
 
 13. Henry IV. We take a (miiff"), put 
 four hens in it, and place it on the pyramid. 
 
 14. Henry V. Diogenes h-^%Jive hens in 
 his lantern ; they are very noisy and trouble- 
 some, — (rout' em.) 
 
 15. Henry VI. Aesculapius, or the doc- 
 tor, is very much annoyed by six hens, which are 
 (running) round the serpent. 
 
 16. Edward IV. Here are four soldiers
 
 56 KEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 taking away poor Ceres, and putting her in a 
 (redoubt).* , 
 
 17. Edward V. Archimedes, ovlht carpenter. 
 
 18. Richard III. Apollo. 
 
 As these two kings are of the same date, one 
 word will be sufficient to fix it. Here are j^rc 
 guards preparing to rob the third rich man ; 
 Apollo is looking on, and amusing them with a 
 tune on his lyre ; in the mean while, Archimedes, 
 or the carpenter, vociferates (rob'etJt). 
 
 19. Henry VII. Robinson Crusoe is seen 
 to shoot seven hens, in a (rebellion). 
 
 20. Henry VIII. There is a Peacock, 
 with eight hens in her nest ; they are young and 
 cannot speak, — they are (lisping). 
 
 21. Ebwakd VI. We hav« here the vault' 
 er, or rider ; one man is a sufficient weight for a 
 horse ; but our liorse must carry seven. There 
 are six guards, or wards, upon this horse, besides 
 the vaulter, who are all scrambling for a piece of 
 a (lark). 
 
 22. Mary. There must be some rejoicings 
 where there is a cock fight ; it is very possible 
 that the town may be (illuminated). 
 
 25. Elizabeth. This queen had so flour- 
 ishing a reign, that she is (allozeed) to ride upon 
 Pegasus. 
 
 * As t!ie b is not souiuUd in pronunciation, the r, (/, f , 
 are the letters Avhich give tlie date.
 
 CHRONOLOGY. 59 
 
 i4. James I. Tlie word chains sounds 
 somewhat like James; we will, therefore, put 
 the Elephant in cliaius : what (dhmal) chains. 
 
 25. Charles 1. ^oov Sancho Panzaw\io\\ 
 his ass ! Poor fellow, lie met with many 
 (denials). 
 
 26. Charles IE. The cAarioifecr is running 
 a race ; the (odds) are against hnn. 
 
 27. James II. Don Quixote must be put 
 jn chains ; he must have two sets of chains j he 
 shall have (double) chains. 
 
 28 William HI. The patient ^ac Morse 
 
 ravelling along the accustomed road, arrives at 
 
 that part where three willows have been planted : 
 
 how melancholy it is to see so many willows ! 
 
 (do weep). 
 
 29- Anne. The Standard Bearer is just 
 arrived on a visit to (cousin) Anne. 
 
 30. George I. Sisyphus is rolling up the 
 hill " his huge round stone," — but he stops and 
 listens to some one who is playing on the 
 (guitar.) * 
 
 George II. This sovereign is a (king) 
 (between two kings of the same name. 
 
 George HI. has had some important con- 
 cerns with (Cadiz). 
 
 * No. 30, as it completes a wall, may iaclude George I, 
 II, III.
 
 60 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 fc- 
 
 o 
 
 V5 
 
 ■« 
 
 a> 
 
 o» 
 
 <0 (M 
 
 )> 
 
 h. 
 
 (« 
 
 'O 
 
 co 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 in 
 
 09 
 
 o^ 
 
 , tH f.^ 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 p 
 
 o ■ 
 
 O 
 
 T-l 
 
 It 
 
 ■iH 
 
 1-^ 
 
 
 o^ G> 
 
 « 
 
 C^ 
 
 
 T-* 
 
 ■n 
 
 •n 
 
 ■rt 
 
 rH 
 
 T-l 
 
 rt 
 
 •n Ti 
 
 th 
 
 Tl 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 "2 
 
 
 
 to" 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 cS 
 
 
 fe 
 U4 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 z; 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 r-^ 
 
 
 ,2 
 
 
 JS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ci 
 
 
 a 
 
 <u 
 
 u ^ 
 
 
 w 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 hi 
 
 a' 
 
 CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 .s 
 
 a 
 2 
 
 s 
 
 Cm 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 is 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 r, — !- 
 
 5 1-2 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _2 
 
 
 bT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tr 
 
 u 
 
 .^-«» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iS 
 
 z 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 U 
 
 «J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <_ 
 
 (d 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 £ 
 
 n 
 
 
 l-l 
 
 
 
 >-H 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 s ^* 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 l-H 
 
 fc" 
 
 HH 
 
 o 
 
 
 l-l a 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■«; 
 
 «1 
 
 >< 
 
 u 
 
 ;» 
 
 ei 
 
 
 >> « 
 
 a 
 
 tf 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 P. 
 
 &3 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 i ^ 
 
 < 
 
 < 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 i2 
 
 a: a 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 U fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tH 
 
 0^ 
 
 «o 
 
 •* 
 
 irt 
 
 <e 
 
 N 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 —1 
 
 S =- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lH 
 
 r-l 
 
 |o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 CHRONOLOGY. 
 
 6i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 fT> 
 
 en 
 
 9» 
 
 rW 
 
 « «n 
 
 ■^ 
 
 Ok 
 
 »« 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 o> 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 o 
 
 'f* 
 
 IC 
 
 p 
 
 rt 
 
 CO 
 
 ■>* 
 
 •* 
 
 -* 
 
 T^ -Tit 
 
 ■^ 
 
 iO 
 
 in 
 
 lO 
 
 
 lH 
 
 ■n 
 
 TH 
 
 ■H 
 
 T-t 
 
 
 
 
 iH 
 
 iH 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'a 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 CX 
 
 •3 
 
 o 
 
 fa 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 pei 
 
 s 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 <u 
 (4 
 
 is2 
 a 
 
 'h3 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 )J 
 
 
 
 wT" 
 
 
 «\ 
 
 o 
 
 
 iT 
 
 ac 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rchimedes 
 Apollo, 
 
 
 
 . <u 
 
 a 
 
 U3 
 
 ■i 
 
 s 
 
 ea 
 
 9 
 
 © 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 0* 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 < 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C($ 
 
 
 
 ■;^ > >- 
 
 . >* K* "^ lJ ri "^ 
 
 l-< !^ > "-I tJ S K» 
 
 :: U H U s 
 
 X K X B w 
 
 12; >< >• 
 
 a et a 
 
 O 2! » 
 
 Sum 
 
 W X X 
 
 s» ** Q^
 
 62 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 ** 
 
 ao 
 
 M 
 
 vs 
 
 
 
 ift 
 
 o» 
 
 S4 
 
 ■* 
 
 ^- 
 
 
 
 <c 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 »J 
 
 <o 
 
 03 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 *i 
 
 «3 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■iH 
 
 T-( 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 it 
 3 
 
 13 
 
 id 
 
 Q 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 
 St 
 
 15 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 0" 
 
 i2 
 
 5 
 
 '« 
 
 C4 
 
 A 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^/-w/ } 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i-T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 iT 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 
 
 tn~ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 sT 
 
 S 
 
 
 s 
 •f 
 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 x: 
 c 
 
 0^ 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 J2 
 ■3 
 01 
 
 
 
 ;3 
 
 
 
 <? 
 
 a. 
 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 c4 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 >-> 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 »• 
 
 a 
 J2 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 W) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 UJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r* 
 
 ^^>* 
 
 ■^ 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 •« 
 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 
 
 )-« 
 
 a^ 
 
 S 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 >-< 
 
 
 HH 
 
 
 
 )v4 
 
 Hi4 
 
 C 
 a 
 
 U 
 
 ca 
 
 l-I 
 
 >4 
 
 en 
 
 »-4 
 
 »4 
 
 
 M 
 id 
 
 
 
 
 1— C 
 
 
 
 1: 
 
 w 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 u 
 
 ■-1 
 
 u 
 
 « 
 
 Bi 
 
 Bi 
 
 
 N 
 
 >] 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 •-s 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 _J^ 
 
 <J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s <^ 
 
 
 
 ■* 
 
 >o 
 
 (O 
 
 K 
 
 00 
 
 o» 
 
 ,S 
 
 
 
 *» 
 
 »» 
 
 *» 
 
 0* 
 
 e< 
 
 »« 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 (gtosrapljj)^ 
 
 In the application of the Art of Memory to 
 Geography, this science will be considered under 
 the following heads; (1.) Principles. (2.) Ge- 
 neral Geography. (3.) Particular Geography. 
 (4.) Statistics. 
 
 Sect. 1. — Principles, 
 
 Geographical charts represent the situation of 
 cities, towns, seas, continents, etc. on the globe ; 
 but we w II suppose that nothing of this kind has 
 ever been fiibricated ; that there are no charts : 
 if we wish to ascertain the relative situation of 
 any places, the means must be invented to ac- 
 complish what is required, beginning with the 
 first principles. Whenever the memory is to be 
 treated with, we siiould employ the powers of 
 reason. The charts must be drawn in our intel- 
 lect, and we should proceed step by step ; what 
 is wanting in the memory, will be supplied by 
 reason.
 
 64 NEW ART OF MEMORT. 
 
 The earth being a round body,* it is repr©= 
 sented by a globe; but as both sides of this globe 
 cannot be seen at the same time, it must be di- 
 vided into hemispheres or halves ; there will then 
 be an eastern and a western, or, a northern and a 
 southern hemisphere. 
 
 Suppose a circle to be described, and a point 
 placed within it ; the situation of this point must 
 be determined witii relation to some other part 
 of the circle. If a horizontal line be drawn 
 across the circle and divide it equally, the line 
 appears to us straight ; but cannot, in reality, be 
 so, because it is half the circumference of a globe. 
 A perpendicular line is then drawn, and the 
 hemisphere is divided into four equal quarters : 
 each quarter containing 90° or one-fourth of 360"; 
 every circle containing HGO". (See Plate I. fig. 3.) 
 The horizontal line must be taken for the equator. 
 The quarter then in which the dot or point ap- 
 pears, should be divided by QO lines, but as this 
 would completely conceal the surface of the 
 diagram, and obliterate the little point itself, we 
 will divide it into 9 parts. (See Plate I. fig. 4.) 
 
 The point is now evidently within the first 
 stripe or line, and if these lines be named ladders, 
 
 • The earth is, as every one knows, an oblate spheroid, 
 but it would be needless to descend to particulars, in a 
 Seoeral illustration.
 
 GEOGHAPUY. 65 
 
 we shall say it is on tlie first ladder ; but its situa- 
 tion is novv only half determhied. Tiiese ladders 
 are divided into f^teps ; and each has nine steps. 
 This will be effected by drawing 8 horizontal 
 lines across those already made. (See Plate I. 
 fig. 5.) The point is still on the first ladder, 
 but on what step ? It is on the sixth step. 
 
 Two rooms should be provided, with four walls 
 in each ; in the upper room is to be placed the 
 northern hemisphere, and the southern is to be 
 supposed under the northern, in the lower room. 
 We will begin with the northern hemisphere, di- 
 viding it into four equal parts or quarters ; trans- 
 ferring one quarter to the first wall. (See Plate 
 I. fig. 6.) 
 
 The former division of a wall was thus : 
 
 1 I '-M 3 
 -^ I ■> I 6 
 
 r i 8 I 9 
 
 It will not, however, be more diflicult to re- 
 member nine figures in one line, than in three. 
 The floor of the upper room in which we stand 
 is the equator ; upon this we reckon the longi- 
 tude. Prom the pole to the equator there are 
 90", but we only place 60" on the wall, the re- 
 maining 30" being fixed in the cieling. In each 
 of these squares, there are 10° of longitude, and 
 10" of latitude. 
 
 63
 
 66 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 The horizontal lines are parallels of latitude^ 
 and the perpendicular lines afe meridians or cir- 
 cles of longitude. 
 
 The series of walls in the first room will be as 
 follows : 
 
 I. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 II. 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 J6 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 III. 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 IV. 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 Upon referring to the globe, it will be found 
 that the whole hemisphere, north of the equator, 
 has been transferred into the first or upper room ; 
 the southern hemisphere being reserved for the 
 room beneath. 
 
 Before we proceed further, the meridian must 
 be fixed. Tiiis, in English charts, is taken from 
 London, or more correctly fiom Greenwich, 
 counting the longitude east and west from that 
 place. The French place their meridian in 
 P,ins, but they mark also in their maps the lon- 
 gitude from Ferro, from which island, all the 
 other European nations commence theirs ; by 
 these means, die longitude which is laid down on 
 a foreign n\ap is comprehensible by ihcm, and 
 the Parisian mode is easily understood by any
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 6? 
 
 other continental geographer, but o\ir maps are 
 not intelligible any wliere but in England. 
 
 In making our calculation we shall adopt the 
 meridian of Ferro, because it divides the globe 
 into those two equal parts or hemispheres, which 
 are usually represented on niaps. Suppose a 
 place to be in 254° of longitude, and 43° of 
 latitude ; on what ladder, on what step, and on 
 what wall will it occur ? We must take 254, 
 (and as it will be remembered our hemisphere 
 is divided only into tens of degrees) we must cut 
 off the unit iigure, thus 25,4, and we have 25 left, 
 but as the 25th ladder would include only those 
 degrees under 250, and 254 being above that 
 number, it is on the l6ih ladder. To ascertain 
 on what wall this 26th ladder is, and its nume- 
 rical situation there, ih* figures 2 and 6 n)ust be 
 added together ; the product gives the number of 
 the ladder. By counting the difference between 
 6 and 8, thus 6, 7, 8, three, the number of the 
 wall is given. In the latitude 43, the 3 is re- 
 jected, and 4S being past 40 it is on the fifth 
 step. A place theii iu longitude 254 and lati- 
 tude 43, will be found on the 26th ladder, fifth 
 step ; or on the third wall, eighth ladder, and 
 fifth step. 
 
 If we read that an engagement had taken place 
 bttvveen two ships in S24° longitude, 36° S. lati- 
 tude, how shall we find on which wall this spot
 
 C8 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 is situated ? We know that south latitude must be 
 in the lower room, and that 3G being more than 
 30, must be on the 4th ladder step. For the 
 longitude, as in the foregoing example, we cut 
 off the unit 32,4 — 324 is more than 320, there- 
 fore it must be on t!ie '33rd ladder; these two 
 figures are now added together ; the product 6 
 gives the situation on the wall, and by counting 
 from 3 to 6 — 3, 4, 5, 6, we get 4, which is the 
 number of the wall. This event, therefore, took 
 place near the mouth of the Rio de la Plata ; on 
 the 4th wall, 6th ladder, and 4th step, of the 
 southern room. 
 
 Sect. 2. — General Geography, 
 
 We are now provided with a geographical net, 
 with which all the different places may be taken, 
 from the smallest to the largest. What we have 
 learned in the common way on globes is soon 
 forgotten, there being no connecting media to 
 bring the different countries to our recollection. 
 Supposing we are looking at a globe, and we fix 
 our eyes upon England, we cannot see its anti- 
 podes ; places can be seen only in one direction. 
 The Chinese, v\hen shown a map of the world, 
 said, why put us up in a corner ? we are in the 
 centre. In fact, every where is the centre, and
 
 Wltyyiay 
 
 Jh4MUft»f. ty Jfun, ,-.'^. jre«4
 
 X D [ JLS 
 
 o 
 
 c
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 69 
 
 the centre is every Mliere. The whole circum- 
 ference is equally distant from us wherever we 
 may be. The four quarters of the northern 
 hemisphere being arranged on the four walls, 
 Mhen we are in the room, we can, in an instant, 
 see every part of the hemisphere. (See Plate 
 IV.) 
 
 On the Jirst wall will be a partof the Atlantic 
 Ocean, the whole of Europe and a great part of 
 Africa and Asia. 
 
 On the second wall will be found the remain- 
 der of Asia, and a large proportion of the North 
 Pacific Ocean. 
 
 On the third wall there is a continuance of the 
 Northern Pacific Ocean, and a part of North 
 America. 
 
 On the fourth wall there is the remainder of 
 North America, part of South America, the 
 American Islands or West Indies, and a great 
 part of the Atlantic or great Western Ocean. 
 This completes the northern hemispliere, and 
 occupies the first or upper room. 
 
 In the second or /ower room, (see Plate V.) 
 on the first wall, we have a part of the Southern 
 Atlantic Ocean, part of Africa, and the Indian 
 Ocean. 
 
 The second wall is occupied by the remainder 
 of the Indian Ocean, the Indian Archipelago, 
 and by New Holland.
 
 70 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 The third wall contains tlie Southern Pacific 
 Ocean, and tlie South Sea Islands. 
 
 The fourth wall has nearly the whole of South 
 America. 
 
 Thus there are in the northern Room the 
 whole Continent of Europe and Asia, the greater 
 part of Africa, the whole of North, and part of 
 South Araeri*^a; the Iowa; or Southern Room 
 containing the remainder of Africa and South 
 America, the Asiatic Islands, Polynesia and 
 Australasia. 
 
 Supposing the windows of our room to be on 
 one side, if we stand with our back to them, the 
 first wall is on the left ; this wall is divided into 
 nine ladders, which show the longitude, and each 
 ladder into nivie steps, giving the latitude. 
 
 On the Jirst ladder,^/'s^ step, there is almost 
 entirely sea, being a part of the Atlantic Ocean; 
 a small portion of Africa, however, is disco- 
 vered. On this part Sierra Leone is situated. The 
 square on which this fails is known by the num- 
 ber 1 ], (1st. ladder, 1st. step,) — here the symbol 
 for 1 1 is, the Pillars of Hercules. These pil- 
 lars are placed in the square; one pillar is fixed 
 in the sea, the oUier on land. Leone will rccal 
 to mind the name of a Lion ; a lion must be 
 placed between die pillars, and the situation of 
 this place will then be fixed in the memory. 
 On the second step there is a part of the At-
 
 •EOGHAPHY. 71 
 
 lantic Ocean and of Africa ; upon this part of 
 Africa are Senegal, Cape Verde, and Goree ; and 
 the symbol for the l,2lh place (1st ladder, 2d 
 step,) is David with the lion ; if it be said that 
 David in tearing the sinews of the lion, is gored 
 by the animal ; and that he has a green cap 
 in his hand, these throe places will be fixed 
 in this square. It is quite sufficient if the words 
 given recal the names of the places to our me- 
 mory. 
 
 On the third step are the Canary Islands; 
 these are somewhat like a cluster of birds (Ca- 
 nary Birds) that must fly round the Pyramid, 
 the symbol for 1, 3, (1st ladder, 3d step.) 
 
 On lUe fourth step, there is part of Portugal, 
 and the island of Madeua. The symbol for 14 
 is Diogenes with the lantern. This man is the 
 proprietor of the island, and has come to Ma- 
 deira from ijisbon, on purpose to drink a bottle 
 of his favorite beverage. 
 
 On the Ji/th step is Cape Fini'^terre. The 
 symbol for 15 is iEsculapius with his serpent ; 
 a serpent then shall be placed at the extremity of 
 the \dU(\, ( Finis terr(B,) 
 
 On the sixth step thtre is a small part of Ire- 
 land. The symbol for l6 is Ceres, or the j^lean- 
 er; she shall have a garland upon her head; 
 gar-land and Ire- land are too much alike in 
 sound to be easily forgotten.
 
 74 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 On the seventh step is Iceland, The sym- 
 bol for 17 is Archimedes, or the Carpenter: 
 he is breaking up the ice, and that we may re- 
 niember the name of the celebrated mounti 
 Hecla, we will say, that he acquits himself wi< 
 vej7 great eclat. . \v- 
 
 These illustrations seem amply sufficient l^' i:^ 
 rect the pupil in the application of this * ni 
 geography, so far as it relates to the use ot 
 symbols, and the connecting ideas to be as ^ 
 ciated with them. 
 
 While we count our meridians all east from 
 Ferro, it must be remembered, tliat in English 
 maps, London, or rather Greenwich, is taken 
 for the first meridian, from which the degrees 
 are countetl 1 80° East, and 1 80° West. If a place 
 be described in longitude 121° west of London; 
 to reduce it to the meridian from Ferro, 12 1** must 
 be substracled from 180°, (the whole number of 
 degrees west,) the remainder is 59, which added 
 to 180, aud the 18° difference between the cal- 
 culation from London and Ferro, will give the 
 product 275°. A place then which is 121° west 
 of London, may be said to be 257" east oi 
 Berro. The meridian of Paris is 20° east from 
 Ferro, and 2 from the meridian of London. 
 This process is at once simple and correct, and 
 will allow us to use a general meridian which
 
 CtEOGKAPTIY. 75 
 
 will be intelligiUe on all maps, and to all per- 
 sons. 
 
 The best mode of learning the geography is to 
 ..'j^ke a chart of Mercator's projection of the 
 earth, in which the degrees of latitude and lougi- 
 'e are marked by tens, that it may coincide 
 ^1 the divisions on the walls, each of the 
 res there containing 100°; 10' both ways. 
 i$^l.li the squares in the map must be covered 
 ■.,>vith a sheet of paper, except one, that is 
 the first step on the first ladder ; the space 
 taken up by the land in this square should be 
 noticed, and the outline of the land described ia 
 the map, and traced upon a drawing, or diagram, 
 of the first wall, divided into ladders, and ladder- 
 steps, as seen before. Tliese squares should be 
 sufficiently large to show some of the principal 
 projections of the land, that the most remark- 
 able places may be inserted ; thus constructing a 
 small chart. 
 
 In the lower room, which contains the south* 
 ern hemisphere, we must count downzeardf 
 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, etc. still begimiing with the 
 equator. 
 
 Every one of the small squares may be divided 
 into degrees.
 
 74 NEW ART OE MEMORY. 
 
 1234567890 
 
 o 
 
 OS 
 
 _L I III III 1 1 
 
 ICIjIIjIII 
 iii i iii iii" 
 
 I 
 
 . — I, ■ J 
 
 Suppose the point in this square to represent 
 Madeira. This point is about on' -fifth of the 
 whole, therefore, it is iu 2° of longitufie, and a 
 little less than one-fifth of the whole 10° of lati- 
 tude, we see then 32*^ | of latitude, and 2" of longi- 
 tude ; there is not an error of | of a degree.
 
 GEOGRAPHY* 75 
 
 To ascertain the relative situation of towns, 
 some association must be formed between the 
 towns and cities found in any one square. 
 If a sort of narrative be invented, the me- 
 mory will be materially assisted. We will tak« 
 25 for an example : in tliis are niany towns, 
 as Madrid, Barceloua, Bourdeaux, Rociielle, 
 Brest, Rouen, and Paris. The svmbol for 25 
 is Sancho Panza. Sancho then must set out oa 
 his travels ; he departs from Madrid, and ar- 
 rives at Barcelona, where he has to call for 
 some parcels (Barcelona); lie then goes to 
 Bourdeaux, and is very fond of drinking a 
 bumper of good Bourdeaux zoiiie ; thence he 
 travels to Rochelle, where he rests on a rock : 
 being pressed for time at Brest, he departs for 
 Rouen; and by rozcing down the Seine, arrives 
 at last at Paris. To remove the appaient diffi- 
 culty of fixing the names of so many squares, it 
 must be observed that, the greater proportion 
 of them is occupied by sea, where, of course, 
 there is nothing to fix. It may also be sup- 
 posed, that as there are no less than eight elevens, 
 there will be much confusion in remembering 
 the name of any particular place. An associa- 
 tion has already been formed for the eleven in 
 the first wall. In the eleven in the second wall 
 is Ceijlon : it is not likely that we sliall ever com- 
 mit so great an error as to place Ceylon on our
 
 76 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY, 
 
 first wall, or Sierra Leone, or Goree, on the 
 second. The locality of each is so permanentljr 
 fixed as to defy any thing like confusion. 
 
 Sect. 3. — Particular Geography. 
 
 In particular charts the divisions are different 
 from those in general charts ; being divided into 
 SBuch smaller parts. 
 
 €1 
 
 €0 
 59 
 58 
 57 
 56 
 55 
 54 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 26 27 28 '29 30 31 32 33 34 35 
 
 TThe above is a chart with a series of figures. 
 The figures which run along the bottom of this 
 chart are the degrees of longitude ; those which 
 run up tlie sides are tlie degrees of latitude. The 
 Latitude must be counted North or South of the 
 Equator, and the Longitude, East or West of the 
 first meridian. There is here a scries of ladders
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 77 
 
 and steps, but very differently numbered from 
 those which have been seen before. The square 
 in longitude CJl)*, and latitude 55*, if brought to- 
 gether will make 2955 ; the tens must be re- 
 jected, and the units only left. We know that 
 the squares in longitude, from 20 to 30, are on 
 tlie third ladder, and tVoin SO to 40 on the fourth; 
 and that the latitude begins on the sixth ladder step. 
 To remember this, some word must be formed 
 from the two figures. Having cut off the tens, 
 we find 2955 becomes 9 longitude, and 5 lati- 
 tude. The minutes are next to be determined. ' 
 The distance from line to line is 60 minutes, one 
 half will of course be 30 minutes; ^ — 15; | — 45; 
 J — 12; ii—5. When the geography of Eng" 
 land is to be learned, we should commence from 
 the bottom or 3outh of the map, as England is 
 above the equator : when any country is beneath 
 the equator, we must of course count down- 
 wards. Although the floor is not used in geo- 
 graphy, it will be convenient to suppose this 
 chart of England placed upon the floor, that the 
 different counties may be arranged in order ; or 
 it may be supposed to be on a table, &c. or on 
 any other object. 
 
 England is generally divided into Circuits, 
 each of which contains a certain number of 
 counties. 
 
 H 3
 
 T8 NEW ART Olf MEMORY. 
 
 Circuits in England and Wales, 
 
 I 11 III IV V VI VII VIII 
 
 f 1 
 
 2 
 
 V5 
 
 w 
 o 
 
 The usual division of (he Counties is into 
 Home Circuits, etc. etc. but this will not be 
 adopted here. The following is our arrangement 
 of them. 
 
 I. South East. Sussex, Hertfordshire, Kent, 
 Middlesex, Esses, Surrey. 
 
 ir. South West. Hampshire, Wiltshire, Dor- 
 setshire, Somersetshire, Devonshire, Cornwall. 
 
 in. East. Suffolk, Norfolk, Cambridge- 
 shire, Bedfordshire, Huntingdonshire, Bucking- 
 hamshire. 
 
 IV. West. Berkshire, Oxfordshire, Glouces- 
 tershire, Worcestershire, Monmouthshire, Here- 
 fordshire, Shropshire. 
 
 V. Midland. Northamptonshire, Rutland-
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 79 
 
 shire, Lincolnshire, Leicestershire, NoUingham- 
 shire, Warwickshire, Derbysiiire, Staffordshire, 
 Cheshire. 
 
 VI. North. Yorkshire, Durham, Norlhuni'- 
 berland, Lancashire, Westmoreland, Cumber- 
 land. 
 
 Vn. North Wales, Montgomeryshire, Den- 
 bighshire, -Flintshire, Merionethshire, Caernar- 
 vonshire, Anglesea. 
 
 VHL South Wales. Glamorganshire, Breck- 
 nockshire, Kadnorshire, Caermarthenshire, Car- 
 diganshire, Pembrokeshire. 
 
 All these Circuits are numbered in a series as 
 ladders, and the counties are the steps ; there- 
 fore 4,4 will be 4th circuit, 4th county, and so 
 of the rest. — The symbol of 44 is a piano- 
 forte ; if it be said that the keys of the instrument 
 are bound with worsted, Worcestershire will be 
 immediately brought to our recollection. In the 
 same manner we must proceed with the others, 
 fixing each on a symbol, and connecting some 
 strange and ludicrous idea with this symbol. 
 
 The student should be prepared with a small 
 map of England which is not coloured ; and 
 colour the circuits, each with a separate colour. 
 The first, for Instance, blue ; the second, yel- 
 low ; the third, green ; the fourth, red ; the 
 fifth, lilac ; and when he comes to the sixth,
 
 80 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 begin again. When this is done, it must be 
 remenibered that the numerical order of the Cir- 
 cuits is represented by the dif^'erent colours. The 
 first colour will be blue, the second yellow. 
 
 When the counties are numbered, the pupil 
 must count upwards, commencing with the 
 lowest. The more effectually to distinguish 
 their numerical order, we use the colours. 
 The first county in the first circuit, must be 
 bordered wiih blue ; the second county with 
 \ellow; the timd with green, etc. and the like 
 with die other remaining counties in the circuit. 
 The numerical order of the counties will thus be 
 firmly nnpressed on the memory. 
 
 France contains one hundred and ten depart- 
 ments. These are to be divided into eleven 7?e- 
 gioiis, containing ten departments in each. The 
 regions should be arranged in geograpliical order, 
 commencing from ^ the equator, and counting 
 upwards. The meridian is taken from Paris. 
 West of this meridian we comiuence witii O, the 
 region of the Pyrenees. On the East is I the 
 Region of the Mediterranean, IT of Piedmont, 
 III of Charente, IV of Lake Leman, V Central 
 Region, VT Fuiisterre, Vtl Region of .luiat, 
 Vlll of the Seine, IX of the Rhone, X northern 
 Region. 
 
 If we wish to know the thirty-fifth dcj)art- 
 ment, it will be found in the third region, fifth
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 81 
 
 -department. To distinguish the region there are 
 five colours; one colour serves for I and VI. a 
 second for II and VII, a third for III and VIII. 
 In the same manner one department is distin- 
 guished from another. 
 
 Sect. 3. — Statistics. " 
 
 It has been shown that by the aid of the first 
 principles of this science, it vvill not be difficult 
 to find the situation of kingdoms, provinces, etc. 
 and their respective longitude and latitude. 
 There are, however, many other particulars 
 which it is important to remember, as the num- 
 ber of inhabitants, the natural products, the 
 military power, the extent in square miles, the 
 form of government, the state of commerce, of 
 the arts, etc. etc. These may be all fixed in 
 the memory with equal facility. Suppose that 
 there is before us, a table, and that all the 
 kingdoms of Europe, are placed upon it, and 
 arranged according to their relative importance. 
 This is shown in the following statistical table.
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 1 
 " 1 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 a. 
 
 C/3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 << 
 
 o 
 >> 
 
 IT 
 
 s 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ^ : 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 i5 
 
 C 
 
 CO 
 
 c
 
 OEOORAPHY. 83 
 
 The first symbol he'in^ the Tozoer of Babel, 
 it must be connected, in some manner, with the 
 kingdom, which is placed first. This is Eng- 
 land. Tlie Tower of Babel was the cause of 
 the confu.'«ion of languages : in England are 
 heard many different languages. Spain shall be 
 II. The symbol for 2 is a Swan ; a swan then 
 is placed in the sea, between Spain and Eng- 
 land, and it will swim to Enghmd to convey 
 intelligence. Ill is France, and is represented 
 by the mountain, or Parnassus ; — the Pluses 
 are banished from France. IV is Sweden, 
 represented by a looking-glass, which hiay be 
 emblematic of the smooth surface of the Baltic 
 Sea, when calm, and at rest. By such compa- 
 risons as these it will be easy to fix any thing that 
 may be required. It novv remains to mention 
 the objects in the particular squares or places. 
 
 1. Population. The symbol for this square 
 is the Tozi'er of Babel. From the top of a 
 tower, some idea may be formed of the popula- 
 tion of a city, by the number of people walking 
 in the streets. 
 
 2. Natural products. This square is repre- 
 sented by the swan. A swan is an animal. 
 Animals may be reckoned among the natural 
 products of a country. 
 
 3. Mititan/ power. A fortification may be 
 supposed to be on a moutttain ; and, as this is
 
 S4 NEW ART OP MEMORY. 
 
 tlje symbol for 3, the military power will imme- 
 diately occur to us. 
 
 4. Extent in square miles. The looking-glass^ 
 which represents 4, will by its four-square figure, 
 call to mind the square miles. 
 
 5. Government. It will not^ be difficult to 
 connect the idea of a throne, wiih that of govern- 
 ment, whether it be monarchial, republican, or 
 any other form of government. A throne is the 
 symbol for 5. 
 
 6. State of commerce. Commerce, the source 
 of plenty, may well be represented by the Horn 
 of Plenty, the symbol for 6. 
 
 7. Arts and Manufactures. To remember 
 these it will be only necessary to think of the 
 Glass-ljlower, the symbol for 7. 
 
 a. The Sciences. The symbol for 8, Midas, 
 or the man with long ears, is capacitated for the 
 reception of all branches of science. 
 
 There is here again a series of ladders and 
 ladder-steps, which must be denominated by 
 their respective num>>ers. In the number 2,4 
 there is 2 for Spain, and 4 for the extent in 
 square miles, or the second ladder, fourth step : 
 4,6 is the Commerce of Sweden; fourth ladder, 
 sixth step. 
 
 In the statistical table may be placed every 
 particular that it is necessary to know respecting
 
 GEOGEAPHY. 85 
 
 a nation. The manner of application for each 
 square is now considered. 
 
 1. Population. This is changing every year ; 
 the thousands and hundreds must therefore be 
 omitted, and the millions only preserved. The 
 population for England will be the number ], I, 
 first ladder, first step : this is represented by the 
 pillars of Hercules. England contains l6 mil- 
 lions of Inhabitants.* This number will be fixed 
 in the memory by changing the figures into a 
 word; t d will be the consonants giving the num- 
 ber ; — it may be said then, that there is a Toad 
 crawling up the pillars of Hercules. 
 
 2. Natural Products. If a country be re- 
 markable for the excellence of its horses, a rude 
 outline of this animal may be drawn in the 
 square belonging to the natural products. If it 
 contain extensive salt mines, a barrel or basket 
 of salt may be placed by the horse ; if good 
 wine, two bottles of wine should be added ; iron 
 may be represented by bars, and sheep by an 
 outline, as with the horse. To connect these 
 circumstances togetlier, some narrative should 
 be invented, the more improbable and ludicrous 
 the better. The horse being pressed by hunger, 
 eats the salt, but becoming thirsty, in conse- 
 
 • Accordiug to the last Population Returns, 16,5)2,144. 
 I
 
 86 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 quence, drinks the wine ; the wine has an effect 
 upon him, he becomes frantic, breaks the bars 
 of iron, and endangers the safety of the sheep. 
 The symbol for 12 is David with the Lion; 
 David must hold the horse, and take especial 
 care that the Lion does not devour the sheep. 
 
 In the course of our reading, if it be required 
 to commit to memory any remarkable circum- 
 stance respecting a country, we should take a 
 sheet of paper and divide it as our table is di- 
 vided, placing in the appropriate squares a re- 
 semblance, or rude outline, of the object or 
 circumstance to be remembered. This mode 
 will assist the memory very materially, and ex- 
 cite a greater degree of attention than the mere 
 idea which is presented to the mind by reading. 
 
 3. Military Power. The state of the mili- 
 tary force, in time of peace as well as of war, 
 must be considered, with the divisions into artil- 
 lery, cavalry, and infantry ; or, any other ar-r 
 rangement may be made which the nature of the 
 military force, in any particular country, may 
 demand. The square may be thus divided: 
 
 
 Navy 
 
 Artillery 
 
 Cavalry 
 
 Infantry
 
 CEOGRAPHY. 8? 
 
 4. Extent in Square Miles. Here we should 
 divide the square into several parts, significant 
 of the face of the country ; whether it be culti- 
 vated or uncultivated, wood-land, meadow, or 
 pasture, arable, etc. and what may be the ex- 
 tent of water in the country. 
 
 5. Government. If die government be mo- 
 narchial, a king may be supposed sitting upon the 
 throne, attended by princes ; or, if of the mixed 
 kind, he is supported by Lords aaid Commons. 
 
 6. Commerce. Tn this are arranged the prin- 
 cipal exports and imports, and whatever relates 
 to trade in general. 
 
 7. ^rts and Manufactures. Those of Eng- 
 land might be represented in many ways. - It 
 will be sufficient, perhaps, to place there the 
 steam-engine and the cotton-mill, and there will 
 be a visible remembrance of the arts and manu- 
 factures of our own country. 
 
 8. The Sciences. To this square belong th« 
 principal universities or foundations for the pro- 
 pagation and increase of knowledge, with the 
 various literary and scientific Institutions, as also 
 the philosophers, poets, etc. etc. 
 
 This general system of statistics is applicable, 
 of course, to any particular country, and to its 
 various subdivisions. In England, for instance, 
 it might be applied to every county, m the sam« 
 manner, as it is used for the whole kingdom.
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 )mtox^. 
 
 JL H E pupil having acquired some knowledge of 
 the details of geography, including statistical ta- 
 bles, and also of the mode of fixing in his me-<- 
 mory the chronological succession of sovereigns, 
 will proceed to the study of history with peculiar 
 advantages. 
 
 The following arrangement of some dates will 
 introduce us to the application of the mnemoni- 
 cal principles to history. 
 
 Place 
 6 
 4 
 
 7 
 4 
 
 r 
 
 9 
 
 There are here units of years, tens of years, or 
 decennials ; and hundreds or centuries. As the 
 division into rooms already noticed, will be here 
 resorted to, we cut off the first series of units, 
 and call them places ; the next which are rejected 
 
 Room 
 
 Stripe 
 
 17 
 
 8 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 
 8
 
 HISTORY. 69 
 
 are named stripes ; and the remaining figures, 
 rooms. For example, 1786, would be seven- 
 teenth room, eighth stripe, and sixtli place ; 
 1524, fifteenth room, second stripe, and fourth 
 place, and so of the rest. 87 is in O room, or 
 the room of units and tens,* eightii stripe and 
 seventh place. When we view a choice collec- 
 tion of pictures, some impressions of the excel- 
 lence of a particular picture, and of its situation 
 in the room or gallery, are generally fixed in the 
 mind. The remembrance of one picture will 
 suggest the situation of another, and in this 
 manner it will not be ditiicult to fix the places 
 of the more conspicuous paintings : and if there 
 are many rooms, the particular room may be 
 distinguished. Instead of a room being filled 
 widi pictures, it is easy to imagine that it is oc- 
 cupied by the events of a whole century : in this 
 room are all the years, reduced to localities. 
 
 A room is now taken with three walls, (see 
 Plate I. fig. 7) each of nnIucIi is divided into 
 three stripes ; and each stiipe into nine compart- 
 ments or squares, as ue have, in some instances, 
 done on our walls. 
 
 Each of these stripes is now a ten; and before 
 the first ten, there is O stripe, which is placed 
 
 • Tne second io the room of centuries. 
 13
 
 90 KEW ART OP MEMORY. 
 
 on the floor : on this are put 1, 2, 3, etc. to 9. 
 The number 100 must be placed on the cieling 
 of the second room, which should be divided in 
 the same way. This number will also serve as 
 an inscription to designate the room. 
 
 As it will be needful to appropriate a room to 
 each century, there will be occasion for a series 
 of rooms. This series will be thus arranged. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 Here are the hundreds; and those before 100 
 are placed in the preceding or O room. There 
 is now a necessity for a tenth room. To obviate 
 this inconvenience it will be easy to suppose that 
 the house is a double house. Thus we shall be 
 furnished with rooms for 2000 years. 
 
 But whence, it will be asked, are so many 
 rooms to be procured ? Every one is familiar 
 whh the apartments in his own house. All 
 these rooms must be employed, and named, 
 first, seventh, fourth, etc. and it will be better 
 to choose rooms which are supplied with pic- 
 tures, furniture, or some other remarkable ob- 
 jects, upon which numbers may be fixed. Each 
 room will be distinguished by one of the sym- 
 bols. The Jirst room will have the tower of 
 Babel painted Hpou it ; and to fix this more
 
 HISTORY. ^1 
 
 Strongly upon the memorv, it may be observed 
 that the proprietor of the room h a great linguist, 
 and the idea of the confusion of languages can- 
 not fail to suggest to us the Tower of Babel, the 
 distinguishing symbol of this room. 
 
 The second room will be designated by the 
 Swan ; the occupant of this room may be 
 much attached to the study of ornithology ; he 
 may be fond of birds, and possess an extensive 
 aviary. 
 
 The third room will have Parnassus or the 
 Mountain; this room may be the habitation of a 
 poety or of one who has a taste for poetry. If there 
 1)6 not a sufficient number of rooms in our own 
 house, some of those belonging to our frienda 
 may be engaged, whether they be at London, 
 Edinburgh, or Vienna. Having placed them 
 ideally, in order, we are now ready to fix what- 
 ever is required to be remembered. 
 
 For example, in the history of England it will 
 be found that William the Conqueror began to 
 reign in lOGQ. This date must be placed in 
 the tenth room, sixth stripe, and sixth place. 
 The tenth room will belong to Goliath, and we 
 shall have associated this idea with the room, by 
 comparing the possessor to Goliath in size and 
 «hape, or in character for courage, bravery, or
 
 92 NEW AKT OF MEMORY. 
 
 any other similar quality. The second king is 
 William Riifus, who ascended the throne in the 
 year 1087; he will, of course, be placed in the 
 same room, on the eighth stripe, and seventh 
 place, and the whole of the stripes and places 
 between this and the former, may be devoted to 
 William the Conqueror. . 
 
 Charlemagne, who was crowned Emperor in 
 the year 800, is, naturally, placed on the cieling 
 of the eighth room, — the room belonging to 
 Midas. With Charlemagne may be arranged 
 Egbert, or any king of another country whose 
 reign was coeval with that of Charlemagne. 
 
 When the present historical arrangement has 
 become familiar, it will be proper to take -a 
 sheet of paper for every century, forming a room 
 and making the proper divisions of three walls 
 and a floor, as above described. A particular 
 fact may be then put upon paper, by sketching a 
 rude outline of the circumstances, by figures of 
 animate or inanimate beings ; this, though it may 
 appear to some unnecessary, will imprmt the 
 different facts upon the memory more forcibly 
 than the usual mode of committing them to 
 writing. This v'ill be sufficiently exemplified by 
 the following bieroglyphic :
 
 ttlSTORV. 
 
 93 
 
 A 
 
 \ 
 
 It is thus explained. A convention was en- 
 tered into in Eg)'pt, between General Khber, 
 on the part of the French, and the Grand Vizier j 
 on the part of the Sublime Porte, which was 
 approved by the Cabinet of London. The 
 straight line with the crescent on its top denotes 
 the Grand Vizier, by its superior height to the 
 perpendicular line which is to represent General 
 Kleber ; the line drawn through the centre of 
 this line forming 2 acute angels, is intended for 
 the General's sword. To denote the convention 
 two lines are drawn, which meet together in the 
 centre, and represent the shaking of hands, or a 
 meeting. The convention was formed in Egypt, 
 which is signified by a pyramid. The Cabinet 
 of London is typified by the outline of a cabinet 
 on the right of the diagram ; the head of a ship 
 placed in the square denotes London, as it is 
 frequented more than any other port by ships.
 
 94 KEW ART or MEMORY. 
 
 It is not to be supposed that each division will 
 become more difficult in proportion as it is filled 
 with events. The reverse indeed will be the 
 case. It is a much greater labor to retain a few 
 facts scattered throughout the different squares, 
 than it is to remember a multiplicity of them, 
 each being arranged in order. If we take a few 
 insulated facts, there can be but little connexion 
 between them ; but when there is a multiplicity 
 of events disposed in order, by associating them 
 together, the one assists the remembrance of the 
 other, and a strong connecting chain is formed, 
 the links of which can scarcely be broken. The 
 facility of committing these facts to memory is 
 increased by their number. In selecting the 
 facts we should be careful to take the simple 
 facts ; and not to mistake their connecting cir- 
 cumstances, or consequences, for the facts them- 
 selves. 
 
 It may be asked, perhaps, is there not occa- 
 sion for a different room for every country ? Cer- 
 tainly not. The history of one country must 
 never be separated from the history of another 
 country. We can .scarcely speak of an event of 
 very great political importance which has hap- 
 pened in England, without involvii)g the history 
 of most of the European States, of the East 
 Indies, etc. etc. The political interests of one 
 country are almost always united with those of
 
 HISTORY. 95 
 
 another country. Sometimes, the events of one 
 nation are of high importance; sometimes those 
 of another nation. The gradual progress of a 
 nation to power, and the gradual decline an^ 
 extinction of that power must be familiar to 
 every one who is, in the slightest degree, ac- 
 quainted with history. The wheel of power, 
 like the fabled wheel of fi>rtune, is continually 
 revolving ; and, as one nation, in one century, 
 takes the lead in importance and influence ; the 
 next views it sunk into insignificance, and conse- 
 quently yery unproductive of peculiar or striking 
 events. 
 
 Some, however, may object, that we shall 
 not be able to distinguish any particular event, so 
 as to assign this event to its proper country. 
 There can be, however, no fear of this. Sou^e 
 particular circumstances connected with, and 
 inseparable from, the fact itself, cannot fail to 
 distinguish the country in which this event hap- 
 pened, whether in England, France, Spain, Ger- 
 many, or any other part of the world. 
 
 Hitherto, that period of time only has been 
 considered which is posterior to the Birth of 
 Christ. Antecedently to this period, however, 
 there is a space of four thousand and four years. 
 This time, though embracing a large number of 
 years, is by no means so pregnant with events as 
 that after the Birth of Christ.
 
 0(5 KEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Plate I. fig. 8. represents the series of cen- 
 turies, and on the left of this series are placed tke 
 events that happened from the creation to the 
 Birth of Christ. 
 
 It would be easy to assign to each year its 
 proper place ; but the first SOOO years are so 
 barren of events, that it would be useless to do 
 so ; and the difficulty of remembrance would be 
 enhanced by the paucity of dates worthy of being 
 committed to memory. We ought not to take 
 rooms where there is nothing to fix. It is only 
 necessary to know the true series of facts ; the 
 years must be put into words. Thgre are but 
 four years before the four thousandth year. In 
 these the Creation, and the birth of Cain and 
 Abel, are the principal events. From 4000 to 
 1000 there are not more than thirty principal 
 facts. If there were 300, not more than three 
 rooms would be required. The period which 
 includes the histories of Greece and Rome, will 
 produce a greater number of facts ; and there 
 will be more certainty as to the dates. From 
 the building of Rome then to the Birth of Christ, 
 there will be occasion for seven rootns. (See 
 Plate 1. fig. 9.) 
 
 These remarks will suffice for the antient and 
 modern history, — for the antediluvian and post- 
 diluvian periods. We may, however, wish to 
 remember not only the principal facts in general
 
 HISTORY, 97 
 
 history, but to enchain and fix the fleeting 
 visions of tlie moment, — those passing incidents 
 Avhich interest, amuse, or instruct us. " The 
 sacred treasure of the past" is not the only 
 *' substantial shadow" which will be registered 
 in our ideal repository. We shall be enabled to 
 arrange y«^«re events, and thus have an orderly 
 disposition of every circumstance of business or 
 pleasure, in which we may be engaged. In this 
 repository may be placed passing events, those 
 already entombed in the grave of time, and those 
 which are yet to seek the same sepulchre. Our 
 ideal almanack will enable us not only to regis- 
 ter appointments — but to enrol the payment of 
 bills and other mercantile concerns. To the 
 diarist it will be a neverfailing source of profita- 
 ble istruction and amusement. 
 
 To fix the events of a whole year more places 
 are required. Our year is divided into months, 
 weeks, and days; and into four seasons. Every 
 room has four sides. Every season contains 
 three months, and each wall contains three 
 stripes. (See Plate I. fig. 10.) The months are 
 named first, second, third, fourth, and so on ; 
 on each stripe are the days of the month, and 
 consequently a sufficient number of squares or 
 places, in which the facts and events may be 
 arranged. To remember the first, second, and 
 third mouths, the figures may be changed inta 
 
 K
 
 98 NEW ART OF MEMOEY. 
 
 letters, and the letters into words, if necessary. 
 If it be required to commit to memory some 
 remarkable circumstance which happened on the' 
 25th of June, we should take the figures 6,25 
 (sixth month, 25th day,) and change them into 
 letters ; these would he d n i; of this we might 
 make Daniel, or any other word that would 
 associate better with the nature of the event. If 
 it be 6,8 (June 8th) we might say d v (dove) 
 and connect it with the leading feature of the' 
 event. 
 
 The advantage of resorting to symbols for 
 the representation of sensible objects, has, al- 
 ready been insisted upon : it must, however, 
 be repeated, that the rude outline of any one 
 object, if drawn upon the paper, will contri- 
 bute more essentially to imprint the circum- 
 stance upon the memory, than whole pages of 
 laboured description and minute detail. The 
 Egyptian hieroglyphics were formed in this 
 May, and the key to their interpretation (the 
 combination of the different images) was a sacred 
 trust reposited with the priests. The symbols 
 which may be formed will serve the purpose of 
 secret writing : for we may be well assured that 
 they will be as unintelligible to every one but 
 ourselves, as the piiest-writing was, to the 
 profanum vulgus of Egypt.
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 I^ausuase* 
 
 Sect. 1.— 0/i learnins Lanc^uafres, 
 
 J. HE learning of Languages is, in these days, 
 an object of such general pursuit, and at the 
 same time of such real importance, that every 
 plan of instruction which has for its object to 
 abridge the labour of this study, or to give per- 
 manence to its acquisitions, comes to our con- 
 sideration with the strongest claims on our 
 attention. The first approach to the study of 
 Languages presents to view a long and dreary 
 passage, but which must be travelled through 
 ■with care and diligence, by those who wish to 
 make any useful progress. Now it would cer- 
 tainly be a great advantage to turn and shorten 
 this toilsome road, and to be enabled to pursue 
 our journey through the regions of science by 
 more direct and less fatiguing advances. 
 
 That any course of learning should be devised 
 by which the acquisition of Languages shall be
 
 100 NEW ART oy MEMORY. 
 
 rendered an expeditious and unlaborious task, it 
 would be presumptuous to expect. But it may 
 be reasonably hoped, that, in the progressive im- 
 provement of human experience, new methods 
 of instruction may be introduced, in this as well 
 as in other sciences, which may afford additional 
 facilities to learning, and clear away many obsta- 
 cles to improvement which former ages were 
 unable to remove. ^ 
 
 It is quite obvious that the difficulty in ac- 
 quiring a foreign language consists in the consti- 
 tutional difference of our native tongue, and that 
 which we propose to learn. If the grammatical 
 properties of the two languages were similar, the 
 mere obtaining of a copia verborum would be 
 an undertaking of no great difficulty. But how 
 considerable a labour it is to obtain a perfect 
 knowledge even of the genders and declensions 
 of nouns, the conjugations of verbs, and other 
 matters which are the very initials of language, 
 any one who has had the least experience of the 
 drudgery of teaching can well testify. 
 
 It would seem, then, that one of the most 
 extensive facilities which can be afforded in this 
 matter, is to point out the affinities of different 
 languages — to systematise, as far as can be, their 
 similarities ; and, where it is practicable, to tjace 
 and notify their variances. In other words.
 
 LANGUAGE. 101 
 
 if the expression may be allowed, to exhibit the 
 uriivenalities of language. 
 
 Something of this nature will be attempted in 
 the present chapter. It is inserted, because it 
 constitutes a part of M. Von Feinaigle's in- 
 structions ; and because the Editor hopes that, 
 it will be found to contain some useful matter. 
 But he does not mean to delude the reader into 
 an expectation that he will be here provided with 
 a sort of talismanic key, which shall enable him, 
 without labor and without loss of time, to un- 
 lock the janua linguaruni. Indeed that (what- 
 ever some interested enthusiasts may pretend) is 
 what no intelligent reader would expect, nor 
 any honest man venture to promise. All that 
 will be here attempted will be, to exhibit some 
 of the most important similarities of different 
 languages — to show that, notwithstanding indivi- 
 dual peculiarities, they still retain strong marks 
 of affinity in many essential particulars. 
 
 Facies non omnibus nna, 
 Kec tamen diversa ; qualem decet esse sororum. 
 
 Ov. Met. l. 2. V. 13. 
 
 And, to bring the matter more home to practice, 
 to offer some rules, by the assistance of which 
 one language may be usefully applied to the ac- 
 quisition of another. 
 
 As we are about to consider some of the uni- 
 k3
 
 102 NEW ART OF MEMOllY. 
 
 versal properties of language, it may not, per- 
 haps, be thought improper to enter on the 
 subject with a slight sketch of the origin of lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Sect. 2. — Sketch of the Origin of Language. 
 
 *' We are informed by Scripture, that when 
 the building of Babel was begun, about eighteen 
 hundred years after the fall, tliewhoJe earth was 
 of one speech. And had no miraculous inter- 
 position taken place, it is probable, that some 
 traces of it would have remained in every lan- 
 guage to this day. For, though, in so long a 
 time, many words must have been changed, 
 many introduced, a»id many forgotten, in every 
 country, yet men being all of the same family, 
 and all deriving their speech from the only one 
 primitive tongue, it may be presumed that some 
 of the original words would still have been in 
 use throughout the whole eaith : even as in all 
 the modern languages of Europe, some Greek, 
 and some Hebrew, and a great deal of Latin, is 
 still discernible. But Providence thouglit lit to 
 prevent this ; and by confounding the language 
 of the builders of Babel, to establish in the 
 world a variety of primitive tongues. 
 
 •^ •fp W "F 
 
 " Languages are either Primitive or Derived.
 
 LANGUAGE. 103 
 
 That those which are formed out of the «ame 
 parent tongue should all resemble it and one ano- 
 ther, and yet should all be different, is not more 
 wonderful, than that children and tlieir parents 
 should be marked with a general family likeness, 
 and each distinguished by peculiar features. 
 Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, French, and a 
 great deal of the English Tongue, are derived 
 from the Latin ; with the addition of many new 
 words, and new modes of termination and syntax 
 which were introduced by the northern nations. 
 And, therefore, all these languages resemble the 
 LiBtin and one another ; and yet each is different 
 from it, and from all the rest. But, if we could 
 compare two original or primitive tongues toge- 
 ther, the Hebrew for instance, with the Gothick 
 or the Celtick, or the language of China, with 
 that of the Hurons in North America, we should 
 not discern, perhaps, the least similitude : which, 
 considering that all mankind are of the same fa- 
 mily, could not be fully accounted for without 
 supposing, that some preternatural events like 
 that at tlie confusion of Babel, had some time 
 or other taken place. But this history solves all 
 difficulties."* 
 
 • Beattie on Language, in his Dissertations, pp. 304- 
 206, 4°.
 
 104 NEW ART OF MfiMOftY. 
 
 This is the general opinion respecting the ori- 
 gin of ilie diversity of Languages; but it is not 
 an uncontroverted doctriiie. Dr. Priestley* 
 has argued upon this point in the following man- 
 ner :— 
 
 " The present diversity of language is gene- 
 rally believed to have taken its rise from the 
 building of Babel, and to have been brought 
 about by the interposition of the Divine Being; 
 but it is no uiipiety to suppose, that this (agree- 
 able to most other operations of the Deity) 
 might have been brought about by natural means. 
 The possibility of this natural deviation seems 
 to be deduced from the following considera- 
 tions. 
 
 " First. The primitive language, or that 
 which was spoken by the first family of the 
 human race, must have been very scanty, and 
 insufficient for the purposes of their descendants, 
 in their growing acquaintance with the world. 
 
 " Second/^. Not being fixed by the practice 
 of writing, it would be very liable to variation. 
 
 " Thirdly. Supposing the primitive language 
 to have had few inflections, (because few would 
 have been sufficient,) it would easily admit any 
 inflections, which chance or design might sug- 
 
 * Lecture on the Theory of Language, p. 287, and leeq.
 
 LANGUA.OE, lOJ 
 
 gest to the founders of different families, or to 
 their successors. These different inflections 
 would consequenily introduce different construc- 
 tions of words, and different rules of syntax : 
 and thus what are called the very stamina of 
 languages, would be formed independently of 
 one another, and admit of all possible varieties. 
 
 " Fourthly. Considering into what different 
 climates mankind were dispersed, furnished with 
 the bare rudiments of the art of speech, into 
 what different ways of living they fell, and how 
 long they continued without the art of writing, 
 (without which no language can be fixed,) it 
 seems to be no woixier that languages should be 
 so different as they are ; both with respect to the 
 rules of inflection, with the fundamentals of 
 grammar which depend upon them, and the 
 words of which they consist. 
 
 " Tiie difficulty which some allege there is, 
 in conceiving hosv languages should arise in the 
 world so very different, not only in the words, 
 but in the manner of using them, seems to arise 
 wholly from the supposition, that the primitive 
 language was copiou'^, regular, and perfect in all 
 its parts: the difficulty of changing such a lan- 
 guage is allowed ; but the fact, is apprehended, 
 is nuich easier accounted for upon the present 
 hypoihusis. 
 
 " To these arguments it may be added, that
 
 106 NEW ART OF MfiMORY. 
 
 to a person thoroughly acquainted with the pre-* 
 sent state of mankind, ti.e prodigious diversity of 
 human manners and customs may probably ap- 
 pear almost as difficult to be accounted for, as 
 the diversity of languages only." 
 
 The late Dr. G. GRnGORY has obsefved 
 on this subject, that it is impossible to say what 
 was the nature of the confusion of language at 
 Babe/ ; whether it consisted in the invention of 
 new tortus, or in the improper use of the old. 
 The miracle at Bahel, he adds, might be only 
 a temporary confusion,* sufficient to set aside 
 that useless and absurd undertaking : and it is 
 more natural to suppose, that the consequent 
 dispersion of mankind was the effect of dissen- 
 tions occasioned by having misunderstood each 
 other, than that ihey could not live together, be- 
 cause they did not all continue to speak the same 
 language. 
 
 II. The origin of alphabetical writing is in- 
 volved in as much doubt as that of the diversity 
 
 * This conjecture, as Dr. Gregory states in a note, 
 is fonfirmed by a criticism of Mr. Bryant, wlio remarks, 
 in his analysis of Ancient Mytiiology, that ("THJli^ really 
 signifies lip, and that consequently the niiia(;le was not 
 any alteration in the language, but a failure or incapacity 
 in labial utterance, which, soon after their separation, 
 tlaey recovered.
 
 LANGUAGE. 107 
 
 of language ; and the controversies which have 
 arisen on both subjects have been Mmilarly con- 
 ducted — one side pretending to found their argu- 
 ments on the authority of the Scriptures, and 
 the other side denymg that those records furnish 
 any such inference. 
 
 They who have recourse to supernaturnl inter- 
 position to account for the origin of writing, 
 allege that the first alphabetical writings were the 
 two tables of stone, which, as we are infoi med 
 by Moses, were written by the finger of (iod 
 himself. And it must be acknowledged (in the 
 words of Dr. Priestley) that the oldest acco. nt 
 we have concerning the use of letters in Asia 
 and Greece is so circumstanced, as by no means 
 to clash with this hypothesis. It seems Itkewise 
 very probable from Robertson's compansou of 
 Alphabets, that all the known ones might origi- 
 nally have been derived from the llebiew, or 
 Samaritan. 
 
 But in opposition to these arguments it has 
 been asked — If the Deity had taught or revealed 
 such an art to mankind, why is it not explicitly 
 noted in that complete history of revelation, 
 which inspiration has handed down to us ? The 
 writing on the tables at Mount Sinai is not 
 spoken of as a new invention; and if it had been 
 such, and particularly if it had been the imme* 
 diate act of the Deity, is there the least proba-
 
 108 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 bility tl*t so important a fact would have been 
 omitted by the sacred historian ? There are va- 
 rious other arguments in this matter, but these 
 form the hinge of the dispute ; and we shall close 
 this subject with a very satisfactory observation 
 of Dr. Priestley, who reniarks, that, the imper- 
 fections of all alphabets, the Hebrew by no 
 means excepted, seems to argue them not to 
 have been the product of divine skill, but the 
 result of such a concurrence of accident and 
 gradual improvement as all human arts, and 
 M'hat we call inventions, owe their birth to. For 
 certainly, the alphabets in use bear no marks of 
 the regularity and perfection of the works of na- 
 ture : the more we consider the latter, the more 
 reason we see to admire their beauty, just pro- 
 portions, and consequent fitness to answer their 
 respective ends ; whereas, the more we examine 
 the former, the more defects, superfluities, and 
 imperfections of all kinds we discover iu them. 
 Besides, had there ever been a divine alphabet, 
 it would certainly have established itself in the 
 world by its manifest excellence, particularly as, 
 upon this supposition, mankind were incapable of 
 devising one themselves. 
 
 Ill, But whatever may be the origin of «/- 
 phabeticai zci iiing, it is certain that all alpha- 
 bets are, more or less, defective. In the or- 
 thography of modern languages, in particular, it
 
 LANGUAGE. 109 
 
 is a great inconvenience, as has feeen truly 
 observed,* that the pronunciation does not cor- 
 respond with the writing ; but that the same let- 
 ters have different sounds, and the same sounds 
 are often represented by different letters : some 
 letters also, according to the pronunciation, are 
 superfluous in some words, in others letters are 
 wanting. This is chiefly a mark of their deriva- 
 tion from other languages : since, in many of 
 those differences, the speUing leans to the an- 
 tients, when the pronunciation is modern. Tlius 
 the (p) in the word receipt is not pronounced ; 
 but it shows the derivation of the word from 
 recipio in Latin. Some words of the same 
 sound are spelled differently, to preserve a dis- 
 tinction in writing, as air, heir : hair, hare, etc. 
 Other words, on the contrary, which are spelled 
 in the same manner, are pronounced differently, 
 to preserve a distinction in speaking ; as I readr 
 and I have read. 
 
 Sect. 3. — Accmint of some attempts towards 
 forming a universal Character or Alphabet. 
 
 All the alphabets extant are charged by 
 Bishop Wilkin s with great irregularities, 
 
 * Priestley's Lectures on Language, p. 43. 
 L
 
 no NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 with respect both to order, number, power, 
 figure, etc. 
 
 As to the order it appears, says he, inartificial, 
 precarious, and confused, as the vowels and con- 
 sonants are not reduced into classes, with such 
 order of precedence and subsequence as their 
 natures will bear. Of this imperfection the 
 Greek alphabet, which is one of the least defec- 
 tive, is far from being free : for instance, the 
 Greeks should have separated the consonants 
 from the vowels ; after the vowels they should 
 have placed the diphthongs, and then the con- 
 sonants ; whereas, in fact, the order is so per- 
 verted, that we find the o the fifteenth letter in 
 the order of the alphabet, and the &>, or long o, 
 the tvi'enty-fourth and last : the e the fifth, and 
 the n the seventh letter. 
 
 With respect to number, they are both redun- 
 dant and deficient; redundant by allotting the 
 same sound to several letters, as in the Latin c 
 and k,f and ph ; or by reckoning double letters 
 among the simple elements of speech, as in the 
 Greek I and ^|/, the Latin q or cu, x or ex, and 
 the j consonant. They are deficient in many 
 respects, particularly with regard to vowels, of 
 which seven or eight kinds are commonly used, 
 though the Latin alphabet takes notice only of 
 five. Add to this, that the difference among
 
 LANGUAGE. Ill 
 
 them with regard to long and short, is not suffi- 
 ciently provided against. 
 
 The powers again are not more exempt from 
 confusion ; the vowels, for instance, are gene- 
 rally acknowledged to have each of them several 
 different sounds ; and among the consonants we 
 need only bring as evidence of their different pro- 
 nunciation the letter c in the word circa, and g 
 in the word negligence. Hence it happens, that 
 some words are diflferently written, though pro- 
 nounced in the same manner, as cessio and sessio ; 
 and others are different in pronunciation, which 
 are the same in writing, as give, dare, and give, 
 vinculum. 
 
 Finally, he adds, the Jigtires are but ill con- 
 certed, there is nothing in the characters of the 
 vowels answerable to the different manner of pro- 
 nunciation ; nor in the consonants analogous to 
 their agreements, or disagreements. 
 
 As we are on this subject, the reader may not 
 be displeased, perhaps, to have the various 
 schemes which have been proposed for the emen- 
 dation and correction of the English Alphabet 
 brought together in one concise view. 
 
 ** There have been many schemes offered for 
 the emendation and settlement of our ortho- 
 graphy ; which, like that of other nations, being 
 formed by chance, or according to the fancy of 
 the earliest writers in rude ages, was at first verj
 
 112 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 various and uncertain, and is yet sufficiently irre- 
 gular : of these reformers some have endeavoured 
 to accommodate orthography better to the pro- 
 nunciation, without considering that this is to 
 measure by a shadow ; to take that for a modet 
 or standard, which is changing while they apply 
 it. Others, less absurdly indeed, but with equal 
 unlikelihood of success, have endeavoured to 
 proportion the number of letters to that of 
 sounds, that every sound may have its own cha- 
 racter, and every character a single sound. Such 
 would be the orthography of a new language to 
 be formed by a synod of grammarians upon prin- 
 ciples of science. But who can hope to prevail 
 on nations to change their practice, and make all 
 the old books useless ? or what advantage would 
 a new orthography procure equivalent to the con- 
 fusion and perplexity of such an alteration. 
 
 " One of the first who proposed a scheme of 
 regular orthography, was Sir Thomas Smith, 
 Secretary of Slate to Queen Elizabeth, a man of 
 real learning, and nmch practised in grammatical 
 disquisitions.* After him auother mode of 
 
 • In the prefa;' ' ohnson's English Dictionary 
 
 (from whWA this h. .iiatled) a f^peclmevi may be 
 
 seen of .Ilia rfePoTMcrj or«if>g)«ifhy. Tke want ol" juoper 
 ty,p98, itowever, renders >* y^">•^^'ii^h\t to etliibit this and 
 ptji^r spe,ciaieu3 here.
 
 LANGUAGE. 113 
 
 writing was offered by Dr. Gill, the cele- 
 brated Master of St. Paul's School in London. 
 Dr. Gill was followed by Charles Butler, 
 a man who did not want an understanding which 
 might have qualified him for better employment. 
 He seems to have been more sanguine than his 
 predecessors, for he printed his book according 
 to his own scheme. 
 
 '* In the time of Charles I. there was a 
 very prevalent inclination to change the ortho- 
 graphy ; as appears, among other books, in 
 such editions of the works of Milton as were 
 published by himself. Of these reformers every 
 man had his own scheme ; but they agreed in 
 one general design of accommodating the letters 
 (o the pronunciation, by ejecting such as they 
 thought superfluous. Some of them would have 
 written these lines thus : 
 
 All the erth 
 Shall then be paradis, far happier place 
 Than this of Eden, and far happier dais. 
 
 " Bishop Wilkins afterwards, in his great 
 work of the philosophical language, proposed, 
 without expecting to be followed, a regular or- 
 thography ; by which the Lord's prayer is to be 
 written thus : 
 
 Y«r FSdher hsitsh art in h6ven, hfllloed bi 
 dhyi nam, dhi cingdym cym, dhy sill bi dyn in 
 erth as it is in heven, etc." 
 l3
 
 ili NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Here Dr. Johnson has closed bis account, 
 which we shall emleavour to complete by no- 
 ticing some other philosophical speculations of a 
 similar nature that have been submitted to the 
 public. But we shall first present the reader 
 with a more detailed accourit of Bishop Wilkins' 
 plan of a universal and philosophical language. 
 This account we shall give in an extract from 
 Dr. Priestley's Lectures on the Theory of 
 Language, because it contains the most clear 
 and concise exposition of it, that can possibly be 
 given. 
 
 " Having in the first place, with prodigious 
 labour and exactness, distributed all things 
 to which names are given into classes ; under 
 forty genuses or general heads, (some of which, 
 however, are subordinate to others) he assigns a 
 short and simple character to each of these forty 
 genuses,---a definite variation of the character, to 
 each difference under the genuses, — and a further 
 variation for each species, etc. By this means, 
 the characters, representing all things that have 
 names, have the same analogies with one another 
 that the things themselves have. 
 
 " Characters being provaded for the names of 
 things, the grammatical distinctions of words, 
 numbers, tenses, persons, voices, etc. are denoted 
 by some appendage to the character. 
 
 " In this manner may we be furnished with an
 
 LANGUAGE. 115 
 
 universal character, which shall represent ideas 
 directly, without the intervention of any sounds, 
 and which may be equally understood by people 
 using any language whatever.* 
 
 " To make this character efFable, the Doctor 
 (Wilkins) appropriates a single sound to the 
 characters representing each genus and difterence, 
 and also to each variation and appendage before 
 mentioned : and they are so contrived, that the 
 simple sounds adapted to all the parts of the 
 most complex character may be pronounced with 
 ease, as one word. 
 
 " By tliis means any people, after they had 
 applied this character to represent their ideas, 
 might soon learn to read it in the same manner 
 
 • Tbc languages of Europe have one instance of this 
 kind of writiny;. Their aritkmeliculfiguus, which were de- 
 rived from the Arabians, arc signiticantiBarks precisely of 
 the sarae nature as the universal characters ai)Ove men* 
 tioued. They have no depondcnte on words ; but each 
 figure represents an object — represents the number for 
 which it stands : and accordingly, on being presented to 
 the eye, is equally understood by all the nations, who have 
 agreed in the use of those cyphers — by Italians, Spaniards, 
 French and English, however diflerent the languages of 
 those nations are from one another, and whatever dift'erent 
 names they give in tlieir respective languages, to each nu- 
 merical cypher.— JB?«Jr on the Belles Lett. Led. vii.
 
 H6 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 as any other people ; whereby, in conversation 
 as well as in writing, they might make themselves 
 perfectly understood by one another. 
 
 " The elements of this character and language 
 are so few, and the combination of them so 
 easy, that the Doctor (VVilkins) says he has no 
 doubt, that a person of a good capacity and me- 
 mory may, in one month's space, attain to a 
 good readiness of expressing his mind this way, 
 either in the character or language. 
 
 " As the names of individuals cannot be com- 
 prehended in tables of genuses and their differ- 
 ences, the Dt)ctor (VVilkins) hath contrived an 
 ALPHABET of all the simple articulations of the 
 human voice ; to which he hath assigned two 
 sets of characters, to be used at pleasure : the 
 one consists of short and plain strokes, the other 
 is a kind of delineation of the position of the 
 organs in forming the articulations." 
 
 This plan Dr. Priestley considers the most 
 rational of all the plans of a universal and phi* 
 losophical language. And he adds, whenever 
 this noble project is resumed, it seems to be im- 
 possible to proceed upon a better plan than 
 this. The principal thing that is wanting to the 
 perfection of it is a more perfect distribution of 
 things into classes than, perhaps, the present 
 state of knowledge can enable us to make.
 
 LANGUAGE. 117 
 
 Mr. JiODWicK, in t\ie Philosophical TranS" 
 actions* gives ' an Essay towards an universal 
 Alphabet.' His plan was to contain an enume- 
 ration of all such single sounds, as are used in 
 any language : by means of which people should 
 be able to pronounce truly and readily any lan- 
 guage; to describe the pronunciation of any 
 language that shall be pronounced in their hear- 
 ing, so as others accustomed to this language, 
 though they had never heard the language pro- 
 nounced, shall at first be able truly to pronounce 
 it : and lastly, this character was to serve to 
 perpetuate the sounds of any language what- 
 ever. 
 
 The construction of " a new alphabet, and a 
 reformed mode of spelling," has also occupied 
 the attention of that celebrated Philosopher, Dr. 
 Franklin. His plan may be seen in his mis- 
 cellaneous works.'!" In this alphabet he has 
 attempted to provide that no letter should have 
 two sounds, and every sound should be repre- 
 sented by a distinct letter. " It is to be observed 
 (he says) that in all the letters, vowels, and con- 
 sonants, wherever they are met with, or in what- 
 ever company, their sound is always the same. 
 
 r— ■ 
 
 • Vol. xvi. p. 126. 
 t Vol. ii. p. 357. ed. Lond. 1806.
 
 il8 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 It is also intended, that there be no superfluous 
 letters used in spelling ; i. e. no letter that is not 
 sounded ; and this alphabet, by six new letters, 
 provides that there be no distinct sounds in the 
 language, without letters to express them. As 
 to the difference between short and long vowels, 
 it is naturally expressed by a single vowel, where 
 short ; a double one, where long : as for mend, 
 write mend; but for remaitied, write re- 
 meen'd ; for did write did, but for deed write 
 diid, etc." 
 
 In this alphabet c is omitted as unnecessary ; 
 k supplying its hard sound, and s the soft ; k 
 also supplies well the place of z, and with an s 
 added, the place of .r : q and x are therefore 
 omitted. The vowel u, being sounded as oo, 
 makes the w unnecessary. The ?/, where used 
 simply, is supplied by i, and where as a diph- 
 thong, by two vowels : that letter is therefore 
 omitted as useless. The jod, j, is also omitted, 
 its sound being supplied by a new letter, which 
 serves other purposes. 
 
 The philosophical construction of the alphabet 
 may be best seen in the following account, writ* 
 ten by himself, and entitled :
 
 LANGUAGE. IIQ 
 
 " Remarks oh the alphabetical Table." 
 
 ^It is endeavoured to give the alphabet a more nU' 
 
 \ fund order ; beginning: first witli the simple sounds 
 
 to <' formed by the breath, with none or very little 
 
 huh J help of tongue, teeth, and lips, and produced 
 
 r chiefly in the windpipe. 
 
 C Then coming forward to tliose formed by the roof 
 ^' ' i of the tongue next to the windpipe. 
 
 j.^ „^ ^ Then to those, formed more forward, by the forc« 
 t. d. i part of the tongue, against the roof of the mouth. 
 
 {Then those formed still more forward in the 
 mouth, by the tip of tlie tongue, applied first to 
 the roots of the upper teeth. 
 
 $.z. 
 
 Then to those formed by the tip of the tongue, ap- 
 plied to the ends or edges of the upper teeth. 
 
 ^1 
 
 C Then to those formed still more forward, by the 
 /• ^'' ^ under lip applied to the upper teeth. 
 
 {Then to those formed yet more forward, by the 
 upper and under lip opening to let out tiie sound- 
 ing breath. 
 / And lastly, ending with the shutting up of the 
 m. J mouth, or closing the lips while any vowel is 
 t.sO"uding. 
 
 It is impossible for want of proper types to 
 give a specimen here of the Doctor's reformed 
 mode of spelling ; but several examples may be 
 seen in the 3rd vol. of his works, p. S57, in 
 which is inserted a correspondence which was
 
 120 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 carried on between the Doctor and Miss Ste- 
 phenson, on this subject, and in which the 
 former urges the utility of his scheme, and 
 endeavours to answer the objections raised 
 against it."* 
 
 Mr. Noah Webster, another American 
 author, has proposed a more moderate inno- 
 vation, " to render our orthography sufficiently 
 -regular and easy." 
 
 1. The omission of all superfluous or silent 
 letters. Thus bread, head, give, bread, built, 
 meant, realm, friend, would be spelt, bred, 
 hed, giv, brest, bilt, ment, relm, frend. 
 
 2. A substitution of a character that has a 
 certain definite sound, for one that is more vague 
 and indeterminate. Thus, mean, near, speak, 
 grieve, zeal, would become, meen, neer, speek, 
 greeve, zeel. Thus key should be written kee ; 
 laugh, laf; daughter, dawter ; blood, blud ; 
 character, karacter; chorus, korus, etc. 
 
 3. A trifling alteration in a character, or the 
 addition of a point would distinguish different 
 sounds, without the substitution of a new cha- 
 
 * Mr. Webster states, that the Doctor, amidst all his 
 other employments, public and private, actually conl- 
 piled aUictionai7 on this scheme of reform, and procured 
 types to be cast for priiiting it. But it never was 
 printed.
 
 LANGUAGE. HI 
 
 racter. Thus a very small stroke across the 
 would distinguish its two sounds. A point over 
 a vowel might answer all the purposes of dif- 
 ferent letters. And for the diphthong on, let the 
 two letters be united by a small stroke, or both 
 engraven on the same piece of metal, with the 
 left hand line of the w united to the o. 
 
 These, with a few other inconsiderable altera* 
 tions, Mr. Webster thinks, " would answer every 
 purpose, and render the orthography sufficiently 
 correct and regular."* 
 
 The only other scheme of reformation we shall 
 notice is that put forth by Mr. Elphinston. 
 We shall transcribe the first paragraph of his 
 preface, f 
 
 " Evvery tung iz independant ov evvery 
 oddher. Hooewer seeks dhe anallogy (or nat- 
 tural rule) ov anny tung, must dherfore find it at 
 home; nor wil dhe seeker seek in vain. Inglish 
 diccion dhen haz no laws, but her own. Yet, 
 in her picturage, and consequently in much ov 
 her livving practice ; hav anny oddher laws, or 
 any lawlesues, been prefferably regarded. No 
 more can anny language adopt dhe system ov any 
 oddlier; dhan anny nacion, dhe hoal poUity ov 
 
 * Dissertations on the English Language, p. 394. 
 ♦ Propriety ascertained in her Picture, 4^.
 
 122 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY". 
 
 anoddher iiacioii : for such adopter wer no more 
 a distinct nacion or language ; wer but a mon- 
 grel, or an eccoe." 
 
 Sect. 4. — Proposed Philosophical Arrange' 
 merit of the Alphabet as applied to Language 
 in general. 
 
 The ordinary arrangement of the alphabet be- 
 ing thus defective and unphilosophical, we shall 
 propose another mode of disposing the letters, 
 which we shall endeavour to justify, by assigning 
 a reason for allotting to each letter the particular 
 place which it occupies. We shall exhibit our 
 alphabet, then, in this form : — 
 
 a 
 c 
 
 b 
 
 ph f 
 
 c 
 
 d 
 *h 
 
 V 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 P 
 
 V 
 
 X 
 
 ' t 
 
 According to this scheme, the letters are dis- 
 tributed into four colunais, each column con- 
 taining five letters. This arrangement is not an 
 arbitrary one, but is made upon principles of 
 philosophical propriety.
 
 LANGUAGE. 125 
 
 The first column contains the vowels. Y, is 
 a vowel in Englisli, but it is by no means an 
 essential part of the alphabet. It takes in general 
 'the sound of i, as in rhyme, cyder, system, synfax, 
 etc. For this reason (as Mr. Walker has ob- 
 served) printers, who have been the great cor- 
 rectors of our orthography, have substllultd the 
 i in its stead, in many instances. We shall dis- 
 card ?/, therefore, fi cm our alphabet. 
 
 The vowels are placed first, because they can 
 be pronounced without the assistance of conso- 
 nants, while consonants cannot be pronounced 
 without the aid of vowels. In order to arcount 
 for the arrangement of the vowels, thus ; a, e, i, 
 0, u; we must advert to the pronunciation of them. 
 The French pronunciation is the most natural and 
 pkilosophical ; for in the course of that pronun- 
 ciation of the vowels, there is a regular gradation 
 of sound from the most open to the closest, — ■ 
 from high to low, — aw, a, ee, o, en. This h 
 the order of nature. The sound of a is produced, 
 by a very wide opening of the lips ; which are 
 somewhat more closed in the pronunciation ofe,* 
 and still more so in the utterance o( i. When o 
 is pronounced, the lips approximate still more, 
 and at the sound of u, they are almost closed. 
 
 This subject may be further illustrated by the 
 following extract from Mr. Walker's Princi- 
 ples of Engli.'ih Pronunciation prefixed to his
 
 124 NtW AUT OP MEMORT. 
 
 Critical Pronouncing Dictionary. After ex- 
 hibiting a detailed view of the organic formation 
 of the vowels, not differing materially from that 
 before stated, he renjarks that, in this view we 
 fiid, that, a, e, and o, are the only simple or pure 
 vowels : that i is a diphthong, and that w is a 
 semi-consooant. If we were inclined (he adds) 
 to contrive a scale for measuring the breadth or 
 narrowness, or, as otliei s term it, the openness or 
 closeness of the vowel, we might begin with t 
 open, as Mr. Elphinston calls it, and which he 
 announces to be the closest of all the vocal 
 powers. In the pronunciation of this letter, we 
 find the aperture of tlie mouth extended on each 
 side ; the lips almost closed, and the sound 
 issuing horizontally. The slender a in waste 
 opens the mouth a little wider. The a in father 
 opens the mouth still more, without contracting 
 the corners. Tlie German a, heard in wall, not 
 only opens the mouth wider than the former a, 
 but contracts the corners of the mouth, so as to 
 make the aperture approach nearer to a circle ; 
 while die o opens the mouth still more, and con- 
 tracts the corners so as to make it the os rotun- 
 dum, a picture of the letter it sounds. 
 
 Consonants are divided into different classes 
 according to the seat of their intonation, or from 
 those organs of speech which are chiefly em- 
 ployed in forming them. The distinction which we
 
 LANGUAGE. 12S 
 
 shall adopt, is .that which divides them into 
 labials, gutturals, dentals, and palatals ; as they 
 are formed by the lips, the throat, the teeth, or 
 the palate : or, in other words, because the 
 breath, in passing from the lungs, is intercepted 
 in those seats or places, or at least is very strongly 
 compressed there. 
 
 In the second column are the consonants b, 
 
 f, P, T>' 
 
 jB is a labial : it is formed by intercepting the 
 passage of the breath through the mouth, by 
 closing the lips. 
 
 F may be represented by ph. Ph occurs 
 chiefly in words derived from the Greek, and 
 written in that language ^. The Italians, 
 in such words, write y,* thus, while we adhering 
 strictly to derivation write philosopher, they write 
 Jilosofo* 
 
 P is a labial, formed (like h) by closing the 
 lips ; but in a less forcible manner. The Ara- 
 bians (says Mr. Wallis) have not this letter, but 
 substitute for it either Be or Phe. The illiterate 
 Jews in this country usually confound b and p 
 in their pronunciation, using the one for the other. 
 
 * Euudem olini (j)li) sonum habuisse ac/ inscriptiones 
 veteres confinnant, in quibus altonun pro altcro proniiscue 
 adhibeii {•erninms : ut pliidelis pro fiddis, — Middleion d€ 
 ImI, Lxtcu Pron, Disc, 
 
 m3
 
 126 KEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 F is a labial : it is formed by a touch of the 
 upper teeth and the under lip. It is, indeed, the 
 flat fj to which letter it bears the same relation 
 as "p does to h. The Arabians and Persians have 
 not this sound ; and Wallis is of opinion that the 
 English-Saxons either had it not, or wrote it by 
 f ; for they used, he says, no v consonant, and 
 they wrote many words with f^ as the English 
 did after them, for some ages, which are now 
 written with v, as well as those which are now 
 written withy.- as gij\ heofon, etc. which are 
 now written give, heaven. And Priscian ac- 
 knowledges, that the Latins formerly pronounced 
 y with the same sound, with which afterwards 
 the V consonant was pronounced. 
 
 In the third column, are c, g, q, x. 
 
 C and g are both gutturals ; c has the sound 
 of s and k ; g of J and k. As the sound of k is 
 usually given to c, there is great reason for sup- 
 posing that this was its original sound.* In the 
 less frequent sound of c, the guttural becomes a 
 hissing sound. The hard sounds of c and g, (ka, 
 ge) are produced by a stroke in the throat, and 
 are consequently gutturals : g is the only weak 
 sound of tch, as in church ; ch is a guttural as- 
 pirated. 
 
 • 'WalHs observes, that tl)e Latin k was formerly used 
 for c : for the Komous wrote judiflfereutly Calendie and 
 Kaknda.
 
 LANGUAGE^ 127 
 
 Q is the strong sound of c, which, as was be- 
 fore observed, is a weak guttural. 
 
 X is written egs, ecs, and eks ; it is a guttural 
 aspirate, with a hissing termination. Aspirate 
 and hissing are compound sounds. 
 
 The fourth column contains d, h, t, t. 
 
 D is a dental, or produced by pressing the 
 tongue against the gums of the upper teeth, and 
 then separating them. 
 
 T is also a dental, and is similarly formed. 
 
 H. This letter is no more than an aspiration, 
 or breathing forcibly before the succeeding vowel. 
 
 ^ is a hissing dental. It is the flat s, and 
 bears the same relation to that letter as h does 
 tojJ, andy'tou. It is formed by placing the 
 tongue in the same position as in t and fZ, but 
 not so close to the gums as to stop the breath : 
 a space is left between the tongue and the palate 
 for the breath to issue, which fojms the hissing 
 or buzzing sound of the letter. 
 
 X, //?, w, are placed in the centre because they 
 are of a middle ilature between mutes and con- 
 sonants. They are generally termed liquids, 
 because, in pronunciation, they easily flow inta 
 and combine with the mutes. X is a weak pala- 
 tal, in is a labio-palatal, and n is a strong palatal. 
 JR is not found in all languages, it is formed 
 by the forcible expulsion of the air, which during 
 its passage, causes a tremulous motion of the
 
 123 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 tongue. The Greeks sometimes wrote this let- 
 ter with an aspiration, and we, follow their ex- 
 ample ill rhetoric, rhythm, etc. 
 
 aS is a hissing palatal, and is formed in the 
 same manner as z. 
 
 J and V are placed between the highest vowels 
 and the weakest consonants. 
 
 We shall subjoin the following tabular view 
 of the powers and qualities of the consonants, 
 accordinof to this system. 
 
 
 Labials. 
 
 Gutturals, 1 Dentals. 1 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 C 
 
 D 
 
 
 a labial with 
 a weak touch 
 
 a guttural witl] 
 the sound of A; 
 a weak touch 
 
 a weak den- 
 tal. 
 
 E 
 
 F 
 
 G 
 
 H 
 
 
 a labial with 
 a strong touch 
 aspirated. 
 
 a guttural; weak 
 sound of che. 
 
 a dental aspi- 
 rated. 
 
 I J 
 
 k L 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 
 a weak pala- 
 tal. 
 
 a labio-pala- 
 tal. 
 
 a strong pala- 
 tal. 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 Q r 
 
 s T 
 
 
 a labial with a' 
 strong touch. 
 
 thestrongsound 
 of c. 
 
 a strong den- 
 ial. 
 
 U 
 
 V w 
 
 X 
 
 y z 
 
 
 a labial with a guttural as-' 
 I weak toucii,'pirated,with a 
 )ut aspirated; hissing sound. 
 It is the weak 
 sound of'i)/t. 
 
 1 hissing den- 
 tal. 
 
 . 1
 
 LA.NGUAGE. 
 
 120 
 
 As in the course of this chapter we have no- 
 ticed the schemes of different autliois on this 
 subject, it may be as well to insert here the fol- 
 lowing tables of the consonants ; extracted from 
 Dr. Wallis, Mr. Walker, and Mr. Elphiuston. 
 
 (I. From Dr. AVallis *) 
 Synopsis of the Letters. 
 
 Mute 
 
 Labial or 
 Lip 
 
 HaU" Mute B 
 
 ( Half Vowel 
 
 W 
 
 M 
 
 Mute 
 
 c ^ 
 
 Palatine or 
 
 g ^ Palate 
 
 a 
 c 
 
 < Half Mute D 
 
 Half Vowel N 
 
 f 
 
 [utp C 
 
 Guttural or 
 Throat •\ Half Mute G 
 
 Half Vowel wasisrh 
 
 a Lowioi 
 
 TH 
 
 DH 
 
 a shjli 
 
 N 
 
 CH 
 G 
 
 L R 
 
 * Grammatica Angliamay p. 55.
 
 1^ 
 
 NEW ART OF MEMOBY. 
 
 
 B 
 o 
 
 
 - -d
 
 LANGTJA«E. 
 
 131 
 
 {5. From Mr. Elphinston.*) 
 TABEL OV AFFINNITY. 
 
 DUE LICQUIDS. 
 
 i Ungual, I guttural, I dental, \ labial^ 
 
 DHE MUTES. 
 direct ; dopri'saire ; 
 
 simfd, 
 
 k, c, f 
 
 aspirate, 
 
 th 
 eb, si 
 
 ch 
 
 ch [tsh'] 
 
 sinipel. 
 
 aspirate. 
 
 >labial. 
 
 dh 
 
 Vdental. 
 
 \sibbilating, 
 [zh]zi J 
 
 / pallatal or 
 ^■giittural. 
 gb J 
 
 J; o L - U Vcompouai 
 
 1 J 
 
 We may conclude this part of our subject in 
 the words of Mr. Walker on a similar occasion. 
 " In this sketch of the formation and distribution 
 
 • * Propriety ascertained is her Picture,' p. 3,
 
 132 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 of the consonants, it is curious to observe on how 
 few radical principles, the almost infinite variety 
 of combination in language depends. It is with 
 some degree of wonder, we perceive that the 
 slightest aspiration, the almost insensible inflexion 
 of nearly similar sounds, often generate the most 
 different and opposite meanings. In this view 
 of nature, as in every other, we find uniformity 
 and variety very conspicuous. The single Jiatf 
 at first imprinted on the chaos, seems to operate 
 on languages; which from the simplicity and 
 paucity of their principles, and the extent and 
 power of their co-mbinations, prove the goodness, 
 wisdem, and omnipotence of their origin. 
 
 " This analogical association of sounds is not 
 only curious, but ustful : it gives us a compre- 
 hensive view of the powers of the letters : and, 
 from the smull number that are radically differ- 
 ent, enables us to see the rules on which their 
 varieties depend : it discovers to us the genius 
 and propensities of several languages and dia- 
 lects; and, when authority is silent, enables us t© 
 decide agreeably to analogy."
 
 LANGUAGE* 133 
 
 Sect. J. — The derkation of French from Latirtf 
 skozcn to consist, principally, in the change 
 of certain letters according to established 
 rules. 
 
 When two difFeient nations have an inter- 
 course together, either by means of war or com- 
 merce, an attempt is made on both sides, to ren- 
 der the language of each, mutually understood. 
 For example, France was once conquered by 
 the Romans. The French people were, of 
 course, subject to the laws of tjitdr conquerors, 
 and if they had any complaints to prefer before 
 the courts, were, of necessity compelled to make 
 them in Latin, 
 
 - The people in acquiring this language, did 
 nut resort to grammars; lhe\f had heard a 
 part^ular name given to a particular object, 
 another name to another, etc. and had con- 
 stantly seen the objects characterised by these 
 names. The French had heard the Romans 
 mention a bridge, vvhich they called pons; they 
 heard them speak of the expense of a bridge, 
 (pontis) of going to a bridge, (ponti) of destroy- 
 ing this bridge, (ponlem) of going far from it, 
 (ponte) of more bridges, (pontes, pontium, pon- 
 tibus, etc.) The common people seeing such 
 terminatk)ns affixed to each word, and not caring 
 to understand or remember ihem, rejected tlieia 
 N
 
 134 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 off at once, preserving the body of the word 
 pout, and forming tlie French ponte. The 
 Spaniards and Italians followed the example. 
 The terminations, which, in Latin, formed the 
 declensions, were omitted ; and as in this last 
 word, so in many other derivatives from Latin 
 appellatives, the last vowel only was changed, 
 and a great part of the original word remained. 
 What is done in adjectives and substantives, also 
 takes place in verbs. 
 
 In Latin, the verbs have their infinitive moods 
 terminaled in re; once preceded by a, once by 
 e, and once by i, as are=ere=ire. It has been 
 observed, that the consonants are weak, strong, 
 aspirated, and hissing. All nations used the 
 letters of the alphabet, but they changed the 
 pronunciation according to the genius of their 
 respective countries. The language of one peo- 
 ple abounds with weak letters, others with strong, 
 hissing, or gutteral letters, etc. 
 
 The Latin word f rater when changed into 
 French, has the letter a weakened, and it be- 
 comes e — as in frere: the deep Roman a is 
 taken away, and the weaker letter e is substi- 
 tuted, as in mare, mer: chare, chere; pater, 
 pere ; catena, chaine. As it is the genius of the 
 French language to shorten their verbs, the 
 Latin infinitive are, becomes er ; as in amare, 
 uimer. In the third conjugation the final e only
 
 LANGUAGE. 135 
 
 is cut off, and the ir remains, as in fiiiire, Jinir ; ' 
 venire, venir, etc. etc. In the second conjuga- 
 tion which ends in ere, were the final e to be re- 
 jected, er only would remain, which would be 
 the sime termination as that of the first conjuga- 
 tion. If it be changed into i, the third conjuga- 
 tion will appear ; we seem then in danger of 
 losing a wh jle conjugation. Tiiis inconvenience, 
 however, will be soon obviated. The genius of 
 the language requires that the sound should be 
 shortened ; there remains, then, no other mode 
 than to deprive the ere of the first vowel, and 
 the second conjugation in re will be found, as 
 perdere, perdre. By taking away the vowel that 
 precedes the r, this letter would come into con- 
 tact with a preceding consonant, with which, in 
 some cases, it would be impossible for it to 
 stnid. The verb valere, would, according to 
 the rule just given, become valre ; but as / and 
 r cannot stand together, one should be taken 
 away. To connect them a sharp vosvel nmst be 
 inserted, and this must be e, but then the conju- 
 gation would be lost. Let us try i, and we shall 
 find it will become oir. 
 
 The Latin trea is changed into trois, for va- 
 lere, there is valoir ; this cannot be an irregular 
 conjugation, for all the remaining parts are con- 
 jugated regularly ; as there is only the infinitive 
 vu/uir, it is then neither regular, nor irregular,
 
 136 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 but regulated. This oir can only stand for the 
 infinitive mood ; it is instead of valre : if the 
 infinitive mood be not found regularly, the future 
 cannot be given. As r is indispensable, we must 
 part with the /. The Latin vvord ca/x, is made 
 chalk in English, but in pronouncing this word, 
 the I is opened and the pronunciation becomes 
 (chawk) changing the c into ch. in Freflch^ 
 calx becomes chaux; in the Latin word alter, 
 the I is opened and alter is converted into autre > 
 saltare into sautre. 
 
 From the Latin pulvere, the French infinitive 
 would be pulver,* but the / is resolved into eu, 
 and V is changed into d; thus, pulvere becomes 
 poudre; cinere, cindre. In vaudre, the / must 
 be rejected, and au supplied ; thus valre — vau. 
 In the future, the French do not say, as in Latin 
 or English, / will do,— hut I have to do ; they 
 take the present of avoir, add it to the infinitive, 
 and thus form the future vaudr-ai, vaudr-as, 
 vaudr-a ; we cannot say voulerai. In the pre- 
 sent tense, in Latin, there is valet ; the e is re- 
 jected, and as the / and t cannot stand together, 
 / is opened as before, and we immediately have 
 vaut. 
 
 It has been shown already, that the infinitive 
 moo^s of the Latin ending in are, ere, ire, are 
 changed into er, re, ir, in French. The first 
 and last conjugations are both made by rejecting
 
 LANGUAGE. 137 
 
 the final e. Afterwards we find a fourth conju- 
 gation in oil'; it has been shown how this is 
 formed, and that it is not a new conjugation, for 
 no tense or person is formed from oir. 
 
 If the Latin and French languages are com- 
 pared together, it will be easy to prove how 
 much one is derived from the other, and how 
 very materially the study of the Latirt and French 
 will facilitate the acquisition of other languages. 
 Those who are acquainted with the Latin lan- 
 guage know that mus is the termination of the 
 first person pKual, so that from are we get 
 amus, from ere, emus, from ire, imiis. ii the 
 first person plural in French be required, the 
 vowel must be omitted, and ms will be given* 
 The French words iion, nom, noms, are all pro- 
 nounced in the same manner; for when m is 
 final, it is pronounced as h, which has a nasal 
 sound : m, then, is no more necessary, for if we 
 write according to the pronunciation it would be 
 
 In the verb darner, for cxamp'e, the infini- 
 tive termination er is changed into oris, and we 
 have darisoiis. The second person in Latin, is^ 
 known by the termination tis — atis — etis — if is:. 
 the same principle that directed the French to 
 shorten the forn>er person, induces them to pur- 
 sue tlie same method here. The i is taken away 
 vmd ts \a left, \vhich has tlie same sound as, a«d,
 
 138 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 may be supplied by, z. The word is written 
 according to its pronunciation, and from darner 
 is produced da?isez. The Latin termination ent 
 is continued in French, but is mute ; they say 
 dansent (danse) as if there were no eiit. 
 
 In the next tense the past time occurs; we 
 danced yesterday: again for the first person 
 plural there is oris, but this would denote the 
 present tense ; to distinguish, therefore, the im- 
 perfect, from the present, tense, and to show 
 that it is past, i is placed before ons, as ions ; 
 and this is always found in the imperfect in all 
 conjugations. In the second person, present, 
 there is ez ; to denote the imperfect, i nmst be 
 added, as iez. For the third person, ent with 
 the i before it, ient ; but this requires some lit- 
 tle addition ; o, therefore, is placed before the 
 J, and oitrit i^ formed. This tense, then, is dan- 
 dons, dansiez, dansoient. 
 
 The future, we shall dance, will require some- 
 thing more than ons; the whole iniinilive is here 
 taken, and the termination ons is added ; thus 
 ■ne have da user, danserons, danserez, and dan- 
 sei'ont. From ont comes the infinitive danser^ 
 to dance. This future also has an imperfect, / 
 would dunce; i the sign for the imperfect being 
 added> danieiions, daiiseriez, danser'oint, are 
 obtaiiied. If the word danserions be analysed> 
 Uiu5, danse \ r \ i \ ons^ it will be *bund tbafr
 
 LANGUAGE. 139 
 
 vNS is the sign of the third person plural ; i of 
 the imperfect ; aiKl ;■ of the future. 
 
 There are yet two more tenses to be consi- 
 dered. The first is the preterperfect, 7ce have 
 danced^ or we danced. In Latin, the termina- 
 tions are }uiis, stis, runt ; the mus is softened 
 into wes, as in parlames ; the stis was formerly 
 written parlastes, but as the s was not sounded, 
 it was entirely dropped, and the i being softened, 
 formed parlates; and runt was softened into 
 rent, as in parlerent. In the imperfect of the 
 subjunctive mood, flie terminations are ssions, 
 ssiez, and the third person would be ssaient ; 
 but that would be a longer termination than the 
 genius of the French language would allow, it is 
 therefore shortened into ssent. 
 
 If the person, tense, etc. of the word Juiiriez, 
 be required, it nmst be remembered that ez is 
 the sign of the second person plwral ; that i is 
 the sign of an imperfect tense, and r of the fu- 
 ture : it is liierefore the second person plural of 
 the future imperfect. In rendroit, t is the sign 
 of'the third person singular, oi is the sign of the 
 imperfect, and r of the future ; it is then the 
 third person singular of the future imperfect, and 
 belongs to the conjugation ending in re. 
 
 A French verb which is termed irrcrrular. 
 is nevertheless derived regularly from the 
 Latitt> For example the verb plaire^ This
 
 140 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 verb is evidently derived from the h-atm p/acere : 
 to convert tliis word into French, it must be cur- 
 tailed, and the first step towards this, will be to 
 leave out the e before the /•; there will then be 
 placre, but as c and r cannot combine together, 
 and tile r is absolutely necessary, the c must be 
 dispensed wiih ; the a being changed into the 
 softer sound ai, which forms plaire. To form 
 the different persons and tenses, it remains only 
 to reject the final e, and add the proper termina- 
 tions. 
 
 The French verb connoitre is derived from the 
 Latin cognoscere. We will now consider the 
 vaiious changes which take place (iuring the pro- 
 cess of derivation. In the word connoissance, 
 which is also derived from cognoscere, the so is 
 changed into ss, and the o is sliortened into oi, 
 oiss : we then have cognoisseie ; but as there 
 cannot be a double e, the first is taken away, be- 
 cause the latter is wanteci for the infinitive ter- 
 minaiion ; the word becomes then cognoissre : 
 the r being too vvei.k by itself, it must be 
 strenglhened by a d or t ; a t h preferred ; the 
 g is changed into n, and the double s is lost — at 
 last connoitre is obtained. 
 
 In thej^utitre, the r is retained ; as counoitrai, 
 coiinoitras, etc. but in other tenses, the r is 
 changed into its original s — je cotuiois, tu <:o«- 
 iioiSf etc.
 
 LANGUAGE. 141 
 
 Anollier example may be found in mourir. 
 In the Latin, there is for the infinitive, some- 
 times moriri, but generally mo/7'. To form 
 mourir, the final i nmst be taken from moriri, 
 and the softened into on ; for the future, the ir 
 is rejected, and we have je mourai — tu mouras, 
 etc. In the present, the infinitive termination 
 is omitted, and an s is added, as je viours, tu 
 mours; but as the ou is too long, it is changed 
 into en, as je meurs, etc. In the same manner, 
 when in the Latin word dolor there are two 
 ihort o's, they are strengthened and converted 
 into ou and eu ; as, dolor, douleur ; color, 
 eouleur ; and from dolorosus comes douloureux. 
 
 When the Latin word debere is to be sought in 
 French, the b must be changed into v (devere,) 
 the second e being rejected, it becomes devre, 
 but as the v and r cannot combine together, the 
 termination re is changed into oir, devoir. This 
 verb then is not regular, but regulated. It is 
 impossible to obtain the future from devoir, as 
 it is irregular, and must be derived from the re- 
 gular verb devre. In the present, the r is re- 
 jected, and it becomes devs ; but, as v and *• cannot 
 stand together, and as s is the personal character, 
 it must remain, and the v be omitted ; the word 
 des is then left, but as the e is too weak, it must 
 be strengthened by changing it into oi : we have 
 then dois — je dois, tu doisy il doit. When in
 
 142 NEW ART OF MEMOTvY. 
 
 the plural there are two syllables, tlie e is re- 
 stored, and devons, devez, doive/if, are ob- 
 tained. 
 
 It remains ou]y to fix the conjugations. This 
 may be easily done by observing which of the 
 vowels, a, e, i, precedes the personal termina- 
 tions rcns, rez, ront. The Latin conjugations 
 may be learned in the same way. In the verb 
 aller, we do not, in the present tense, Bayfa/Ie^ 
 hut jevais; the v a is in not then derived from 
 aller, but from tlie German, zcenden. It takes 
 part of the present from one verb, and the re- 
 mainder from another. When the Latin verb 
 habere is to be converted into French, the b is 
 changed info r, and hatere is formed ; the /* 
 not being sounded in French, it is omitted, as 
 avere; the first e is rejected, and the re being 
 changed into oir, we have avoir. 
 
 In the present, the oir would be s — avs; but 
 V and s not combining together, the v must be 
 omitted, and the a is softened into ai — making 
 uis; the s not being pronounced, it is therefore 
 dropped ; we have tiien ai — -jai : the future 
 comes from the infinitive ax're ; the v being re- 
 solved into u; as avrai — aurai — auras — aura. 
 The second person singular always takes s for its 
 character, as in Latin — habes — as=dehes — doi&. 
 The third person has t from the Latin, but as 
 this letter was not pronounced in some cases, it
 
 LANGUAGE. 143 
 
 has been dropped ; yet it is again brought into 
 use, when the nominative case is put after the 
 verb, wlien two vowels would come together, as 
 aima-t-il? — moura-t-'U? When the nominative 
 precedes the verb, the t is omitted. 
 
 The following observations showing the pro- 
 cess of derivation in some particular languages, 
 and the mode by which one letter is substituted 
 for another, will serve to illustrate the subject 
 upon which we have been treating. Thty are 
 taken from Dr. Rees' Cyclopaedia.* 
 
 ** The substitution of a labial for an aspirate 
 or a guttural, or a diphthong, forms a general 
 principle which pervades the Latin tongue in its 
 formation from die Greek. Hence vicus, a vil- 
 lage, from oixoj; vinum, w^ine, from oivog\ oris, 
 a sheep, from oig ; video, to see, from n^co. With 
 respect to our own language a similar analogy 
 prevails, which has converted a guttural into a 
 labial ; thus laugh is pronounced la/f; enough, 
 oiuff; and most of those words which begin or 
 end with ?/ and zc, whether derived from He- 
 brew, Greek, or Gothic, began or ended with 
 a guttural. On tliis general principle year may 
 safely be said to be derived directly, or indirect- 
 ly, from yvfoj, a circle, and means a period, 
 
 • Art. Etymology.
 
 144 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 or revolution of time ; wheel from «y^<w to rotlf 
 etc. etc. 
 
 " The prefixing of the letter s to Greek words 
 is a principle that pervades the Latin tongue ; as 
 in sperno, to despise, from ttts^vyi, the heel ; thus 
 the primary sense of sperno is, to put the heel 
 upon ; qn the same principle is salio, insilio, in- 
 sult, taken from aWoiMai, The French gene- 
 rally drop the gutturals either in the middle or 
 at the end of vfords ; hence we should be justi- 
 fied by an invariable analogy in saying, that eau^ 
 water, is from aqua, and seul from singulm. 
 The Italians generally drop the liquid /,• agree- 
 ably to this custom of the language, Jiiime is 
 derived from Jiumen, a stream, and piano from 
 planus, a plain. In German, most of those 
 words which have t in English, are used with an 
 s ; as teaser, water ; besser, better ; es, it : and 
 the corruption of m into f or v, is a principle 
 that runs through the Welsh tongue ; thus, ve, 
 voer, and vayr, are but the Latin words, me, 
 fnare, and major." 
 
 We shall conclude this section with some ex- 
 cellent rules given by Mr. Greenwood,* for 
 ascertaining when an English word is derived 
 
 • E.ifay toward a Practical English Grammar, p. 21'^.
 
 LANGUAGE. 145 
 
 from Latin,- and how it may be made Latin 
 again. 
 
 1 . Most English words, ending in nee, or cy, 
 are derived from Latin words in tia ; Tempe- 
 rantia, dementia ; Temperance, Clemency. 
 
 2. Words in ion, in Enghsh, are made Latin 
 by casting away n ; as. Question, Questio ; Re- 
 iigion, Religio. 
 
 S. Words ending in ty are made Latin by 
 changing ty into tas; as. Liberty, Libertas; 
 Charity, Charitas. 
 
 4. Words ending in nde are derived from the 
 Latin, by changing o into e ; Fortitude^ Forti"- 
 tudo ; Gratitude, Gratitudo, etc. 
 
 5. Adjectives, which end in d, do for the 
 most part become Latin, by the addition of us ; 
 as Rigid, Rigidus ; Putrid, Putridus, etc. 
 
 6. Words ending in t, n, or r, between two 
 vowels become Latin by changing the last vowel 
 into us ; as, Mute, Mxitus ; Obscure, Obscu- 
 Tus; Obscene, Obscanus, etc. 
 
 7. Most words ending in 7U are made Latin, 
 by changing nt into ris ; as Latent, Latens ,' 
 Vigilant, Vigilans, etc. 
 
 8. Many words ending in al, by the addition 
 of is become Latiij; as Liberal, Liberalise 
 Substantial, Substantialis.
 
 146 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Sect, 6. — Mode of learning the Conjugations 
 and Declensions of a Language. 
 
 In the Latin infinitive are, ere, ire, are the 
 terminations of the primary conjugations ; there 
 are two more in ere which are secondary. The 
 first person singular is given by the termination 
 0, as eo — deleo from delere ; and io — audio from 
 audiere ; but we do not say amao from amare^ 
 but amo : a and o are two dependant vowels ; 
 the a is merged in the o according to the genius 
 of the language ; for a labial cannot precede a 
 lingual vowel. In eo and io there is first ^ 
 lingual, and then a labial vowel, we conse- 
 quently have : 
 
 amare — delerie— audire — larabere — fugere 
 amo —deleo — audio — lambo — fugio 
 
 The preterperfect tense is terminated by vi, as 
 amavi — delevi — audivi, except in the secondary 
 conjugations which only change the o of the pre- 
 sent tense into i; as lambo — Iambi— fugio— 
 
 The supine is known by the termination tuntf 
 as, amatum — deletum — auditum— lambitum — 
 fugitum. The personal characters are in the sin- 
 gular (amoj, m (amabam^, s (amas—amabas,
 
 LAK6UACE. U7 
 
 ( (ama? — amabaO 5 and in the plural, mus, tis, 
 nt, as (amamz«, ama^js, amanO* The third per- 
 son plural from ire is not iiit, but being softened 
 in the pronunciation by the insertion of ti, be- 
 comes iunt, as audiunt, fugiunt ; and the se- 
 condary '(^re, as in lambere does not make lam,' 
 bent in the third person plural, but lamhunt. 
 The different tenses to be considered are the pre- 
 sent, imperfect, preterperfect, preterpluperfect, 
 and future ; and there are two moods, the indi- 
 cative and the subjunctive, each of which con- 
 tains all llie foregoing tenses. 
 
 In the present tense of the subjunctive mood 
 when the vowel is a in the infinitive, it is changed 
 into e ; and when it is e in the infinitive, it be- 
 comes a in the subjunctive ; this may be thus 
 
 e 
 remembered a / « amare — amem : delere-^ 
 
 deleam; legere — legam. The character of the 
 imperfect is ha in the indicative, and re in the 
 subjunctive mood. The word hare will bring 
 this to our recollection — amabam — amarem; 
 deleham — delerem. 
 
 The character of the preterperfect is i in the 
 indicative, except in the secondary verbs, and in 
 the subjunctive is erim ; amavi — amaverim; 
 delevi — deleverim ; — Iambi — lamberim.
 
 148 NBW ART OF MBMORY. 
 
 The preterpluperfeci of the indicative ia 
 known by the termination veram, etc. except 
 ■when the pretcrptrfect is formed simply with t, 
 in which case it is eram. The same tense in tbo 
 subjunctive is vissem, or issem :~^amaveram'— 
 amavissem ,• — deleveram — delevissem ; legeram 
 •—•hghsem. 
 
 The future of the indicative is formed by bo in 
 amo and deleo, and by am in lambo and Jugio, 
 In the subjunctive mood^ the future termination 
 is formed from the preterperfect indicative by 
 the addition of ero throughout; as amabo—* 
 amavero ;—delebo — delevero ; lambam — lam' 
 hero. 
 
 The following tables of the Latin conjuga- 
 tions and declensions may be committed to me- 
 mory, by placing them on a wall, a mantle- 
 piece, a door, etc. preserving the situations of 
 the moods, tenses, and declensions as described 
 in the tables.
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 149 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ol 
 
 
 .IS 
 
 
 
 ,§1 
 
 •- 
 
 E 
 
 s 
 
 bo-bis 
 ani-es 
 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 "3 .22 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 £■?« 
 
 •»^ 
 
 s 
 
 3 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^a 
 
 
 5 
 
 cj 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 V? 
 
 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 "> 
 
 u> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .0 
 
 
 
 
 Jh 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^0 
 
 .. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 '% 
 
 
 _s 
 
 
 t3 
 
 2-^ 
 
 Oi 
 
 4! 
 
 u 
 
 
 'u, 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 
 eu 
 
 
 
 
 '■S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ,4^ 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 «; c 
 
 
 § 
 
 Is 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 «<5 
 
 
 
 
 ■- 
 
 r- 
 
 
 i- 
 
 1 "= 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 ►-5 
 
 
 
 .S '=< 
 
 •^0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -<j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E? 
 
 <v 
 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 4J 
 
 go 
 
 
 s 
 
 6 
 
 
 5 1 ^• 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 «.s 5'i^ rt-^ 
 
 
 > S .E 
 
 ;|'s=i 
 
 ^2 
 
 
 Q. 
 
 c 
 
 3* 
 
 « 
 i< 
 
 -r Si 
 
 k5 
 
 ■y? 
 
 
 Sinsjiilar 
 plural cud 
 of all the 
 scs in tli( 
 dicative 
 subj. moo 
 
 o3
 
 150 
 
 NEW Allf Oi MEMORY. 
 
 V V ^ ^ ^ 
 
 J3 O » 3 S 
 
 ^ O ij <u n 
 
 o.H.M V « 
 
 S.-2 p:| 
 
 !« £ >) tC ^ 
 
 p.-. © s o 
 
 «j {^ Si n Ri 
 
 .s o ii c* u .a 
 
 C 1 H tl 5^ ~ 
 
 .:s o <ii fj o .a 
 
 S 3 
 .2 I 

 
 LANGUAGE. 151 
 
 Sect. T, ^—Particular Directions for the acqui" 
 iition of a Language. 
 
 Having fixed the terminations of the declen- 
 sions and conjugations, and observed the signs of 
 the different cases, the student may proceed to 
 the learning of a language. Supposing this to 
 be the JLatin language, an easy book must be 
 first taken, for instance, a Latin Bible, and an 
 English one, placed by the side of it. In the 
 latter we read, " In the beginning God created 
 the heaven and the earth," etc. etc. In the 
 Latin it is, In principio creavit Dens ca'lum et 
 terram, etc. The two versions having been 
 compared, the first word is found to be the 
 same in both ; the second in the Latin (princi- 
 pium) does not resemble the English ; its mean- 
 ing may, however, be ascertained with tolerable 
 accuracy from its situation ; and as o is the sign 
 of the ablative singular, there will n6t be much 
 difficulty in discovering the translation of p?'//ic/- 
 pium to be ' in the beginning.' The next word in 
 Latin is creavit, this is found to be a verb by its 
 termination ; cre-a-vi-t is proved to be of the 
 first conjugation by the character a ; v shows it 
 to be the preterperfect tense, and t gives the 
 third person singular. It is impossible to err in 
 assigning creavit its proper meaning ; the 
 word so nearly resembles the English created.
 
 J.52 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 Who createtl ? God created — Deus is the nomi- 
 native. What did he create ? the heaven and the 
 earth: cochun et terram will immediately be 
 presented to us; our caleiiial and terrestrial 
 cannot fa' I to give the meaning of diese words> 
 and the final m will point out to us Uiat they are 
 in the accusative case. In this manner, we should 
 proceed for two or three pages, and then read 
 them for three or four times more, till we can 
 translate with tolerable facility. We do not 
 consult grammars to learn the rules, but merely 
 to solve any difficulty that may occur. In the 
 present mode, the grammar is learned in the lan- 
 guage, anil not the language in the grammar. 
 Every rule is an abstraction, and cannot be un- 
 derstood without an example. Instead of long- 
 rules we learn examples, and these should be 
 fixed upon the walls of a room in proper order. 
 The striking analogy between many modern lan- 
 guages, and the consequent facility of acquiring 
 several languages, at the same time, must be 
 evident to every one. This is particularly the 
 case with the English, German, Latin, French, 
 Italian; Spanish, and Portugueze languages.
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 )pstematic Cables. 
 
 JL H E knowledge of systematic Tables is pecu- 
 liarly important to the student in any branch of 
 science, whether it be botany, zoology, chemis- 
 try, mineralogy, etc. and the mode of fixing 
 these tables in the memory, must be deemed of 
 very great use to all who are concerned in such 
 pursuits. The application of this art to such 
 tables will be shown in the following Mineralo- 
 gical Table of Hau y. 
 
 The characters of Minerals are of three kinds, 
 Physical, Geometrical, and Chemical, 
 
 ; I. GENERAL. 
 
 1. Specific Gravity, (according to the Hy- 
 drostatic balance of Nicholson.) 
 
 2. Cohesion. 
 
 1. In Solids is proved : 
 I. By friction with a File, 
 t Yielding. 
 ii Not yielduig.
 
 154 NEW aut of memory. 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 
 II. By rubbing the angular parts of one mi- 
 
 neral against the angular parts of ano^ 
 ther mineral. 
 
 III. By Percussion with a hammer. 
 
 i Dirticult to be broken. 
 
 a Brittle. 
 
 Hi Crumbling. 
 
 IV. By a Steel. 
 
 i Giving Fire< 
 u Not giving Fire. 
 
 V. By flexion or pressure. 
 
 i Simply Flexible. 
 21 Elastic. 
 Hi Ductile. 
 iv Soft. 
 
 1. In its own nature. 
 
 2. Having imbibed a fluid. 
 
 VI. By the force of Traction. 
 
 2. Liquids (yielding with the slightest pressure.) 
 
 I. By moistening the hand. 
 
 II. By not moistening it. 
 
 II. PARTICULAR. (As found by the senses.) 
 1. Impression upon the Tongue. 
 I. Bi/ Taste, 
 i Salt. 
 
 ii Astringent. 
 Hi Sweetish. 
 iv Pungent. 
 V Bitter. 
 vi Urinous.
 
 SYSTEMATIC TABLES. 155 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 II. By adhesion. 
 
 2. Feeling. 
 
 I. Unctuous and Greasy. 
 
 II. Smooth, hut not greasy. 
 
 III. Harsh. 
 
 3, Smell. 
 
 J. By Breathing. 
 
 II. By Rubbing. 
 
 III. By Heating. 
 
 i Aliaceous, or garlic-like. 
 ii Bituminous. 
 Hi Sulphureous. 
 
 4, Sound. 
 
 I. By Percussion, 
 
 II. By Bending. 
 
 5. Light. 
 
 I. By Reflexion, (producing Colour.) 
 i Colours of the mass. 
 
 1. In their species. 
 
 2. In their distribution. 
 
 i Uniform. 
 ii Variegated. 
 
 1. In stripes. 
 
 2. In spots. 
 
 3. In their action. 
 
 1. By change of colour. 
 
 2. By reflex irises.
 
 156 NETf ART OE MEMOKY. 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 
 ii Colours of the Streak. 
 
 1. Similar, 
 
 2. Dissimilar. 
 
 ill Colours of the Powder, 
 
 1. Similar. 
 
 2. Dissimilar. 
 (Producing Lustre) 
 
 i Brilliant. 
 ii Dull. 
 Hi Greasy. 
 tv Silky. 
 V Pearly. 
 vi Metallic, 
 vii Pseudo-Metallic, 
 II. jBy Refraction. 
 (Transparency.) 
 
 1. Limpid. 
 
 2. Transparent but coloured, 
 
 3. Translucid. 
 
 4. Opaque. 
 
 iil« J5_y Phospltorescenct, 
 i By heating, 
 ii By rubbing, 
 
 6. Electricity, 
 I. Passive. 
 
 i By communication. 
 ii By rubbing. 
 1. Vitreous. 
 3. Resinous.
 
 SYSTEMATIC TABLES. U7 
 
 Physical characters, continued. 
 in By heating. 
 
 (Vitreous on one side, and resiuoui 
 on the other.) 
 II. Active » 
 t Vitreous. 
 a Resinous. 
 iii Neither vitreous nor resinous > 
 
 f. Magnetism. 
 
 I. Simple, 
 
 II. Polar. 
 
 11. (geometrical €i^tmtt0, 
 
 L FORM. 
 
 1. Determinable. 
 
 I. Elementary. 
 
 II. Secondary. 
 
 J. Indeterminable. 
 
 I. By rounding oflf the surfaces and angles. 
 
 II. Striated and rough. 
 
 III. Amorphous bodies, (i. e. bodies of an 
 
 irregular form.) 
 
 3. Imitative. 
 
 I. Bodies formed by concretion. 
 
 II. Pseudoraorphous bodies, (i. e. such as 
 
 have assumed the form of another body, 
 for which they are substituted.) 
 p
 
 IB9 NEW ART OF MEMORY, 
 
 Geometrical characters, continufd. 
 II. STRUCTURE, 
 
 1. Laminated. 
 
 2. Lamellated, ' 
 
 3. Stratiform, 
 
 4. Foliated, 
 
 5. Fibrous. 
 
 j With parallel fibres^ 
 it With radiated fibre?. 
 
 6. Granulated. 
 J', Compact. 
 
 8. Cellular. 
 in. FRACTURE, 
 
 I. Directions, 
 
 I, Longitudinal. 
 
 II, Transverse. 
 
 III, Indeterminate, 
 
 g. Varieties. 
 
 I. Conchoidal. 
 
 II. Smooth. 
 
 III. Rough. 
 
 IV. Scaly. 
 
 V. Articulated, 
 
 , BY FIRE. 
 
 1. With Straw. 
 
 I. Fusibility. 
 
 II. The result of Fusiop, 
 
 nu Tiie Reduction of metallic Substances.
 
 SYSTEMATIC TABLE«f« 159 
 
 Chemical characters, continued* 
 2. With red-hot Coals. 
 
 I. Volatility. 
 
 II. Detonation. " 
 
 III. Decrepitation. 
 
 IV. Ebullition. 
 
 II. BY ACIDS, (and in particular by the Nitrli 
 
 Acid.) 
 
 i. Dissolution with effervescence. 
 
 2. Dissolution without efferves- 
 cence. 
 
 3. Reduction into jelly. 
 
 III. BY ALKALIES. 
 
 1. Dissolution of Copper by Ammonia, 
 
 forming a beautiful blue Colour. 
 
 2. The Vapour of sulphuretted Ammo- 
 
 nia, blackening the Carbonate of Lead. ^ 
 
 The characters of minerals, as we have seen, 
 are physical, geometrical, and chemical. The 
 physical characters are general and particular; 
 and both these are again subdivided. The ge- 
 neral physical characters must be first consi- 
 dered. In order to fix these, we should take a 
 room \vhich is familiar to us, and place the va- 
 rious divisions upon the different objects in that 
 room, which are also well known to us, invent- 
 ing some connecting circumstance by which w«
 
 160 NEW ART OF MEMOKY. 
 
 may be the better enabled to remember the par- 
 ticular division of the table. 
 
 Having a room in which there are four walla, 
 "we take 'the first which is on our left hand, and 
 commence with specific graviti/, the first divi- 
 sion of the general characters, and to fix this in 
 our minds a balance is placed on the top of the 
 wall, near the cieling. The next division ia 
 cohesion, which is put by the end of the balance } 
 if we ask what preserves the whole wall in its 
 present firm state, the answer will be cohesion. 
 There is now occasion for a sopha, which is 
 placed against the lower part of the wall ; upon 
 which the solids must be put ; cohesion in solids 
 is proved in six different ways. In one corner of 
 the sopha, a file is placed, which will call to 
 mind the first mode, friction with a file ; in ano- 
 ther corner, some minerals of an angular shape ; 
 and thus we must proceed to fix the six different 
 divisions. The sub-divisions will be easily re- 
 membered, if connected, in some way, with the 
 principal outlines, which are thus permanently 
 fixed. Having filled one wall with the general 
 physical characters of minerals, the particular 
 characters are next to be considered. The paV" 
 ticular physical characters of minerals are known, 
 1. by taste, 2. by adhesion. Another wall is now 
 needful, in which there may be a door : on this 
 door a tongue is placed as the emblem of taste ;
 
 SYSTEMATIC TABLES. l6l 
 
 the door being divided into six compartments, in 
 tlie first is found a cube of salt, to convey the 
 idea of saline ; on the second a stritig for 
 astringent; in the third some sweetmeats for 
 sweetish; in the fourth, a knife for sharp, which 
 may cut the string in the second compartment ; 
 bitter in the fifth division will come immediately 
 under sweetish ; and cannot fail to be remem- 
 bered by the contrast which it presents ; urinous 
 is in the sixth and last division, and will need no 
 symbol. In this way must the pupil proceed 
 with the remaining divisions of the table, fixing 
 each upon an object, and connecting some 
 striking circumstance with the object, that will 
 afford a permanent idea of the system \\hich he 
 is desirous to acquire. 
 
 PS
 
 CHAP. vn. 
 
 anlj Brose. 
 
 A HE first materials of a poetic edifice are to be 
 found in metaphors, allegories, arid in various 
 kinds of fiction ; , and, it is thus all images, 
 comparisons, allusions, and figures, particularly 
 those which personify moral subjects, concur in 
 adorning such a structure. When these images 
 are reduced into verse, ihe ear is delighted to a 
 high degree, and the mind insensibly repeats 
 them while the eye reads them. This is parti- 
 cularly the case with rhyme. Cadence, har- 
 mony, and especially rhyme, afford the greatest 
 assistance to the memory that art can invent; 
 and the images, or poetic fictions, that strike 
 our senses, assist in engraving them deeply on 
 our minds. 
 
 When a historical narrative is related in prose f 
 the facts only are stated in a plain, regular order, 
 without any minute description of the different 
 objects which occur in the course of the history.
 
 fOETRY AND PROSE. l63 
 
 The poet; however, proceeds differently. He 
 describes, minutely, every object wliicli presents 
 itself; if it be a mountain, we have a lively de- 
 scription of its situation, the objects seen from 
 it, and the trees or houses upon it. Should 
 there be a castle on this mountain, its antient 
 and present state is accurately described, toge- 
 ther with the characters of its various possessors 
 and their contests for the occupation of it : these 
 descriptions we read with pleasure, and they are 
 more firmly imprinted upon the memory by the 
 variety and succession of images employed in 
 them. 
 
 In order to commit to memory any particular 
 piece of poetry which may be divided into stan- 
 zas, each consisting of four, six, eight, or ten 
 lines, etc. it is necessary to take one stanza at a 
 time, to read it over, and to select the principal 
 objects or images, and combine them with the 
 Jirst symbol ; attaching (he next stanza to the 
 second symbol, and so on with the remaining 
 stanzas. By these means we are not only ena- 
 bled to recite the whole poem in regular order^ 
 but to repeat any one or more stanzas in any 
 order, — to determine the numerical situation of 
 any line or vvord in the poem — and to say how 
 often any particular WDid may occur. As we 
 are able to repeat any stanza in the poem, it will
 
 1(54 NEW AHT OF MEMORY. 
 
 only be needful to count the lines or words, if it 
 be required to determine the numerical situation 
 of any line or word. 
 
 It will not be d fficult to apply these princi« 
 pies to the repetition of poetry. A single illus- 
 tration, perhaps, will be sufficient \ and, for this 
 purpose we take the first stanza of Goldsmith'* 
 Edwin and Jiigeiina. 
 
 " Turn, gentle hermit of the dale, 
 
 " And guide my lonely way 
 " To where yon taper cheers the vale 
 
 " With hospitable ray." 
 
 We must here reflect, and imagine that we sets 
 a Hermit standing on the Tozcer of Babel, and 
 turning round with inconceivable rapidity ; a 
 very large taper is placed upon his head. An- 
 gelina is walking by the tower and calling out 
 loudly to the hermit ' to guide her lonely way ;' 
 the taper cannot fail to suggest the remainder of 
 the stanza. 
 
 In a poem that is not divided into stanzas, we 
 must take 4, 6, 8, or 10 lines, preserving the 
 connection, and fix them upon a symbol. Se- 
 veral small pieces of poetry may be readily im- 
 printed upon the memory by placing them upon 
 the pictures, or furniture, of the wall of a room 
 with which we may be acquainted. Though 
 the symbols are not here actually resorted tO;,
 
 yOKTRY AND PROSE. l65 
 
 yet the principle that is pursued, is precisely 
 the same, for what are the symbols, but 
 pictures which line the walls of our imaginary 
 rooms f 
 
 As a further illustration of the mode of com- 
 mitting poetry to memory, we shall give the fol- 
 lowing examples from Nolegar, as quoted by 
 Feyjoo, iu his Cartas Eruditas,* 
 
 First Example, 
 
 Feuix Divina 
 De tan hellas alas 
 Humilde, y piadosd 
 Al Cielo te ensalzas. 
 
 Divine Phcenix, 
 With such beautiful wings, 
 Humble and Merciful, 
 Thou laisest to Heaven. 
 
 " The Pkanix in the first verse of this stanza, 
 (says Noiegar) must be placed on the first predi- 
 cament of the sphere,f on the right hand, and a 
 papal crown, or tiara, or any other thing be- 
 longing to the Church, must be put on its head ; 
 because we cannot apply any other material ob- 
 
 • Tom. i. 
 
 t This will answer to the first place in the first wall of » 
 room.
 
 166 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 ject, to represent the Word Divine; w6 majf 
 then make a reflectioji or two on these images, 
 and say, why has a Phcenix, the Papal Crown 
 on its head ? It is a Divine Phoenix, a Divine 
 Phmnix. Then the second predicament of the 
 left hand shall be taken for the second verse, and 
 a drum with a stick to beat it, may be placed 
 there ; the stick may explain the word [t?e] with, 
 * # #^ I imagine that the drummer being 
 ready to beat it, says [<^e} with and the drum 
 Itari] such ; in the same place, I would put two 
 beautiful women silting by the drummer, who 
 should have two wings lying at his feet ; and 
 speaking of the second predicament, f would say, 
 JDe tan hellas alas (with such beautiful wings.) 
 
 " On the third predicament opposite th« first on 
 the right, I would put a woman kneeling and 
 soliciting the pardon of a poor man condemned 
 to banishment, who should be there with a 
 chain, and by this image I xvould recal to mind 
 the words of the third verse, Humifde y piadosa 
 (humble and merciful.) On the fourth predica- 
 ment, I would place a piece of carpet, (alfomhra) 
 or any thing whose name begins with al [to,] and 
 I would only use this syllable, to which I would 
 sew the tester of a bed, and would say (al eielo) 
 to heaven; and for the word thou raisest I would 
 put a Priest, raising the Host, to whom the Cu- 
 rate (ayudantei) should hold some salt, saying
 
 POETRY AND PHOSE. l67 
 
 (ten sal alzas) take some salt, (thou raisest.) In 
 tills last image the figure Apenthesis is formed, 
 and reflecting, I should say (ensalzas) thou 
 raisest. 
 
 Second Example. 
 
 Pongan, Scnor, el medio, y el gohitrm 
 Lot altos alribtilos de tu Essencia. 
 
 Sir, let >r«'tIiod and government be established 
 By the high attributes of thy Essence, 
 
 '' In order to commit these verses to memory, 
 (says Nolegar,) on the right hand of the table 
 upon which I am writing, and where my ink- 
 stand is, I would place a slave, or a black wo- 
 man, with a basket and two hens in it ; and cJos* 
 to the slave a Marquis or Duke, who on enter- 
 ing my room should attempt to frighten the hens, 
 at which the slave must say (Po)tgan, Senor,) 
 Let them lay, Sir. On the right hand of the 
 slave I would place a Medi§ Ce/emin (half a 
 Peck measure,) and on the left hand a Chairif 
 signifying the letter (i/) (G) or some (hiel) 
 Gall, For government, I would place oue of 
 the many Governors of my acquaintance, who is 
 astonished at what is going forward, I would 
 reflect, and think that I heard him say, Ponganf 
 Scnor, el medio y el gobierno. To represent 
 ihs other Terse, I w ould put for (los altos) tWQ
 
 168 NEW AUT OF MEMORY. 
 
 or three pieces of timber with some tiles, taking 
 these for the whole of the roof of a house, which 
 consists of timber and tiles ; and for (atributos) 
 attributes, I would place two tributary Princes, 
 with an image of the letter (A) on the head of one, 
 who must be going to collect tributes or taxes, 
 and if his name be Andrew, the better ; because 
 the (A) might be placed as an imi^e of the name. 
 Then supposing our food to be dependent on the 
 collection of the taxes, it would be easy to re- 
 remember, that Andrew was bringing some attri- 
 butes by the letter (A) ; now, at the feet of this 
 collector, I would place an alembic of Quint- 
 essences, or a Distiller, with a glass full of wa- 
 ter, (Quintessence, already drawn,) who should 
 mind not to break it with his feet ; and close to 
 the glass I would place a small stick, or the 
 stick of a drummer, made of iron, that we may 
 remember it is not to be broken ; because it 
 might be used as we have already said, for an 
 abecedario, meaning (de tu) of thy. In this 
 manner, whenever I write, I shall remember 
 that I have this verse at my right hand; Pongan, 
 Senor, el Medio, y Gobierno ; and on my 
 left, the other ; Los altos atributos, de tu Es" 
 sencia" 
 
 When Prose is to be Committed to memory, 
 the particular passage, or chapter, should be 
 read over carefully two or three times, and
 
 POBTRY AND PROSE. l69 
 
 having selected the principal images or objects, 
 it will be necessary to form a narrative by com- 
 bining them with the different symbols. We 
 should take a few lines only at a time, and pro- 
 ceed gradually in fixing the various objects pre- 
 sented to us. 
 
 To remember the principal points in a Sermon 
 which is regularly divided into parts, it is only 
 needful to take the different heads or titles as 
 they are given, and arrange them on the cieling 
 of the church or chapel, placing some on the 
 cornice, and others in various parts, in regular 
 order.* Or, a sort of imaginary tree may be sup- 
 posed springing from the centre of the cieling, 
 and the proofs and illustrations adduced by the 
 preacher, may be suspended on its branches. 
 This method will be rendered more effectual, 
 if a symbol of the idea be formed, as for 
 
 • A plan somewhat analogous to this, is mentioned by 
 Mr. I^ugald Stewart, who observes, " I have been 
 told of a young woman, in a very low rank of life, who 
 contiived a method of committing to memory the sermons 
 which she was accustomed to hear, by fixing her atten- 
 tion, during the different heads of the discourse, on dif- 
 ferent compartments of the roof of the church ; in such a 
 manner as that when she afterwards saw the roof, or re- 
 collected the order in which its compartments were dis- 
 posed of, she recollected the method which the preacher 
 had observed in treating his subject.— Elements qf the 
 PJiilosophy of the Human Mind, p. 456. 
 
 9
 
 j70 new art of memory. 
 
 Justice a pair of scales, etc. etc. This, hoW' 
 ever, is not essential.* 
 
 Mr. Stewart, speaking of the assistance ren- 
 dered to an orator, or public speaker, by the topi- 
 cal memory, in recollecting the plan and arrange- 
 ment of his discourse, considers the accounts 
 given of it by the antient rhetoricians, as abun- 
 dantly satisfactory, and makes the following per- 
 tinent observations on the subject. " Suppose 
 (says this author) that I were to fix in my me- 
 mory the different apartments in some very large 
 building, and that I had accustomed myself to 
 think of these apartments always in the same in- 
 variable order. Suppose farther, tliat in pre- 
 pnring myself for a public discourse, in which I 
 had occasiou to treat of a great variety of parti- 
 culars, I was anxious to fix in my memory, the 
 order I proposed to observe in the communica- 
 tion of my ideas. Tt is evident, that by a proper 
 division of my subject into heads, and by con- 
 ncctinaf each head with a particular apartment, 
 (w.!ii( h I could easily do, by conceiving myself 
 to be sitting in the apartment while I was study- 
 ing the part of my discourse, I meant to connect 
 
 * The chapter and verse of the text maybe soon fixed, 
 }>y changing the nnnilnr of each into a hieroglyphic, and 
 formjujf an association between the two.
 
 POETRY AND PROSE. Ifl 
 
 with it,) the habitual order in which these apart-^ 
 menls occurred to inv thoughts, would present 
 to me, in tlicir proper arrangement, and without 
 any effort on my part, the ideas of which I was 
 to treat. It is a'so obvious, that a very little 
 practice wou'd enable me to avail myself of this 
 contrivance, toithout any embarrassment or dis- 
 traction of mi/ attention." * 
 
 A public speaker may arrange the arguments 
 of his adversary on various parts of his person, 
 and thus be enabled to review and answer 
 a multiplicity of observations made by many 
 different speakers. The first remark might be 
 placed on his head, one in each eye, one in 
 each ear, another on his nose, mouth, etc. etc. 
 if it be required to remember a iiigh number, 
 we need only resort to the symbols : for in- 
 stance, 27,819 will be fixed by remember- 
 ing the names of Don Quixote, Midas, and 
 Robinson Crusoe, the 'i7th, 8th, and IQth 
 symbols. 
 
 The advantages of this part of the system 
 to the different professions are very great. Tiie 
 minister — the legal student, and the Member 
 
 • Elements of the Philosiyphy of the Uumun Mind, pp. 
 456, 4,07.
 
 172 NEW ART OE MEMORT. 
 
 of Parliament, may all practise this method 
 with success. The application of these principles 
 will also render an essential service to the mer" 
 chant and ihe man of business, iu the various 
 couceriis ol life.
 
 CHAP. Vlll. 
 
 Sititijmetic* 
 
 Xhe application of Mnemonics to arithinetie 
 was entirely omitted in the former edition of this 
 work, becanse the editor did not conceive at that 
 time, that the system could be rendered suffici- 
 ently intelligible to the general reader. Anxious, 
 however, to make this edition as complete as 
 possible, he has given faithfully the substance of 
 Mr. Feinaigle's Lecture on Arithmetic, without 
 any attempt at illustration. As this Lecture has 
 been accurately detailed in a recent publication,* 
 it is extracted from that work, but without any 
 of tlie reporter's commentaries and observations. 
 
 " We have now to see how our methods will 
 apply to Arithmetic. 
 
 " In this subject we think we have, or may have 
 evidence, for every particular proposition. But 
 let us think a little ; in many cases we have cer- 
 
 • Cross' Examination of Feinaigle's Arithmetic. 
 S3
 
 174 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 tainty : but is certainty and evidence the same 
 thing ? For instance we know that 6 multiplied 
 by 6 gives 36 : this is certain ; but is it evident ? 
 Ail we can say is that we have learned so : but 
 where is the evidence that 6x6 gives just 36 ? 
 When you say that 6 X 6 is 36, you answer that 
 it is three tens and six units ; but see we this ? 
 How are we convinced that it is just 36 and no 
 other number ? It is only in our machine ; but 
 how it comes we know not. We have these 
 products given us in our multiplication tables, 
 which we all know how difficult it is for children 
 to learn ; nay, many grown persons cannot learn 
 it, because it is founded only upon tlie poor na- 
 tural memory, upon which we can never depend. 
 We make it only an object of memory instead of 
 presenting it to the intellect, and we have no evi- 
 dence, because we want the first evidence. To 
 find the first evidence we must cousider the fi- 
 gures ihemselves. Let us see then what is in the 
 figures : we have 
 
 123456789 
 
 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 
 
 100, &c. 
 
 1000, &c. 
 What conies after 9 ? Is it 10? No; 10 is a 
 higher unit, and must therefore be placed before 
 the 1 ; now what comes after 10? Is it 1 1 .? 
 No ; it is 20. Thus we find those nations did
 
 ARITHMETIC. 175 
 
 who employed letters for numbers : after having 
 used the first 9 they went on thus, 10, 20, 30, 
 &c. and not 10, II, 12, &c. .Thus change these 
 numbers as you please, you will always find they 
 go from 1 to 9, and by considering the numbers 
 in this way, the child sees at once that the rap- 
 port of 10 to 60 is exactly the same with that of 
 1 to 6 ; and all the relations of these numbers 
 are at once in his mind. The first thing then 
 must surely be to give the evidence of those fi- 
 gures ; after this every thing will be easy. In 
 problems, the greatest difficulty is to understand 
 . the question ; when we do that, the problem is 
 half solved ; the mind then acts like an alge- 
 braical formula. O I we see — put this here, 
 and that there ; do this, and do that, and it is 
 done. 
 
 " Let us see then how we are to get the true 
 idea of number. 
 Let this be one, --------O 
 
 Let it be one something, an apple, or an 
 orange, or whatever, and let this be 
 another, ---------Q 
 
 Now what have we here ? Is this two ? 1 see only 
 two ones ; an I we say that these are equal to one 
 two: But how kn>)W we this?. Have we evi- 
 dence in the tiling itself that two ones are the 
 same with one two ^ I should see two things in 
 one thus : ---------<I) 
 
 O
 
 176 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 and the child sees at once that two halves are 
 equal to one ; and that two halves and one are 
 equal to one two. In the same manner I have 
 for three, a circle divided into three sectors ; 
 and the child sees at once that three thirds are 
 equal to one ; and that the half of 3 thirds is one 
 half; and that three thirds and two halves and 
 one are equal to three. And so on for the higher 
 numbers. 
 
 *' Thus tlie child sees at once the proportions 
 between the fractions : those things which are 
 most difficult to be learned by the common way 
 are here the first to be acquired, because they go 
 M'ith the first conception. If I say give me one 
 half of three thirds, or one third of one half, or 
 one half of one third, or one third together with 
 one half of one third, he gives me them at once, 
 because he has a clear conception of their mean- 
 ing. I give not these things to the child, he 
 must give lliem to me ; and it is wonderful what 
 calculations many children will make when they 
 go on witli their reason ; but all this is gone 
 when they begin with the usual methods, be- 
 cause evidence is taken away, and commonly we 
 find that the more instruction they receive, the 
 difficulty is the greater. But in our method they 
 proceed with pleasure, because they continue to 
 have evidence ; and I will engage that any child 
 instructed in this method, would in one fortnight
 
 ARITHMETIC. 177 
 
 perform calculations of which you have no idea. 
 So true is this, that if we were to unknow all that 
 we have learned, and begin from the foundation, 
 it would be better. 
 
 ** We can go on with the same principles to 
 Mathematics ; in them we have three things, 
 weight, measure, and number ; but all are redu- 
 cible to number. 
 
 " If we now represent our succession of . • 
 units thus, and divide ten into two halves, . . 
 as we have seen that this is necessary for . . 
 representing two in one. If I ask what . . 
 is 6 to 8, or give me one half of eight, . . 
 and one fourth of eight, the. child finds 
 this at once, which is sometimes the solution 
 of a difficult problem. If we go onto Addi- 
 tion, and ask what is 7 and 8 r the child sees 
 at once that 7 is equal to 5 and 2, and that 
 8 is equal to 3 and 3 ; so that 7 and 8 are 
 equal to two fives and five, or one ten and five, 
 or fifteen. In the same manner 6 and C) are one 
 ten and two, 8 and 8 are one ten and six, See. &.c. 
 so that we see addition is certainly demonstrated 
 thus ; and subtraction is as evident. 
 
 " Let us go on then to Multiplication. Say that 
 we ask how much is eight taken six times, the 
 answer nmst be in tens and units, the child sees 
 that 8 is equal to 5 and 3, 
 
 and is equal to 5 and 1.
 
 178 NEW ART OF MEMORY. 
 
 And multiplying tlieSe he has - - - - 25 
 Thus every number must be considered by 15 
 what it is in rapport to 10 and 5. 5 
 
 3 
 
 48 
 But let us see if this is not in our dots also, . 
 
 We have certainly above a and below b and e 
 four dots, which are the tens ; above b we have 
 four, and above c two; two nuiltiplied by four 
 gives eight for the units, so that we have 48. 
 
 " In the same manner 7 nmltiplied by 9> 
 we have 6 tens, and one multiplied by ?>, 
 or 3 units, that is 63. tjj
 
 ARITHMETIC. 179 
 
 And so 8 multiplied by 9, we have 7 tens, 
 and one multiplied by two units or 72, 
 and so in every odier case; only the rule ^' 
 must be changed when we change the . 
 object of the question. 
 
 So that we see a child has no need of the mul- 
 tiplication table ; he burdens not his mind with 
 it; he sees not only the relation of the different 
 numbers, but he sees all haw they affect and 
 combine with each other; ail is in tlie nature of 
 the thing ; the evidence is before liim. 
 
 " Let us now go on to Division. Suppose we 
 have to divide 63 by 7 ; let us see if this is not 
 included in the nature of the thing. We have 
 
 7)63( 
 
 If we subtract the 7 from 10, we have 3; and
 
 180 KEW AKT OF MEMOHY. 
 
 if we add this to 6, we have 9 the quotient. 
 Divide 54 by 9. 
 
 9)54(6 
 Subtracting the 9 from 10, and adding the re- 
 mainder to 5, we have 6 the quotient. 
 
 4 2 
 
 SO 6)48(8 8)72(9 and so on. 
 
 And in cases where the dividend does not exactly 
 contain the devisor, as in 
 
 9)76(8 
 we find by multiplication, that 8 mulkiplied by 9 
 gives 72, we have then 4 over, which is conse- 
 quently 4 ninths. 
 
 " Thus in every case we have always the answer 
 to the nearest whole number. Here also we 
 have no need of the multiplication table, which, 
 as I said before, is so difficult to learn, as the 
 numbers themselves give us the answer ; it is in 
 their nature. You see then how easy it is to ad- 
 vance by our method, and we charge not th« 
 memory with what it is so difficult to fix."
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS 
 
 ^irttficial iHemotp. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 JlA-S many of the treatises on this subject are 
 extremely rare, we shall give the title of each, 
 and occasionally notice their contents ; but we 
 shall not attempt a particular analysis of the early 
 books, as the same principles will be found am- 
 ply developed in those of a more recent date, 
 from which copious extracts will be made. In 
 some few instances, indeed, on account of its 
 rarity, or usefulness, the whole work has been 
 reprinted ; and, a slight sketch of the author's life 
 has, when practicable, been introduced. The 
 articles thus noticed are all numbered; the books 
 are chronologically arranged, according to the 
 dates of their publication ; and the MSS. are 
 referred to that period in which their respective 
 authors probably tlourished.
 
 182 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 1. ThomcB JBradwardini Ars 3Iemora- 
 tiva. 3IS. 
 
 This curious manuscript is No. 3744 in the 
 Shane Collection, preserved in the British Mu- 
 seum. It consists of three pages and a half of a 
 small duodecimo size, and treats of places, and of 
 images or symbols to be arranged in the places ; 
 and, is evidently an attempt, though a feeble one, 
 to form a system of topical memory, according to 
 the plan of the antients. 
 
 Thomas Bkadwardin was called the 
 Profound Doctor, and was born in Sussex, 
 about the beginning of the fourteenrfi century. 
 He was educated at Merton College, Oxford, of 
 which he was proctor in 1325. Being called to 
 court by Stratford, archbishop of Canterbury, he 
 was made confessor to Edward III. and presented 
 with a canonry of Lincoln, and also with the 
 chancellorship of St. Paul's, London. He ac- 
 companied the king in his warlike expeditions; 
 and to his sanctity of life and pious prayers, the 
 superstition of the age attributed much of the suc- 
 cess attending the arms of that monarch. His 
 writings were partly theological ; and he appears 
 to have been one of the most enlightened eccle- 
 siastics of his age. He gained great credit by his 
 mathematical works.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 183 
 
 2. Matheoli Perusini iractatus Artis Me- 
 
 morativce, 8°. 1470. [BL Ictj 
 
 This work was often reprinted in subsequent 
 years. 
 
 3. Jacohi Puhlicii Ars Memorativa in- 
 
 cipit feliciter, 4°. p&L IctJ 
 
 4. In 7iova mirahilique ac perfectissima 
 
 Memorise Jacohi Puhlicii, prologus 
 feliciter incipit, 4". [iJL Jct*] 
 
 These two articles are without date, place, or 
 printer's name. Panzer* has arranged No. 3. 
 among the books printed at Cologne, by John 
 Gnldenschaff, but does not assign any date to it. 
 Publicius was the author of Ars conficiendi epis- 
 tolas TulUano more, printed in 1488; and of 
 Artis Oratories Epitom. Ars Epistolaris et Ars 
 Memorise, printed in 1482. It is very proba- 
 ble, then, that tlie article under consideration, was 
 printed before the year 1482, and afterwards re- 
 printed with, the two other tracts of Publicius. 
 Tlie Ars Memorativa seems to have been the 
 fountain from which every successive writer has 
 taken copious draughts. It treats of the airange- 
 
 • Aunales TypograpUici, torn. I., p, 343. eiL Norimh. iTSt-
 
 184 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Of 
 
 ment of places and the combination of images. 
 Several wood-cuts are given, of the most rude and 
 grotesque description, representing the alphabet 
 by symbols taken from diiFerent objects. 
 
 5. Ars 3Iemoraiiva per Johannem Priiss. 
 
 foL Argent. 1488. [ijj. let.] 
 
 6. Petrus Colonia, Ars Memorativa, 4". 
 
 [W. let.] 
 
 No. 6. consists of eight leaves, with several 
 badly executed wood-cuts, evidently the produc- 
 tions of a very early period. It is without date, 
 place, or name of the prmter. The arms of 
 Cologne occupy the whole of the last page; 
 from this circumstance, and from the addition 
 of the author, it may be inferred that the work 
 was printed at Cologne. The address to the 
 reader notices the attempt of Publicins, and ex- 
 presses the author's desire to form a compendious 
 view of the Art of Memory for the use of all 
 persons. There is, of course, but little differ- 
 ence between the schemes of Publicius, and Pe- 
 ter of Cologne. The wood-cuts, which are nu- 
 merous, are interspersed with the letter-press, and 
 are intended to represent images of particular ob- 
 jects; as a carpenter, by a hammer ^ a cobier, 
 ii by a shoe, etc, etc.
 
 ARTIFICIAL WEMORY. 18.^ 
 
 7. Incipit Ars Memoria venerabilis Sal- 
 
 donini Sahodiensis Medicce Artis 
 D act oris Eximii, 4°. Paris. [6L let ♦] 
 
 This article is without date, place, or name 
 of the printer. It is, in fact, a republication of 
 Publicius, with some introductory rule&, which 
 are dehvered in Latin hexameters, aceompanied 
 by a prosaic comment and exposition. Manget, 
 m his Bibliotheca Script or um Medicorum* 
 has the following meagre information respecting 
 this * venerable and illustrious medical Doctor.' 
 * Baldovinus (Sabodie.mis), De eo erstat, Ars 
 viemoricc carmine cum glossis. Varisiis^ in 4°.' 
 
 8. Fcenix Duni Petri Rauenatis Me- 
 morice magistri, A°. Venetiis, 1491. 
 
 9. Memorice Ars quce Phcenix inscribitury 
 
 8". Paris, 1544. 
 
 10. Phcenix sen Artificiosa Memoria CI. 
 
 J. V. D. et militis J>. Petri Raven- 
 iiatis Juris Canonici olim in Pata- 
 vino Gymnasio Professoris celeber- 
 rimi, 4*"^ Vicentice, 1600. 
 
 • Tom. L p. 224. 
 S3
 
 186 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 In this work, [Nos. 8, 9, 10.] the places and 
 images are noticed at large, with various rules for 
 forming, arranging, and combining them. If we 
 would remember, says Peter, any particular cir- 
 cumstances, we must form some vivid imagination 
 of the event, and associate it with the names of 
 some" pretty girls"ofouracquaintance! ! ! Iwould 
 
 ^wish him that is melancholy, (says Burton) to 
 study Cosmus Rosselius, Peter Ravennas, and 
 
 ■ Schenckelius Detectus. 
 
 1 1 . Jacohi Colincei Campani de Memoria 
 
 Arti/iciosa compendiosumopusctdnm. 
 Jmpressit Ascensms, 4". ^Paris'] 1515. 
 Venundatur in Aedihus Asccnsianis. 
 
 12. Nicholcd Chappusii de mente et me- 
 moria lihellusntilissimus, 4*^. \^Paris\ 
 1515. Venundatur ubi impresstis : 
 est in Aedibus Aseensianis. [hi. Jct.] 
 
 The two preceding articles are little more than 
 a repetition of the scheme of Peter of Ravenna, 
 with some observations on the theory of natural 
 memory. They are both beautiful specimens 
 of early typography, and have in the title a large 
 colophon [in wood] representing a room of a 
 printing ofiice, in which are a compositor at work,
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 187 
 
 a press, a man laying on the ink, and another 
 working the press. 
 
 13. Congestorium Artificiosce Memorice 
 Joamiis Romberch de Kyrpse; — opus 
 omnibus Tkeologis, predicatoribiis ; 
 confessoribuSy advocatis, etuotariis; 
 medicis, philosophis ; Arti liberalium 
 professor ibus. Insuper mercatoribus, 
 nuntiis, et tabellariis perfiecessarimn, 
 8°. Veneius,per 3Ielch. kUtessa, 1533. 
 
 [hi let.] 
 
 This work abounds with the most curious wood- 
 cuts ; according to tlie title, it is intended for di- 
 rines, preachers, confessors, advocates, notaries, 
 physicians, philosopliers, and professors, of the 
 liberal arts: it is also very necess-ary for mer- 
 chants, messengers, and amanuensts. The au- 
 thor speaks of natural memory, its seat, etc. and 
 illustrates his observations by the representation 
 of a head, on which the situations of thought, 
 fancy, etc. are laid down with great care. Arter 
 having treated of the necessity and use of places, 
 and images, of visible places and fictitious places ; 
 the author recommends the fixing of certain places 
 upon the walls of the different rooms of a house, 
 monastery, or other place : and, the better to re- 
 member the situation of the places, puts symbols
 
 188 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 there. A wood cut is given with the symbols 
 for figures as hij^h as 30, niauy of which repre- 
 sent very accurately the outline of the figure. The 
 alphabet is represented in the same way by sym- 
 bols ; and, in one instance, entirely by birds of 
 different species. 
 
 In speaking of languages, in order to fix the 
 numbers and cases of nouns in the mind of 
 the pupil, M. Romberch resorts to the fol- 
 lowing expedient. A naked man is to personate 
 the singular number ; ihe nominative case is to be 
 placed on the head of this man, the genitive in 
 his right hand, the dative in his left, the accusa- 
 tive on his breast, the vocative on his middle, and 
 the ablative on his knees. A man clothed gives the 
 plural number, and the cases are to be disposed in 
 the same manner, as on the naked man. Two 
 chapters are devoted to the merchants; in the one, 
 they are instructed to remember the weight and 
 measure of their goods ; and in the other, the debts 
 owing to them, the bills which they have to pay, 
 etc. etc. I'hree chapters are dedicated to gam- 
 ing; one explains tlie application of the art to 
 dice, another to cards, and the last to chess. 
 
 Another edition of Romberch's Congestorium 
 was published at Franckfort, in iGO^, 8°. Xo- 
 dovico Dolci translated this book into- Italian, 
 but gave it a dialogue form j it was printed at 
 ¥enice, iu 8". 1562..
 
 , ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 189 
 
 14. DeMemoria reparanda, migenda, ser- 
 
 vandaque lib. itmis ; et de locali vel ar- 
 tificiosa Memoria lib. alter Cruill. 
 Grataroli, 8°. JRomcc, 1555. 
 
 A prior edition of this treatise was printed at 
 Basle in lo54, with Grataroli's Opuscula, which 
 were all corrected by himself. Many other edi- 
 tions followed, and a translation into English was 
 made by William Fulwod nnder the following 
 title. 
 
 15. T/ic Castel of Memorie : iv herein is 
 contemned the restoring, augment- 
 ing, and conseruinge of the Memo- 
 rie atid Remembrance, tvith the 
 safest remedies, and best precepts 
 thereunto in any icise apperteining : 
 made by Gidielmus Gratarolus JBer- 
 gomatis Doctor of Artes and Phy- 
 sike. Englyshed by William Fid- 
 ivod. The Contentes ivherof ap- 
 pear in the Page next folowing. 
 Imprinted at London in Fleete- 
 streete by William How, dwelling 
 at Temple barre. [bl. let.]
 
 iQO PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 An earlier edition of this extremely rare book 
 is noticed in the Censura Literaria.* After the 
 line in the title of this edition, * The contentes/ 
 etc. there is a cut of the Printer's sign with the 
 motto post tenebras lux. * Printed at London 
 by Rouland Hall, dwellynge in Gutter-lane, at 
 the signe of the Half Egle and the Keye, 1562, 
 12°.' The address to the reader is dated Nov. 
 20, 1562. The date to the edition from which 
 our extracts have been made, is placed at the end 
 of the ' address,' and is Nov. 20, 1573. 
 
 An Epistle * dedicatorie' to Lord Dudley, 
 '^Maister of the Queenes Maiesties horse,' follows 
 the title. This epistle is in verse, very prolix 
 and dull. After a studied eulogy on his patron, 
 Mr. Fulwod enlarges upon the importance of 
 memory, particularly to the Judge, Preacher, 
 Captaine, Marchaunt, Lawyer, and Husband- 
 man, and shrewdly observes. 
 
 For what helps it good bookes to r«ade, 
 
 or noble stories large : 
 Excepte a pcrfecte Meraorie, 
 
 do take thereof the charge ? 
 
 What profits it most worthy thinj 
 
 to see, or else to heare : 
 If that the same come in at the one, 
 
 and out at the other eare? 
 
 Vol. vii, p. 209.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 191 
 
 An address from the translator to the reader, 
 concludes with this sage admonition, lege et per- 
 lege, ne quid temere. In the next place we 
 have, 
 
 THE BOOKES 
 
 Verd'ute. ] 
 
 A Castell stroug I doe present 
 
 well furnished and sure : 
 Munited eke with Arraoure bent 
 
 For euer to endure. 
 
 Which iiitherto long time hath ben 
 
 In (Limbo patrum) hidde, 
 But now at last may here bee scene, 
 
 From daungers men to ridde : 
 
 Procuring them a perfect state,* 
 
 And safe securitie, 
 Wherby they may fynde out the gate 
 
 Of wisedome's lore. For why ? 
 
 Hee that hath lost his Mcmorie, 
 
 By mee may it rcnewe : 
 And hee that wyll it amflifio. 
 
 Shall find instructions trewe. 
 
 And hee that will still keepe the same, 
 
 That it shall not decay : 
 By mee must learne the way to frame, 
 
 And my pr«ccptes obej-. 
 
 • Sapi. 6, 8. and 18. j
 
 192 PRlNCirAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Lo here yee see my full effecte : 
 And that I doe entende 
 
 The secretes tlierof to detect. 
 That thereby wittes may mende. 
 
 Then ludge mee^ 
 As I am worthie. 
 
 The Castel of Memorie is divided into seven 
 chapters. The first ' declareth what memorie 
 is, where it Jiorisheth, how profitable and ne- 
 cessa7'ie it is.' The second * conteineth the 
 chiefe causes wherby the memorie is hurt, with 
 their signes and cures :' and, in treating of moist 
 and cold brains, concerning the * nieates forbid- 
 den the pacient,' there are the following curious 
 directions :' 
 
 " Let them also forbeare Marow (which is in 
 bones) Cranes fleshe, fishe, especially if it be 
 clammy and nourished in diches or holes, colde 
 pot herbes, milke, cheese, especially much, or 
 naughtie : fruites moist and not ripe or often 
 but sometimes they maye eate sharper or tarter 
 nieates, chiefly in the winter, as Garlike, Peni- 
 royall, or Calamint, Capers being watered ; 
 mustard is praised of Pithagoras, they must eate 
 little and speciailye at supper : they must drink 
 no water, except it be sod with hony, or cinna- 
 mon, or some other pleasant spices. They must 
 abstein from ouer mutch sleepe, and not to
 
 AKTlilClAL MEMORY. IQS 
 
 sleepe in the daye time, nor upon the noddle of 
 the head, nor upon to mutch fulnes of meate : 
 let them also take heede of ouer great watch- 
 inges, for it weakeneth the spirite, and resokieth 
 it, and stuffeth the head." 
 
 The third chapter ' sheweth the principall 
 tsndajnages of the memorie in what sorte, so 
 euer tliey bee.' The fourth * telleth likewise 
 the perticuiar helpes of the Memorie.' The 
 fifth * comprehendeth certain best approued and 
 chosen medicinable compounded remedies and 
 presertiatiues greatly encreasing the Memory ;* 
 and containeth a receipt to make ' Pilles that are 
 good for a languishing braine, especially in aged 
 and olde folkes,' "an odoriferous or sweet smell- 
 ing aple for the memorie' — ^ a comforting water 
 or lee, for the washing of a colde and moist 
 head, also it helpedi the Memorie, autl it must 
 be of the ashes of Twigges, or of an oake.'— 
 Another, and another follow. The sixth chap- 
 ter * expresseth Philosnphicall .Judgements, 
 Rules, and PreceplesofRememhraunce; these 
 are twenty iu number; the nineteenth is as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 . " For the recreation of your myude and there- 
 storing of your strengthes, you must not flye to 
 fylthie and dishonest things, but you shall bring it 
 to passe by changing of your studie ; for it is better 
 somewhat to refresh your niynde, then altogether
 
 194 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 to lose it. Yea, also the plaies, pastimes or en- 
 terludes of Christians ought to be sage and ho- 
 nest. Therefore after earneste and graue studies 
 you muste repaire to lighter and easier, as to 
 Histories or Musicall exercises, for it restoreth 
 the strength and norisheth the conuenient reste, 
 and also vertue is of more power after leasure 
 and rest. There be some that had rather play, 
 the which indeede is graunted and permitted, so 
 that the playe bee a play and not an earnest or 
 said thinge, and let it be shorte, honest, without 
 deceite hurt or couetousnes. The Chestes playe 
 (a Treatise whereof I lately translated into Eng- 
 lishe) doth moue and stire up the wit, but in 
 the same is often bestowed to much tyme and 
 studye, the which ought to be better applied. 
 The baule or Tenyce play, doth also profite the 
 hole bodye (But above all the noble exercise of 
 Shooting in the long Bowe is most commenda- 
 ble) walking abroad is good chieflye for the 
 heade ; but it is better to dispute together walk- 
 ing up and downe and mouing the handes. 
 This recreacion of the minde ought not to be 
 daily nor often, and especially it must not be 
 used at the hours or tyme of study." 
 
 The seventh chapter * entreateth in fevve 
 zeoordes of locall or artificiall MemorieJ 
 
 " Artificiall Memorie is a disposyn or placing 
 of sensible thinges in the mynde by imagination,
 
 AKTIFIcrAL MEMORY. 195 
 
 whereunto the naturall memorie hauing respect, is 
 by them admonished, that it may be hable to call 
 to mind more easely and distinctly suche thinges 
 as are to bee remembred : and (as Cicero sayth 
 in hys seconde to Herennius) it .consisteth of 
 places, as it were of waxe or tables, and of 
 images, as of figures and letters. For so it 
 commeth to passe that such thinges, as we haue 
 heard or learned, we reherse agayne, euen as 
 though we read them. Nor it skilleth not 
 muche whether we begynne at the first, or at the 
 mjfie. The places themselves rMiis!; be set in 
 order, for, yf there be a confusion in them, it 
 foloweth of necessitie, that al the reste must be 
 disordred. And it behoueth also that there be 
 many places, that manye thinges maye be placed 
 by the same exercise and practise. Cicero 
 judged that there should be an hundreth in num- 
 ber. Thomas A<juinus thought it good to have 
 mo. [more]. For these places many have 
 searched by diuers and sundry artes. Metro- 
 dorus found oute three hundred and sixtie places 
 of the XII signes in the whiche, the sunne goeth 
 his course : because the Astrologers do deuyde 
 the Zodiacke into so manye degrees. 
 
 " Cicero inuented a certayne familiar house, se- 
 uered or parted into manye places, and he thought 
 it good that we shoulde deuise after euerye fyft« 
 place, either a golden hande or some other dis-
 
 196 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 tinction, wherby the one might be discerned 
 from the Oiher, and also in them to obserue a 
 stfdfaHt and unmonable order, th.-st wee miglit 
 a!vv;jys enter in and go out at the right syde. 
 A'l' idler A'jtiior, not unskillful, fayned places 
 bv certavife iyuing creatures, and deriued their 
 or<!«.r out of the Latyne alphabet, in suche sorte 
 thai euer) one of their names shouloe bcginne 
 with some one of euery- letter : euen as if these 
 vere the names : an Asse, a Beare, a Cat, a 
 Dogge, an Elephant, a Foxe, a Goate, a Horse, 
 tj Ja^e, a Kyte. a Lyou. a Mule, a Nyghtingafc, 
 an Oule, a Partridge, a Quaile, a Rabbet, a 
 Sheepe, a Throstle, a Unicorne, Xystus the Phi- 
 losopher (who wrote of these) Hyena, Zacheus, 
 He deuyded all these into fyue places : into the 
 heade, into the fore feete, into the bealye, into 
 the hynder feete and the tayle, for this order na- 
 ture herself niinistreth, neither can the wit be 
 confounded in counting or reckenning them. 
 Hauing thus gotten then an hundrcth and fyftene 
 places, he graued in them the Images of thinges 
 worlhye of memorie, and also he coraniaunded 
 that many thinges should bee written by the 
 mynde or wit in the face of him that speaketh, 
 in the heares, in the forehead, in the eyes, and 
 so to descend downewarde to the feete. But me 
 thynketh it a verye easye thinge to deinise and 
 Jmmagine not onlve an hundreth but also infinite:
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. IQ? 
 
 places, seeing no man is ignorant of the situation 
 of the citie where he was borne, or in the which 
 he hath long dwelled. 
 
 " Therefore when the mynde entreth in at the 
 gate, whiles it considereth the diuersitie of waves, 
 directing and leading to diners countreyes, and 
 whiles it remembreth frendes houses, pnblike 
 dwellinge places, palaces, or common places of 
 Judgment, it shall fynde out a maruelous number 
 of places. Hereto also it maye imagine great 
 courtes, or places of larger roume, wherein it 
 may deuise as great a number of places as it list- 
 eth, so that euery thing may be written therein 
 that he will haue. 
 
 *' And because the teaching by examples is 
 briefe and effectual], nowe will I put forth some 
 examples, to the end that thereby the matter 
 may be the better perceiued. I will put forth 
 a)i example of tenne, and consequently by the 
 proportion thereof shall be deuised the example 
 of a thousand. 
 
 " And therefore I take or choose a greate and 
 emptie house, to the which you muste not go 
 often but seldome, and appointe or sette the 
 fyrst place which is at the doore, three foot 
 distant from the doore. Let the seconde place 
 be twelve or fyftenne foote distant from that, as 
 for example let there be one corner or angle. 
 Let the thyrd place be distant from the seconde 
 s 3
 
 l^S- PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 even as many or twelve foote, and there may be 
 perchance, another corner, or a middest betwene 
 die first and the second corner. The fourth shall 
 be a corner. The fyft shall be a corner, distant 
 by as miiche. The syxte llkewyse: and' the hall 
 beyng finished, you shall enter into one chamber, 
 and immediately within the doore you shall note 
 or appoynte the seuenthe, and afterwarde, in the 
 fyrst corner of the chamber the eyght, and in the 
 second corner the nynthe, and in the thyrd the 
 tenth with his distaunce. And yf you wyll haue 
 any more places, goe out of the chamber, and 
 so raarke or note the other chambers propor- 
 tionally. 
 
 " But yet remember that the dystaunce whych 
 is geuen is moderate and conuenyent, but yf 
 there be not found so great dystaunce, but a 
 lesser eucn unto eyghte, or to Ipsse euen unto 
 fiue foote, yet should it be tolerable. As con- 
 cernynge the teniple, it ought to be such a one 
 as must not be much frequented, especially of 
 yourself to the ende that you be not confounded 
 or troubled, with the multitude of the fygures or 
 Images. These places ought to be memorable 
 and remoueable with ones hand, for the corners 
 are not places, but fyxed images sette and placed 
 in the corners, uppon the which (euen as upon 
 paper) are painted other fygures, which may he 
 put out euen as letters upon paper. As for
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. Jf)^ 
 
 example, the firste place is marked or known 
 by * * * in setting * * * in his place. The 
 second by asalue boxe, setting there also a salue 
 boxe. Tlie iii by a morter putting it there. The 
 fourth by a pestle. The fyfte by a pair of 
 writing Tables. The sixte by a hares foote» 
 The senenth by a Scarcer. The eight by a 
 bagge. The ninth by a lofe of waxe. The 
 tenth by the Canes of Cassia. And these names 
 must be kepte alwaies in niynd and the places 
 from fine to liue^that the quinaries or fyfte places 
 may alwaies by had in mcmorie. Of the dis- 
 tance there is enough spoken. Yet note tha? 
 you may passe to fine and thirtie, and not be- 
 yonde, leste t'nere should chaunce a negation in 
 the images. 
 
 " And bee it spoken euen likewise of the 
 quantitie as touching the height, that there be 
 not manye of a height, but from fyue eueii unto 
 eleven foote. And let euery fyftic place be 
 marked, as it is sayde of the order. The qualiti« 
 also must be noted, that they be not to light, nor 
 to darke, nor to much frequented. Let us come 
 to the Images which are the ihinges that must be 
 places : the Images whiche bee knowen unto 
 us, ought to be so set in these places with such 
 mouingcs, that by them we may call tliinges to 
 remembraunce. For example, I would remem- 
 ber twentye names^ I will do thus : In the fyrste
 
 SOO PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 place, I will set the Images of Peter, one whom 
 I well knowe, with an * ^ * full of water iu hys 
 hande, the whyche he shall power upon James 
 one also well k no wen unto me : and so by this 
 notable act, I shall remember these twoo, and 
 so place in my remembraunce these twoo names. 
 
 " In the seconde place I wyll put Henrye 
 who is unto mee verye well knowen (for these 
 fygures must be exactly knowen that they maye 
 quickelye come into ones Memorye) who shall 
 put his hande into a Boxe and pull out the salue, 
 and therwilhal to besniyer Steuen, one also 
 whom I do very uell know. 
 
 " In the thyrde place I will set Wylliam, one 
 whome I knowe also, who shall take out of the 
 morter a playster, and shall put it upon Fraunces 
 face : or inuentinge some other mad iestes and 
 toyes, whereby the memorye maye bee confyrmed 
 to beare awaye suche lyke names. 
 
 " And so in lyke manner proceede with the 
 rest.* 
 
 * As the 'original passage has not, here, been literally 
 translated, we shall present our readers with a specimen of 
 Grataroli's Latin. — " Transeanius ad imagines, qua; sunt 
 res collocandic : dobent it;v imagines nobis notae in istis 
 locis collocari cum motibus talibus, ul per eas valeamus 
 memorari. Verbi gratia, volo memorari dc viginti nomi- 
 uibus, sic faciam : in priino loco iniaginem Petri mihi 
 aotissimi locabo, cum urinali in raanu pleno urina quam 
 fundet supcr^Iacobum mihi uotissimum : et ex isto acta
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 201 
 
 " Likewise if I would remember any man 
 and also his acte, I will imagin him and the 
 doyng of his acta; as, if I would remember one 
 eating of iigges, then I will imagine that with a 
 figge, he did some mery or strange thing. 
 
 Grataroli next treats of figures, and gives the 
 five following rules concerning them. 
 
 '*' Thefyrste is that the fygure do mone either 
 to laughter, compassion, or admiracion, for one 
 may soone fynde a figure that styre up and moue 
 the affection of the Soule. 
 
 " An example hereof is this, if I should settc 
 ©r place in the mouthe of a mad Asse, the head 
 of Antonye to be almoste bytten in pieces, the 
 blood to gushe out of him, and that he asketb 
 helpe, and holdynge up his handes cryeth out : 
 for it cannot bee but that when I woulde, I 
 shoulde see him with the eyes of my mynde, and 
 
 Dotabili, honim duorHin memorabor: ctsic duorum nomi- 
 nuin raenioriaiu milii fcceio. In secundo l«co pouaiii Mai- 
 tiiiiim niilii iiotis^imuin (nam opoitet imagines istas esse 
 iiotissinias, at cito in nicnioriani rtcuiTant) qui ponet 
 tligitum sunm in pyxidc ct extrahct nnguentiini, qno - m 
 di'^ito ^oriliciiini un^et ani Ilcnrici niilii notissirai. In 
 /e;^(tf ponani Andieam niihi itidem uotuin, qui cum manu 
 ex mortaiio extrahet cmplastrum quod ponet super faciem 
 ' Frnncisci, vcl alios ridiculos actus fabricando, ex quibus 
 memovia dc talibus nominihus confirmetur. Et ita pari- 
 fonnitcr pioredatnr in aliis." — Gratarolux de Manor ii ; 
 <)Pi St. pp. 66, 67. Kanil. 1554.
 
 202 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 declare or express Antony to him that should ask 
 or enquire for him. 
 
 " Aiiother is, that we should represent eyther 
 the lyke by the like, or by the contrary, or else 
 by the proprietie therof. An example of tbe 
 fyrst is, as if I were about to place the name of 
 Galeae, I should write the name of some other 
 excellent physition, whose authoritie (as neere as 
 lusiy be) is eyther equall or lyttle inferiour. 
 
 " An example of the seconde is, if 1 writ the 
 name of an unlerned physition, if I describe 
 Thersites, by Achilles, and the good for the * 
 euill ; or the foule by the fayre. 
 
 *' An example of the thi/rde is, yf I represent 
 Ouidius Naso, by a great nose : Plato, by large 
 shoulders, Crispus by crysped or curled heares ; 
 and Cicero by Gelasinus. 
 
 " The tkyrde is, that wee accustome our- 
 selues to place thinges, euen from our very 
 youth, and that we encrease with dayly exercise : 
 although that the teaching therof may helpe and 
 profit euen them also that be elder. 
 
 " The habite, the perfectnes and dexteritye 
 (I meane to practyse these thynges) is muche the 
 more, if they doe so place all thynges, whiche 
 they shall either saye or do and also whatsoeuer 
 they heare in communication or talkinge. And 
 they must lykewise paynt and graue the maners, 
 gestures and tymes. For in so doynge they shall
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 205 
 
 ill a sliorte space be notably wel exercised. It 
 profvteth also to playe one with another, and to 
 goe about to excel! hym that shall recyte many 
 thynges, more clearlye, orderlye, and spedely 
 then other. 
 
 " The fourth is that (in euery quinary or 
 fyft number of those thynges that are to be 
 marked) we repeate agayne from the beginninge 
 all such th}niges as are alreadye noted for the 
 repeticion of things coramonlye bryngeth greate 
 utilitie and profyte. 
 
 " The fyfte is, that wee should represent 
 thinges compounde with the scimilitude of simple 
 thinges. As for example. Hee that will re- 
 member this sentence : Cicero contendeth with 
 Hortensius, shall immagine the pease called 
 C/c^7' whiche complayneth of the barenes of the 
 garden : for so doth Cicer resemble Cicero and 
 the Garden called Hart us doth represent Hor- 
 tensius, and the complaynte the contention, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 " Agayne you shall not forget that in placyng 
 or setting of the images or fygurts in their places 
 the thynge is alwayes to bee placed with a merye, 
 a merueylous or cruell acte, or some other unac- 
 customed mauer : for merye, cruel), iniurious, 
 merueylous, excellently fayre, or exceedinglye 
 foule thynges do chaufige and moue the sences, 
 and better styrre uppe the memorye, when
 
 204 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 the myude is muche occupied about suche 
 thinges. 
 
 " Also the images are varyed by the transpo* 
 sition and transumption of the letters : as if I 
 vvoulde remember Nep,* I shall place a pen, 
 and for a tyran, [Tyrant] a rauening wolf. It 
 sufficeth therefore, that we have expressed a me- 
 thode or compendious waye, the whiche whoso- 
 euer foloweth shall easelye (so that exercise be 
 not lackynge) get and attayne the certeine and 
 sure remembrance, of manye and sundrye thinges, 
 as due occasion shall require : but as for the 
 sluggish and ydle, let them slugge and sleepe 
 still, to whome all thinges are displeasing." 
 
 At the conclusion of the seventh chapter ' is 
 put an Epilogue of the foresayde thinges' 
 This epilogue contains quotations from Erasmus, 
 PJato, and Aristotle, and concludes thus : 
 
 " It is verye good also to renewe and rehearse 
 verye often suche thinges as are commytted to 
 the memorye, with an elegant Oration or a sweete 
 songe, as it is heretofore declared, for pleasure 
 is the sauce of thynges, the foode of love, the 
 quickening of the wyt, the nouryshynge of the 
 affection and the strength of the Memorye. 
 
 " The Soule also must be purged from 
 
 * A Horbc so called.
 
 ATtTlIlCIAL MEMORY. 205 
 
 euill thinges, that it may be filled with good 
 thinges. 
 
 " And we must humbly desire of God with a 
 faythfull prayer to grant us his spyryte of wyse- 
 dome and knowledge, for our Lord Jesus 
 Christes sake, to wliome wylh the father and the 
 holy ghost be all honor, laud, and glorye for 
 euer and euer. Amen." 
 
 On the back of the last l*"af, Memory taketh 
 leave of her disciples with the following admo- 
 nition. 
 
 Memorie sayeth. 
 
 To him that would me gladly gaine 
 
 These three precepts sliall not be vaine. 
 
 The first is well to vnderstand 
 
 The tiling that he doth take iu hand. 
 
 The second is the same to piace 
 
 In order good and formed race, 
 
 The thirdo, i^ often to repeat 
 
 The thing that he would not forgeat. 
 
 Adioyning to tliis castell strong, 
 
 Great vcrtue comes cr it be long. 
 
 A French translation of Grataroli's Treatises 
 on the Memory and on Physiognoujv, is extunt; 
 the following is the title as given by De Bure, 
 and it is remarkable that this is the 07t/i/ book 
 which he has admitted imder the head ol Natu- 
 ral and Artificial Memory.
 
 206 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 16. Discours notables des moyens pour 
 
 conserver et augmeiiter la memoire^ 
 
 avec wi Traite de la PJiysionomie 
 
 oil Jiigement de la nature des hom- 
 
 mes tire des traits dii visage, et 
 
 autres parties du corps; trad, dii 
 
 Latiti de Guill. Gratarol, par 
 
 Estienne Cope, 16'', Lyon, 1586. 
 
 Of this book De Bure says, * Fetit Traite 
 
 singulier, et assez recherche.' AndCAiLLEAU 
 
 in his Diet. Bibliog. ' Petit Traite singulier 
 
 et pen commun.' — * Onprefere cette Traduction 
 
 a Voriginal Latin.' 
 
 William Grataroli was born at Berga- 
 mo in Italy, in the year 1510. He was educated 
 at Padua, where he took the degree of Doctor 
 of Physic, and afterwards became Professor of 
 the same science, and gained considerable dis- 
 tinction. But, having embraced the Calvinistic 
 doctrines on the persuasion of Peter Vermilli, he 
 fled from Italy through fear of the inquisition, 
 and retired to Marpurg, where he taught medicine 
 for a year. He was, however, compelled.to leave 
 that place also, and repaired to Basle, in the 
 hope of a better fortune, and where, in fact, he 
 taught and practised his profession with success 
 until May, 1 5QQ>, when he died at the age of 52 
 He was author of a great number of works, som-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 20? 
 
 ©f which are honorable to his talents, and 
 evince a large share of knowledge, but in otliers 
 he shows an attachment to the absurdities of 
 the alchemist, much superstition, and opinions 
 which do not imply a sound judgment. His 
 works, besides those which we have had occasion 
 to mention, were, I. A Treatise on the Preser- 
 vation of the Health of Magistrates, Travel- 
 lers, and Students, in Latin, published at Frank- 
 fort, in 1591, in 12°. — II. Da Vini Natura. 
 Cologne, 1(371, in B°. — III. He was the editor 
 of a collection of various works of Pomponatius : 
 Basle, 1565, in 8°. He had been the pupil of 
 this celebrated man, and adopted some of his 
 notions. — IV. Vera Alchijmice Artisque Me- 
 tallic^ Doctrine, etc.fol. Basil, 156l. — V. De 
 pradictione rerum naturarumque hominum 
 etc. — VI. De Temporum omnimoda mutatione, 
 etc.* 
 
 " It cannot be denied (says Baylc) tlvat Gra- 
 taroli was a public-spirited man, since he not 
 only sought remedies that he might be useful to 
 magistrates, but also those that are proper for all 
 sorts of travellers. He did not forget studious 
 men ; for he endeavoured to enable them to pre- 
 serve their health, and strengthen their memory. 
 A man, who would supply their necessities on 
 
 • Bavle— Diet. Hist. art. GralarolL
 
 €08 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 this account^ would deserve divine honors tit 
 the republic of tetters, in which memory is 
 almost as necessary as life." 
 
 17. AriiJlcioscE MemoricB libellus, antore 
 
 Joann. Spaiigenherg, Herd. 8°» 
 Witeberg, 1570. 
 
 18. Artis 3Iemoria:, seupotius Reminis- 
 
 centicE pars secunda^ Autliore Joh, 
 Sp, Herd. Franco/. 1603. 
 
 This is a very useful mamiil, and is intended 
 principally for tyros in the -dii. It unfolds, by 
 question and answer, the principles of former 
 writers on the jsufcject, and is equally remarkable 
 for perspicuity and brevity, TJiis small tract is 
 included in the Gazophylacium Artis Memorice, 
 published in l6lO, under the title of Erotemata 
 de Arte Memories seu Reminiscent ice, etc, 
 
 J 9. Cosmi Rosselii Thesmirns Artifi- 
 ciosce Memoriae, 4°. Venet. 1574. 
 
 20. Jordano Sruno de nmhris Idearum, 
 
 Paris, 1582. 
 
 21. Artificiosce Memorise Libellus, Au- 
 
 thore Thoma Watsono Oxonictisi,
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOItY. 20L) 
 
 Juris Utriusque studioso. MS. 
 lo83. 
 
 This manuscript is No. 5731 in the Shane 
 Collection, preserved in the Britisii Museum. It 
 is divided into fifteen chapters, the titles of 
 which are, 
 
 1. yJutoris Prologomenon el Methodus, 2. De 
 Memoria et Heminiscentia. 3. De Me- 
 moria Nnturali. 4. De ArtificiGsa Memo- 
 ria. 0. De Dup/ici locorum gene re. G. De 
 Legibas locorum. 7- De Imaginibus. 8. 
 De Imagine rei aimplici. 9- De Imagine 
 rei composita. 10. Qnales esse debeant 
 imagines. 11. De Cathena. 12. De Fer- 
 boruin memoria. \3. De praxi artis me- 
 jHorativae et ofijectornm tarietate. 14. De 
 U til it ate localis memorirt. 15. De Imjus 
 artis acqnisitione, 
 
 ( If I wish to remember five objects, (says Mr. 
 Watson) as a stone, a tree, a fish, a bird, and a 
 horse, I take some spacious wall well-known to 
 me, and make five great divisions ; in the inst, I 
 see a door ; in the second, a window ; in the 
 third, a chest ; in the fourth, an iron book ; in 
 the fifth, a large crack, or fissure. The stone 
 , must be large enough to fill up the whole door- 
 viay ; the tree has taken root, and almost con- 
 t8
 
 210 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ceals the window by its branches ; the iish is ly- 
 ing hid in the chest ; the bird is seizing the iron- 
 hook with his beak, and is endeavouring to tear it 
 from the wall ; the horse has put his tail into the 
 fissure, and is fixed there. By these means, the 
 objects, and their numerical situation are perma- 
 nently remembered: other divisions of a wail 
 are given: one into 3C, and the other into 100 
 compartments; the first is reckoned by eights, 
 and the latter by tens. 
 
 The connection of the different images is con- 
 sidered of great importance, and the following 
 illustration is given. If 1 wish to remember 
 (continues the auihor) a man, a horse, a stone, 
 a fire, a hog, and a tree, 1 must say, that the 
 man finds a hoise and seizes it by the tail ; the 
 horse is biting a large stone, from which fire is 
 elicited by the teeth of the animal; this fire 
 burns a hog, which had approached too near the 
 horse ; the hog, mad with pain, runs against the 
 tree, and overthrows it. 
 
 Anthony Wood, in his Athencc OxonieU' 
 ses* affords some information respecting this 
 author. 
 
 " Thomas Watson, a Londoner born, did 
 spend some time in this University, not in Logic 
 
 Vol. I. col. 262, 263.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 211 
 
 and Philosophy, as he ought to have done; but 
 in the smooth and pleasant studies of poetry and 
 romance, whereby he obtained an honourable 
 name among the students in those faculties. Af- 
 terwards retiring to the metropolis [he] studied 
 the common law at riper years, and for a diver- 
 sion wrote, Echgn in obitum D. Francisci 
 Wals'mgham Esq. aur. Lond. loQO. yJminta, 
 Gaudiu, Loud. 159'2, written in Lat. Hexa- 
 meter, and dedicated to the incomparable Maty 
 Countess of Pembroke, who was a patroness of 
 his studies. He hath written other things of that 
 nature, or strain, ami something pertaniing to 
 pastoral, which I have not yet seen, and was 
 highly valued among ingemous men, in the latter 
 end of Q. Elizabeth." 
 
 22. Jordano Hfuno de Imaginum, et 
 Idearum compositioue ad omnia in- 
 venlmiem, et iMemorice genera tres 
 lihri, 8°. Franc. 1591. 
 
 55. Joan. Mich. Alherti de omnibus in- 
 sreniis ausrendce nwmoria libera 4". 
 13onon. 1591. 
 
 24. F. Philippi Gesvaldi Plutosojia, 
 Patau. 1600.
 
 212 PIllINCIPAL SYSTEMS GF 
 
 25. Ars Remiuiscendi Joan. Bapiista; 
 Porta; Neapolitan i, i'^.Neap. 1602. 
 
 Porta, like the authors aheady noticed, treats 
 of pUices and images ; he also advises the pupil 
 to commit poetry to memory, by forming ideal 
 representations of the language, and placing them 
 in order. He exchanges iigines for symbols, 
 and represents a cipher for a globe ; 1 by a knife ; 
 2 by a sickle ; 3 by a bow ; 4 by a chopper ; 5 
 by a serpent ; 8 by a pair of spectacles ; 9 by a 
 crosier, etc. etc. Letters are also represented 
 by symbols, and two aljihubels are given ; in 
 the one, the letters are formed from vaiious ob- 
 jects ; and in the other, from different positions 
 of the human body. 
 
 John Baptist Porta was a Neapolitan 
 gentleman, who acquired celebrity by his appli- 
 cation to polite literature and the sciences, espe- 
 cially those of mathematics, medicine, and natu- 
 ral history. He often held at liis house meet- 
 ings of literati, when they discussed the chi- 
 merical secrets of magic. The Court of Rome, 
 apprised of the object pursued by this little aca- 
 demy, prohibited him from holding its meetings. 
 Porta then cultivated the Muses, and composed 
 several tragedies and comedies, which were re- 
 ceived with some success. His house was al- 
 ways the retreat of men of letters, and of foreign-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 215 
 
 CIS, who admired the merit of Porta. He died 
 in 15\5, aged 70 years. We are indebted to 
 Porta for the invention of tlie Camera Obscura. 
 His works are, 1. A Treatise ou Natural M;gic. 
 2. A Treatise on Physiognomy. 3. De occultis 
 Litterarum notis ; a treatise on the art of con- 
 cealing our thoughts in writing, or of discover- 
 ing those of others. 4. P hi/tognomonica, seu 
 Methodus cognoscendi ex inspectione vires abdi- 
 tas cujmcumque rei. 5. De Distillationihus,* 
 
 26. F. Hieronymi MarafiotiPoUstinensis 
 Calabri Theolou'i J^e Arte JRemi- 
 niscenticBy per Inca^ et imagines^ ac 
 per 7iotas etjiguras in manibus posi- 
 tas, Q\^Franc. 1602. 
 
 Places and images are the basis of Marafioti's 
 system, but instead of putting tiie images upon 
 the walls of a house, they are placed in different 
 parts of the hands, both on the back and in the 
 palm of the hand. By this mode a high number 
 of places and images is obtained. This tract 
 was reprinted in KJIO, in the Gazuphylaciam 
 Artis Memorice. 
 
 * Diet. Hist. art. Pvrtn.
 
 tI4 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 37. Specimma duo Art is 3femoria ex- 
 hibita Lutetice Parisiorum, 8°. 
 
 Paris, 1607. 
 
 This tract we have not seen, but suspect that 
 it contains an account of Schenckel's experiments 
 in Mnemonics at Paris ; of whose system some 
 accuunt will be found in the next article. 
 
 28. Sckcnckelii 3Ielkodus de Latina 
 
 Lingua intra 6 menses docenda, 
 &\ Arsrerd. 1609. 
 
 29. GazopJiylaciiim Artis Meynori^e ; in 
 quo duohus lihris omnia et singula 
 ea quae ad absolutam hujns cogni- 
 tioneM iuservimd, recondita haheii- 
 tm\ per Lambertum Sc/ienckelium 
 Dusilviiim. His accesserunt de 
 eadeni Arte MemoriiB adkuc 3 
 opnscuJa; quorum 1. Joannis Aus- 
 triaci. 2. Hleronymi 3IuraJioti. 3. 
 Joh. Sp. Herd. 8". Argent. 1610. 
 
 30. Sckeuckclins delectus : sen, Blemoria 
 
 Arfijicialis hactenus occultata ac 
 a multis quamdiu desiderata : nunc
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 215 
 
 primiim in gratiam optimarum ar ■ 
 tmm, ac sapieuticB studiosorum luc' 
 douata, a J. P. G. \Joh. Paep 
 Galhaicus] S. P. D. Heme artem 
 principes et alii ?iobiles, cum Eccle- 
 siastici, turn seculares addidicerunty 
 exercuerunt et tnirijice probarunty 
 ut ex sequent ihus notum Jiet. 8". 
 Lugduni, 1617. 
 
 3 1 . Brevis Delineatio de utilitatihits et. 
 effectihus admirahilihns Artis Me- 
 moricBy 12°. Venet. \circ. 1610.] 
 
 32. 3Iemoria artificialis Lamherti 
 Schenckqly . Omnibus literarum et 
 sapientice amantibus luci donatay 
 vnacum clauicula Illam legendi,mo- 
 diim aperiente. Arnoldi Backhusy 
 Lubece?isiSy 12". Colon. — Agrip. 
 1643. 
 
 No. 28, ochenckel's method of learning the 
 Latin language in six mouths, we have not seen. 
 No. 29, contains Schenckel's Ait of Memory, 
 and very considerable prolegomena which are 
 not inserted in any subsequent reprint. No. SO,
 
 tlQ PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 is Schenckel's system only, without any intro- 
 duction. The two last treatises are perfectly 
 ueless to the uninitiated, on account of the arbi- 
 trary signs and marks employed in them.* No. 
 31, is a reprint of No. 30, wish the addition of a 
 kej/ which explains the arbitrary signs used in the 
 work. It also contains a dedication to the learned 
 Meibomius, and an address to the reader. This, 
 consequently, is the most useful edition for prac- 
 tical purposes. No. 31, is a treatise by Mar- 
 tin Sommer, a contemporary and delegate of 
 SchenckeJ. It is reprinted in No. '29, the 
 Gazophylacium, and forms a part of the intro- 
 duction to that work. 
 
 Lambert, or Lcrmprecht Schenckel, 
 born at Bois-le-Duc, in 1547, was the son of 
 an apothecary and philologist. He went through 
 his academical course at Lyons and Cologne, 
 and afterwards became a teacher of rhetoric, 
 prosody, and gymnastics, at Paris, Antwerp, 
 Malines, and Rouen : not forgetting, as the 
 custom of the age required, to claim his title to 
 scholarship, by writing Latin verses. From 
 
 • The Gazophylacium, liowcver, is valuable on account 
 of the prefatory matter, and tlie thi ec tracts which it con- 
 tains ; more particularly, as the original editions of the 
 tracts are extremely rare. — See Monthly Slaguzine, fer 
 Feb. 1810, for some part of this accovnt.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 417 
 
 tliese, however, he acquired no celebrity propor- 
 tionate to that which was reared on his disco- 
 ▼eries in the Mnemonic Art. The more efFec- 
 tually to propagate these discoveries, he travelled 
 through the Netherlands, Germany, and France ; 
 where his method was inspected by the great, 
 and transmitted from one university to another. 
 Applause followed every where at his heels. 
 Princes and nobles, ecclesiastics and layniCn, 
 alike took soundings of his depth ; and S, ' "i- 
 ckel brought himself through every ordeal, to the 
 astonishment and admiration of his *'idges. The 
 rector of the Sorbonne, at P;in , < g previ- 
 ously made trial of his merits, peuiiitted him to 
 teach his science at the university; and Marillon, 
 Maitre des Requetes, havitig done the same, gave 
 him an exclusive privilege" for practising Mne- 
 monics throughout the French dominions. His 
 auditors were, however, prohibited from com- 
 municating this art to others, under a severe 
 penalty. As his time now became too precious 
 to admit of his making circuits, he delegated this 
 branch of his patent to the licentiate Martin 
 Sommer, and invested him with a regailar diplo- 
 ma, as his plenipotentiary for circulating his art, 
 under certain stipulations, through Germany, 
 France, Italy, Spain, and the neighbouring coun- 
 tries. Sommer now first published a Latin trea- 
 tise on this subject, which he dispersed hi every 
 u
 
 218 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 place he visited. [No. 31.] In this he announces^ 
 himself as commissioned by Schenckel, to in- 
 struct the whole world. 
 
 '* A lawyer, (says he) who has a hundred 
 causes and more to conduct, by the assistance of 
 my Mnemonics, may stamp them so strongly on 
 his memory, that he will know in what wise to 
 answer each client, in any order, and at any 
 hour, with as much precision, as if he had but 
 just perused his brief. And in pleading, he will 
 not only have the evidence and reasonings of his 
 own party, at his fingers' ends, but all the grounds 
 and refutations of his antagonist also ! Let a man 
 go into a library, and read one book after ano- 
 ther, yet shall he be able to write down every 
 sentence of what he has read, many days after at 
 home. The proficient in this science can dictate 
 matters of the most opposite nature, to ten, or 
 thirty writers, alternately. After four weeks' 
 exercise, he will be able to class twenty-five 
 thousand disarranged portraits within the saying 
 of a paternoster : — aye, and he will do this ten 
 times a day, without extraordinary exertion, and 
 with more precision than another, who is igno- 
 rant of the art, can do it in a whole year ! He 
 will no longer stand in need of a library for re- 
 ferring to. This course of study may be com- 
 pleted in nine days, — and an hour's practice 
 daily, will be sufficient : but, when the rules are
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 219 
 
 once acquired, they require but half an liour's 
 exercise daily. Every pupil, who has afterwards 
 well-grounded complaints to allege, shall not 
 only have the premium paid in the first instance, 
 returned to him, but an addition will be made to 
 it. The professor of this art, makes but a short 
 stay in every place. When called upon, he will 
 submit proofs, adduce testimonials from the 
 most eminent characters, and surprise the igno- 
 rant, after four or six lessons, with tlie most in- 
 credible displays." Here follow testimonials from 
 the most celebrated universities. Nine alone are 
 produced from learned men at Leipzic, and pre- 
 cede others from Marpurg, and Frankfort on the 
 Oder. 
 
 On the 29th and 30th of Sept. and on the 1st 
 of Oct. [O. S.] 1602, Schenckel exhibited 
 some specimens of his art at Marpurg in Hesse.* 
 the first experiment took place on the 29th of 
 Sept. at eight o'clock in the morning, before a 
 large assemblage of Divines, Lawyers, Physi- 
 cians, and Philosophers. Schenckel having re- 
 quested some one to dictate 0.5 Latin sentences, 
 he wrote them down with a pen, and numbered 
 ihem. He next read them aloud tv\'ice, with 
 scarcely any pause, and having sat for a short 
 
 * This account of Scbenckel's experiments is taken from 
 his Memoria urtijiciality edited by Buckliusy. (See No. ,"2.)
 
 €20 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS or 
 
 time in silence, he repealed the tvhole, from 
 beginning to end, backwards and forwards, and 
 in any order desired, without the slightest hesita- 
 tion. It happened, however, that once or twice, 
 Schenrkel substituted one word for another, as, 
 lithits for ends; but being reminded of this, he 
 immediately gave the word required. After- 
 wards, any particular number being given, he 
 repeated its appropriate sentence; and, on the 
 first word of a sentence being named, gave the 
 proper number. Schenckel being asked to re- 
 peat 25 doctrinal sentences, replied, that he 
 thought 15 would be sufficient; and, according- 
 ly, that number having been dictated, written 
 down, and read, he united them to the former 25 
 ■entences, and answered to the whole 40 in any 
 order desired. 
 
 On the 30th of Sept. another meeting was 
 held at the house of a medicine-vender, when 
 Jifty words were given and numbered from 1 to 
 50. Schenckel having considered for a short 
 time, repeated the whole from beginning to end, 
 in regular order, — from the last to the first, and 
 in any order required. On any number being 
 given, he named the appropriate word, — and 
 vice-versa. Havnig asked the persons present to 
 double the number of words, some of the literati 
 replied, that he had given sufficient proof of his 
 abilities, and that they had no doubt he would
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 221 
 
 be able to repeat many more words by the same 
 method. A learned auditor expressed his regret 
 to Schenckel, that he was not allowed to repeat 
 Jifty sentences, and a It unci red words, being fully 
 persuaded that he was capable of greater things. 
 
 Schenckel having presented to his auditory 
 two hundred sentences, in which a pupil of his, 
 taken from the last meeting, had been exercised, 
 together with the 40 sentences then given, the 
 pupil, on any number being asked, repeated the 
 appropriate sentence, and vice-versa, to the asto- 
 nishment of all present : — more especially at the 
 unconnected manner in which the numbers were 
 proposed; as 235, 27, 9, 240, 128, 19, iB4, 3, 
 22.3, 2, 170, SQ, 7, etc. etc. This same pupil 
 offered to the assembly 250 written words, which 
 he had learned by some tuition from Schenckel, 
 and by his ow n application. To these 250 words 
 were added 50 others ; and, in a short time, the 
 pupil answered to the whole 300, in the same 
 manner as had been done before by the professor 
 himself. In repeating the sentences, the pupil, 
 once or twice, did not give the words regularly : 
 — when this was intimated to him, he immediate- 
 ly corrected himself, and repeated the words in 
 their appropriate order. 
 
 On the folio wing day, the 1st of October, similar 
 experiments were tried, greatly to the satisfaction 
 of all present i and, in consequence, Schenckel
 
 222 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 received (without asking for it) a certificate of ap- 
 probation, under hand and seal, from a learned 
 physician, and some professors. This certificate 
 concludes by observing, that ' the deponents^ 
 were present at the different examinations, — that 
 there was not a possibility of fraud or collusion — 
 that they thought it but justice, thus, unsolicited, 
 to express their approbation, — and to bear wit- 
 ness to the truth of the facts stated in the docu- 
 ment. 
 
 The student, destitute of oral instruction, can- 
 not expect to reap much benefit from a perusal 
 of Schenckel's system in the Gazophylacium, or 
 in Schenckdius delectus : he might as well seek 
 for a knowledge of Mnemonics, by gazing at 
 the hieroglyphics of an Egyptian obelisk. It is 
 pretty evident that this Gazophylacium was 
 designedly intended as a labyrinihal series : the 
 author indeed closes his labors by confessing, 
 that the work was to be entrusted only to his 
 ■scholars, and referring for further elucidation to 
 oral precepts. The very basis of his art is con- 
 cealed beneath a jumble of signs and abbrevia- 
 tions : thus, sect. 9. d. a sect. 99 ; " videlicet, 
 locus, imago ordo locorum, memoria loci^ ima- 
 gines." And further, in setting forth the most 
 important points, he amuses himself by evinc- 
 ing a multitude of jingling, and unintelligible 
 words.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 2^3 
 
 In proof of this assertion it will be sufficient 
 to give the ki'y from Backhusy's edition of 
 Schenckel : it is a fair specimen of the obstacles 
 which are presented to the student. 
 
 Clauiculaseu cxplicatio libri. 
 
 FALVCO NIVALCA. 
 
 1. Lcf^endum serom a focis barbaeho. 
 t. Alplia & oincgd sunt lasos vitor. 
 .1. Idqae etiam in diet, osi^is oiiiui. 
 
 4. Si in doliibacoui q. itaro cniccos 1 reg. amucoli no« 
 
 habet, sed cygaus in ilia tantnna caballyso. 
 
 5. Hacbaei-etila singula sing. num. denotant. eaedem gemi. 
 
 pi. 
 
 6. Gen. ca. mod. temp. & alia datus obirttas, ex lusncsi 
 
 facile collignntur: 
 
 a amnlube niacoue 
 
 b osias 
 
 c codrot 
 
 d emuliica sibuco. 
 
 e daitnem etnesi. 
 
 f anuiit ecapso. 
 
 g boganiin 
 
 li aseirape: 
 
 i vanosrcpo 
 
 k emnsrodi 
 
 1 asumodi 
 
 in imnis ftice orexes 
 
 n asulugnas. 
 
 e lairomemi 
 
 p dannofc 
 
 q osedesi 
 
 r asiiarpe ' 
 
 6 asucoli 
 
 t bogamiu 
 
 II rogamis 
 
 V usucolae! 
 
 X farreto. 
 
 y amnitios 
 
 I amulucato epecera 
 
 A efucis itcmhtiras. 
 
 C emurtsaca 
 
 D emiioite ocnita istdo 
 
 E parti esenefa 
 
 G. & Gr. facitamo emar- 
 
 go 
 I asuirano bigamie 
 K emuxi fennoca 
 « omutnemi badnufa
 
 224 
 
 PRfNClPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 N. asuremuiii 
 
 P. Omuite galapo. 
 
 R. boitis otcpera. 
 
 T. asuruase hti 
 
 V. aniuiiato euuloni. 
 
 Adi. cimitac onuidas 
 
 ct. foitatica. 
 
 dct. roitato scidos 
 
 diu. poisis euido 
 
 cp. galoti osipcs 
 
 L G. afiicigoli 
 
 Mpli. asucisyiio epatem. 
 
 Or: roitaros 
 
 Ph. csHcisylipo 
 
 {amPHOs enerpo 
 vel 
 laidos esorpo 
 L asutali 
 Rh. Laciros ethere 
 
 <.Ru. satueinis eduro 
 Sy. esisato anysi 
 Ve eimibieui. 
 rbaeieco 
 
 1. < salednaca 
 
 L vanlns 
 
 2. asmigyco. 
 
 3. esuliige onaiite. 
 
 4. asnluga inaido 
 
 aqua?. 
 
 5. esunanii. 
 
 6. falktsc. 
 
 7. lamtor i vcl asiruceso. 
 
 8. txilacu 
 i*. diinroca 
 
 rasulunnas 
 0. < ext'inoia 
 V-cstiUKiito. 
 
 Reliqu* sludiosus Lector facile colliget. 
 
 CLAVICVLA. 
 
 1. Lcgcndum haebraico more. 
 
 2. Prima Sc vltima litcra sunt otiosae. 
 
 3. Idque etiani in dictionibiis diuersis. 
 
 4. Si in vocabulo Q occurat, prutia regula locum non ha- 
 
 bet, sed prinium in taiitnm illasyllaba: cxcmphim sit 
 in asnluga inardo aquas: hoc est Quadrangulus, quas 
 vox nimierum quatcrnarium significat. > 
 
 5. Litera; singulae singnlarcm numerum denotant, easdem 
 
 gcminatae, pluralem, 
 €. Genus, casus, modus, tempus & alia attvibttta ex semn, 
 facile colliguntur.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 
 
 'i'zo 
 
 Literx signijUanf. 
 
 a. Voca1)nIum 
 
 b. Ars 
 €. Ortlo 
 
 d. Cubiculuni 
 
 e. Sententia 
 
 f. Spacium 
 
 g. Imago „ 
 b. Partes ' 
 i. Persona 
 k. Dorsum 
 1. Domus 
 
 in. Exercitinm 
 
 B. Angulus 
 
 0. Meiuoria 
 p. Forma 
 ([. Sedes 
 r.^^Praxis 
 
 s. Locas 
 
 t. Imago 
 
 u. Imago. 
 
 V. Locus 
 
 ■X. Terra 
 
 y. Ostium 
 
 8. Reccptacnlum 
 
 A. Aritbmeticiu 
 
 C. Castrura 
 
 D. Distinctio 
 
 F. Fenestra 
 
 G. Gr. Graminatica 
 
 1. Iniagiiiarius 
 K. Couuexum 
 
 N. Numerus. 
 P. Palatium 
 K. Repetitio 
 S. Fundamentura 
 T. Thesaurus 
 V. Voluntarium 
 Adi. Adiunctum 
 (J). Citatio 
 Diet. Dictatio 
 Din. Diuisio 
 Ep. Epistola. 
 LG. Logicus 
 Mpb. Metaphysicns 
 Or. Oratio 
 Ph. Physicus 
 Pr. Pronomen 
 Prosodia. 
 La. Latus 
 Rh. Rhetorica 
 Ru. Rudimenta 
 Sy. Syntaxis 
 "Ve. Verbum. 
 
 1. Cadela, Cerea, Vina 
 
 2. Cygnus 
 
 3. Triaiiguhis 
 
 4. Quadrangului 
 
 5. IManns 
 
 6. Stella ' 
 
 7. Norma vel SecurU 
 
 8. Calix j; 
 
 9. Coniu. 11 
 
 10. Anulus, Reroex, Circulus.
 
 226 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 The work of Schenckel is a singular produce 
 tion. His development of the art does not con- 
 fine itself to mechanical ideas alone. It sets 
 the technical, symbolical, and logical faculties of 
 the memory, in equal activity ; and requires that 
 its powers should be at once ingenious and per- 
 ceptive. Its acquirement is founded on the asso- 
 ciation of ideas : nor does it fail to call wit and 
 imagination in aid of natural memory. Som- 
 mer's Compendium, consisting of eight sections, 
 was printed for the use of his auditors. After 
 his departure, permission is given to his scholars 
 to communicate their mnemonistic doubts, ob- 
 servations, and discoveries, to each other ; but 
 no one can be present without legalizing himself 
 previously, as one of the initiated, by prescribed 
 signs: and he who fails in this, is excluded as a 
 profaner. 
 
 As Schenckel's work, besides being a literary 
 curiosity, had, of late years, become extremely 
 rare, Dr. Kliiber, in 1804, published a Ger- 
 man translation of it, entitled, * Compendium 
 der Mnenionikf etc' or, * Compendium ofMne' 
 monies, or the Art of Memory, at the beginning 
 of the seventeenth century, by L. Schenchel, 
 and M. Sommer. Truyislatedfrom the Latin, 
 Tenth a preface and remarks, by D. Kluber, 8°. 
 Erlamien. 1804.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 2"27 
 
 33. De Memoria, ac Reminiscentia Dis- 
 cerptafio Sempronii Laucioni Ho- 
 mani ad went em Philosophorum. 
 jyrincipum Platonis et • Aristotelis 
 concinnata. Yerona, 1608. 
 
 In this tract, are exhibited passages of divers 
 authors, respecting the system of local memory as 
 practised among the Greeks. 
 
 34. Joh. Henr. Alstedii Theatrum Scho- 
 
 lasticum, 8°. Herborn. 1610. 
 
 In this work is contained the Gymnasium 
 Mnemonicum, or, treatise on the Art of Me- 
 mory. 
 
 3-5. Jo7i. Henr. Alstedii Si/ sterna Mne- 
 monicum^ 8". Franc. 1610. 
 
 36. Joh. Henr. Alstedii Triga; Cano- 
 
 niece, S°. Franc. 1611. 
 
 The first of these trigae is Artis Mnemonics 
 explicatio. 
 
 37. Simonides redivivns; site Ars Me- 
 moricE et ohlivionis (qnam hodie 
 complures penitus ignorari scripse-
 
 228 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 runt) tahulis expressce^ Authore 
 AdamoBruxio Sproffasilesio Doct. 
 et 3Ied. cut accessit nomenclator 
 mnemonicus ejusdem aufhoris, 4°. 
 Lips. IGIO. 
 
 A gieat part ©f the Simonides Redimvus 
 was reprinted at Leyden, by H. Herdson, in the 
 year l65l, under the title of ^rs Mnemonicaf 
 sive Herdsonus Bruxiatiu ; vel Bruxus Herdso- 
 niatus. To this was appended a treatise in Eng- 
 lish by Herdson, on the same subject, the whole 
 of which may be seen at Nos. 51 and 53. 
 
 After the title of No. 37, there is a wood-cut 
 nearly the size of the page, very tolerably exe- 
 cuted. It represents a tree loaded with fruit, — 
 a man mounted on a ladder plucking the fruit,— 
 a boy in a go-cart, — and a venerable figure (we 
 suppose the magister) looking very attentively at 
 the boy. Underneath the cut, are the following 
 verses : 
 
 Scala riro, currvs puero, quod scipio Acestce ; 
 Hoc memorativa prasiat in arte Lociis. 
 
 Brux has treated the subject in a very compre- 
 hensive manner, and has subjoined a complete 
 nomenclator mnemonicus. He also directed his 
 attention to an art on which much less has been 
 written : — the an ohlivionis, or art oi forgetful-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOUY. 529 
 
 ness, for the acquisition of which very full and 
 minute directions are given. Were this art 
 ' eliminated out of the thick fog in which it is 
 enveloped' many a candidate would be found for 
 the srceet oblivious antidote. In this (says the 
 great moralist) we all resemble one ai;other ; the 
 hero and the sage are, like vulgar mortals, over- 
 burdened by the weight of life ; all shrink from 
 recollection, and all wish for an art of forget~ 
 fulnesS' 
 
 Before we take leave of this interesting art, 
 the ff'liowingy^M d'e'<prit will be given from one 
 of the daily papers,* as it deserves to be rescued 
 from the usual oblivion of such repositories. It 
 was written uu the occasion of some lectures 
 delivered mi Mutnionics in the ciiyof DubUn. 
 
 ** Svi-LABts of ih«i Public Expernnents on 
 the new system of .'tnti-muemonics, to the per- 
 feciionation of whicii the Chevalier de sans Seu- 
 veiiir I'.as devoted the last fifty years of a long life, 
 fully verifying from the toila he has encountered 
 and surmounted iu the pursuit, the assertion of 
 Pope, — - 
 
 " Of all the lessons taught to mortals yet, 
 Tis sure the hardest scieTite—to forget." 
 
 • Morning Chronicle for Nov. 21, 1815, 
 X
 
 230 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 EXPERIMENT I. 
 
 " The Chevalier will produce before the com- 
 pany one of the Members just returned to Par- 
 liament, and whom he shall have instructed not 
 one quarter of an hour ; he will present to him 
 fifty of those Constituents, with whom but a 
 week since he was on the most familiar terms, 
 when to the astonishment of all present it will be 
 found that he does not remember the face of one 
 of them, nor retains the slightest remembrance 
 of the pledges he gave or the promises he uttered, 
 notwithstanding the utmost efforts of the above- 
 iiaentioned fifty promisees to recal them to his re- 
 collection. 
 
 EXPERIMENT II. 
 
 *' The Chevalier will present to the company 
 an elderly Widow Lady, of demure aspect, and 
 sedate appearance ; she shall have a smelling- 
 bottle in one hand and a white handkerchief in 
 the other, which she shall respectively apply to 
 her nose and eyes, and exhibit every other accus- 
 tomed symptom of grief, when, by virtue of ten 
 minutes' influence of the anti-nmemonic system 
 she shall furl her flag of sorrow, pocket her bottle 
 of disconsolation, dance a favourite Irish jig, box 
 the ears of her seven children by her first hus- 
 band, and loudly declare the impossibility of
 
 AllTIFICIAL MEMORY. €31 
 
 managing a large family wiUiout the aid of a 
 second. 
 
 EXPERIMENT III. 
 
 " A certain Viscount has graciously promised 
 to be present at the first exhibition, and to permit 
 the efilvacy of tlie art to be tried upon his recol- 
 lection. Twelve Members of Parliament have 
 likewise consented to attend, and severally to ask 
 him twelve questions upon various topics of 
 foreign and domestic l%licy — Unions — Swamps 
 — Catamarans — Cat-o'-mue-iaih — Beds of roses 
 — Triangles— Italian Music — The Penal Code 
 — The Orders in Council — and, the Emaficipa- 
 tion of the Catholics, — by all which interroga- 
 tories, amounting to 144, he shall evidently ap- 
 pear quite unmoved ; nay, during the whole time 
 he shall smile, and preserve the most inviolable 
 self-complacency. 
 
 EXPERIMENT IV. 
 
 " Many elderly persons having, since the Che- 
 valier's arrival, complained to him of the intole- 
 rable tenacity of the memories of their children 
 and dependants, who actually exhibit symptoms 
 of impatience at the fiftieth or sixtieth repetition 
 of the same story, and aiidaciously either yazon 
 or anticipate the denouement, to the great mor- 
 tification of the nairator. Now the Chevalier
 
 S32 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 invites any one of the said respectable characters 
 to his exhibition, accompanied by seven or eight 
 of his most refractory family hearers, and he 
 engages, that after but ten minutes' instruction,' 
 they shall listen, not merely composedly, but 
 with something like curiosity, to the most thread- 
 bare tales, laugh in all the proper places, an^ 
 exhibit every other symptom of being entertained 
 and gratified. 
 
 EXPERIMENT V. 
 
 " A venerable Pluralist shall be brought for- 
 ward for examination, and shall be asked. What 
 promises he made at his ordination ? — or whether 
 he made any ? — which of his three livings he last 
 visited ? — from what well-known author he tran- 
 scribed his last sermon ? — with how many persons 
 amongst his several flocks he was acquainted r 
 Not one of which interrogatories he shall be able 
 to answer. 
 
 EXPERIMENT VI. 
 
 " The Chevalier will next present to the pub- 
 lic a Lady of cold affections and morbid vanity, 
 inoculated with the love of the great, possessed 
 of a little smartness, which the superficial might 
 mistake for wit, and deeply versed in what is 
 termed knowledge of the world. She shall in 
 early life have given the most unequivocal pro-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 23S 
 
 mise of lier affections to an unpractised heart, 
 that trusted her with all the unlimited credulity 
 of confiding love — 'pledges shall have been niutu- 
 alized, and those solemn assurances reciprocated 
 which indissolubly bind the faithful, and can only 
 be violated by the unprincipled, — ^yet by the in- 
 fluence of this miraculous science, she shall for- 
 get her vows, deny her attachment, and finally 
 marry another person ; and when the parties after- 
 wards meet, no feeling shall arise in her mind 
 but a kind of aukward flutter, nor in his but the 
 most contemptuous indift'erence, 
 
 EXPERIMENT VIT. 
 
 " An eminent Luwycr shall also be produced 
 in testimony of this wonderful ait, who will be 
 found to be proof tven against a Refresher, and 
 this is supposed, with one illustrious exception, 
 to be the 7ie plus ultra of atiti-mnemouic in- 
 fluence, if circumstances did not imperiously 
 prevent, the Chevalier ccnild produce this Exalted 
 Individual, and triumphantly display him as one 
 of the singular prodigies of the anti-muenionic 
 system. It is asserted by a celebrated crauiosco- 
 pist. Dr. Gall, that earli/ friendships make the 
 deepest impression upon the human brain, and 
 are with the greatest difticu'ty effaced — that they 
 linger there, the last and most tenacious inmates, 
 when other recollections have been weakened by 
 x3
 
 234 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 years, or absorbed in selfishness. To triumph 
 over a radicated feeling like this was reserved for 
 that science which can pervade the cottage as 
 well as the palace, and while it steeps the 
 peasants mind in balmy forgetfulness, can equally 
 relieve the Prince from the pangs of reminis- 
 cence. 
 
 " The Chevalier sans Souvenir having thus 
 far developed his plan, will not for the present 
 enter into further details. To the Irish Nation, 
 whose characteristic it is to forgive, he begs 
 leave particularly to recommend his system, which 
 will a!so enable them to forget their manifold 
 wrongs and injuries, and only to remenihtr, that 
 an united f are ever a happi/, and a prosperous, 
 people; that to Religious and Political opinions 
 perfect freedom should be given, if we wish to 
 be happy at home or formidable abroad ; that all 
 irritating retrospects should meige ?w the love of 
 country, and that our endeavours should zealous- 
 ly and exclusively be directed to the Reform of 
 internal abuses, and the extension of public liber- 
 ty, that so the glorious fabric of our Constitution 
 may be enabled to resist the aggression to which 
 it is exposed, and to survive the storm which has 
 made shipwreck of other Governments." 
 
 38. Fr. Alart. Ravellini Ars Memoriir, 
 8". Franc. 1(517.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 235 
 
 The principles of the art according to Ravel- 
 lin, are four ; — place, image, order, and practice 
 or use of the images. He takes houses, cham- 
 bers or rooms, and walls, in the following 
 order ; on entering the room, and standing with 
 the back to the door, the first wall is to be on 
 the left, the second before us, the third on the 
 right, the fourth behind us, and i\\e Ji .or is to be 
 reckoned as the fifth wall. The letter M is to be 
 supposed on each M'all, and to be divided thus : 
 
 3 4 
 
 1 
 2 5 
 
 In each of these divisions a hand is to be placed, 
 consequently 2a places will be gained, if we 
 count one for each of the fingers and the thumb. 
 By taking ten hands and disposing them in the 
 same nianner, fifty places are obtained, and if 
 each wrist be accounted as one place, 60 com- 
 partments will be found. In these compart- 
 ments the image of what is intended to be re- 
 membered is to be placed. Ravel) in afterwards 
 divides a wall by tens, precisely in the same way 
 as Mr. Watson has done in the Shane MS. be- 
 fore noticed. The tract of llaveUin was re- 
 printed in 1678, with five others, in an octavo 
 volume, entitled; Variorum de Arte Memoria 
 Tractatm Sex.
 
 S;>5 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 39. ZHriusfpie Cosmi, innjoris scilicet, et 
 minoris Mefaphysica, Physica et 
 Teclmica Historia, anctore Iloberto 
 Fludd, It-om.fol. Openh. et Franc. 
 1617—1621. 
 
 A few pages of tins curious and expensive 
 work are devoted to an explanation of the author's 
 system of Jtlnenionics. This seems to be an 
 attempt to combine tlie ' Ars Magna' of Lully, 
 Avith the local memory of the antients, as improy- 
 ed by the modern memorists. Some curious 
 wood-cuts accompany the description ; and thers 
 are, on other subjects, many extremely singular 
 prints in this rare work, which are intelligible 
 only to an adept. The portrait alone of Fludd, 
 prefixed to the first volume, has been valued at 
 four guineas ! ! ! 
 
 Robert Fludd, or as he styled himself in 
 Latin, de Jiuctibns, was the second son of Sir 
 Thomas Fludd, Treasurer of War to Queen Eli- 
 zabeth. He was born at Milgate in Kent, in the 
 year 1574, and was educated at St. John's Col- 
 lege, Oxford. He was a very voluminous author 
 in his sect, diving into the farthest profundities, 
 and most mysterious obscurities of the Rosycrucian 
 philosophy ; — and blending in a most extraordi- 
 nary manner, divinity, chemistry, natural philoso-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 237 
 
 pby, and metaphysics. He was made Doctor of 
 Physic in l605, and died 1637. 
 
 40. Apsinis Grccci RJietoris, de 3l€mo- 
 ria liber singularis latine nunc pri- 
 mum vertit. Fed. 3IoreU. Paris, 
 1618. 
 
 41. IncostimabilisArtisMemorandi The- 
 
 smirus, ex variis optimisque autho- 
 rihus dcpromptus, ab Adamo Nau- 
 lio, Rheto. Sacerd. et S. Theol. 
 Doct. 8". Paris. 1618. 
 
 Naulius has compiled a useful and well- 
 arranged digest of the different authors who have 
 written on this subject, and has devoted a chap- 
 ter, treating of the application of the art, to 
 each of the following persons : — divines, con- 
 fessors, lawyers, linguists, rhetoricians, astrolo- 
 gers, geometricians, kings, princes, aud noble 
 travellers. 
 
 42. 3Inemonica ; sive Ars Reminiscen- 
 di : e puris artis naturoequefontihus 
 hausta, ct in ires libros digesta, ac 
 non de Memoria vatiirali fovenda 
 libcUus : e variis doclissimorum ope- 
 ribus, sedulo collectus : jam primuni
 
 238 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 in lucem edita author e Johan. Wil' 
 lisw, SacrcR Theolo. Bacch. 8°. 
 Loud. 1618. 
 
 Tlie treatise de Memoria vaturali fovenda, 
 was reprinted at Frankfort, in the year 1678, 
 wit!i five other tracts, in an octavo volume, en- 
 titied, Variorum de jirie Memoria Tractatus 
 Stx. 'i'he whole work was translated by Leonard 
 Sozvershyj a bookseller * at the Turn-stile, near 
 New-market in Lincoln's Inn Fields,' and printed 
 in (he year 166], with the following title : 
 
 43. Mnemonica; or, the Art of Memo- 
 /7/, dramed out of the pure fountains 
 of art and nattire, digested into 
 three books. Also a phi/sical trea^ 
 tise of cherishing 7iatural Metnory ; 
 diligent/)/ collected out of divers 
 learned mens writings. JBy John 
 Willis, JBatchelour in Divinity. 8". 
 Lo?id. 1661. 
 
 As this book has become rare, and developea 
 many of the principles of the local memory in 
 an apt and ir.tcUigihle n)anner, our extracts will 
 be more copK)iis than usual. 
 
 The worthy translator seems to have been a 
 man of very unassuming manners. The dedica-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 239 
 
 tion, which we recommend all booksellers of the 
 present day to peruse and imitate, has not its 
 parallel for diffidence and humility. 
 
 " TO THE HONORABLE 
 
 " WILLIAM PIERREPOINT, ESQ. 
 
 " Honored Sir, 
 
 " If Lines were capable of Humane affec- 
 tions, these would blush, they are so mean a 
 present to so Illustrious a person ; at least con- 
 scious of their Masters presumption, they would 
 condole his unhappiuess, that had not greater 
 ability to accommodate some more worthy Fabrick 
 to so fair a Frontispiece. The Original compiled 
 by a learned hand, among some vulgar things 
 and trifles, coutainetti very excellent and profit- 
 able matter ; I hope it hath not lost its utility 
 (though Grace) in English. 
 
 " Honored Sir, I fear, good intentions are no 
 sufficient Plea for temerous Enterprises, espe- 
 cially the Undertaker being privie to his own 
 imperfections ; Therefore like a Criminal ac- 
 knowlediiing my vanity in ambitiously affecting 
 things ab(»ve my Sphere, I humbly re-implore 
 your Honors pardon and admittance to be what 
 
 I was before, 
 
 Your Honors most 
 
 humble Servant 
 
 Leonard Sowersby."
 
 240 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 The author, in tht- preface, having compared 
 his Art of Memory to a new-born infant, be- 
 cause it was then first prestnted to the world, 
 proceeds to show the advantages attendant upon 
 it. Ths Jirst book treats o( remembering com- 
 mon affairs, words, phrases, sentences, and 
 speeches, by means of notes and writing 
 
 Having despatched these vulgar ways of me- 
 mory, our author proceeds to speak in the ^rst 
 chapter of the second book, * of remembring 
 without writir,:i;,' and says, " I descend to helps 
 conducing lo the same purpose without Hand- 
 writing, vhich is then most pleasant, when we 
 are destitute of the aid of Paper, Ink, or Table- 
 Books, or when by sume obstacle we are debar- 
 red the free use of them. This consisteth of two 
 operai)or.s, Reposition and Deposition. 
 
 " Reposition is the maimer of charging Me- 
 mory v\ito Note-vvo'thy things; herein it is not 
 to be expected th<>t each particular word of cvrry 
 senterice be rttai!'* d ; but onely, thut the general 
 sence be fasiened m mind. At -all times wijen a 
 man is about to commit any thing in custody to 
 his Memory, first let him study to drown all un- 
 necessary ihvjughts in oblivion, that he may per- 
 fectly Hitend the tlungs he is to learn. * * * * 
 A ready re>nembrance most commonly procced- 
 eth from right understanding the thing in hand; 
 therefore a man must prepare himself diligently,
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 241. 
 
 and so unite the force of his imagination, that ho 
 may as it were engrave and imprint occurrent 
 things in his niemory. Lead doth facily receive 
 impression, because it is tenacious, which Quick' 
 silver cannot admit, by reason of \isFluxibility : 
 In like manner fleeting inconstant minds continu- 
 ally hurried into new & strange cogitations, is far 
 from gathering fruit by any thing heard. The 
 method of a speech is chiefly to be observed, re- 
 garding seriously what is the general subject 
 thereof; Secondly, the greater parts, and with 
 what Logical Arguments each part is handled ; 
 the perfect Mtthod of a speech doth much con- 
 duce to remember the whole ; or if the Contex- 
 ture thereof be inartiflcial, imperfect, and unsa- 
 tisfactory, comprehending many things forcibly 
 applied, rejecting things of a like kind, yet a 
 strong Memory will retain the same by observa- 
 tion of the absurdities and rude Artifice of the 
 whole. 
 
 " Deposition is when we recollect things com- 
 mitted to memory; and having transcribed or 
 transacted them, discharge our memories of them, 
 which is alwayes to be practised at the first 
 opportunity : Things charged in Memory by 
 day, are to be deposited at least before sleep, if 
 not sooner ; things charged by night, are to be 
 deposited immediately after sleep, that the mind 
 be no longer burthened than is convenient, and
 
 24^ PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 that things negligently laid up in mind, be not 
 forgotten, Writing being the faithfullest Guar- 
 dian of Memorandums. If in dis-burthening 
 your Memory, something charged happen to be 
 forgotten, shut your eyes, that no external obiect 
 may divert your mind, and try to recall it by im- 
 portunate scrutiny ; which operation may be 
 called Revocation, and is an Art that by help of 
 certain Rules teacheth the investigation of things 
 lapsed out of memory. 
 
 " To conclude, Deposition, or discharging 
 things committed to mind, is not unlike expung- 
 ing writing out of Table- Books : If therefore 
 there be any Art of Oblivion (as some affirm) it 
 may be properly referred hither. So much in 
 general ; now to explicate the particular species 
 thereof.'* 
 
 The second chapter treats of * remembring by 
 certain verses purposely born in mind,' the third 
 * of remembering by extempore verses,' and the 
 fourth ' of exonerating things charged on memo- 
 ry ex tempore.' The manner of remensbering 
 by verses already composed, says Mr. Willis, is 
 when a man doth excogitate or rt tain remarkable 
 things by repetition of verses provided to that 
 purpose. Suppose an attorney, be to wait upon 
 Judges riding the Circuits from one County to 
 another, it may be vvorth his labour to repeat 
 these verses at leaving his lodging, lest he forget
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. ^43 
 
 some necessary thing, which we may imagine 
 formerly framed by him to this end. 
 
 Scalpellum, calami, comttgraphiumq; libcUi, 
 Charta, pugillares, vapilalia, ceia, aigiUum, 
 Sic aepiJe, gla<liu.s, cultellus, pu^io, burssu, 
 Muccinium, indtniumq ; monilia, penula , pecten 
 Fascia cruralis, cruralia, dactylethece. 
 
 These useful hexameters are thus done into 
 English, by the worthy Mr. Sowersby. 
 
 Pen-knife, Quills, Ink-horn, Book, Paper, Table-Book 
 
 Caps ; Take 
 Wax, Seal and Slippers, Swoni, Knife and Dagger, safe 
 
 make 
 Purse, handkerchiefs, Shirts, Rings, Coat, and^ for your 
 
 own sake, 
 Combs, Gai-ters, Stockius, XJloves. 
 
 The following memorial verses for a traveller, 
 from FiTz Herbert's Husbandry, will 
 form a suitable companion to those of Mr. 
 Willis. They are hexameters, but were by -the 
 Printer jumbled into prose, and have been res- 
 tored by a correspondent in the Gentleman^s 
 Magazine foj- October 1767, vol. xxxvii. 
 p. 487. 
 
 Purse, dirk,* cloak, nightcap, kerchief, slioeing-hom, 
 bugetjt and shoes ; 
 
 • Dirk is a word of the same age. Diigger will not 
 scan quite so well, 
 t Bu"<it, budget.
 
 24* PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Ot 
 
 Spear, nails, hood, halter, sadle-cloth, spurs, hat, wi thv 
 
 horse comb : 
 Bow, arrow, sword, buckler, horn, 'brush, gloves, string, 
 
 and thy bracer ; 
 Pen, paper, ink, parchment, red wax, poms,* books, then 
 
 remember : 
 Pe-i-knife, comb, thimble, needle, thread, point, lest that 
 
 thy girUi break j 
 Bodkin, ki.ife, Iingel,t give tljy horse meat : see he be 
 
 stowed well. 
 Make merry, sing an thou cansty.take heed to thy geer, that 
 
 thou lose none. 
 
 Having recommended the carpenter to apply 
 himself to the Muses and register his tools in the 
 day-book of Parnassus, Mr. Willis introduces 
 the following verses composed by himself. 
 
 ilN? quisquid^ eujus? cut? qtio? qvibus? muxilijs? tur? 
 Quemodo? circa quid? quulis? quantum? ex, in eta 9U0? 
 Quamdiu'i ubi? quandol quotiesl quotufUxl quotetundtl 
 
 These quiddities are thus translated by Mr. 
 Sowersby for the benefit of the English reader, 
 and more particularly for the ladies, whose natu- 
 ral curiosity might well be excited by so formid- 
 able a list of quaeres. 
 
 * Poms, perfumed wash-balln, pf^waniii <«. 
 
 * Lingel, an awl.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. '245 
 
 If? who? what? whose? to what? whether? why? about 
 
 what ? 
 How? what fashion? how much? by, of, in, and from what ? 
 'How long? how often ? how manifold ? whence catne that? 
 Where, when, how many ? 
 
 *' These Verses (craving the Readers pardon 
 for the rugged iiess) contain twenty two Questions 
 of excellent use to invent, retain, as also to recall 
 to minde things of great concernnjent and worthy 
 memory in urgent affairs. 
 
 # * # * 
 
 The most curious and interesting part of these 
 " drainings out of the pure fountains of art and 
 nature," is to be found in the third book ; a large 
 proportion of which we have reprinted. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 ** Repositories, 
 
 " The Art of Memory, which we now treat 
 of consisteth of Ideas, and places, wherein we 
 will first handle the Repo!>ition of Ideals, and 
 afterward their Deposition. 
 
 " Reposition of Ideas is, when things to be 
 
 remembred, are charged upon Memory h\ Idea's, 
 
 disposed in certain places of a Repository ; but 
 
 before 1 discend to the manner of Reposition, it 
 
 Y 3
 
 846 PRINCIPAL STSTKMS OF 
 
 is necessary for better explanation, to speak of JK«- 
 positories, Places, and Idea's in distinct chapters. 
 ** A Reposiiori/ is an imaginary fabrick, fan- 
 cied Artificially, built of hewen stone, ia form of 
 a Theaf^er, the form whereof followeth ; suppose 
 the Edifice to be twelve yards in length within 
 the walls, in breadth six yards, and in height seven 
 yards, the ruof thereof flat, leaded above, and 
 pargetted underneath, lying wholly open to view, 
 without any wall on that side supposed next us : 
 Let there be imagined a Stage of smooth gray 
 Marble, even and variegated with a party colour- 
 ed border, which Stage is to be extended over 
 the whole length and breadth of the building, 
 and raised a yard high above the Level of the 
 ground on which the said Edifice is erected : Let 
 all the walls, that is, the opposite wall, & two 
 ends ba wainscotted with Cj/presse boards, so 
 artificially plained and glewed, that the Joynts be 
 indiscernahle ; suppose also a Groove or Gutter 
 cut in the middle of the Marble Stage, three 
 inches broad, extended from the opposite wall to 
 the hither side of the Stage, whereby it is exactly 
 divided into two equal parts, and that upon the 
 further end of the said Groove, therr is erreared 
 a Column, a foot and half thick, arising up to 
 the Roof of the building, almost touching the 
 opposite wall, and deviding it iuto two equal 
 parts, as the Groove divideth the Stage ; so that
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 247 
 
 by the Groove, and the Pillar, the ^hole RepO' 
 sHory is parted in twain, and consisteth of two 
 Rooms, siding each other, each of them being 
 six yards long, six yards broad, and six yards 
 high. For the better understan»ling this inven- 
 tion, I liave caused a J'j/pe of the Repository to 
 be here dehneated, the explanation whereof im- 
 mediately followeth."* 
 
 • That nothing might be wanting to ehicidate tliis cu- 
 rious description, we have given a fac-simile of the original 
 we^d'Cut. See p. 348.
 
 248 
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 O ^
 
 AKTIFICIAL MEMORY. 249 
 
 " The letters, a, b, c, d, shew the length of the 
 edifice, a, c, b, d, the height, a, e, b, f, the 
 height of the stage, g, i, k, k, are boundaries of 
 the opposite wall, e, c, i, g, the side wall upon 
 the left hand, h, k, d,f, the side wall of the right 
 hand, c, I, m, d, design the Roof, g, i, n, p, the 
 opposite wall of the first Room, e, g, o, p, the 
 stage of the first Room, r, q, k, k, the opposite 
 wall of the second room, s, r, h,f, the stage of 
 the second room, n, o, the pillar dividing the 
 opposite wall, o, p, the groove wrought into the 
 $tage. 
 
 " A Repositori/ according to this fashion, is to 
 be represented before the tyes of our minde, 
 wheresoever we are, as oft as we intend to prac- 
 tise this Art ; supposing ourselves to stand about 
 two yards distant, against the midst thereof. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 " Of Places, 
 
 " A Place (as to our consideration) is an apt 
 space in a Repositori/, designed for reception of 
 idea$. 
 
 " There are onely two places in every reposi' 
 ^ory uf equal fsrui and magnitude, that is the
 
 250 PRINCIPAL SYSTEM^ OF 
 
 twe rooms of eacii repositaii/ determinated as 
 aforesaid by the pilar air(i groove. 
 
 ** That place is .-^aui io b the former, which 
 is on the right luuid of the repository/, that 
 which IS on the left hand, the latter ; that part 
 of the repository/ is said to be on the right hand, 
 which is opposite to the left hand of a man 
 standing against the middle of itie repository, 
 that on the ieft hand which is opposite to the 
 right. 
 
 " Thus in the scheme exhibited in the former 
 chapter, tlie letters, g, i, n, o, demonstrate the 
 opposite wall of the right hand part, or first 
 place or room of the repository, and the letters, 
 e, g, 0, p, the stage thereof ; so r, q, k, h, are 
 indices of the opposite wall of the left hand part, 
 or second place or room of the repository, and 
 s, r, h,J\ the stage of the same. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 " Of Idea's in general. 
 
 " An idea is a visible representation of 
 things to be rememhred, framed by a strong 
 imagination, by help whereof the minde by re- 
 flexion calleth to memory, together with the idea, 
 the thing represented. Idea's are to be vested
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOKY. S51 
 
 with their proper circumstances, according as 
 their natures require, for like as tvritings, the 
 fairer they are, are more facilly read ; so ideas, 
 the more aptly they are conceived, according to 
 the exigency of their nature, are more speedily 
 recalled to minde ; and also consequently the 
 things by them signified. Motion is to be attri- 
 buted to ideas of moveable things; quiet to 
 ideas of quiet things, and good or evil savours, 
 to ideas representing things so qualified. Exam- 
 ples of moveable idea's, are artificers at work in 
 their shops, women dauncing, trees shaken by 
 the wind, water running from cocks, and such 
 like. Idea's of quiet things, are henns laying in 
 their ne^ts, thieves lurking under bushes, &c. 
 Idea's to which sound is ascribed, are a lion roar- 
 ing, a bell ringing, whistling, rnuruiure of trees, 
 a quirister singing, a huntsman hollowing, &c. 
 Moreover, if perfume, burning in a chafing-dish, 
 be used for an idea, a sweet and pleasant odour 
 must be attributed thereto, on the contrary to 
 vaults under ground, a filthy, unwholesome stink, 
 is to be assigned ; so idea's of merry men, require 
 cheerfulness of countenance, of sicknien, pale- 
 ness and sadnes:>e. After tbis manner idea's of 
 edifices, macliines, aud all artificial things whatso- 
 ever, oughi to be signalised ;^ proportion of form, 
 and splendour of colours, must be attributed to 
 pictures, grace and livelinesse of letters, to
 
 252 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 writings, glory and excellency of workmanship, 
 to engravings; finally, every idea must have 
 such illustration as may render it most notable 
 and conspicuous, and seem principally coherent 
 to its nature. 
 
 " But before I proceed further, it is expedient 
 to take into consideration, the common affection 
 of ideas, their species shall succeed after, in a 
 more proper place. 
 
 The common affections of idea's are three : 
 quantity, position, and colour. 
 
 CHAP. IV, 
 
 " Of the Quantitie of Idea's. 
 
 "An idea in respect oi quantity, is either 
 equal, greater, or lesser then the thing repre- 
 sented. 
 
 " An equal idea is, when the thing repre- 
 sented, is bestowed in a place of the repository, 
 in its proper and due magnitude, as being neither 
 too great to be contained therein, nor so small it 
 cannot be discerned by one standing before the 
 repository; such are chairs, pictures, tables, 
 beds, heaps of stone, piles of wood, two comba- 
 tants in a single duel, and the like. 
 
 " An augmented, or greater idea, is when the 
 thing to be remembred, is increased to a multi-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 253 
 
 tude, that it may be better viewed at a distance, 
 which else being small, would not fall under 
 cognizance ; as if the tlwng to be deposited in 
 the repository, were a penny, a pearl, a grain of 
 mustard-seed, or a spider, which are so, small, 
 that disposed in a room of the repository, they 
 escape the sight of a man standing before the 
 repository : in such cases, instead of one penny, 
 imagine a heap of pence new coined ; instead of 
 one pearl, a multitude of pearls ; instead of one 
 grain of mustard-seed, fancy eertaiv bushels 
 scattered about the stage ; and ' for ' one spider, 
 suppose a multitude creeping about the opposite 
 wall. 
 
 " A contracted or lesser idea is, when the thin^ 
 to be remembered is so great, that it cannot be 
 comprehended in its proper natural quantity, 
 within such narrow limits of a room of a reposi- 
 tory, and is therefore imagined to be pourtrayed 
 with elegant lively colours, in a picture fixed to 
 the opposite wall. Thus space of places how 
 far soever distant, and all great things, may be 
 facilely represented in a picture : as if the thing 
 to be remembred were a battel, a triumphant 
 spectacle, hunting or hawking through woods 
 and groves, a naval conflict, large territories, 
 castles, a mountain, or church, &c. whose idea's 
 cannot be contained in the memorial places, un- 
 less contracted, and aptly and artificially com-
 
 254 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 prized in a picture, conceited by imagination 
 hanging against the opposite wall, that so it may 
 be fully comprehended. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 ^* Of the Position of Idea's. 
 
 '* Let the position of every idea be such as in 
 vulgar use doth most commonly appertain to the 
 thing signified ; let the ideas of things usually 
 hanged against a wall, be so disposed in the re- 
 pository, as musical instruments, arms, looking- 
 glasses, pictures, brushes, written tables, &c. 
 Such things as are customarily fastened to, or in 
 a wall, imagine them accommodated in the re- 
 pository in like manner, as title pages of books 
 pasted against the pillar, proclamations, or 
 printed pages nailed to the wall, funeral-stream- 
 ers, or pendants, in the higher part of the oppo- 
 site wall, as you see in churches : such things as 
 are commonly set upon shelves, fancy them so 
 placed in the repository ; as vessels of gold, sil- 
 ver, glasses, books, mercery wares, &c. Such 
 things as are usually placed on a table, conceive 
 them so marshalled in the repository, as victuals, 
 sums of money, table-boards, &c. such things 
 as Jye, or are any ways situate on grounc^ must
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 255 
 
 be so placed in the repositoi-y, as heaps of wheat, 
 a cradle, chest, table, living creatures, whether 
 standing, sitting, or l^ing, &c. Such things as 
 are frequently under ground, are to be supposed 
 under the marble-stage ; for though they escape 
 the eye of a man standing before the repository, 
 yet they cannot be concealed from the eyes of his 
 mind, which are only exercised in this matter ; 
 of this sort are graves, wells, wine-cellars, met- 
 taline-mines, subterranean passages, through 
 which streams have their course, as blood in the 
 veins, &c. Like method is to be observed in 
 site and position of all other things 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 ** Of the Colours of Repositories and Idea's. 
 
 " Here you are to be admonished, that 
 though every repository is supposed to be uni- 
 form in building ; yet they are distinguished from 
 one another by tiie pillar in the middle of every 
 repository, which nmst be imagined of several 
 colours ; as if you use ten, that which you design 
 for the first, must be conceived to have a golden 
 pillar; the second a pillar of silver; the third 
 of black stone ; the fourth of blew stone ; the 
 lift of red stone ; the si\th of yellow stone ; the
 
 Q56 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 seyenth of green stone ; the eighth of purple 
 stone, the ninth of white stone, the tenth of ci- 
 namon colour. New for distinction sake, gold 
 is called the colour of the first repository ; silver 
 the colour of the second repository ; black of 
 the third repository ; and so successively as be- 
 fore. If you use more than ten repositories, you 
 must repeat the same coloirs over again, as be- 
 fore; so that the eleventh is imagined to have a 
 golden pillar, the twelfth a silver pillar, the thir- 
 teenth a black pillar, th^^ fourteenth a blew pil- 
 lar, and so the rest in ocder. After the same 
 manner every idea must be conceived cloathed, 
 adorned, or some way illustrated with the pro- 
 per colour of the repository, wherein it is ima- 
 gined to be placed. Take an example or two 
 for better explanation : suppose a saylor in a 
 canvase suit be retained for an idea in the first 
 repository, { represent him standing there with 
 a golden chain over his shoulder like a belt ; if 
 n tlie second , imagine he weareth a silver chain 
 iabout his neck, with a whistle fastened thereto : 
 *f in the third, that he hath black boots on his 
 legs : if in the fourth, that he hath a blew skarf 
 on his arm, tyed in a rose-not : if in the fifth, 
 that he wears a Red Monmouth Cap on his 
 head : if in the sixth, that he swaggerelh with a 
 yellow feather in his cap : if in the seventh, that 
 he hath a green silk garter on his right leg : if in
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 257 
 
 the eighth, that his canvase coat is imbellished 
 "with a border of purple velvet : if in the ninth, 
 tliat his neck is beautified with a very white 
 orient pear! ; if in the tenth, that he hath a pair 
 of cinnamon coloured breeches. 
 
 " Howbeit, if the idea of its own nature be any 
 ways rehited to tlie colour of its repository, 
 wliereby it may be presently understood to have 
 the colour thereof, it will need no other attribu- 
 tion : for example, if a mayor of a city, (who in 
 regard of his office is dignified with a purple 
 gown, and gold chain) be placed as an idea in the 
 first or fift repo<>itori/, there will be no need of 
 attribution of colour, because the golden chain 
 doth manifestly represent the colour of the first 
 repository, the purple gown of the colour of the 
 fift. In Uke sort, if a black bull be placed as an 
 idea in either room of the first repository , his 
 horns must be conceived gilded with gold ; if in 
 the second, with silver ; if in the third, black, 
 being the proper colour of that repository, ex- 
 cludeth any other addition : if in the fourth, let 
 him be decked with a chaplet of the blew flowers; 
 if in the fift, with a garland of red roses. See. 
 So a picture imagined to be painted on the op- 
 posite wall of the first repository y must be illus- 
 trated w'iih gold in some convenient place; if in 
 the opposite wall of the second repositorijj with 
 silver ; of the third, with black, &,c. 
 z3
 
 258 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " This attribution of a repositories colour, is of 
 marvellous use, bolh to keep in mind the idea's 
 themselves, as also their order ; hereby the mind 
 re-perusing ideas formerly bestowed, hath al- 
 wayes some certainty to guide itself, and recol- 
 lect any idea at present latent ; because it's un- 
 questionable, that the missing idea is either 
 wholly, or at least in part, illustrated with the 
 proper colour of its repository. 
 
 " Moreover, in attributing a repositories colour 
 to an idea, (of it self not partaking thereof) you 
 musi; be careful that the colour of the repository 
 be accommodated to the most eminent part of 
 the idea, or as near as may be : if the history of 
 the prophet Jonah thrown into the sea by mari- 
 ners, be used as an idea, it mu-)t be represented 
 in -a picture according to the third chapter pre- 
 ceding ; in which, though the whale, sea, ship, 
 and land are to be poui trayed, yet the effigies of 
 J^owaA himself is the most remarkable part of the 
 picture, because Jonah is of the history there 
 painted: if therefore this story be to be dej osited 
 in the first repository, let the border of his gown 
 be supposed of gold ; if in the second, of silver ; 
 if in the thud, let the gown be fancied black ; if 
 in the fourth, blew, t^c. so the top of a heap of 
 wheat is the most ct)nspicu()us part ; therefore 
 if a heap of wheat be placer! in the first reposi' 
 tory, imagine a golden streamer two foot long,
 
 AETIFICIAL MEMORY. 259 
 
 fixed In the top of the heap ; if in the second 
 
 repository^ let the streamer he silv. r ; if in the 
 third, black ; if in the fourth, blew, Sd'. 
 
 " Thus much may suffice for common affec- 
 tions of ideas, in quantity, position, and colour ; 
 their species follow. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 " Of Direct Idea's. 
 
 " An idea is simple or compound : a simple 
 idea is uniform, and is fourfold, direct, relative, 
 fictitious^ and written. 
 
 " A direct idea is when a visible thing, or con- 
 ceived under a visible form, is bestowed in the 
 repository, according to the same form, under 
 which it is naturally apprehended : so a goat is 
 the direct idea of a goat ; a rhinocerot of a 
 rhinocerot ; a peacock, of a peacock ; a dove of 
 a dove. Tims a majc stical man adorned with a 
 scepter, iipperial diadem and robe, is the idea 
 of a king : a person arrayed in academical habit, 
 of a schoUar ; an ancient woman in mourning 
 weeds, weeping and wiping her face with an 
 handkerchief, of a widow : a virgin apparelled 
 like a nun, of a nun : a satyr, as the poets de- 
 »cribe ihem, of a satyr : so a temple is the direct 
 idea of a temple, a book of a booke, a bed of a
 
 260 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 bed, a shealh of a sheath, an image of an image, 
 a picture of a picture, an epistle of an epistle, a 
 bond sealed, of a bond : so good angels and spi- 
 rits, though they be incorporeal and invisible, 
 (seeing they are commonly conceived under visi- 
 ble forms) may be reposited as the otlier. To 
 conclude, the minde of man doth naturally and 
 immediately present direct idea's of all visible 
 thiug3, or such as are conceived under a visible 
 form, that it is in vain to excogitate any, but ra- 
 ther use those diat offer themselves. If a man 
 he^rs the relation of a naval battel, doth not he 
 presently seem to behold the sea, ships, smoke 
 of great ordnance, and other things obvious in 
 such matters. If speech be made of mustering 
 an ar?ny, doth not the hearer form in his minde 
 the effigies of the field, replenished with soalders 
 marching in military postures No precept in 
 this kind is delivered, which nature it self hath: 
 not dictated ; but onely to imprint these idea'^ 
 more dei^ply in meniory, we bestow them me- 
 thodically ni some place, lest otherwise they be 
 forgotten through light apprehension. To ex- 
 plain this more evidently, I will use an ex- 
 ample. 
 
 " Jin Example of remembring a History. 
 
 " Diogenes the Cynick entering Plato's hall^ 
 when he saw the table covered with a rich car-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMaHY. 2(>1 
 
 pet, the shelves glittering with silver, gilt cups, 
 vessels, and other sumptuous furniture, laid hold 
 of the carpet with all his might, threw it to the 
 ground, and trod thereon with his feet, saying, 
 / tread upon Plato's pride : to whom Plato re- 
 plied, But with greater pride. 
 
 " The idea of this story is not so great, but that 
 it may admit reposition in its equal quantity : 
 therefore I suppose in the place of the repository 
 where it is to be bestowed, that there is a table 
 covered with a rich carpet, which a sordid fellow 
 in beggarly raiment, throws on the ground, a grave 
 man clothed in honest sober apparel looking on. 
 The attribution of the colour of the repository is 
 not to be forgotten : if therefore it be the first 
 repository in which this idea is to be placed, I 
 imagine the carpet to be imbellished with a fringe 
 or border of gold : if in the second, of silver : if 
 in the third, of black : if in the fourth, of blew, 
 and so forth in the rest. 
 
 " An example of a Sentence to be remembredy 
 the Subject being visible. 
 
 " An ant is a small insect, the coldestand dryest 
 of all creatures, and therefore the wisest ; for 
 cold and dry do chiefly contribute to wisdom. 
 The idea of this sentence ought to be augment- 
 ed ; for the magnitude of an ant is so inconsi-
 
 263 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 derable, that being bestowed in a memorial 
 place, it escapeth sight : therefore I suppose an 
 tfnMieap in the middle stage of the memorial- 
 place, seeming almost black with antSj swarm- 
 ing hither and thither ; as for assignation of co- 
 lour if this idea be placed in the third Repository , 
 the colour of the Repository j is sufficient!}' noted 
 by the blackness of the ants; if in the seventh, 
 by the greenness of the a«^-hill ; so that there 
 needeth no addition of colour, if placed in the 
 third or seventh Repository : But if it be designed 
 to the first Repository, 'et a triangular golden 
 streamer be supposed fixed in the an?-hill, a foot 
 high; if in the second, a silver streamer ; if in 
 the fourth, a streamer of blew silk ; if in the 
 fifth, of red ; if in the sixt, of yellow ; if in the 
 eighth, of purple ; if in the ninth, of white ; if 
 in the tenth, of cinnamon colour. 
 
 " All Histories, Actions, F.ibles, common 
 Affairs ; all visible things, or conceived under a 
 visible form ; finally, All sentences whose subject 
 is visible, may be disposed in Repositories by Di- 
 rect Ideas, in equal, augmented or contracted 
 quantity." • 
 
 Chap. vlii. and ix. treat of relative and ficti- 
 tious ideas. Chap. x. of written Ideas, and chap, 
 xi. of c()n)j)ound Ideas. 
 
 [n chap. xii. Mr. Willis gives the following 
 rules for the * choice of ideas.'
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 9.63 
 
 " Rule 1. All Histories, Actions, Fables, 
 Apologies, common businesses, visible things, or 
 conceived under a visible form, all sentences 
 whose subject or matter is visible, and without 
 any dependent written illustration, ought to be 
 laid up in the Repositories by a Direct Idea, in 
 quantity equal, augmented or contracted. Cap. I. 
 
 " Rule 2. All Histories, Actions, Fables, 
 Apologies, Morals and Similyes, remarkable for 
 some coherent Verses or Writings, as all Epi- 
 grams, Epitaphs, Anagrams and Impresses are 
 generally to be expressed by a compound Idea, 
 consisting of a Direct and Scriptile, Cap. 2. 
 
 " Rule 3. All Emblems and Sentences illus- 
 trated by some notable Example, or expressed 
 Hyeroglyphically, are to be bestowed in Repo- 
 sitories by a compound Idea, consisting of a 
 Relative and Scriptile, Cap. 2. 
 
 " Rule 4. All Characters, single Letters* 
 naked Numbers, Calculations of Nativities, Cos- 
 mographical descriptions and citations, are to be 
 always disposed in Repositories by a Scriptile 
 Idea. 
 
 " Rule 5. All single words signifying no vi- 
 sible thing, whose Idea either relative, fictitious, 
 or compound of fictitious and scriptile, doth pre- 
 sently occur, is to be so placed in the Repository, 
 either relatively, fictitiously, or compoundly : If
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF ' 
 
 no such Idea occur, then it is to be represented 
 by a Scriptile Idea. 
 
 " Rule 6. All Phrases and Sentences inex- 
 pressible by a Direct Idea, may be conserved by 
 a Relative Idea, or compounded of a Relative 
 and Scriptile, if any present it self commodious- 
 ly, or if no such offer itself quickly, by a Scrip- 
 tile Idea." 
 
 In chap xiii. the following rules are given for 
 ' reposing ideas,' 
 
 " Rule 1. Every Idea is to be placed in its 
 order, tiz. that which first occurreth in the first 
 place ; the second in the second place of the first 
 Repository; the third in the first, the fourth in 
 the second place of the second Repository ; fift 
 in the first, the sixt in the second place of the 
 third Repository ; the like method is to be used 
 in all the Repositories, till all the Idea's be 
 placed. 
 
 " Rule 2. Due quantity, convenient site, co- 
 lour of the Repository, and peculiar attributes, 
 are to be imposed on each Idea, and very care- 
 fully minded. 
 
 " Rule 3. After you have rightly disposed the 
 first Idea of any Repository, note it very diligent- 
 ly with the eye of your mind, as if it really stood 
 there, observing its kind, subject, <iiiantity, site, 
 attribution of the Repositories colour, and other
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 265 
 
 such like peculiar attributes, if it have any. For 
 example, whether the Idea deposited in the first 
 place of any Repository (as to the kind) be di- 
 rect; as to the subject, concerning a man; in 
 respect of quantity, equal ; in regard of sight, 
 placed on the ground ; and as to peculiar attri- 
 butes, whether moving or yeilding a sound ; go 
 over all these things in your mind, saying, The 
 Idea which I have here bestowed, is Direct, of a 
 man, equal, placed on the grouad, moving smd 
 yeilding a sound : For by such considerations an 
 Idea is more firmly graven in mfemory. 
 
 " Huh 4. After you have fitly disposed the 
 second Idea of any Repository, you must: exco- 
 gitate some apt relation thereof to the former, in 
 respect of likeness or unlikeness of site, likeness 
 or unlikeness of subject ; or else in n;gard of the 
 action of the latter Idea referred to the fonper ; 
 you can pitch upon no Idea which may not be 
 related to the former by on* of these five vv»yes, 
 which shall plainly appear by example : if both 
 Idea's of one Repository, precedent and subse- 
 qi'.ent, be fixed to the wall, placed on a table, 
 the ground, or under ground, 4'c. they agree in 
 site : But if one be fastened to the Wall, the 
 other placed on a Table, on the ground or under 
 ground, they are unlike in site : When the sub- 
 ject of both Idea's is Justice, Sin, a Man, War, 
 or Sleep, S^c. they agree in subject ; but when 
 
 A A
 
 266 PR1^'CIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 the subject of one Idea is Justice, of the other 
 Drunkenness, the one of a man, the other of a 
 stone, or any other opposite thing, they disagree 
 in subject. Take an example of transferring the 
 action of a latter Idea to a former : Suppose that 
 a man in a Gown, sitting at a Table, and over- 
 looking some Books of Accounts, with Counters 
 lying ready to compute the total sum, be an Idea 
 disposed in the first place of a Repository ; and 
 the Idea to be placed in the second room of the 
 Repository, be a Farryer giving a Horse a Drench 
 with a Horn : In this case, that the action of the 
 latter may have some dependance on the former, 
 imagine that the Horse (as soon as the drench is 
 poured into his mouth) leaps back and disturbeth 
 the man in his reckoning, who sits at the Table 
 in the first place of the Repository. This mutual 
 Relation of Idea's placed in the same Repository, 
 is as it were a linking of them together, and doth 
 admirably conduce to the remembrance of both. 
 " Rule 5. If two or more distinct idea's con- 
 cur, whose relation to one another is found so 
 near, as if they were combined together ; bestow 
 them in one same Memorial Place : As if the 
 Idea immediately preceding be a Silver Bason 
 full of fragrant Water, set upon a joyned Stool, 
 and the subsequent Idea be an idle man doing 
 nothing ; you may conjoin these two Idea's in 
 one, imagining that this man washeth his hands
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 26? 
 
 in that odiferous water ; so if the former Idea 
 be two Virgins talking together, the latter a Skein 
 of Green Silk, to join these two Ideas by a pro- 
 per connexion, you may fancy that one of the 
 Virgins holdeth the Skein upon her wrists, whilest 
 the other windeth it off her hands into a bottom. 
 In like manner if the Antecedent Idea be Scrip- 
 tile, and the Consequent likewise Scriptile, if so 
 be you ailow space enough in the Table, tiie lat- 
 ter may be subscribed under the former in a 
 convenient distance from one another. Thus 
 three Scriptile Ideas concurring together, if they 
 be not too large for one Table, may be supposed 
 written therein ; the first in the highest place, the 
 second in the middle, the third in the lowest, al- 
 lowing nevertheless a fit distance. But alwayes 
 when you comprize two or three Ideas in one 
 place, you must remember carefully, that so 
 many Ideas were constituted in such a place. 
 
 " Rule 6. W hen you have laid up any Idea in 
 its Place (whether it be in the first or second 
 Room of the Reposiforj/) peruse all the foregoing 
 Idea's in their order, if you have time, that they 
 may reside more deeply in Memory, and make 
 the stronger impression in minde. For as a 
 School-boy by often reading over his lesson, 
 learneth it by heart, so the more frequentlv you 
 peruse Idea's, the more firmly you will retain 
 thorn.
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 '* Rule 7' Lastly, have a care not to load 
 jour Memory wiih a more numerous multitude 
 of Ideals t\r<\n is fit, for as it is unwholesome to 
 burthen the stomach above its strength, so also to 
 overwhelm the Memory with multiplicity of 
 Idea's, doth lead into great confusion. Tem- 
 perate men admit only so much meat as they 
 think they can well concoct ; so do you only 
 commit such things to Memory, as you trust 
 faithfully to remember ; for it is better firmly to 
 retain a few remarkable things, than many of 
 mean base nature. 
 
 In chap. xiv. which treats " of the practice of 
 the Art of Memory," we have the following 
 
 " Examples of ordinary business. 
 
 ** I. Suppose (as taking it for granted) you 
 were to go to some great Market Town, it con- 
 cerns not our purpose whether the place be known, 
 or unknown, and intend in the first place to en- 
 quire the price of Seed Barlie : imagine then in 
 the first Place of the first Repositorie (that is the 
 part on the right hand) you see a man measuring 
 Barlie out of a Sack into a Bushel, with a com- 
 pany of men standing about liim, as is the usual 
 manger in Maikets, not forgetting to fancy the 
 Bushefl handles to be Gold, that so the Idea in 
 some .part may be related to the Repository is 
 colour, as is required in the sixdi Chapter :
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOKY. 269 
 
 " 11. Moreover, That in tlie same Town liv- 
 elli a Labourer wliom yon know, and must en- 
 quire out to work in your Ilay-harveit ; fancy 
 him to stand in the second place (on the left hand) 
 of the first Repositori/, sharpening his Gulden 
 , Sytlie on a zchetsfoiie, as it were preparing for 
 such Rustical imploynient: I say Go/den St/the, 
 that it may participate of the colour of the Repo- 
 sitory ; this Idea agreeth with the former in sight 
 and subject, for both Idea's of this llcpository 
 are of men, and placed on the ground. 
 
 " III. A while after you cail.to niinde some 
 jdromutical Spices you are to buy : To remem- 
 ber which, fancy the second place of the second 
 Repositorie converted into a Grocers Shop, the 
 opposite wall garnished with Nests of Boxes full 
 of several Spices, with Tiiles writ upon the 
 Boxes, after the usual mode ; two foot on this 
 side the wail, let iheje stand a Counter, the VV^ares 
 exposed thereon you are to buy : as if the first 
 thing you nominate to buy be Pepper, let a 5'//- 
 ver box full of Pepper stand upon the further 
 end of the Counter; if die second thing design- 
 ed be Nutmegs, place a loose bagge of Sliver 
 gilt Nutmegs in the oiiiddle of the Counter; if 
 the third be Sugar, set a Sugar loafe on the hi- 
 ther end of the Counter, with a Sf/rcr string 
 tyed about the top, that it may in some part bear 
 
 the colour of the Repositorie. In this case you 
 A A 3
 
 270 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 must remember that three Idea's were bestowed 
 ill one Place, whose coherence with the Idea in 
 the other EeposUoiy, is taken from their unlike- 
 nesse of site ; for that Idea was heaped on the 
 ground, these three are placed upon a Counter. 
 " IV. Your next incident businesse is to re- 
 member to speak with a Counsellour of the same 
 town (a man of a very great repute and credit for 
 knowledge in the Law) about a friends sute de- 
 pending in CImmery : Imagine that Counsellour 
 in a Lawyers Gown, sitting in a Chair, overlook- 
 ing some writings, in the first Place of the third 
 Repository/ : seeing his Gown is black, you need 
 no other attribution of colour of the Repositoyy. 
 " V. If another new occasion present it self 
 to minde, as that you are to buy "a piece of 
 Blarh Vehit of a Mercer in that town ; the se- 
 cond Place of the third Repository must be 
 transformed into a Mercers shop, a piece of 
 Black Velvet neatly laid in folds of equal length, 
 lying on the Counter, which doth in like manner 
 As well denote the Repositories colour, as the 
 Gown of the Counsellor sitting in the former 
 Place; whence also is deduced a manifest rela- 
 tion to the precedent Idea, the Lawyers Govvn 
 supposed to be lined with Velvet,
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. €71 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 " Of Dictation and Reposition, 
 
 " Moreover, the practical part of this Art 
 is perspicuously seen in the Exercises of Dictat- 
 ing and Repetition, 
 
 " The use of Dictating is, when a person is 
 to dictate to several Scribes or Secretaries, what 
 every one must write, so as to direct aid exercise 
 them all at once, which is frequently incumbent 
 upon Princes and Generals of Armies in peril- 
 lous times : In such cases there must be assigned 
 a peculiar Repository to every Scribe, wherein 
 the affairs and sentences by him to be dispatched, 
 must be reposited in order; that is, the first Re- 
 pository to the first Scribe, the second Repository 
 to the second, the tiiird to the third, the fourth 
 to the fourth,.and so forth if there be more : All 
 Idea's of things to be dispatched by the first 
 Secretary, must have some attribution of Gold 
 appertaining to them ; all Idea's of the secoiid 
 Repository, something of silver ; of the third, 
 something of l>lack, of the fourth, blew, S)C. In 
 this case also it is permitted to place two, thre«, 
 or more Idea's if it be necessary, in one place of 
 a Repository : All businesses and sentences being 
 thus reposited in order, & faithfully digested be- 
 fore in mind, it is no difficult matter by the .first
 
 272 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Idea of the first Repository, to dictate to the first 
 Scribe what he siiust write first ; l)y thu first Idea 
 of the second Repository, t.i tell the second 
 Scribe what he sliall write; by the first Idea of 
 the third Repository, to inform the third ; nnd in 
 like manner all the rest in their order. Again, 
 by the second Idea of each Repository, the se- 
 cond sentence is facilely delivered to each Scribe : 
 By the tiiird, every Scribes third bnsiness ; by 
 the fonrih Idea their fourth, and so forward in 
 the residue. This is the Exercise, which by 
 some is called the Art of Dictating. 
 
 *' Repetition is when a man repeateth sen- 
 tences spoken by several persons, so as to return 
 each persons sentence in order as it was deliver- 
 ed ; as if six, seven, or more friends sitting toge- 
 ther (to experience your happy memory) do every 
 one in order speak some sentence, to have them 
 repeated again, after the same or a retrogade 
 manner, which way they please; dispose the 
 Liea's of your first friends sentences in the first 
 Repository ; of your second friend in the second 
 Repository ; of your third friend in the third, and 
 so forward in the rest. All which being rightly 
 disposed, you may with little trouble restore to 
 every friend his saying, either in the same order 
 as they were spoken, or in a retrogade or invert- 
 ed order. 
 
 " I have not thought expedient to illustrate
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. «73 
 
 these with Examples, because I think them suffi- 
 ciently explained by what hath been already said; 
 as also, that this Exercise of Dictating and Re- 
 peating have little or no use, but vain ostentation; 
 though I have inserted them here, it was not 
 done as necessary, but because the knowledge of 
 them did not seem superfluous for such as are 
 learned of this Art. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 " Of irregular Reposition. 
 
 " I HAVE thought godd to annex a few words 
 of irregular Reposition, which is onely one Rule, 
 that is, a real Repository may be sometimes sub- 
 stituted instead of a feigned, which irregiUarity is 
 admitted upon a double occasion. 
 
 " First, A thing itself being at hand, may be 
 fitly used instead of its proper Idea : As if a man 
 sitting in his Study, light on some Book whose 
 sheets are transplaced, which he intendeth when 
 he goes forth of l)is Study, to send to a Book- 
 binder to be amended : That Book is to be cast 
 at the threshold of the Study, that the sight there- 
 of may admonish him departing, to get it bound : 
 So also if Ink be wanting, an Ink-Glass or Bottle 
 may be set by the Book. 
 
 " Secondly, When a man must exonerate one
 
 274 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 or more Idea's, as soon as he hath reposited 
 them ; as when something offers it self to a mans 
 mind, talking to a powerful or rich man, which 
 he judgeth convenient to be comuiunicated to 
 him with the first opportunity, let him speedily 
 reposite the Idea of that thing in the same house, 
 field, plain, or wheresoever he then is, in some 
 certain place conversant before his eyes, that he 
 may be always put in mind to propound the 
 same when occasion serves : As if he think to do 
 some friendly office for a person absent, by pre- 
 ferring some business of his to the rich man ; let 
 him imagine that Friend always obvious in some 
 determinate place in sight, not suffering the ob- 
 ject to slip out of view, till he have curteously 
 performed his officious enterprise. Or if there 
 intervene some thought of buying fewel, whereof 
 the rich man hath great plenty, let him suppose 
 a great quantity of Wood piled up in some place 
 not distant out of sight : This is all I have to say 
 of ii regular Reposition, 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 '' Of depositing Ideals. 
 
 " Haying spoken copiously of repositing 
 Idea's, now I will conclude with Depositing them.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 275 
 
 " Deposition of Idea's is, when tilings charged 
 upon Memory by Idea's, are recalled, and the 
 mind exonerated of them, the Memorial Place? 
 after such Deposition, being left empty, and 
 prepared to receive new Idea's. Now in this 
 case, if it happen at any time that an Idea negli-. 
 gently reposited, is lost or forgotten, when it 
 should be deposited, the recovery thereof must 
 be endeavoured by these ensuing considerations. 
 " First, This is always assuredly known, every 
 lost Idea did bear the colour of his Kepository, 
 either in wliole or part; therefore the first thing 
 to be inquired is, in what respect the colour of 
 the Repository did agree with the Idea sought ; 
 by this sole consideration, forgotten Idea's are oft 
 discovered. 
 
 " The Idea being not discovered thus, make 
 diligent indagation for its relation to the Idea 
 placed in the same Repository, in regard of site, 
 subject or action. Cap. 14. Rule 4. One Idea 
 of a Repository being known, doth easily call the 
 other to mind, by mutual dependance whereby 
 they were connexed together, unless there did 
 precede very negligent Reposition. 
 
 " If still you are disappointed, happily you 
 may find it out by repetition of such things as are 
 especially remarkable in laying up Idea's, of 
 which I have spoken in the 13. Chapter. That 
 is by enquiring whether the latent Idea's was
 
 276 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 Direct, 
 
 Relative, 
 . ^ i" L- J J Fictitious, 
 
 In r«pect of kind, <Scriptile, ^ 
 
 Compound, 
 Double, treble, S^c. 
 
 Of God, 
 Of Christ, 
 ^ c t • * J Of the Holy Gh»$t, 
 In Mspect of subject, <^o/^«g-e/*, 
 
 ^ Of Men, 
 Of Animals, 
 
 C Equal, 
 In respect of quantity, < Augmented^ 
 i. Contracted, 
 
 r Under ground^ 
 \ Upon ground. 
 In respect of site, < Upon a Table ^ 
 j Upon a Shelf, 
 {^Against a wall. 
 
 r Moving, 
 In respect of attribu- J Quiet, 
 
 tioD, i Giving a sound. 
 
 V. Yielding 4 smel. 
 
 , d 
 " An Idea is oft recovered by discussing these 
 
 ie\N questions in a mans thoughts. , 
 
 " If it be certain the forgot Idea was Scriptile, 
 
 but the inscription is in oblivion, the first' inquiry 
 
 must be, whether it were a angle 'wordj proof, 
 
 phrase, or sentence of one or more clauses ; a 
 
 single word, proof, or principal word pf a sen-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 277 
 
 tence, may be regained by applying each Letter 
 of the Alphabet in the same manner as is pre- 
 scribed in the second Rule of Poetical Revoca- 
 tion, in the second Book, Cap. 3. till you have 
 obtained the first Letter ; the other Letters may 
 be found by transcendencies and gilded Vowels ; 
 the chief Word being obtained, the rest come 
 easily to mind. 
 
 '* If you cannot yet discover the Idea, have re- 
 course to the third and fourth Rules of Poetical 
 Revocation, '2. Book. S Chap, an Idea being 
 revocable in the same manner. 
 
 " Finally, if it continue irreparable by all 
 these ways, let it pass, and be no longer sollici- 
 tous irf search thereof: For as a Book carelesly 
 laid up in a Study, is not many times to be found 
 when it is sought, though you remove several 
 Volumes ; yet afterward comes to hand beyond 
 expectation, when another Book is reached that 
 stands by it : So it doth oft happen in this busi- 
 ness, though ijn Idea negligently reposited, can- 
 not be, found when it is sought, yet at another 
 time when a Notion reposited in the cell of Me- 
 mory near it, is excited, that also of its own ac- 
 cord dlscovereth it self. 
 
 " If a man do prudently follow these Rules of 
 recovering latent Ideas, as with Ariadnes thred, 
 he will doubtless wind himself out of the Laby- 
 rinth of blind Oblivion, and with admirable 
 
 B B
 
 278 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 facility recall to mind forgotten sentences, and. 
 vanished Idea's" 
 
 A Treatise ' of cherishing Natural Memori// 
 concludes the volume ; in which are considered, 
 "J.. Of such [things] as debilitate Memory. 
 2. Of things corroborating Memory. 3. Of a 
 prescript order of life. 4. Of restoring a debi' 
 litated Memory. 5. How to discern the tem- 
 perame/ht of the Brain. 6. Of Dyet properly 
 convenient to every temperament. 7. Of 
 Diseases of the Brain." 
 
 Among those things which debilitate memory, 
 are enumerated bad air, particular drinks and 
 decoctions, bad water, particular sorts of food, 
 repletion, too much sleep, etc. etc. In the list of 
 corroboratives are, wholesome air, sweet scents, 
 and particular meats, among which are, the 
 brains of sparrows, hares, conies, etc.; — herbs, 
 bathing the feet in warm decoctions of camomile, 
 etc. and * exercise in delightful places not sub- 
 ject to wind.' The chapter concludes with this 
 important admonition : " Finally, your apjyarel 
 close fitted, walk leisurely abroad, if the winde 
 breath a gentle gale, otherxi^ise within doors." 
 
 In treating of the " prescript order of life" 
 Mr. Willis, after very properly recommending 
 frequent prayer for Divine assistance, in all our 
 undertakings, which he enforces by a reference to 
 the Epistle of James, chap. v. ver. 1 6, 17, di-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 279 
 
 rects the reader to " comb his head every day, 
 backward, fasting" " to abstain from all evacua- 
 tion by virtue of Physick except upon necessity" 
 " to eat twelve Raisotis of the Sun7ie stoned, 
 evert/ morning without drink, instead of break- 
 fast" " to let his supper be larger than his din- 
 ner"* " to observe accustomed hours of eating" 
 *' to refrain from labour after meats" " to shut 
 all the windows at bed-time^" " not to sleep under 
 the moon-beams," and " not to lie out all night 
 in the open air." The remaining rules are some- 
 what more rational : they recommend the morn- 
 ing as the best time for study, — the reading of 
 
 * Mr. Willis seems to have entirely forgotten the aiitient 
 distich. 
 
 Ex }}ut^na cccna stomuchofit maxima fcena ; 
 Ut SIS node levis, si tibi ccena brevis, 
 
 A correspondent in the Gentleman's Magazine tbv 
 the year 1787, in answer to Immemor, who had been com- 
 plaining of the weakness of his memory, advises him to 
 follow this rule ; " Instead of eating suppers, leani by 
 heart some passages of poetiy which please yoii, tJie last 
 thing before yoii go to bed, and repeat them the first thing 
 in the morning, at six in the spring and antumn, five in 
 snmmor, and seven in winter. Study Watts' Logick, 
 and his Improvement of the MiTid, Locke, and Ei'cltd. 
 Let me knowtiie effects of this regimen, accompanied with 
 plain food and constant exercise, and I will then prescribe 
 fariiicr if it should be necessary." Gent. Mag. vol. Ivii. 
 part i. p. 22.
 
 280 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 select authois, — a devotedness to the studies which 
 we are pursuing, — a choice of fit companions, — 
 and occasional relaxation. 
 
 The symptoms of cold and hot brains are 
 explained at large for the benefit of all those who 
 are disposed to read such " phantasies." Under 
 the article of " Dyet" we have the following 
 singular paasage. " Strong sweet wine, as 
 Muskadine, Ipocras, drunk temperately, is most 
 restorative for old folivs, and co:d and sickly per- 
 sons, more efficaciuusly gold (made red hot in 
 the Jire) quenched therein, doth marvellously 
 restore and exhiieiate the heart. Concerning 
 this matter, Roger Bacon, a famous philosopher 
 in his Treatise of old age, hath this story ; ^n 
 ancient husbandman (saith he) wearyed with 
 plowing f and thirsty with his hot labour y- drank 
 water of a Cytron colour, and after he had 
 greedily swallowed the same, was changed both 
 in complection and strength like one of thirty 
 years of age, possessing more excellent discre- 
 tion, MEMORY and understanding, than ever he 
 enjoyed before, jfrom which time, he lived eighty 
 years in the Kings Court. Bacon, who recit- 
 eth this, thought, that water or liquor received 
 its yellow Tincture from Gold, as he there tes- 
 tifieth." 
 
 After a long and fruitless search, the only par- 
 ticulars which we have been enabled to glean.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 281 
 
 respecting John Willis are, — that he \vas 
 author of the ' Art of Stenography/ an edition 
 of whicli was published in 1628, and that he was 
 a Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. Of 
 this latter circumstance, a communication in an 
 early volume of the Geiifleinans Magazine, is 
 the only evidence,. The writer of this article 
 mentions a system of short-hand, said to be in- 
 vented by a Fellow of Magdalen College; and 
 this system is the identical one published by 
 
 ivmis. 
 
 44. Ars Memories localis, plenius ct lu- 
 culejitius expositct, quani ante hac 
 nunrjuam, una cum appUcatione ejus- 
 dem ad singulas disciplhms ctfacul- 
 tales, 8". Lips. l()-20. 
 
 This book (says Morhof, in his Polyhistor) is 
 to be preferred to all the treatises on Mnemo- 
 nics, for perspicuity and arrangement. The 
 anonymous author, as appears by the preface, 
 was a Professor of Mnemonics in the University 
 of Leipsic. 
 
 45. D. Joannis Velasquez de Azevedo 
 
 Feuix de Minerva y Arte de Memo- 
 ria queenseuna sin maestro aprender 
 y relenir, 4". Madrid, 1620. 
 
 B B 3
 
 £82 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 46. Artis Lullian^, seu Memorice Ar- 
 
 tificialis Secretum explicitnm, Ora- 
 torihiis et PrcBdicatorihiis uiilissi- 
 mum per JR. P. F. Hugonem Car- 
 honellwn: 8". Paris. 16*20. 
 
 For an account of ' LuUy's Art' see No. .51. 
 
 47. Lettera a Andrea Valieri ove si 
 tratta della Memoria locale e del 
 modo facile per acquistarla. MS. 
 
 This manuscript is No. 2259 in the Slonne 
 Collection pre-erved in the British Museum. It 
 treats of the arrangement of different places on 
 the walls of the rooms in a house or monastery, to 
 the number of 173 ; and gives directions respect- 
 ing the formation and combination of images. It 
 is in folio, and is dated October 30, ]623. 
 
 48. 3Iagazin des Sciences, on way VArt 
 de 3Iemoire, par Adrian le Cuirot, 
 12^ Paris, 1623. 
 
 In this extremely rare volume, which abounds 
 with curious plates, the system of Lambert 
 Schenckel is given in detail ; but, with many im- 
 portant additions and improvements.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 283 
 
 49. Tractatus de Memoria J oh. Conra- 
 di Dannhaiveri D. Sf Pr. of Puhl. 
 8". Arsrent. 1635. 
 
 Of this work we have not been able to procure 
 a copy ; the reader, tlierefore, must be contented 
 with a memoir of the author. John Conraue 
 Dannhawer, a Lutheran divine, was born at 
 Brisgau in 1 603 : and he was raised to the chair 
 of eloquence at Strasburgh, in 1 629- He died 
 in this city, aged ,57. Befoie his death he was 
 made preacher at the Cathedral church, and Dean 
 of the Chapter; he was very zealous for the sen- 
 timents he embraced, and entered into a severe 
 controversy with those who contended for the 
 union of the Lutherans and Calvinists. He has 
 left behind him many theological works of con- 
 siderable reputation.* * 
 
 50. Meyssonerus in Perilagono Philoso- 
 phico-3Iedico, sive Arte novcs Re^ 
 miniscentim, 4°. Lugd. 1639. 
 
 51. Ars Memorativa inventiva et appli- 
 
 cativa Raimundi LuUii^ 12". Ca- 
 dom. 1640. 
 
 The system of Artificial Memory of that lu- 
 * Diet. Hist. art. Dannhawer.
 
 284 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 miliary of science, Raymund Lully, was formed 
 at a very ea'rly period ; and he was, perhaps, the 
 first modern who practised this art ; but as the 
 books on this subject have been noticed accord- 
 in" to their dates, and we have not seen an earlier 
 edition of Luily, he is placed among the writers 
 of the seventeenth century. 
 
 " By this system, any one was enabled 
 mechanically to invent arguments and illustra- 
 tions upon any subject, and thus to reach the 
 summit of science, at a small expence of 
 time and labour. This Great Art professes 
 to furnish a general mstrument for assisting 
 invention in the study of every kind of science. 
 For this purpose, certain general terms, which 
 are common to all the sciences, but prin- 
 cipally those of logic, metaphysics, ethics and 
 theology, are collected and arranged, not how- 
 ever according to any natural division, but merely 
 according to the caprice of the inventor. An 
 alphabetical table of such terms was provided; 
 and subjects and predicates taken from these, 
 were respectively inscribed in angular spaces, 
 upon circular papers. The essences, qualities, 
 and relations of things being thus mechanically 
 brought together, the circular papers of subjects 
 were fixed in a frame, and those of predicates 
 were so placed upon them as to move freely, and 
 in their revolutions, to produce various combina-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 285 
 
 lions of subjects and predicates ; whence would 
 arise definitions, axionis, and propositions, vary- 
 ing infinitely, according to the dilierent applica- 
 tion of general terms to particular subjects.;"* 
 This is the general idea of Lully's mechanical 
 logic, wliich would enable a person to hold a 
 disputation for a who/e day upon any siihj^xt 
 tohatever, zoithout knowing any thing of' the 
 matter. 
 
 Morhofm his dissertation de Arte Lidliana ,-);■ 
 has preserved an elaborate account of the system, 
 and has given a tremendous list * ordine longo' 
 of commentators on the art. The two principal 
 expositors are Athanasius Kircher, in his Ars 
 Magna Sciendi, [see No. 56] and Jean Helot, 
 in his L'Oeuvre des Oeuvres, [see No. 54.] 
 
 Raymunf) Lully was born at Majorca, 
 in the year 1236, and on account of his great 
 abilities, obtained the name of the Il/uminated 
 Doctor. After excelling as a divine, he applied 
 himself to physic and chemistry, that he might 
 be enabled to cure the cancer of a young woman 
 of whom he was enamoured. He was stoned to 
 death in Mauritania, where he went as a mis- 
 sionary in the year 1315, at the age of 80. His 
 
 • Sec Enfield's History of Philosophy, vol. II. pp. 
 399—401. 
 
 t Polyhistor, Tom. I. Lib. II. cap. 5.
 
 286 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 works which ale in general very obscure, are 
 written in a* style worthy of the barbarous age in 
 which he lived. Tliey were collected and pub- 
 lished at Mentz, and treated of theology, history, 
 medicine, law, and philosophy. 
 
 52. Ars 3Inemcmica, sice Herdsonus 
 Uruxiatus ; vel JBruxus Herdsoni- 
 atus, f^''. JLotid. 1651. 
 
 o3. Ai^s 3Iemori(E: The Art of Memo- 
 ry jnade plaine hy Henry Herdson, 
 late Professor l^y PuMich Autho- 
 rity, in the Ujiiversity of Cam- 
 bridge, 8". Lond. 1651. 
 
 No. 52 and No. 53 are printed and bound to- 
 gether, consisting in the whole of ninety-two 
 pages. The^Vs^ is in Latin, and is a republica- 
 tion of a part of Adam Brux's Simonides Redi- 
 vivus, before noticed, [See No. 37] A Latin 
 dedication to ' his dearest mother, the University 
 of Cambridge' follows the title, after which we 
 have this singular address to the reader. 
 
 '6^ 
 
 " Covrteovs Reader, If any thing in this 
 BOOK seemeth obscure unto thee, and thou de- 
 sirest Instruction in the same, and clearly to 
 game the full benefit of the Art, thou mayest
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 287 
 
 repniie unto me at the Green Dragon, over 
 against Saint A.ithohns Church in London, 
 where I shall bee ready to give thee sufficient 
 Testimonially and Satisfaction of the Art, that 
 the plaj/nest and meanest Capacitt/ may appre- 
 hend it. And so I rest thij Wel-zHsher in 
 Christ lesus, 
 
 Octob. 21, Henry Herdson. 
 
 1661. . 
 
 No. 53, the second article, being in English, in 
 a small coMipass, and very scarce, we shall reprint 
 the whole of it, verbatim. 
 
 " To my dearest Mother, the Vniversity of 
 " Cambridge, all the good of this life, 
 " and eternall Life. 
 
 " My dearest Mother, let the lovingest, 
 though least deserving of your true sonnes, pre- 
 sent you Zi'ith one sparkle of living fire, raked 
 7ip in your ashes, O your own ashes ! The Phoe- 
 nix of Christendome, that never shall be put to 
 death : The Angels of Heaven may sooner be 
 extinct, than this Phanix : Be not discomfort- 
 ed ihut the Sunne is beclouded, the Clouds are 
 but for a time. Bee not forgetfull, norfaith- 
 lesse; but rather accept this my little Booke, the 
 Prospective Glasse, 1 send you to view the Art 
 of Memory by. If yon look on it at the zvrotig
 
 288 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 etid, unto the ignorant it will appear in a smal- 
 ler volume, then in itspoore Octavo : But if you 
 looke on it at the right end with the right eye, it 
 will grow bigger than your Expectation. He 
 that hath but one eye I know will almost love 
 it : Hee that hath but halfe an eye cannot des- 
 pise it : But hee teho by zoilfulnesse S^ malice, 
 will put both his eyes out, may stare in his con- 
 ceits; and the next messe of his own crooked 
 Broaih, his hollozv throat sinkes downe: he can 
 as well crum his porrage with his ei/es, as con- 
 demne my Art of Memory: And let it bee 
 enough to choak him, that Lumen ex ipso bono 
 est, & bonitatis Imago. But you who are inge- 
 nuous Academicks: The God of Heaven and 
 Earth send you eyes, Ears, and all your Senses, 
 with all sutable objects, that piously may delight 
 you in them all. 
 
 So pra^eth your true Lover 8c Servant, 
 
 Henry Herdson. 
 
 " CLAVICVLA, SIVE 
 
 Explicalio Llbri: 
 The Key or Explication of the Booke. 
 
 (C C. Chambers.) 
 
 (H. H. Houses.) 
 
 (D. Door. (W. Wall:) (S. Sided.) 
 
 (R. Repository.)
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. , 289 
 
 (Angiile, Corner.) 
 
 (Center, tlie Middle in the Qvadrangule.) 
 
 (Quadrangnle, 4 Corners. 
 
 (Coelum versus, ubove, towards Heaven.) 
 
 (Juxta terrani, below tlie ground, or earth. 
 
 (Paries, Wall or Side.) 
 
 (P. P. Places. 
 
 " THE ART OF MEMORY. 
 LECTIO PRIMA. 
 
 Partis Theorica. 
 
 " Hee that desireth this art or any other, must 
 bring along with him two things. 
 
 " 1. Love of the Art. 
 
 " 2. Desire of the Art, without which no man 
 can learn or protit in any Art or Science. 
 
 " And he must also resolve of a third thing, 
 not to undervalue any Art or Science by the ex- 
 ility and meanness of the grounds of the Art. For 
 Divinity, Law, Physick, and the seven Liberall 
 Arts, and all other Sciences are preserved in six 
 and twenty Letters, and so traiwmitted to Poste- 
 rity, from one Generation to another. Now how 
 plain and mean the six and twenty Letters of the 
 Alphabet be, every one knovveth ; so let us also 
 consider, that most rich stones, and precious 
 Gems are digged out of the earth, and the most 
 c c
 
 290 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 stately trees doe grow out of the earth : but if art 
 be not added, wee make no use of these. By 
 Art the stones are separated from the chalk, and 
 fitted by the Artificer for the most sumptuous 
 buildings : the Diamond, Saphire, Rubie, by the 
 hand and skill of the Artificer are inthroned in 
 the purest Gold ; also the most harmonious and 
 Ear-pleasing Musick that quicknelh up, and en- 
 liveneth the drowsie vitals, consisteth but in three 
 Keyes, and six Notes. We might instance the 
 like exility in the Fundaments and grounds of the 
 other Sciences and rarest Arts : Therefore if it 
 be thus in these, he must needs be malicious and 
 unworthy, that will contemne this Ait of Me- 
 mory for the meanness of the Fundaments there- 
 of, which be 
 
 " 1. Repositories. 2. Ideas. 'J. Method, 
 " 4. The Vse or Exercise of them. 
 « I. The Repositories be C. C. in H. H. 
 which be of two sorts : either, 
 
 *' 1. Naturall, which we know : or, 
 " 2. Artificial, which we imagine and make 
 in our Fancie. And in both of them the Me- 
 thod is according to this Figure.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 9.QI 
 
 i 2 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 
 13 
 
 11 
 
 
 14 
 
 17 
 
 SO 
 
 18 
 
 15 
 
 
 19 
 
 " Enter in at D under tlie Center of the North 
 W. or S. Then move as the Sun moveth, be- 
 ginning on the left hand, which is the East side 
 of this C. and imagine this II or C (call it which 
 you will) in every of the 4 W W ; or S S. to be 
 every way 10. yards square from Angule to An- 
 gule, then make the R. as followeth, ivz. the first 
 VV which is East C. and ten yards four square 
 from angule to angule) hang'd or clothed with 
 cloth of gold, dividing it into its parts, according 
 to the Metliod of its figure ; in the first 10. yards 
 square. Paries, which is l-'i-S 4 5. 2 W. also 
 10. yards 4 square, which is South, and adorned
 
 292 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 with the purest white Linnen or Taffaty, and di- 
 vided into its five parts also, viz. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. 
 The third S or W, which is West, of the same 
 Latitude also, and clothed with rich Tapestry, 
 and divided into its five parts, which be 11, 12, 
 13, 14, 15. The fourth Paries which is North 
 10 yards, foure square, also hanged with an hang- 
 ing, beset full of Diamonds, Rubies, Saphires, 
 and all manner of precious Gems, and divided 
 also into its five parts, viz. 16, 17, 18, 19, 20. 
 
 " LECTIO II. 
 
 Partis Theories. 
 
 " When you are perfect in tliis, place in eve)7 
 Angule of every of these Paries, and in their se- 
 veral Centers so many large 4 square Tables, 
 viz. In the first Paries of this Repository (which 
 is East, and hanged with cloth of Gold) in the 
 first Angule, Juxta terram, you have a large 
 foiire square Table of Gold : In the North- East 
 Angule which is Caelum versus) and the second 
 place) you have a large foure square Table, Jet 
 or Ebony (for alwayes let the Colour of the one 
 Table contrary the Colour of the other:) In the 
 fourth Angule, Juxta terrain, (which is also East 
 by South) you iiave a large foure square Table
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOKY. 295 
 
 of the purest white Alabaster polished : In the 
 Center of this East Paries, you have a large 
 square Table also made of Saphire, Marble, 
 Cristals, Diamonds, or what you will : And thus 
 distinguish the other three Paries, or S. S. of this 
 R. in their severall Tables, three wayes. 
 
 " 1 . By the matter they are made of, as Gold, 
 Wood, Stone, 8cc. 
 
 " 2. By the colour without a Carpet, as red, 
 green, yellow, &,c. 
 
 " 3. By Carpets and Coverings with their 
 colour, as black Velvet, Scarlet, &c. and so they 
 be distinguished, it mattereth not how they be dis- 
 tinguished, so long as they be all large and four 
 square Tables in every of their Angules and Cen- 
 ters. 
 
 LECTIO III. 
 
 Partis Theories, 
 
 " After you have this perfect, divide all 
 these Tables in their several Places (as they stand 
 in order) both in their Angules and Centers, into 
 five parts in the lid or top &c. into five parts by 
 the four feet, and Center below ; the top or lid 
 aloft is like to the Scheam of the first Paries, and 
 so are the four foot and Center below : Now the 
 best method, is to leave out use of four feet and 
 c c 8
 
 294 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 Center below, and to spare tliein on^ly for mat- 
 ter of the same nature, that njay be added after- 
 M'ard, upon furihtr study and serious deHbera- 
 tioi^ : As no man can say so much at one time 
 for his own or others satisfaction, but that he may 
 say for his own content and others satisfaction, 
 more and better at another time ; because every 
 sence of man h regulated according to the sence 
 of tasting. The pallat deliglueth hereafter some 
 things both of dry and moist nourishmeiit, above 
 some things it liketh for present : So always in. 
 every thing what man can attain unto in all Arts, 
 Sciences, and Languages It jnust be confessed 
 that in these, alwayes Nos non sumus ti'js, what 
 we heretofore approved, upon serious consult, 
 we see (though that then did passe with us and 
 others) yet now a better way is opened unto us. 
 Exempli gratia, he that is in a tolerable bon- 
 dage, and therewith contenttd, yet when his eyes 
 are opened, will rntlitr throw himself in the 
 armcs of his own Moilicr, than the unkindly nurs- 
 ings of a fawning step Motlier. So then having 
 divided all these Tables into ten parts, you have 
 in the whole Repository twenty Tables, and in 
 every Table ten places (diougli at fi-st opportu- 
 nity vou make use but ui live ni the leafe of the 
 Table, leaving the lower live parts for use as 
 abovesait'.) so all ihe divisions of the twenty Ta- 
 bles are one hundred places in the top, and as
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 2^5 
 
 many in the bottome, and then you must place a 
 Table in the (. enlt-r of the flue of this Reposi- 
 tory, dividing tliat as y<>n did the other in which 
 you have ten places more, but in the Center of 
 this Table, tis your cheil care to place tl)e figure 
 of 1 . and look upon it when you first come into 
 this Repository. Now this figure of 1. is a 
 burning Taper, placed in the Center of the top of 
 this Table, and that you may the better remem- 
 ber it, imagine it as it burnetii casting a sweet 
 perfume all the room over ; for the five Sences 
 of Hearing, Seeing, Smelling, Tasting, Touch- 
 ing, are the five excellent Rules for imprinting 
 things in the memory. \ 
 
 " LECTIO IV. 
 
 " After you have thus done, in the fourth 
 place, put so many of your acquaintance (I doubt 
 I cannot say friends) in the severall Angnles and 
 Centers of every of the tops, or lids, or leaves of 
 the Table (call them what you will) and be sure 
 you know what five friends are at the first Table, 
 what five at the second, what five friends or ac- 
 quaintance at the third, &c. in all four of the Pa- 
 ries twenty Tables, are in this Repository, and 
 five friends or acquaintance at every Table, for
 
 295 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 all the bottomes (viz.) four feet and Centers 
 you leave empty and unused ; so you have 105 
 friends or acquaintance in this Repository. 
 
 « LECTIO V. 
 
 " Then that you may proceed to the practick 
 part of this Art of Memory without losse of time, 
 take tlie severall characters of the figures, and 
 place them in their order, in the right and left 
 hand of every of your friends, as they are placed 
 five by five, at every of the large four square Ta- 
 bles, in every of the Angules and Centers of the 
 abovesaid Paries of the Repository- 
 
 " The Ideas of these you have in this Table of 
 figures (adding according to your own fancy more 
 Ideas of every figure, as your fancy and invention 
 please.) 
 
 " As for the figure of 1. a Candle, a Fish, a 
 Staf, a Dart, &,c. For 2. a Swan, a Duck, a 
 Goose, a Serpent : For 3. a Triangle, a Trident, 
 or any thing with three legs : For 4. a Quadran- 
 gle, a die, any four square thing: For 5. a foot 
 of a man, an Hand, a Glove, a Sickle, a Peircer, 
 a Shoemakers Knife, &c. For 6. a Tobacco 
 pipe : For 7. a Carpenters Iron square, a Rai- 
 ser bent thus 7 ; For 8. a pair of Spectacles, a
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 297 
 
 Sea Crab, Twin Apples, &c. For 9. a burning 
 Glasse, a riding Stick made of a Reed, twisted 
 at the upper end thus 9 long Peares, 8cc. 10,20, 
 30, Sec. to a thousand, may be formed from these 
 figures, taking any round for the ciphers 000. as 
 an Orenge, a Ball, &c. for a Candle run through 
 an Orenge is ten, a Swan with an Orenge in her 
 mouth is twenty : But they may more profitably 
 be made by single Ideas, as a Crosse of Gold, 
 Silver, Wood, &c. for ten ; for twenty a Jug, a 
 Dagger, or any thing you will fancy ; for thirty 
 a Belclapper, or what you will fancy, so for ali 
 the rest of the cardinall numbers what your fancy 
 will put, because it will be better to have single 
 Ideas for the cardinall numbers. 
 
 This is the Theorick. 
 Now for the Practick Part. 
 
 *' LECTIO I. 
 
 The first Lecture of the Practick Part. 
 
 " Now before we can come to the Practick 
 Part, or exercise it selfe, 'tis necessary that we 
 make some little Preface concerning Ideas. 
 
 " An Idea is the figure of anything represented.
 
 498 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 now the Ideas of things visible are very facile and 
 ready, but the Ideas of those things that be invi- 
 sible, are to be found out by rule, whereby the 
 Ideas of all things may be had in a readinesse ; 
 and for this there is need onely of but one gene- 
 rall rule (which in perfecting this Art I have 
 found out.) 
 
 ** An Idea is twofold ; 
 
 *' First, Proper. 
 
 " Secondly, Improper. 
 
 *' First Pioper, which is the Image of that 
 thing it representeth, as if I put the Idea of Christ 
 to represent Christ himselfe. 
 
 ** 2. Improper, as if I put the Image of Christ 
 to represent a man; Logicians expresse this in 
 few words ; when the Image (say they) of the 
 Individual! is put for the Individuall it selfe 'tis 
 proper ; but if it be put for the Species or Ge- 
 nus, 'tis improper. This Division is brought to 
 shew that oftentimes improper Ideas are as use- 
 full to stirre up the Memory as proper. A se- 
 cond Division of Ideas, is 1. Perfect. 2. Im- 
 perfect. 
 
 " 1. Ideas are perfect, and such be of rare and 
 excellent things, as of Daniel in the Lyons Den, 
 of Jo?tah in the mouth of the Whale, the fact of 
 InditJi, Esther, loseph, &^c. 
 
 *' 2. Ideas are imj»erfect, as of obvious and 
 vulgar things, as the rising and setting of the Sun
 
 . ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 299 
 
 no man adiniretli, because it is daily, it raineth, 
 it raineth not, &.c. The Idfaa of the»e be first 
 imperfect, but they may presently be made such 
 by some notable attribute, that they may become 
 perfect; as for examp'e, the wind bloweth, the 
 Idea is imperfect, but the wind bloweth with 
 such a force, and so tearingly, that Trees are rent 
 up from the ground, and Houses blowne downe, 
 now the Ideas are perfect, it raineth, so imper- 
 fect; but it raineth so thick that all the streets 
 and wayes are of a swim : and filled with water : 
 Now the Ideas be perfect; so the Sun aiiseth 
 with a huge great body and red colour, so the 
 Idea is perfect. And so wee come uow to give 
 the Rules of the Practick part : Aud first de vo- 
 cabulis intdlectis of words which we uader- 
 stand, (for we shall appoint the lection for 
 Words we understand not afterwards :) Words 
 which we understand are remembred by Ideas, 
 put in the places of the R. with some famous ac- 
 tion attributed, received from Writers sacred, or, 
 prophane, er invented, and feigned by our selves ; 
 (for no intellect word can be spoken but of our 
 selves) we may presently be able to fancy the per- 
 fect Idea of it, aud apply unto it some notable 
 action.
 
 500 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " LECTIO II. 
 
 Of the Practicke Part of Sentences. 
 
 ** Sentences, or continued Texts are com- 
 mitterl to Memory, and retained : The principall 
 Ideas of their Words being put in the Methodi- 
 cal! places of the R. And these being made sure 
 of, they bring the 'esse principal! Words of the 
 sentence, or text by the lieipe of the natural! 
 memory into our Rcmenibrance immediately. 
 Now that we may be able to perform this, we 
 must observe foure things. 
 
 " 1. Talve special! notice of the principall 
 Idea of the whole sentence. And it matters not 
 whether it be the principall or no, so we take it 
 for the principall. 2. Marke diligently the first 
 Word of every sentence ; for if returning to the 
 P. P. by the eye of our fancy, we see the first 
 Word and principal! Idea in every sentence, the 
 naturall Memory will suggest the rest very safely : 
 for as in Sclibols, Children, that have got a taske 
 of Verses by heart, if they misse the repeating of 
 them, and the leafe being doubted, may be but 
 pern)ilted to see the first Letters that overy Verse 
 beginneth withall, they will be able to repeat 
 every one of the Verses both forward and back- 
 ward, casting their eye upon the Letter that every
 
 A»TiriClAL MEMORY. 301 
 
 Verse beglnneth wlthall, the same is done here by 
 the eye of Fancy. 3. We must have a great care 
 lest we take one Synonyma for another, as to say 
 muUer for f&mina, or silver for money, or a 
 Sword for a Rapier. 4. We must have a care 
 that every W ord be repeated in the same order it 
 is read, or spoken ; now tliis is done by the strong 
 application of the mind unto every Word, and it's 
 Collocation : as also by often exercise, by which 
 alone all this is so exactly obtained^ that in a 
 short time exercising our selves herein, we can- 
 not but admire our progresse and successe. 
 
 " LECTIO III. 
 
 Of unknown Words. 
 
 "Unknown Words are remembred four 
 wayes. 
 
 " 1 . By the Harmonic of Words, which va- 
 rious Languages have one with another, as the 
 English word Riche, brings into my mind the 
 Hebrew word Riach, S^c. 
 
 " 2. From the sound or eccho, as England, 
 Isleland, Presbyterie, Presbyter, &c. 
 
 " 3. From the beginning of the words, as for 
 Back, Backwards. 
 
 D D
 
 302 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " 4. By way of Division, as for Parrat, a pare, 
 and a Rat. 
 
 " LECTIO nil. 
 
 De rebus Communibus, of businesses, and 
 ordinary imployments. 
 
 " As in the sun-shine the shaddowes follow 
 their bodies, so common businesses, and ordinary 
 imployments are easily figured out by their pro- 
 per Ideas, soone placed and certainly retained ; 
 as if a Shop-keeper would bare iu mind how many 
 yards of this or that stuflfe silke. Velvet, 8cc. he 
 hath, it is but fancying in the R. one of his ac- 
 quaintance clothed with a suit or cloake of the 
 same, and to hold the number of the yards in his 
 right hand, the figure of 40. for 40. yards and if 
 the price of it be 16. per yard, the figure of 16. 
 in his left hand.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 303 
 
 " LECTIO V. 
 
 De Memoria Concionum, To remember Ser- 
 mons heard. 
 
 " When wee heare a Sermon, foure Rules 
 are to be observed. 1. Diligent attention. 2. 
 Carefull observing the Division of the Parts. 
 3. Methodicail Collocation of the Parts in the 
 Places, of the R 4. serious Meditation on the 
 Ideas, If there be but two parts of the Text, 
 place the first in the Center of the South, and 
 the second in the Center of the North ; if three 
 parts, place them in the three Center Tables of 
 the East, South, and North ; if 4 in the fourth 
 Center Tables of the fourth Paries. If five 
 Parts, place the fift Part of the Text in the Cen- 
 ter of the Flore ; if yours be six Parts, Place the 
 sixth Part in the Center Table of the East W. 
 of the second R. if seven Parts, place the se- 
 venth in the Center T. of the South Paries, in 
 the second R. and so on ; after this manner, if 
 there should bee more Parts, leaving the matter 
 of every part to be expressed, first with its part, 
 so far as the places will reach in the Center 
 Table, which being filled, proceed unto the four 
 Tables of the four Angules, according to their 
 place and number.
 
 304 PRINCIPAX, S¥SfTBMS OI' 
 
 " LECTIO VI. 
 
 De raemoria Historiarum; to remember IKS' 
 tories. 
 
 " Histories be very eaaie to be remem- 
 bered : three rule* are to be observed. 
 
 " First, Propound unto your self the History, 
 and Authour of the History, and read some of 
 it in the morning, some of it in the afternoon, 
 and leisurely, and seriously imprint into yo«r 
 mind, the substance and chief passages of the 
 History by Ideas put in some apt Repository, and 
 you shall have it in readinesse by once or twice 
 thinking of it. 
 
 " Secondly, When you are to remember di- 
 rers Histories, tliey are all to be expressed by 
 their singular and proper Ideas, in places by 
 themselves ; After tiais manner you may remem- 
 ber Scripture Histories in six, seven, eight con- 
 claves;, for example, you may divide the book of 
 Genesis, into the History of Adam, Noah, 
 Jhraham, Isaac, Jacob, Joseph. 
 
 " Thirdly, If you desire leisurely, and with 
 exactness to learn a History, divide it into prin- 
 cipall parts, Avhich you may represent by certain 
 persons, giving of them convenient motion ; for 
 example, you may remember the History of
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOttY. 305 
 
 Joseph if you place the known men of the His- 
 tory, as Joseph, Jacob, Josephs Brethren, and 
 Pharaeh. 
 
 " LECTFO VII. 
 
 De meraorin Citationum ; to remember Scrip- 
 ture-Quotations. 
 
 " Ta k e for every book of the Bible some 
 freind or acquaintance of the name, near the 
 name, or for the name, as one John for the 
 Gospel of Saint John; one Genne for Genesis ; 
 some patient pious man for the book of Job, if 
 you place not one Job you know 8cc. Then 
 alwayes take the right hand for the Chapter, and 
 left hand for the Verse. 
 
 " LECTIO VIII. 
 
 For sure imprinting the Ideas of all things in 
 tlie memori). 
 
 " There be two sure directions: 
 " The first is called Paradise, which is the ap- 
 plying the most delightful! things and objects 
 to every of the five Sences, viz, what most afFect- 
 D d3
 
 306 PHINCIPAL SVSTEMS.OP 
 
 eth Hearing, Seeing, Smelling, Touching, Tast- 
 ing. 
 
 " The other is temed by the name of Hell, 
 which is the applying of the most odious and 
 loathfull objects to every of the five Senses. 
 
 " LECTIO IX. 
 
 Of Shorthand-writing. 
 
 " There is a kind of a Short-hand writing 
 in this Art, by the Ideas of letters objected to 
 the eye of the fancy, as the Alphabet is objected 
 to the sight of the bodily eye. Now for brevity 
 sake, using colours instead of vowels, the eye of 
 a nimble fancy will read any thing by Ideas thus 
 figured, as readily as if it were written in a book, 
 and will retain what thus is written. Now the 
 Ideas of this Alphabet be these, and such like as 
 yonr fancy best pieaseth to make choise of ; A. 
 a pair of Compasses so made, b. a Lute, B, a 
 Bow bent with an Arrow in it, C. an Horn, &c. 
 and so in like manner, take Instruments or any 
 kind of Ideas for the rest of the letters, which be 
 like the letters ; and instead of vowels use these 
 colours, A. for white, for E. blew, or green, 
 for /. red, for O black, for U. yellow."
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 307 
 
 ^4. UOenvre des Oeuvres, ou le plus 
 parfalct des Scimces Steganogra- 
 p/iiques, Paulmes, Armedelles, et 
 Lidlistes, par Jean Selot, 8". Lifg^ 
 du?ii, 1654. 
 
 This work is an enlargement of Lully' Art of 
 Memory, and is much superior to the original 
 system .* 
 
 o5. Faj£ Nova Arti Memorise localis 
 accensa, S'*. Lips. 1654. 
 
 This new torch does not shed a ' flood of light' 
 upon the subject of local memory, but its rays if 
 collected and concentrated, will serve to direct 
 the steps of the mnemonic student. 
 
 56. Atha?iasii Kircheri, Ars Magna 
 Sciendi in xii Lihros digesta, qna 
 nova et universali meihodo [l.ul- 
 lianci\ per arti/iciositm Comhi/ta- 
 tionum contextmn de omni re pro- 
 posita plurimis el prope iufiuitis 
 rationibus dispulariy omniumqMe 
 
 * Morliof, inToljliist,
 
 308 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 summaria qucedam cognitio compa' 
 rari potest) fol. Amstelod. 1669. 
 
 This curious work contains nearly five hiin^ 
 died closely-printed pages, and exhibits a com- 
 plete exposition of Lully's Art, as applied to the 
 various branches of human learning. [See No. 
 51.] 
 
 Athanasius Kircher, was born at Ful- 
 da, in the year IdOl, and was much celebrated 
 as a mathematician and philosopher. He com- 
 menced his noviciate in the Society of the Je- 
 suits, in his seventeenth year, among whom he 
 distinguished himself by a surprising proficiency 
 in literature and science. His works amount to 
 tzcenty-two volumes, /i>//o, eleven in quarlOy 
 and three in octavo!!! He died in the year 
 1680. 
 
 57. Variorum de Arte Mcmorice Trac- 
 talus Sex, 8°. Fraric. et Lips. 1678. 
 
 The authors of these six tracts are, 1. Lam> 
 bert Schenckel. 2. Johannes Austriacus. 3. 
 Hieronymus Marafiotus. 4. J. Spangenberg 
 Herd. 5. Fr. Mart. Ravellin. 6. De Memo- 
 ria natural! fovenda a Johan. Willisso. The 
 whole of which have been already noticed, ex- 
 cept the tract of Johannes Austriacus, and in
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 300 
 
 this riitre is nothing of a novel desGription, or 
 \vortby of a particular remark. 
 
 57* Tlie Tyivine Art of Memory : oVy 
 The Sum of the Holy Scriptures^ 
 delivered in Acrostic Verses, so 
 that the Contents of the ivhole Si- 
 Me, may readily be remembred ; and 
 in what Chapter, each particular 
 passage is recorded. Written ori- 
 ginally in Ltttine, hy the Reverend 
 and Learned John Shaw, and made 
 English hy Simon JVastel, 12°. 
 Lo?id. 1683. 
 
 * This rare and curious little volume, containing 
 more than 200 pages, is a translation from Shaw's 
 ' Bihliorum Sumrmda, seu argumenta singulo- 
 mm capitum Scripiurce CanoniccB utriusque 
 Testamenfi, ulphahetice distichis comprehenm, 
 8°. Lond. 1G21-23.' a work which we have not 
 been able to meet with. The present * Divine 
 Art' seems to have been first published in the 
 year 1623, under the title of * The true Chris- 
 tian's daily delight ; being a sum of every Chap- 
 ter of the Old and New Testament set down 
 alphabetically in English Verse, that the Scrip- 
 tures we read, may more happily be remembred, 
 etc. 13°. Lond. 1623/ This work was again
 
 310 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 published under the Title of ' Microbiblion ; or 
 the Bible's Epitome, etc. 1-2°. Lond. 1629/ 
 
 The Piolegomena to this metrical version and 
 abridgment of the Old and New Testament, are 
 two Epistles Dedicatpry ; one from T. B. and the 
 other from S. W. [Simon VVastell], and the 
 Translator's Preface to the reader from the same 
 person. All these are curious, and worthy pre- 
 servation, as they explain the plan and objects of 
 tlic work. 
 
 1. Epistle Dedicatory from T. B. 
 
 " To the Honoured 
 PAUL WENTWORTH, Esq. 
 
 Worthy Sir, 
 
 THIS laborious and useful Enchiridion was 
 first taught to speak Enghsh in the Free School 
 o/" Northampton, 5ei/?g translated by the painful 
 hand of Mr. Waste), quondam School-master 
 there, (whose Memory, like a Box of precious 
 Oyntment, still retains a szceet fragrancy iu those 
 Parts;) And was there by him humbly recom- 
 mended to the Patronage of a Noble Lord, 
 Baron Spencer of VVormleighton, especially 
 upon the account of his indulgent Favours to- 
 wards that eminent Seed-Piot -and Nursery of 
 Leaniins^ ; being now therefore again to salute 
 the Light in a new Edition, to whom more pro-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 311 
 
 perly should it address it self than to your 
 honour'd Name, zoho have been a Liberal Bene- 
 factor to the same School wherein it was so hap- 
 pily edurated, as to be rendred serviceable to 
 our Countrey men in general ; whereas before, 
 like some rare Jewel, whose value is knozvn to 
 none but the skilful Lapidary, it was justly ad- 
 mired, and made use of only by the Masters of 
 the Latin Tongue. 
 
 'Tis one of the greatest Uses, and most lauda- 
 ble Designs of Epistles Dedicatory, to pay the 
 Tribute of a Publick acknozdedgment to gener- 
 ous Vertue, and the noble Encouragers of Learns 
 ing. But since 'tis well known you as little 
 desire Commendations as you do greatly study 
 to merit them, and delight rather to be Good, 
 than told so ; jill J shall say, is, Thai by en- 
 dowing the Muses, you have made Learning 
 your Debtor, which never fails to be a grateful 
 Pay-master ; a7id that your example zeill confute 
 our Roman Upbraiders, and let them know, 
 That 'tis no Discouragement to Good Works, 
 to believe, they are not Meritorious, and that 
 Charity is not grown Cold, since she left off to 
 be Blmd. 
 
 " The Piece that here presents it self to our 
 view is indeed small, but may prove great in 
 use ; as it will help both to understand and re- 
 member what is contained in Sacred Scripture,
 
 312 PRIJfCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 and make Persons bettei^ acquainted with that 
 Blessed Book which alone can biing ics ac- 
 quainted with the Abniglit). 
 
 ** Tliat it may conduce to these ends; arid par- 
 ticularly, that your worlliy Selfe may, hy a 
 Belief, Adherence, and P ractise of those Divine 
 Dictates, enjoy an everlasting Memoiual iii tJie 
 Book of 'Lifi^, as the Prayer of 
 
 " Your Servant 
 
 " T. B." 
 
 'jl. Bpistle Dedicatory from Simon Wastell, 
 
 " TO THE 
 
 " Right Honourable 
 " His singular Good Lord, 
 
 « SIR ROBERT SPENCER, Knt. 
 Baron Spencer of Wormleighton : 
 
 " S. W. wisheth all Happiness Temporal and 
 Eternal. 
 
 " Hi^ht Honourable, 
 
 *' THE manifold Favours received from your 
 Lordship ever since my first placing in the Free- 
 School of Northampton, as also Your Honour's 
 late promised Assistance to help the said School 
 to tliat Right whereof it hath been these many 
 Years unconscionably defrauded, hath caused me
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S13 
 
 many tinles to wish lliat some good occasion 
 might be offered unto me, whereby I might wit- 
 ness not only unto your Honour, but also to 
 Posterity, how much I confess my stlf obliged 
 unto you for the same. And therefore, having 
 taken some Pains to turn the Contents of the 
 Bible briefly into English Meeter, for the help 
 of weak Memories, (being hicouraged thereunto 
 by the Persw'asion of divers of my godly learned 
 Friends, when they saw some Entrance made 
 thereinto.) Your Honour being in the very 
 Frontispiece of my dearest and worthily most ho- 
 noured Friends, I determined to dedicate the 
 same, together with my humble and best Ser- 
 vice, unto your Honour ; beseeching you, that 
 both my self and it, as also our poor wronged 
 School, may still be patronized and shrowded 
 under the shadow of your Honourable Pi otec- 
 tion : so will I not fear what my back Friends 
 can say to my Book, nor what they can devise or 
 do against my self ; so also shall yonr Honour 
 (in respect of the School) have tlse praise of the 
 Prophet, to be called, A Builder of that waste 
 place, and a Raiser tip of the Foundation 
 thereof ; a Repairer of that Breach, and a 
 Restorer of those Paths to dxvell in : And so be 
 honoured and esteeinedof me and all my Succes- 
 sors, as the second Founder thereof, and be pa- 
 
 E E
 
 314 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 rallel'd and equalized with Thomas Chipsetf^ 
 who was the first : For, 
 
 " Non minor est virtus quam quarere parfa 
 tueri. 
 
 'Tis no less pious, things lost to regain. 
 Than for first Fouaders to give to maintain, 
 
 " Vouchsafe I beseech you (my most honoured 
 Lord) as cheerfully to accept of this my poor 
 Present and Widows Mite (being a Pawn and 
 Pledge of my ever dutiful and thankful Mind, as 
 Artaxerxes is said to have received an handful of 
 Water froom the poor Country-man, whose 
 Ability, would afford no better a Gift. So will 
 I ever pour forth my Prayers unto the Almi^jhty 
 Preserver of Mankind, the Giver of every good 
 Gift, that he would be pleased to vouchsafe unto 
 your Honour, and to all your Honourable Pro- 
 geny, health of Body, length of Days, with In- 
 crease of Grace and Honour in this Life, and 
 the Fruition of eternal Blessedness in tlie World 
 to Gome. 
 
 " Your Honours 
 
 " ever to command, 
 
 " SIMON WASTELL.^
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 315 
 
 The Translators Preface to the Header. 
 
 "the 
 ^* Translator's Preface 
 
 " TO THE 
 
 "READER. 
 
 ^'NOT long ago (Christian Reader) there was 
 published a little Book in Latin Verse, called 
 Bibliorum Summula, set forth hy Mr. John 
 Shaw, (a man whom both for his Learning and 
 Gravity, as also for our old and antient ac- 
 quaintance (being School-fellows in Westmer- 
 lendffti/ years ago, and both o/* Queens Col- 
 ledge in Oxford) / did, and do much esteem and 
 respect.) This Book 1 perceived to be much 
 applauded of the godly learned Ministers, and 
 of many other Scholars that had seen and react 
 the same. And therefore, after tit nua aeui me 
 one, as a token of his love, I began to study 
 how I might teach it to speak English, being as 
 desirous to benefit the unlearned, as he teas the 
 learned; and having translated the Books of
 
 316 PRINCIPAL SYSTF.M^ O'^F 
 
 Moses, atid offered them to his and to otMf 
 learned and grave Ministers view and censures, 
 they did by their -persuanms so prick and 
 spurr me forward, that I could not give 
 over, untill (through God's Assistance) I 
 had gene through both the Old and Ne^ 
 Testaments. I confess I have not precisely 
 tyed my self to his Method and Manner, be- 
 cause the English tongue is far more copious 
 than the Latin ; but have taken liberty (ac* 
 cording as the contents of each chapter were 
 longer or briefer) to conclude them sometimes in 
 two, sometimes in four, sonfctimes in moie I)is- 
 ticks, with as much brevity (observing perspi- 
 cuity) as I could. I have purposely laboureci 
 to speak plainly to the capacity and understQudr 
 mo of the simple and ignorant, rather than b^ 
 Poetical strains to please the Ear, and the Eye 
 of the curious learned Headers. Thou hast alsQ 
 not only the contents of every Chapter set dowt^ 
 in order Alphabetically with figures to direct 
 thee unto them, but also Jigur^s in every line to 
 direct thee to the Verse where thou shfilt fnd 
 that presently which thou desire^t to knoWy 
 without reading over the whole Chapter, 
 Thou hast also a Chronolocfical observation 
 of times from Adam to CUrist, and from 
 Christ to Antichrist. T/\oii Imt also the name$.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 317 
 
 of all the Books of the Bible, as they follow 
 in order, 
 
 " Lastlt/, thou hast comforts and encourage- 
 ments against thefeare of death, called the old 
 mans A. B, C. If it shall -please thee (gentle 
 Header) when thou hast read or heard a Chap- 
 ter, to read over the contents in meeter once or 
 tzvice, thou mat/est be able to rehearse and sai/ 
 the said contents bi/ heart, and so in short time 
 be acquainted zvith the Historic of the ithole 
 Bible. If any be so zealously affected with the 
 knowledge of the Scriptures, as the Lord Crom- 
 well was, who (as Master Fox recordefh in the 
 Book of Martyrs, of the ffth Edition, page 
 1015, got by heart all the new Testament of 
 Erasmus his Translation in his jour net/ to Home, 
 he might in short time get by heart these brief 
 contents of the whole Bible. If therefore 
 the LkIW of God be tliy delight, (as it 
 was Davids) this little Book will be a com- 
 fortable companion, whether thou zmlksst 
 abroad, or staycst at home. And finally if 
 thou reappst any increase of saving know- 
 ledge, justifying faith, or holiness of lij'e. by 
 these my poor labours to the Edijicafion and 
 Salvation of thy Soul, have all that I de- 
 sire, saving that J would entreat thee to 
 Mscribe the Braise and Glori/ of all to God, 
 £ £ 3
 
 ai^ PIIINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 an4 to aford me thy charitable Cemurt^ 
 Well-wishingSj and Prayers. 
 
 ** Thine in any Christian service 
 
 '* that he can perform, 
 
 '< s. wr 
 
 A chronological table follows this preface, 
 from the Creation of Adam to the departure out 
 of Egypt, and the names of all the Bocks of the 
 Bible, with the number of the Chapters. The 
 specimens selected from the Divine Art, are 
 the whole boQk of Genesis, and the old manV 
 A. 3. C.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY, 
 
 319 
 
 1 . Old Testament. 
 
 Cx E N E S I S, 
 
 1 ALL things in i Heaven, iii Earth and ^ Seas, 
 
 our great ^ Jehovah makes : 
 ile bade them "^ grow and multiply : 
 and Man Gotls "^ Image takes. 
 
 2 BY him iu ^ six days all were ^ made ; 
 
 the 3 Sabbath, * Man af Dust : 
 
 Paradise", =* Wedlock ; Nain^s -" impos'd : 
 
 The Fruit forbear ^' Ma.i must. 
 
 3 CLosely the subtil ^ Serpent tempts; 
 
 thoy '^ eat ; are ^^ bare ; arraign'd : 
 The promli'd '^seed; their strife, earth ^"^ curst, 
 
 Man *^ punish'd, ^*^ cloath'd, •* disdain'd. 
 4. £)ViEj 3 Sacrifice the "* Brotiicrs bring: 
 
 fierce Cain good Abd " slays : 
 Cain *2 vagrant ujade, Lantech's ^■* great wrath : 
 
 Scth liv'd in holy days. 
 
 5 ]^Noch\, blest Enoch, is by God, 1987. 
 
 2* from Earth to Heaven translated : 
 The Patriarchs * lives : lines : ^ years, & death, 
 to ^ Noah's time related. 
 
 6 pAir forms make - matches : monstrous men 
 
 iu monstrous ^ Sin abound ; 
 ■This ^ brings the Flood but Noe and his, 
 (i'th Ark) ^ God's favour found.
 
 320 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 7 GOD 1 sends all pairs, and Noe repairs 
 *l656 unto the ^ Ark, wherein 
 
 They ' being shut, the ^ flood o'reiiows, 
 and drowns ^^ all flesh for sin. 
 
 8 HE^v'"s 1 wrath aswag'd, the flood is swa<'';l 
 
 the 1; Raven and the Dove : 
 Noah '^ goes forth, "^ doth sacrifice : 
 
 God 21 makes two leagues -^ of love, 
 p JiiTb vah 1 gives laws, of Increase, 
 
 2 Fear, * Murther, ' Meat, the Bo\y 
 Blood is * forbidden, N')e made '^^ drunk, 
 
 mock'd, *^ Cham accurs'd also. 
 lOKNov/ 1 here of Noe, • and of his ^i Sons 
 
 theinighty * Generations. 
 Ninirod first ^ Moarth : here begins, 
 
 dividing of the ^2 Nations. 
 1 1 LEarn here ^ one language, at the first : 
 *17S7 confusion ^ jBaif/* rent : 
 
 Mark ^'^ S'hem's and Tej-ah's ""^ Progeny, 
 
 to Harun ^^ Tf^yj^ went. 
 ISMAke hast, O ^ ^ira»j,* leave thy land ; 
 *2023 I will - preserve thy life : 
 
 A '° Famine ; Fear ^^ doth make him fain : 
 
 the King ^^ restores his Wife. 
 ISjXOW Lot -and he ^ richly - return; 
 
 but discord "^ parts them both ; 
 Lot's lot is ^° sinful Sodvm's Soil ; 
 to Hthron ^ Abram go'th. 
 140Ppos'd by four, i five Kings are slain, 
 *2033 Abraham ^* rescues * Lot : 
 
 Mdchizedek "^ receiveth Tythes ; 
 spoils, Abraham ^^ takes not.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SO.}. 
 
 15PRomise ' of Seed chears ' Abraham, 
 
 which he believes ^^ most true ; 
 But first his Seed '^ must Servants be, 
 
 And ^^' then their Foes subdue. 
 16'QUarrelIiiig Hagar now wilh * Child, 
 
 Her Mistress doth disdain : 
 The Angel bids "' she should submit. 
 
 And turn to her again. 
 17l^Enewed is the * Covenant sure : 
 
 their names are ^^ chang'd, tliey blest ; 
 Abraham liere is f i* circuuicis'd, +2440 
 
 hhmael^^j and the rest. 
 ISS^ra 12 for laughing is ^^ reprov'd ; 
 
 Sodoms *i Destruction shewn : 
 Abraham prays, for ^^'^ ten just men, 
 
 it may not be o "rethrown. 
 Ji)TWO Angels 3 Lot doth entertain, 
 
 Sodomites fiery ^-^ Slaughters : 
 Lot's Wife a s" Pillar of Salt is made : 
 
 he drunk, ^^ defiles his Daughters. 
 SOIJNwares the King takes - Abranis Wife ; 
 
 God him, he Abra^am ^ rates, 
 Restores, i' reproves^'', makes ^^ rich : he " prays. 
 
 Then heal'd are all Estates. 
 2 1 With Joy Sarah her « Son || embraced : 1| 2050 
 
 the 5 scotfing Lad and's Mother 
 Cast 1* out, distress'd, " refresh'd, Peace sworn 
 
 between the ^- King and th' other, 
 22UP Abraham rose to ^ slay his || Son : \\ 20()1 
 
 the Angel '^ holds his hand : 
 The Ram is ^^ offered up for hina: .^ 
 
 His Seed shall be ^'' as Sand.
 
 322 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 SSW^i'i Tears did 2 Abraham hew^iil 
 ^ 2085 the death of || Sara old : 
 
 Macijpelah bought to ^^ bury in, 
 
 V/liich Ephron to him sold. 
 QA>/^Braham • sends : the ^2 Servant prays . 
 11 208 8 asks " Water of the |i Maid : 
 
 Gives 22 gifts, brings ^^ home to Isaac her, 
 
 on ^vliom '''' his love is staid. 
 25BY ^ Kettir Abram had « moe Sons: 
 
 he ^ dies, and "* Isaac prays : 
 Two *2 Twins do strive : Birth right is sold, 
 il 21 13 and Jacob || Pottage ^ pays. 
 
 26QAnaan ^ promis'd, Famliie sent : 
 
 his Wife he '' Sister calls : 
 The ^ King reproves, he " rich, digs ^ Wells ; 
 
 Sons Wives him ^^ grieves and galls. 
 27r)Ini-sighted ^ haac Venson craves : 
 II 2140 II Son -^0 hunts, and comes too ^^ late : 
 
 Jacob "■' is blest : Esati ^^ doth weep : 
 
 And's Brother *^ deadly hate. 
 HSj^Sau's ungodly ^ Marriages : 
 
 Jacob is ^° sent away : 
 A Ladder ^^ sees, and ^^ consecrates 
 
 a stone -- whereon to pray. 
 SPpOr Rahel Jacob '^ seven years serves : 
 11 2185 bat '" Laban Lea \\ gives. 
 
 He *^ serves seven moe : Lea *' conceives, 
 
 but Rahtl 31 barren lives. 
 30G^'^'^'^ Rahel * gives Jacob her Maid : 
 
 so ^ Lea : Jacob '^ hir'd. 
 Joseph is 2* born : by Jacobs ^'' art, 
 
 his Sheep and Wealth admir'd.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 313 
 
 3lHEre Gods bids * Jacob ' home return, *2'205 
 
 the Idols 15 Rahd takes : 
 Lahan -'"' conii)laiiJs : cliarg d -* not to chide ; 
 
 at Gilead ** peace he makes. \^ 
 S2jAcob is by an ^ Angel clieer'd: 
 
 "^ fears ; ^ prays : confest ^° his faults : 
 Sends ^' g^fts, doth with an -* Angel strive, 
 
 and -5 ever after hanlts. 
 33K^eeIing faint Jacob * Esau meets : 
 
 they * weep, they kiss : he ^* takes 
 The gifts : i6 departs : a i' field is bought : 
 
 Jacob an ^o Altar makes. 
 34.LEwd Sliechem. - Dinah \\ doth deflour^ |1 2213 
 
 and craves her ^ for his Wife. 
 The People - circumcis'd are ^5 siain: 
 
 good Jacob ^^ fears his life. 
 35MAking an i Altar JacoVs, blest: 
 
 he - purgeth Idols all : 
 Reubens 22 foul Lust : a 20 Pillar pitcht : 
 
 a 8 threefold is Funeral*^. v' ^*ealth : 
 3o]\Ow ^ £A'aM*s Wives : ^Sons: ^^ Dukes and 
 
 ^ departure : ^ habitation : 
 Are here set down : •* mules are found out : 
 
 the ^^ Kings of Edom's Nation. 
 370F's Brethren ^ Joseph makes Complaint : 
 
 dreams ^ twice : Jacob ^^ deceiv'd : 
 Joseph is put -* into a pit : 
 
 is 2s sold : his Father ** griev'd. 
 38pLedge ^ sending : ^ Judu'i Wife and "* Sons : 
 
 he in to '" Thamar wentt: t2222 
 
 Would ** have her burnt : then "' clears her more: 
 two -" Twins to him are sent.
 
 324 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 39QUickly good Joseph is "* i>refcr'd : 
 
 of's Master much ^ approv'd : 
 +2227He flat 8 denies : his Mistriss ^* liesf: 
 
 he is °* in Bonds -^ belov'd 
 40REiiearse your ^^ Dreams : O Butler ! thou 
 
 a h appy ^^ Man shalt be : 
 Have me **in mind. O Baker ! mark, 
 
 the ^5 Gallows groans for thee. 
 4lSAd Pharaoh's ^eDrearas expounded are : 
 •12236 and Joseph '^^ grac'd as Kingt: 
 
 ■}2238Against the *« Dearth hoards up, ^^ sells Corn+: 
 
 His Wife two ^° Sons doth bring. 
 42TEN sent for ^ Com: -^ imprison'd are : 
 
 releast -^ and sent away : 
 For Bmjamm ^* a Pledge is pawn'd : 
 
 but him ^'^ doth Jacob stay. 
 43XJNwilling Jacob " sends his Son, 
 
 Ihey 1^ Presents bring to C(.urt : 
 Joseph ""^ confers : his -^ Brother calls : 
 
 and ^"^ feasts in ^^ wondrous sort. 
 44WIthin the Sack of ^- Benjamin, 
 
 is Cup and Coin (Ihey paid) 
 They fear, ^ confess : the Fathers Pledge, 
 
 for '*' Be7i. woidd now be staid. 
 45U^1^^" '"* Brethren ^ Joseph's known . 
 
 he • weeps, i s ^ sent before. 
 For Ffilher^ sends, the King" consents, 
 t2240 he goes, and "^ grieves t no more. 
 
 46W'Ith Jflfofr (after ^ Sacrifice) 
 
 God will ^ g» on the way. 
 Him Josqjh "^ meets and greets, they -^^vccp; 
 
 he tells them ^'^ what to say.
 
 AllTIFlCTAL MEMORY. 325 
 
 *7'^\Gc«l Jacob, with all his ^ Sons, 
 
 before ■" King Pharaoh stand ; 
 Goshen^^ : ail's bought save the -- Priests Land ; 
 
 bury * me '"^ in my Laud. *2255 
 
 48BLcst./cco5 sick ^ is visited; 
 "' Gives ii/^Ariwt '^ Praewiiuence : +22 SO 
 
 Blesseth-9: relates ^i the Pronuse made: 
 
 foietells -' their going thence ; 
 49CAl!inghis * Sons heblesseth ' them:' 
 
 dotli future things || declare : |j230O 
 
 Gives charge about his*^ Burial : 
 
 of Soul the Lord takes care. 
 50D01eful ^ lamenting msde '"^ for him : 
 
 Troops bring him to his Grave: 
 The Brotliers ^^ fear : he makes them "^ swear 2r>10 
 
 his Burial there to have. 
 
 2. THE OLD MANS A. B, C. 
 
 Ye Saints on Earth be of good cheer ^ 
 The Darts vj Death ye need not fear. 
 
 ^Ccount'st thou death a dreadful thing, 1 Cor, 
 
 Which hath by Christ now lost its siing ? 15. 55, 
 
 ^E sure, a;i Spring doth Winter blasts ; l Tlies. 
 
 So follows death, a life that lasts. 4. IJ. 
 
 (^Olfrn this corjxs and lay't in grave, 1 Cor, 
 
 A glorious rising it shall have. 15. 53. 
 
 DEbt due to God I hereby pay, o 77^, 
 
 By dying at th' appointed day. 4. Q^ 
 
 J r
 
 S26 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Heb. p.^Xceeding welcome Death's to me, 
 27. All men must dye, no man is free. 
 
 Rev. full happy man that dyes in Faith : 
 
 14. 13. His good works follow him, Christ saith. 
 P/«7.1.GLad are the Saints dissolv'd to be, 
 
 23. To live with Christ, his face to see. 
 Rev. 6. HE well may quake and fear to dye, 
 16'. That in his filthy sins doth lye. 
 
 1 Thes.yS Death is gain, it's gate of Life : 
 
 4. 14. Last night; asleep; and end of Strife. 
 
 2 Pet. K.Nown God's Ambassador to be, 
 
 1. 14. Death will I meet; I will not flee. 
 Ileb. 2.L0rd paramount of death hath kill'd 
 
 24. Death by Jiis death, and law fultill'd. 
 Psal. MUse oft upon thy latter end, (mend. 
 90. 12. The thoughts of Death will make thee 
 Rom. ]VOught but Christ's death doth sin remove 
 
 5. 8. Admire the greatness of his love, 
 2 Cor. QF earthly Pilgrims, death from God 
 5. 6'. Makes us possest of Heavens above. 
 1 Cor. PAss not for death, I daily die, 
 
 15. 31. Why then doth death me terrific ? 
 Eccles.QVict thy self, thy day of death, 
 
 7. 1. Excells that hour thou first took breath. 
 
 1 Pet. J^Eceivhig but our due deserts, 
 
 2. 20. Why then should death afflict our hears 
 Heb. P-S^th God from all eternity, 
 
 27. Hath so decreed that all must dye. 
 
 1 Cor. THat deadly foe (last foe of all) 
 15. 2G. At last shall have a deadly fall. 
 Rom. yAnquiahed death I wish were nye, 
 7.24. It ends a Christians misery.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 527 
 
 John Shaw, according to A. Wood,* was 
 a Westmoreland man born, and became a student 
 of Queen's College, Oxford, in 1579, at the 
 age of U); he took one degree in Arts, left the 
 College, and at length became Vicar of Oking, 
 or Woking, in Surrey, where he was had in 
 esteem, by many for his preaching, and by some 
 for his Poetry. His works, in addition to that 
 already mentioned, were: (1.) The blessedness 
 of Mary, Mother of Jesus : a Sermon on Luke 
 i. ver. 28, and 45, 8°. Lond. I6I8. (2.) Th« 
 comfort of a Christian, by Assurance of God's 
 Love to him, written in verse. (3.) The Com- 
 plaints of a Sinner : the comfort of our Saviour — 
 in verse also. These two last are printed with 
 the Seimon. 
 
 Simon Wast ELL, was, according to Wood,-}- 
 a Westmoreland man born, and descended from 
 those of his name, living at W^astellhead in the 
 same county. He entered as a student of 
 Queen's College, Oxford, in 1580, or there, 
 abouts, and took one degree in Arts five years 
 after; at which time being accounted a great pro- 
 ficient in Classical Learning and Poetry, he was 
 made Master of the Free-School at Northamn- 
 
 Athenaj Oxon. vol. i. col. 487. t Ibid.
 
 528 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS or 
 
 ton, whence by his sedulous endeavours, many 
 were sent to tlie Universities. He seems to have 
 been a feilow-sludent of Shaw, and on terms of 
 strict intimacy with him. 
 
 58. Ars Magna et admirahilis Specimi- 
 nibns variis coiifirmala, qua Pan- 
 dectarum Titnli eorumque prcicipua 
 materia ope Figiirarmn emhlemati- 
 canim, brevissinie, jiicunde et tena^ 
 citer, memoria imprimi, Jirmiter 
 contineri, et opportune in usum 
 transferri possunt : In maximum 
 comrnodum legis tStudiosi, 8**. Lvgd. 
 Bat. 1695. 
 
 This anonymous work contains an ingeniou* 
 and very full application of the local memory, to 
 the fifty books of the Roman Pandects, and to 
 the various titles and subdivisions of each book. 
 To the Preface is appended the signature of 
 R. C. The title is a coniplete bill of fare, and 
 is a good model for all those who render this 
 ' annonce' a table of contents, instead of a title- 
 page. 
 
 59. Copia Speciminvm Ariis Memorio'^
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 5G& 
 
 BnLvellcc, Leodii, Tornaci, et alibi 
 editorum, 8". Leodii, 1697. 
 
 This small pamphlet contains an account of 
 the different exhibitions of L. Schenckel, at the 
 various cities enumerated in the title. 
 
 60. Ars 3Iemorice vindicata, auctore D- 
 Jo. Srancaccio, accessit Artijicium 
 Poeticum ad Scripiuras Divinas 
 in jjvomptii habendas memoriterque 
 ediscendas accommodatum, 8". Pn- 
 normi, 1702. 
 
 This is an excellent and useful little work j 
 for, in addition to an explicit detail of the prin- 
 ciples of the art, it includes instances of wonder- 
 ful memory, in particular individuals, from the 
 time of Adam, to A. U. J 690, and a list of 
 writers on the subject. To neitlier of these 
 sources, however, are we indebted for any of the 
 materials in the present work, not having been 
 able to procure more than a transient inspection 
 of this rare and curious volume, 
 
 1 . The Art of Memory. A Treatise 
 uscjulfor all, especially such as are 
 
 F p 3
 
 330 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Ot 
 
 to speak in Publick. Hy 3Iarms 
 D'Assigmy, B. D. 8°. Lond. 
 1706. 
 
 This is the third edition of D'Assigny,* and 
 is ornamenled with an * elegant engraving on 
 copper,' representing Jupiter with his fulinen 
 reclining on a cloud ; — the winged Hermes i» 
 seen flving with a caduceus, and a scroll in 
 his hands, on which is inscribed jlrs Me/no- 
 ria. Three pedestals, the centre one circular, 
 and the others square, occupy the fore ground of 
 this beautiful picture. On one pedestal stands 
 Minerva; in the centre llcrcules AngUcus; 7\nd 
 the remaining pedestal is adorned by the Graticc 
 Decentes, in their usual costume. At the 
 foot of these illustrious personages are seen eleven 
 * human forms divine,' from whose ears issue 
 eleven threads or lines, all meeting in one point, 
 ■ — the mouth of Hercules Anglicits!!! 
 
 We have been thus particular in describing 
 this frontispiece, in the hope that some one who 
 is ' pretty far gone' with tiie mania o^ illustration j 
 may be induced to seek for it ; for, here, he might 
 certainly indulge his favourite pursuit without a 
 chance of injuring the book ; a rare occurrence 
 in the an'nais of the print-ferret. It is not, per- 
 
 TUe first edition -vvas published ih 1697.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 331 
 
 haps, known to all our readers, that a passion for 
 books illustrated or adorned with numerous 
 prints, exists to a very great extent ; and, that 
 tlie most valuable books are deprived of their 
 engravings merely to illustrate some favourite 
 production, by the portraits of the person* 
 named in it. Mr. Dibdin, in his Bibliomaniay 
 p. 665, notices some curious examples. Seven 
 hundred [>rints were collected by a lady to illus* 
 trate six cviAPTEUsm Genesis: and 650 por- 
 traits by anotlier person to ornament Scott's edi- 
 tion of Drydcn. The sum of ^GOOO, u'as 
 expended by the late Mr. Crowhs in illustrating 
 Pennant's London^ which book he bequeathed, 
 in the true spiiit of virtu, to the British Mu- 
 seum. 
 
 The address ' To the Young Students of both 
 Universilifs,' which precedes this i\rt df Me- 
 mory, we recommend earnestly to the present 
 race of Oxouiaiis and Cantabs, as it is peculiarly 
 applicable to their present state. 
 
 The following are the contents of this vo- 
 lume. 
 
 " Chap. 1. Of the Soul or Spirit of Man. 
 " Cliap. 2. Of Memory, its Seat, and Excel- 
 lency. 
 
 " Chap. 3. The Temper or Disposition of ihs
 
 S32 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Body best and worst for Memory, with the na- 
 tural Causes and Reasons of both. 
 
 " Chap. 4. Some General and Physical Ob- 
 servations and Prescriptions for the remedying, 
 strengthning, and restoring a Memory injur'd by 
 the ill Temper of the Body, or the Predominancy 
 of one of the four Qualities in the Brain. 
 
 *' Chap. o. What is very much prejudicial to 
 the Faculty, Habit, and Practice of Memory. 
 
 " Chap. 6. Of such Natmal Things as may be 
 assisting to, and may comfort Memory, from the 
 Procurement of Nature, and the Contrivance of 
 Art. 
 
 " Chap. 7' Rules to be observ'd for the Acts 
 or Practice of Memory. 
 
 " Chap. 8. Rules to be observ'd to help our 
 Remembrance of things that we desire to pre- 
 serve in Mind. 
 
 <' Chap. 9. Of Artificial or Fantastical Me- 
 mory or Remembrancje." 
 
 This book upon the whole (the dedication ex- 
 cepted) is rather dull, and not very profitable. 
 In the fifth chapter, at the fifteenth section, we 
 are told that " all such ^lotions of the body as 
 cause giddiness or swimming in tliehead, are de- 
 structive to the memory. Therefore zee should 
 have a sped. I care to avoid falls froiti high 
 PLACES, turning round [as the Dervishes we
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 333 
 
 suppose] or Blows tipon the hinder part of the 
 Head a r 
 
 The tilth chapter abounds with receipts for 
 ' comforting the memory' takeu principally from 
 the early writers on this subject. A few of these 
 we shall extract for the benefit of such as are in- 
 clined to use them. 
 
 " I. Sneezing Ponders. 
 
 " Sneezing Pouders well prepared are of great 
 use, but may prove pernicious if any thing be 
 offensive to the Brain in the Composition. Dried 
 Leaves of Marjoram, Sage, Rosemary, the Roots 
 of the Herb Vyrethrnm, of Lingwert perfumed 
 with Musk, are a choice sneezing Pouder, to 
 comfort the Brain and Memory. And the Herb 
 Galangal well dried, and reduced to Pouder, 
 is very useful to strengthen Memory. Another 
 -good sneezing Pouder may be made of Pepper, 
 with the Herb Condisi, white Ling wort, and 
 Lillies, with some perfumed Gums. But we 
 must have a care not to offend Nature by a too 
 frequent use of these or other Snuffs, zehich mar/ 
 prejudice the Brain. 
 
 " J. Plaisters to prevent a decay of Memory. 
 " Divers Plaisters, \\hen we find a decay in 
 Memory, may be useful for helping the Brain : 
 As a I^laister made of Mustard-seed, and clapt
 
 354 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 to the hinder part of the Head, or the Oil of 
 Mustard-seed when apply 'd to that part. Or if 
 you please to be at greater Expence, take Flo- 
 rentine Lillies, the Herbs Hernwdaciyle and 
 Pyrethrum, leaves of tiie wild Vine, Pigeon- 
 dung, Mustard-seed, of each an Ounce; mix 
 them with Moschata Nuts, Spice, Cloves, Cina- 
 mon, and Pepper, and make a Plaister ; which 
 you may likewise apply to the hinder part of the 
 Head, and you will find it increase and help Me- 
 mory. And a certain famous Author assures us, 
 that the Gall of a Partridge anointed about the 
 Temples does wonderfully strengthen the Seat of 
 Memory ; as also the Brains of Birds and Fowls 
 roasted, and chiefly of Hens are not useless for 
 the same purpose. 
 
 *' 3. A Pouder for the Memory. 
 
 " Take the Seed or Leaves of Ormitium, and 
 reduce them to Pouder, and every Morning take 
 a small quantity of a Glass of Wine. And they 
 say that the Shavings or Pouder of Ivory pro- 
 duce the same effect, namely, the corroborating 
 of the Brain and Memory ; as likewise a Grain 
 «f white Frankincense taken in a Draught of Li- 
 quor when we go to Bed, dries up the offensive 
 Humors of the Brain. And it has been observ'd, 
 that the Application of Gold to that Sutura, 
 which divides the Seat of Memory from tlie other
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 335 
 
 Closets of the Brain, strengthens the weakness 
 of the Heady drives await/ all Puin, and has 
 a wonderful Effect on the FacuUy of Me- 
 mory. 
 
 " 4. Jn Ointment. 
 
 " A famous Author tells us, That a firm and 
 constant Memory, and quick Apprehension, 
 many great Men have used this Medicine. Take 
 Roots of wild Bugloss, Roots of Valerian, or 
 Setwall, of each four Ounces ; Roots oi Rue 
 two Ounces; reduce them to very fine Powders: 
 then take Juice of Ey-bright, Clary mid Verven, 
 ofearh four Ounces: strain iheJuices well throi:gh 
 a Clolh; then mix the Juices togei!:er, and the 
 Ponders apart : aftowards take the Essence of 
 Anacardi, or Cassia-nuts once Ounce, and make 
 a Ponder as before. Also take Bird's Tongue, 
 i. e. Ash^keys^ and make a very fine Pouder : 
 Then mix all the foresaid things together, viz. 
 the Ponders and the Juices><nid take an Earthen 
 Pot glaz'd, and set it on the Fire, putting into it 
 some Bears Fat, and suffering it to melt by de- 
 grees ; then throw in the said Ponders, mixing 
 tlieni with the Juices, always adding some of the 
 foresaid Fat, till a very thiii Ointment be made ; 
 xcithwhiih anoint the lentpfes, Fore/wad, and 
 top of the Head touards the Nape, And this
 
 336 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 do three or four times a year, and continue anoiut- 
 ing more or less as there is occasion. 
 
 " 5. A Lye, or Wash for the Head. 
 
 " Again, another Experiment may be try'd for 
 the same purpose. Take eight Glasses of com- 
 mon Water, leaves of Ivy and Sticas, of each a 
 Pound and a half; put them together in the 
 Water to boil till the Water be almost consum'd; 
 afterwards let it be well strain'd and squeezed, 
 and put into it a small quantity of Turpentine 
 washM with Rose-water : Then wash the Head 
 with a good l.ye, and after drying it, anoint with 
 the aforesaid Liquor the Temples and hinder part 
 of the Head. 
 
 " (i. A perfumed Apple for comforting the 
 JBruin and Memory. 
 
 " Take Laudanum, Lignum Aloes, Storax, of 
 each a Dram ; Cloves, Nutmegs, sweet Basil- 
 seed, of each half a Dram ; with Rosewater, in 
 which a small quantity of Mosch and Aniber- 
 grisehas been dissolv'd, make an Aj)ple. 
 
 "7' Jo strengthen (he Memorj/ or resiore it 
 when lost. 
 
 *' To strengthen the Memory, <ir restore it 
 when lost; or against Giddiness: Take Fiose- 
 niary, Borage, Chamotnile, Violets, Roses, of 
 each an Ounce; the Leaves of Laurel, Maijo-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 337 
 
 ram, Sage of each two Ounces; chop them all 
 togetlier, and put tlieni in the best Wine, and after 
 a day's time distil thro a glass Alembic, and 
 keep the distilled Liquor; in which put of sweet- 
 scented Turpentine a Pound, white Frankin- 
 cense eight Ounces, Mastic, Myrrh, Bdellium, 
 Anacardi, or Cassia nuts, of each four Ounces : 
 beat them altogether, and so let them stand for 
 five days, mix'd with the Distillation in a cover'd 
 Vessel. Afterwards distil with a quick Fire till 
 you get an Oyl out of them, which keep close 
 shut up in a glass Bottle well stnpp'd with Wax 
 and Parchment. For use, take as much of it as 
 would ly in a large nutshell down the Mouth, and 
 anoint also ihe Memorial parts, viz. the hinder 
 part of the Head, and all tlie Parts before-men- 
 tion'd. You wiUJind it to be veri/ good. 
 
 " 8. Pills for the use of Memory. 
 
 " Take Chubebs, Calamint, Nutmegs, Cloves, 
 of each a Dram and a half ; the best Frankin- 
 cense, choice !Myrrh, oriental Ambergrise, of 
 each a Scruple and a half; Mosch, five Grains : 
 with Moijoram-water make Pills. Take one in 
 going to Bed, and two at Sun-rising, five hours 
 before Meat ; in the Winter every Month, in the 
 Spring and Fall more seldom." 
 
 The chapter which treats * of Artificial or 
 
 G O
 
 358 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Fantastical Memory or Remembrance' is almost 
 a literal translation from Grataroli. 
 
 Marios D'Assigny was the Author of Rheto- 
 rica Anglorum, vel Exercitationes Oratoritc in 
 Rhetoricam Sacram et Communem. Quibus 
 adjiciuntur quaduni Regula ad imhecilles Me- 
 morias corrohoraudas, 1*2°. Lond. l6y9- In 
 this work, a chapter is devoted to the subject of 
 memory, in which, as might be expected, a great 
 part of his Art of Memory is * done into Latin.* 
 
 62. Ars Memoriop, sive clara et perspi- 
 
 cua 3Iethodiis excerpendi Nuclewn 
 rerum ex omnium Scientiartnn mo- 
 numenlis a R. P. Thoma Eriiardt, 
 8". August. Vindel. 1715. [Part. iv. 
 in 3 T'om. 
 
 63. Pratique de la 3Iemoire Artijicielle 
 pour apprendre et pour retenir 
 VHistoire Saiute, Vllistoire Eccle- 
 siastique et VHistoire de FraucePar 
 le Pere Bnffier, 8". Paris, 3 torn. 
 1719-1723. 
 
 This work is intended to facilitate the acqui- 
 sition of Ciironology and universal History, and 
 the system is at once ingenious and simple. It
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY, 339 
 
 is composeil in the form of a dialogue, and the 
 BUlhor has compressed, into verse, the principal 
 events and names of the different Sovereigns. 
 The following are specimens of his verses. 
 
 The first age commencing from the Deluge. 
 
 Le iwtit fils de Cam et qui ftit fils de ctius 
 Est prince a Babilone et Neinbrod dii Belus, 
 Qiiaad se toiiue sous lui I'otat de I'Assivie, 
 Vienent ceux des Cliiaois d'Egipte et de Scithie. 
 Ninive avant deux niille est en Assur funded, 
 Et ponr roi Sicion choisit Egialee. 
 
 First part cf the history of France. 
 
 Ses Loix en qiiatre rens Pharaniond introduit 
 Glodiou Chevelu q«' Aetius vaiiiquil, 
 Merov^e avec lui combatit Attila. 
 Cliikleric fuit chasse, puis on le rapela. 
 Clovis vain a SoJBsens, fait v«hi detre Oir^tien: 
 Defait Gombaut et tue Alaiic Aricu. 
 
 Vol. 1. contains Sacred History and Chrono- 
 logy, Profane History and the His^tory of France. 
 Vol. II. A system of Universal Geography, for 
 which verses are employed, as in the first volume. 
 Vol. HI. includes Clironology and History, from 
 the birth of Christ to the time of IJiiffier's 
 publicatii>n ; Ecclesiastical liistory, and Uie his- 
 tory of llie princip;tl Slak-s of Europe. 
 
 Claude de Buffi ik was Lorn cf French 
 parents, in Poland, in the year I66I ; he became
 
 340 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 a Jesuit in 1 679- After having travelled to Rome, 
 he fixed his residence in the capital of France, and 
 died in the year 1737, at Paris, in the College 
 of the Society, aged 76 years. He has left be- 
 hind him jnauy works, besides that already no- 
 ticed, the principal of v\hich have been collected 
 and published in his Cours des Sciences pa)' des 
 priucipes nonveaiix et sirr-pfe, pour former le 
 language, respnt et le caur, fol. 1732. The 
 style of Buffier, in his verse and prose writings, 
 is tnore plain than elegant. He was a virtuous 
 man, and very laborious in his studies.* 
 
 64. Memoria Technica: or, a New 
 JMetiiod of Artificial Memory^ ap- 
 plied to and exemplified in Chrono- 
 logy, History, Geography, Astro- 
 nomy ; also Jewish, Grecian and 
 Roman Coins, Weights and Plea- 
 sures, etc. HyHichardGrey, D. D. 
 8°. Lond. 1730. 
 
 The ninth edition of this book has been just 
 published, to which, and to the eighth edition 
 are appended Lowe's Mnemonics, [see No. 65.] 
 In 1802, a thin pamphlet was published, enti- 
 tled, Technica Memoria, by M. W. Johnes ; it 
 
 * Diet. Hist. Art. Buffitr.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S41 
 
 consists merely of extracts from Grey. Tn the 
 Mont hi If Magazine for June 1S0.5, Dr. Lettice 
 insertec] some proposals for publishing his * Aeay 
 Memoria Techuica,' but we cannot learn tliat 
 diis work was ever put to press. It was intended 
 to embrace a number of tables, in chronology, 
 geo^craphy, &c. on the plan of Dr. Grey, b\it 
 with considerable improvements.* 
 
 In order to enable those who feel so inclined to 
 practise Dr. Grey's System, we shall extract from 
 the fourth edition of the Memoria Technica 
 published in his life time, so much as is neces- 
 sary foi" the purpose. 
 
 " The principal Part of this Method is briefly 
 this; To remember any thing in History, Oiro- 
 nology. Geography, S^c. a Word is form'd, the 
 13eginni«!g whereof being the first Syllable or 
 Syllables of the Thing sought, does, by frequent 
 Repetition, of course (haw after it the latter 
 Part, which is so contriv'd as to give the Answer. 
 Thus, in History, the Deluge happened in the 
 Year before Christ two Thousand three Hun- 
 dred forty eight ; this is signified by the Word 
 
 * To this list may be added a work auiiounced some 
 time since, entitled Keminiscenlia ; or, the Memory's 
 Assistant, by Samuel Needham, to be conipietcd in throe 
 parts, ou tlie plan of Di; Grey. 
 
 G g3
 
 342 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS Of 
 
 Deletok: Del standing for Deluge, and etok 
 for 2348. In Astronomy, the Diameter of the 
 Sun (So LIS Diameter) is eight Hundred twenty 
 two Thousand one Hundred and forty eight 
 English Miles; this is signified by Soldi-/cc(^-a/H, 
 Soldi standing for the Diameterof the Sun, ked- 
 afei, for 822,148 ; and so of the rest, as will be 
 shewn more fully in the proper Place. How 
 these Words come to signifie these Things, or 
 contribute to the Reraenibring of them is now to 
 be shewn. 
 
 " The first Thing to be done is to learn exactly 
 the following Series of Vowels and Consonants, 
 which are to represent the numerical Figures, so 
 as to be able, at Pleasure, to form a Technical 
 Word, which shall stand for any Number, or to 
 resolve a Word already formVl into the Number 
 which it stands for. 
 
 « 
 
 e 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 au 
 
 01 
 
 ct 
 
 ou 
 
 y 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 d 
 
 t 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 
 P 
 
 k 
 
 n 
 
 z 
 
 " Here a and b stand for 1, e and d for 2, i 
 and t for 3, and so on. 
 
 " These Letters are assign 'd Arbitrarily to the 
 respective Figures, and may very easily he re- 
 meniber'd. The first five Vowels in order natu- 
 rally represent 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The Diphthong 
 au, being composed of a 1 and u 5 stands for 6 ;
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 343 
 
 oi for 7, being composed of o 4 and i 3 ; ou for 
 9, being composed of o 4 and u 5. The Diph- 
 thong ei will easily be remember'd for c/ght, 
 being the Initials of the Word. In like Manner 
 for the Consonants, where the Initials could 
 conveniently be retain'd, they are made use of to 
 signifie the Number, as t for three, /'for four, s 
 for six, and w for nine. The rest were assigned 
 without any particular Reason, unless that pos- 
 sibly p may be more easily remembred for 7 or 
 Septem, k for 8 or oKtcj, d for 2 or duo, h for 
 1 , as being the first Consonant, and / for 5, being 
 the Roman Letter for 50, than any others that 
 could have been put in their Places. 
 
 *• The Reasons here given, as trifling as they 
 are, may contribute to make the Series more 
 readily remembred ; and if there was no Reason 
 at all assign'd, I believe it will be granted that the 
 Representation of nine or ten numerical Figures 
 by so many Letters of the Alphabet, can be no 
 great Burthen to the Memory. 
 
 " The Series therefore being perfectly Icarn'd, 
 let the Reader proceed to exercise himself in the 
 Formation and Resolution of Words in this 
 Manner. 
 
 Id 325 381 1921 1491 1012 536 7967 
 *z tel feib aneb afna lybe uts pousoi 
 
 431 553 680 &c. 
 Jib lut seiz &c.
 
 341 PHINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 *' And as in Numeration of larger Sums, 'tis 
 usual to point the Figures -at their proper Pe- 
 riods of Thousands, Millions, Billions, &c. for 
 the jnore easy Keading of them, as 172,102.795 
 one Hundred seventy two Miiiions, one Hun- 
 dred two 'riiousar.d, seven Hundred nitiety five ; 
 so, in forming a V^-^ord for a Number consisting 
 of many Figurts, the Syllables may be so conve- 
 niently divided, as exactly to answer the End of 
 Pomting. Thus in the Instance before us,, 
 which is the Diameter of the Oi bit of the Earth 
 in Eiig/ish Miles: The Technical Wojd is 
 Dorbter6o/c/ cize-poul ; the Beginning of the 
 Word Dorbter, «tauding f(ir tl»e Diameter of the 
 Orbit of the Earth, (Diameter ORBUag TERiae) 
 and the remaining Part of it boid-aze-poul for 
 the Number 172,^02,79,5. 
 
 *'jY. B. Always remember that the Diphthongs 
 are to be consider'd but as one I etter, oi rather, 
 as representing only one Figure. Note also, 
 that 1/ is to be pronounced as w, for the more 
 easily distinguishing it from /, as sijcl=i502, pro- 
 nounce swid, tiip= 307 pronounce ?av/j. 
 
 ** The Reader will observe that the same Date 
 or Number may be signified by different Words, 
 according as Vowels or Consonants are made 
 Choice of, to represent the Figures, or to begin 
 the Words with, as 
 
 325 tcl, or idu, l5t h'lf, or A/o, or «(/", or al: 93,451 
 ni-ola, or oul-/ub, or ni-Jiaf or ciU-olb, &c.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 345 
 
 " This Variety gives great Room for Choice, in 
 the Formation ot Words, of such Terminations 
 as by iheir Uncommoriness are most likely to be 
 remembred, or by any accidental Relation or 
 Allusion they may have to the Thin^ sought. 
 Thus the Year of the World in which .Eneas is 
 supposed to have settled in Italt/ is 2H'24 ; but 
 as this may be expressed either by ekej or deido, 
 I chuse rather to join deido to Mneas, and make 
 the Technical Word J^n^tdeido than JEnckef, 
 for a Reason which I think is obvious. Thus 
 King John began his Reign A. D 199- ("ne 
 Thousand being understood to be added, as I 
 shall shew hereafter ;) but as this may be ex- 
 press'd by anoit, or boun, or ami, I make 
 Choice of the last, for then 'tis but calling him 
 Jann instead of John, and you have the Time 
 almost in his Name. Thus Inachus King of 
 Argos began his Reign in the Year before 
 Christ 18,3(); wiih u very small Variation in the 
 Spelling, 'tis his Name li\akiis. But this by the 
 Way. 
 
 " To go on with our Art ; 'tis further to be ob- 
 serv'd, that z and y being made Use of to repre- 
 sent the Cypher, where many Cyphers meet to- 
 gether, as in 1000, 1000000, &c. instead of a 
 Repetition of azyzyuj, which could neither be 
 easily pronounced nor remember'd, g stands for 
 Hundred, th for Thousand, and m for Million.
 
 346 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Thus ag will be 100, ig 300, oug 900, &c. 
 ath 1000, olh 4000, otfio or othf 4004, peg 
 7200, <//'g 2300, lath 51000, am 1000000, 
 azmoth 10.004,000, sumus 65.000,056, /om»i 
 59000,000, &c. The solid Content of the 
 Earth (TERiae M AON rruHo) is two Hundred 
 sixty four 'J'housand, eight Hundred titty six 
 Millions of Cuhick Miles; this is expresfj'd by 
 the Word Ter-magnit-eso-/r/««W2 ; Termagnit 
 standing for TVrras Magnitudo ; tso-klauin for 
 264,856,000,000 the Number of Cuhick Mi!es» 
 " It w ill be .sumctnues also of Use to be able to 
 set down a Fraction, winch may be done in the 
 following Manner : Let r be the Separatrix 
 between the Numerator and the Denominator, 
 the first coining hejore, the othf r after it ; as 
 iro I urp -. puurag t4 or ,79 north ^^^ o*" >094 
 &c. Where the Numerator is I, or Lhiit, it 
 need not be expressed, but begin the Fraction 
 with r, as \ re, ^ ri, | ro, &.c. So m Deci- 
 mals, ,01 or ,5b> rag ,00 i or ,-oVo f(ith- 
 
 1 . Chrohology and History. 
 
 " Th e Ages of the World before our Saviour's 
 Time are by Chronologers generally divided into 
 Six : The Fir^i from the Creation to the Deluge ; 
 the Second from the Deluge to the Call of J bra- 
 ham, &c. according to the following Periods :
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOllY. 347 
 
 Before Christ. 
 
 1. Tlie CReation of the World 4004 
 
 2. The universal DfiLuge 2348 
 
 3. The Call of ABiaham 1921 
 
 4. EXodus, or the Departnre of the Is- 
 
 raelites from Egypt 1491 
 
 5. The Foundation of Solomon's TEMple 1012 
 
 6. Cyrus, or the End of the Captivity 536 
 The Bnth of Christ. 
 
 " All this is express'd in one Line, as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Cro<A/"Dele/ofc AbanfJ Exo/no Temhtjle Cyruts, 
 
 Cr denotes die Creation, othf 4004, Del the 
 Deluge, Ab the Calling of Abraham, Ex Exo- 
 dus, Tem the Temple, and Cjr Cyrus. The 
 Technical Endings of each represent the respec- 
 tive Year according to the Rules already laid 
 down. 
 
 " I shall explain two Lines more. 
 
 Nicsilcoii kr'xtel, Codathe mdiieih, Ephcethe-nes/i. 
 Challemar-eudio/a, Covijtist-O/wt, C-^^copo-nionscir. 
 
 " These two Lines are a short History of the 
 first Six General Councils ; and every Syllable 
 has its distinct Signification. The first represents 
 the Place where it was held ; the second shews 
 who was Pope at that Time ; the third under
 
 S48 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 what Emperor ; the fourth against what Here- 
 tick ; ihejjf'ih, in what Year of our Lord. Thus 
 the first Word is Nicsilcon antel. Nic denotes 
 the Council of Nice, sil Pope SiLvester, con 
 the Emperor CoNstantine, ari the Heretick 
 Arius, tel the Year 325. The second Word is 
 Codathe msiteib ; Co denotes the Council of 
 Constantinople, da Pope DAmasus, the the 
 Emperor THEodosius, ma the MAcedonians, 
 teib 38 1 . The third is Ephcethe-nes^T* ; Epli 
 the Council of EpHesus, ce Pope Cfilestine, the 
 the Emperor *rHEodosius, nes the NEStorians, 
 fb the Year 431. The fourth is Challemar- 
 euSio la ; Chal the Council of CLALcedon, le 
 Pope Leo, mar the Emperor MAiician, eudi the 
 Errors of Eutyches and Dioscorus, ola the Year 
 451. The fifth is Covijust-O/?/? ; Co stands for 
 Constantinople, vi Pope Vigilius, just the Em- 
 peror J usTinian, O the Errors of Origen, lut 
 the Year 553. The sixth C-i^copo-monseiz ; 
 C stands again for Constantinople, ag for Pope 
 Aoaiho, copo the Emperor COnstantine PO- 
 gonatus, mon the IVloNothelites, seiz the Year 
 680. 
 
 • TlieodosiMs Junior.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 540 
 
 ** The Regal Table of England since the Con- 
 quest, and some of the most remarkable 
 Princes before it. 
 
 Bef. Christ. 
 
 CASiBELanus chosen chief Commander by 1 
 the Britains ai^aiiist the Invasion of Julius > 52 
 Ccesar [CasibelMrf] } 
 
 Aft. Christ. 
 
 Queen Boa Bicea, the British Heroine, be-") 
 ing abused by the Romims, raises an > 67 
 Army and kills 7000 [BOddaup] 3 
 
 VoRTiGeni who invited the Saxons to the ") 
 Assistance of the Britains against the V 446 
 Scots and Picts [Vortij!;/os] j 
 
 HENcist the Saxon, who erected the King-") 
 dom of Kent, the first of the Heptarchy > 455 
 [He.ig/>//J 3 
 
 Kin? ARTHur famous for his powerful Re- ^ 
 sistance and Victories over tlie Saxons > 514 
 [Arth/«/-] 3 
 
 EcBKrt who reduced the Heptarchy, and ^ 
 was first crown'd sole Monarch of £ng- > 828 
 land [Egbe/ifA:] J 
 
 ALFRF.d, who founded the University of) 
 
 Oxford [Mfrekpe] | ^'^ 
 
 Can ute the Dane [CanJaw] lOlS 
 
 Edward the Con FKSsor [Confes/I'] 1042 
 
 WiLliam the CoNq. [Wil-consoMJ Oct. 14. 1066 
 
 William Rufus [Ruf Aws] Sept. 9. 1087 
 
 HKNRy I. [Henra^] Aug. 2. 1100 
 
 SxEPHen [StephW/] Dec. 2. 3135 
 
 HENry the SECond [Hens^cbuf] Oct. 25. 1154 
 
 H H
 
 $$0 PRINOIPAIi SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Richard I. [Ricbei7i] July 6. 118*> 
 
 John [Jann] April 6. 11 99 
 
 HEiiry the THird [Heth«?a«] Of?. 19. 1216 
 
 EDward I. [Edrfojrf] Noik \6. 1272 
 
 Envardus SEcundus [Edsef^yja] July 7, 1307 
 
 EDvardus TERtius [Edterfe*] Jan. 25. 1326 
 
 Richardus SEcundus [Ris^t6ip] June 31. 1377 
 
 HEnry the Fourth [Hefofown] Sept. 20. 1399 
 
 HEnry the Fifth [Hefi/^rf] March 20. 1412 
 
 HEnry the sixth [Hensi/frf] Aug. 31. 1422 
 
 Eovardus ouARtus [Edquar/(7M.r] March 4. 1460 
 
 Edward the Fifth 1 pp . n ,-, r April g. 14&3 
 Richard III. / L*^^» «<"^f J | J„ae 32. 1483 
 
 HENricus SEPtinius [Henseji/e//] yi?<^. 22. 1485 
 
 HENricus octav. [Henoc/y«J April 22. 1509 
 
 EDvardus SEXtHs [Edsex/o*} Jan. 28. 1546 
 
 Mary [Mary/w^J Jj^^y 6. 1553 
 
 ELisabeth [EIs/mA:] iVoi;. 17. 1558 
 
 jAMes I. [Jams3/rf] March 24. l602 
 
 CaroIus PRIMUS [Ctiropn:n«e/] Mairch21. l625 
 
 CaroIus SEcundus [CarsecsoA:] ^Aisw. 30. l64S 
 
 jAMes II. [Jamsf?/] Fe&. 6. l684 
 
 WiLliam and Mary [Wilse/Ar] Ffi. 13. ltf88 
 
 ANne {h\\pyh\ March 8. 1701 
 
 GEOrgel. [Geofeo] Aug^ 1. 1714 
 
 CrEorgell. [G6osec<?oi} Jwne 11. 1727 
 
 " The Memorial Lines. 
 
 Casibelwrf BSddaiip \ovt\gfos Uengfid & Arthlqf, 
 Egbe/tefc AlfreA:pe Odiibau Confes/f.
 
 AHTIPICIAL MUMOhlf. 551 
 
 Wil-constvii ilufAoi Henrflg-. — — •— ^ 
 
 Stepb6/7 & Uemecbuf Ricbein Jantt Hethrfff* & 
 
 Eddoid. 
 Edse(y/> Edter/es Risetoip Ht(otoun Hefi/flrfque. 
 H^nsi/ed Edquar/cMJ Ein-llokf licme\)JeillienQclyn. 
 Edsex/o« Marylut FAsluk Jmnsj/d Cdioprimsel. 
 Carsec/b/c Jamseif Wilwt'A: Aupyb Geofto— — (/oi. 
 
 *' N. B. After Canute inclusive, One Thou- 
 sand is to be added to each : It was thought un- 
 ucwessary to express it, it being a Thing in which 
 it is impossible that any one should mistake. 
 
 " If it be desired to remember in what Month, 
 and Day of the Month each King began his 
 Reign, it may be done by the following Lines : 
 
 Wil-tbosou-fat Steph-de Jsim-chef-fau Wi-ls-jeb-ed 
 
 lA-nap. 
 Hen-ge-tel-an sez-chez gib-ged-ped Geor-ga-iab 
 
 An chei. 
 Caf-chf^-rix Ma-b Jo-ps Ed-n<f«-lo» tel-cho-pou rek- 
 
 c|ue« 
 
 " EXPLANATION. 
 
 " The Italick I^etters represent the Day of 
 the Month ; the Letter immediately preceding 
 represents the Month itself, r standing for Janu- 
 ary, f for JPebruary, ch for March, p for April , 
 ■1 for Msij, j for June, 1 for Ju/y, g for August,
 
 35% PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 s for 5eptember^ t for October, n for iVovernber, 
 and d for jDecember. 
 
 " Thus Steph-de, Stepli King Stephen, de 
 Dec. 2. El-nap El Elizabeth, nap Nov. 17. 
 In Words of three or more Syllables, the first 
 Syllable stands for all the Kings of the same 
 Name, and the following Syllables in Order an- 
 swer to the first, second, third, 8cc. of that Name. 
 So Jam-chef-fau ; Jam denotes James I & II. 
 chef (viz. March 24.) belongs to James I. and 
 fau (viz. Feb. 6.) to James II. So lR.i-\s-jeb-ed ; 
 Hi denotes all the Richards, Is (viz. July 6.) be- 
 longs to Richard 1. jeb (viz. June 21.) to Rich- 
 ard II. and ed (viz. 22. of the same Month) to 
 Richard III. 
 
 " If this be thought either too difficult, or ^oo 
 minute, the Reader may pass it over." 
 
 In the Rev. J. Robinson's * Grammar of 
 
 History,* will be found a list of remarkable 
 
 events from the Creation to the Battle of Tra- 
 
 J a /gar, with all the technical terminations of 
 
 Dr. Grey. This is a useful supplement. 
 
 "2. Geography. 
 
 ** In the first Place are laid down the general 
 Divisions of Europe, Asia, Jfnck and America; 
 then the particular Divisions of the several King- 
 doms of Europe, into their respective Govern- 
 ments or Provinces. For every Division there
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 355 
 
 is one Technical Line, composed of the first 
 syllables (or sometimes only of the first letters) 
 of the Parts or Places into which it is subdivi- 
 ded ; which Syllables or Letters are distinguished 
 from the rest, in the Tables, by Small Capitals, 
 or an Hyphen following. 
 
 " ' Tis further to be observ'd, that the Begin- 
 ning, Middle, and Ending of the Line answer, 
 in order, to the Northern, Middle and Southern 
 Divisions of the Kingdoms or Countries; so that 
 not only the Places themselves, but in some 
 Measure their Situation with Respect to each 
 other may be remember'd at the same Time. 
 Thus in the Memorial Line for France, 
 
 Fra— P \oi-I-cham ; Eiet-O-BuL; GuULa-DaP. 
 
 " P Nor-T-cham denotes the four Northern 
 Governments, ij/s. P-icardy, NpRmandy, I-sle 
 of France, and CuAMpagne. 
 
 " Bret-O-BuL denotes the four Middle Go- 
 vernments, viz. BRETagnc, O-rleanois, Bour- 
 gogne, and L-ionnois. 
 
 " Gui-La-Da-P denotes the four Southern 
 Governments, viz. Guienne with Gascony, Lah- 
 guedock, DAuphiny and P-rovence. 
 
 " It will be yet some further Help to remem- 
 ber the Situation of Places, to observe, that in 
 the several Divisions I begin at the PVesv, and go 
 •n Eastward, as far as the Limits of the Cotm- 
 H H 3
 
 354 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 try will allow, in a strait Line, unless where the 
 Irregularity of the Position makes this Method 
 inconvenient or impracticable : Where that is the 
 Case, the Reader will supply the Defect by his 
 own Observation, and by comparing with proper 
 Maps. 
 
 " Observe further, that where the Syllables 
 are connected with an Hyphen, the Countries 
 denoted by them are contiguous from West to 
 East ; thus, 
 
 " Nor-I-cham shews that the IsU of France 
 joyns to l^^ormandy on the East, and Champagne 
 to the Isle of France on the East. Where the 
 Syllables or Letters denoting two or more Coun- 
 tries are joyn'd together without an Hyphen, 
 there the Countries are contiguous from North 
 to South. Thus Gui-La-DaP shews that Lan- 
 guedock joyns to Guienne on the East, Danphiny^ 
 and Provence to Lcmguedock on the East ; and 
 also that Provence is contiguous to, and South 
 of Dauphini/. Such Syllables as have an Hi/- 
 phen preceding, but are not by it immediately 
 joyn'd to the foregoing Syllable, signifying that the 
 Countries denoted by them lie Eastward, but are 
 not contiguous. Thus Sp-It-Turk shews that 
 Italy is East of Spain, and Turky East oi Italy, 
 but not contiguous. 
 
 " When the Reader is become well acquainted 
 with the General Divisions^ he may then go on
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 35* 
 
 to charge his Memory with his chief Cities, and 
 most remarkable Places of every Country ; their 
 Longitude and Latitude ; the Correspondence of 
 ancient and present Geography ; the Geography 
 of the Old and New Testament ; the Propor- 
 *tions of the Kingdoms of Europe to Great Bri~ 
 tain ; the Situations of the most noted Islands ; 
 with other instructive and entertainhig Particulars 
 in Geography : All which he will find himself 
 able to remember with greater Ease than he can 
 possibly imagine, till he is acquainted with the 
 Memorial Li)ies, contriv'd for that Purpose. 
 
 " The General Divisions of Europe, Asia, 
 Africk and America. 
 
 " L EUROPE is divided into, " 
 
 1 . Northern ; Containing NOrway, S-wederr, 
 MOscovy ; D-onmark : 
 
 2. iSUddh; Contaiuing NEtherlands, GEmiany, 
 Poland, Little T-artary; Francc, SwiTzerland, 
 HuNgary, TRANsilvmiia, MOidavia, VAlachia. 
 
 3. Southern; Containing Spain with Portjigal, 
 iTaly, TiRKv. 
 
 Eur =: No-S-Mo D ; Ne-Ge-Po-IT Fran-Swita Him-Traii' 
 Mo-Va Sp-It-Turk.
 
 3j6 principal systems of 
 
 " 11. ASIA is divided into, 
 
 1. Nortlierfi ; Containing Great TAitary, GEor- 
 gia. 
 
 2. Middle; containing TuRky in ^«/a ; PErsia, 
 Empire of the MOguI, CniNa. 
 
 3. Soniheryi; Containing Ar Asia, East iNDies. 
 
 . As = Ta-Geo j Tiu-P6-Mo-Cliin ; Arab-Ind 
 
 <' III. AFRICK is divided into, 
 
 1. Northern; Containing BArbary, BiLdulgerid, 
 E-gypt. 
 
 2. Middle; Containing ZAara, Nsgroland, Gui- 
 nea, N-ubia. 
 
 3. Southern; Containing CoNgo, ABlssinia, 
 Coast oI'Abex, Coast oi"CAFreria, MoNOmotopa, 
 ZANGUebar, Coast of Ajan. 
 
 AF — BaBil-E.; ZiiNeGui-N ; Con-Abiss-Abe Caf-Mono- 
 Zangu-Aj. 
 
 " IV. AMERICA is divided into, 
 
 1. N-orthern; Containing New WALes, New 
 BRiTain, Lovisiana, CANada or New France, New 
 GRANada, MExico, Fi.ORida, New England con- 
 taining these seven Provinces, (CARolina, Virginia, 
 MAryland, P-ensilvania, New YoRk, New J-arsey 
 New ENoland properly so call'd,) lying from Soutli- 
 West to North-East.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 35^ 
 
 2. S-ottthein : Containing Terra FiR Ma, Peru, 
 Country of the Amazohs, BrasH, CaiH, Para- 
 guay, MAGellaiiica. 
 
 N-AM = Wal-Brit L6vi-Can GranMex-F'lor (C^r-Vi-M« 
 
 P-YorJ Eng. 
 S-AAtFinn Per-Ain^z-Bra Chi-ParMag. 
 
 '' 3. Astronomy. 
 
 " The Technical Endings affixed to the Be- 
 ]gimiings of the Names of the Planets represent 
 the Number of Miles of their Diameters, Dis- 
 tances, Magnitudes, 6jc. according to the general 
 Key. Where the Beginning of the Word is 
 Technical, it is composed of the Syllables or 
 Letters distinguish'd in the Tables by Small 
 Capitals. 
 
 " The D'iameters, S^c. of the Planets in Eng' 
 
 lish Miles, according to Dr. Derham's Astro- 
 
 theology. 
 
 Engl. Miles.. 
 Lu na [LuDdapu] 2175 , 
 
 MERCUry IMcrcuDepokl 2748 
 
 Mars [MarDoAr/zw] 48/5 
 
 VEnus [VeDoneip^ 4987 
 
 TERree DiAni. [TerDinpousX,k'] 79^7,8] 
 
 SAturn [SaDHz-o/a] 93,451 
 
 Jupiter [JuDrt^-*//] 130,653 
 
 SoLis Diam. ISolDlked-nfa] 82'?,148
 
 358 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 " The D'iameters of their OkbUs. 
 
 Engl. Miles. 
 SATum ITy-oTh-Siitasob-les-teis] l64>l. 526,386 
 
 Jupiter IJuRBkoul-atoth] 895.134,000 
 
 MArs [MuRBese-deid-naz] 262.282,910 
 
 TERra ID-orh-Terboid-aze-poul] 172.102,795 
 
 MErcury IMeRBsau-sebthl 66.621,000 
 
 Vedus lYeKBbef-okoi-baf] 124.487,114 
 
 LuNa IDorhhrnopoU'tiyl] 479,905 
 
 SATurni AniiuH Diam. or the Dia-'j 
 
 meterof .SV7/?/ni's Ring [Sat- ami- > 210,265 
 
 thddz-datd'} J 
 
 — Ejnsdem LATitudo, or the^ 
 
 Breadth of Saturn's Riug [ > 29,200 
 
 iUtJ«WH-tgJ J 
 
 TERrie SuPERficies, or the super-^ 
 
 ficial Content of the Earth [Ter- J- 199.444,205 
 super a un-f of -ezau'] J 
 
 Ejusdem DiAmeter [Dia^0M-"i 70^7 & 
 
 saijkl i ' 
 
 Ejusdem Orbita pERiMeter ■) ^^^ ^gg ^^5 
 
 [Permnfy-skau-del'} J 
 
 *' The Magnitudes or Solid Contents in Cubick 
 Miles of the larger Planets. 
 
 " MagnitiuIo. 
 
 Cubick Miles. 
 TERrze \Tej-ma»niteso-klatim] 264,856.000,000 
 
 SOLls [Mag-so! iseo«2- -» 090,971 .000,000.000,009 
 «o;a-iau-niil] J
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOttT. S59 
 
 Cubick Miles. 
 
 JOYis [Mag-jovKea- ^ 920.011,200.000,000 
 
 SATurni [Sat-nragnit- "i 497.218,300.000,000 
 
 oep-aak & tzym] J 
 
 " 27ie A Mbit or Circumference. 
 
 English Miles. 
 Jovis [Am-jovisijW)M-rof] 379j043 
 
 T-en-je [Am-Tt;/-^*7>] 25,031 
 
 SoLis [Ani-sole-/«rf-A<wY3 2.582,873 
 
 " The Memorial Lines. 
 
 "LioDdapv, MerfiiD<?jjo/c MarDofc/jw TerDia;)owsoi,fc. 
 SviDatij-sli VcDojifj/j SaD«j-o?a, 'io\Y)'\ked-afei. 
 D-orb-Situiofr-ics-kw JuRB^o«<-a^o<ft.MaKjSt.ve-deirf-n«z. ' 
 D-or'o-Tertoid-^jse-poui MeRB,vaM-se6Wi VeKB6«/-(.feoj-6u^. 
 Sat-anu-dif/as-daui — latirfoM-c^ D-orb-lunj»(>u-ni//. 
 Ter-buperan«-yo/-f3a« — dia^«usoi,fc^PcrmM/j/-«A;a«c(af, 
 Ter-inagiiitt%o-A:/ai<m Mag-s61is-i;ofir-noia-niil-inil. 
 Mag-Jov?i<?>2(U-e:(/w Sat-niagnitoq)-rfrtA;& ist/m. 
 Am-jovisfpoM-2o« Am-Tt/-!/i6 Xm-^o\e-teid-koit, 
 
 " 4. Coins, Weights, and Measures. 
 
 '* The Beginning of the Words is composed 
 of Uie Initial Letters ; thus At-ta stands for 
 ATtick TAlent, Het far Habrew T-aleut ; Ad 
 for A ttick D-rachm; AId for ALexandrian 
 P-rachm; HetO for Hebrew Talent of Gold; 
 (Het standing for HE-brew T-alent as before, 
 and O for Or, or Gold) RoL for ROman
 
 ,860 PRlNCIPAf. SYSTEMS OF 
 
 L-ibra, Den for DENarius, Shek for ShekcI, 
 GreF for GREcian F-oot, HeC for HEbrew 
 C-ubit, HoFq for ROman F-oot S^^uare, ^c. 
 
 *' The Italick Endings of the Words represent 
 the Number of Pounds, ShilHngs and Pence, 
 which are separated from each other by Hyphens^ 
 or else signified by the Roman Letters I. s. d. 
 The double Lines denote Equality. Thus 
 Am— dr«^— ?-e2-w, signifies that an A-ttick 
 M-ina, which is equal to 100 Drachms, was 3 
 Pounds 8 Shillings and 9 Pence. The Letters, 
 though separated, are to be pronounced together; 
 as t-ei-n tein. The Reader is to be reminded 
 here that re signifies ^,ro J, &c. But Note, that 
 instead of the Fraction re, the Letter h is some- 
 times used for Half, as oikbe-h— 7 Sl^l sc. 7812 
 Pounds 10 Shillings." 
 
 This system of Dr. Grey reflects great credit 
 on the ingenuity of the author. Of the Me- 
 moria Technica, Dr. Priestley observes, " it 
 is so easily learned, and may be of so much 
 use in recollecting dates, when other methods 
 are not at hand, that he thinks all persons of 
 a liberal education inexcusable, who will not 
 take die small degree of pains that is necessary 
 to make themselves masters of it ; or who think 
 any thing mean, or unworthy of their notice, 
 which IS so useful and convenient.*" 
 
 * Lectures on History, p. 157.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S6l 
 
 Richard Grey was born in the year 1693, 
 and was a learned divine of the Church of Eng- 
 land. He took his degree of M. A. at Lincoln 
 College, Oxford, in the year I? IS- 1 9. The 
 6rst preferment which he obtained, was the 
 Rectory of Kilncote, in Leicestershire, to which 
 he appears to have been instituted at an early 
 period of life ; and afterwards he was appointed 
 to the Rectory of Hinton, in Northamptonshire, 
 and to a Prebend iu the Cathedral Church of St. 
 Paul. 
 
 In the year 1730, he published his Me- 
 moria Technica. In the same year also he 
 published, " A System of English Ecclesiastical 
 Law, extracted from the Codex Juris Eccle- 
 iiastici Anglicani, of the Right Rev. the Lord 
 Bishop of London, for the use of young stu- 
 dents in the Universities, who are designed for 
 Holy Orders." 8*^. For this work the University 
 presented him with the degree of Doctor of Di- 
 vinity, by diploma, during the following year. 
 It was afterwards reprinted, at different periods, 
 with the addition of marginal references to the 
 pages in the Codex. 
 
 In the year 17S6, he published a large 
 anonymous pamphlet, entitled, " The miserable 
 and distracted state of Religion in England, 
 upon the downfall of the Church establish- 
 ed :" and iu the year 1738, " A new and 
 1 I
 
 S62 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 easy method of learning Hebrew without 
 Points. To which is annexed, by way of praxis, 
 the Book of Proverbs, divided according to the 
 Metre; with the massoretical Readings in Ro- 
 man Letters, &c. a grammatical analysis, and 
 short notes, critical and explanatory, etc. 8*^." 
 In the following year, he published, on a large 
 single sheet, " Tabula exhibens paradigmata 
 Verborum Hebraicorum regularium et irregula- 
 rium, per omnes ConjngRtiones, Modos, Tem- 
 pora, et Personas, pleuius et accuratins excusa ;'' 
 and also, " Historia Josephi Palriarchae, Literis 
 tam Roraanis, quam Hebraicis excusa, cum 
 Versioue Interlineari S. Pagnini, 8c vocum In- 
 dico Analytico ; praemittitur nova Methodus He- 
 braice Discendi, diligcntius recognita, etc. 8°." 
 These pieces were again reprinted in 1751. 
 
 In the year 1742, Dr. Grey published, " Liber 
 Jobi in versiculos Metiice divisus, cum Versione 
 Latina Alberti Schultens, notisque ex ejus Com- 
 raentariis excerptis, etc. Edidit, atqiie annota- 
 tiones • suas ad Metrum przecipue spectantes, 
 adjecit R. G. etc. Accedit Canticum Moysis, 
 Deut. xxxii. cum Notis variorum, 8°." In the 
 preface to this work some strictures were intro- 
 duced on particular passages in Warburton's 
 " Divjne Lesj^tion ;" to which that gentleman 
 replied ui !iis " Rcmurks on several occasional 
 eftjctioiH," etc. Tlus reply called forth from
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SGS 
 
 Dr. Grey, in the year 1744, an " Answer to 
 Mr. Warburton's * Remarks on several occa- 
 sional Reflections,' so far as they concern the 
 preface to a late edition of the Book of Job ; in 
 which the subject and design of that divine poem, 
 are set in a full and clear light, and some particu- 
 lar passages in it occasionally explained," etc. 8". 
 In the year 1746, Dr. Grey occupied the 
 post of official and commissary of the Arch- 
 deaconry of Leicester. In 1749, he published, 
 " The last words of David, divided according to 
 the metre, with notes critical and explanatory," 
 4°. This last publication, except new editions 
 of his former pieces, was an English translation 
 of Mr. Hawkins Browne's poem, " De Animse 
 Immortalitate," which appeared in 1753. Be- 
 sides the articles enumerated above. Dr. Grey 
 printed some single " Sermons," preached on 
 public occasions. He died in 1771, in the 
 seventy-eighth year of his age.* 
 
 05. Mnemonics delineated in a small 
 compass and easy Method, for the 
 better enabling to remember what is 
 most frequently ivanted, and most 
 dijficultly retained or recollected, 
 8". Lond. 1737. 
 
 * Nichols' Anecdotes of Bowyer.
 
 8C4 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 This extremely rare tract, compiled by Soto*' 
 man Lowe, contains 14 pages in a very small type, 
 besides the title and the advertisement which i» 
 printed on the back of the title, making a single 
 sheet of demy, 8°. As Dr. Watts has consi- 
 dered this tract as a material improvement of 
 Grey, and as some of the purchasers of the pre- 
 sent volume may choose to practise the scheme 
 of Grey and Lowe, we have thought pro* 
 per, in this edition, to reprint the whole of 
 the original tract, as it has become extremely 
 rare ; — and although lately reprinted, it can- 
 not be purchased without the incumbrance 
 of the Memoria Technica of Grey ; a suf^ 
 ficient specimen of which has already been 
 given. 
 
 ADVIKTISEMENT. 
 
 " Th e key to this art (so far as relates to. 
 the expressing of numbers by Letters) we 
 owe to the ingenious Dr. Grey. What fol-. 
 lows may be considered as a supplement to, 
 and improvement of his Memoria Technica ; 
 for most of the articles are what, perhaps, did 
 not occur to him : aud the rest I think are re-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. . 365 
 
 formd * to great purpose ; particularly those of 
 Weights, Coins, and Measures; ofNvhich I have 
 given a full account in less than three pages, 
 whereas the Doctor's (though very defective) 
 amounts to 31. Those who are curious will add 
 such particulars, as they have most occasion for; 
 in order to lay up a treasure of useful principles 
 in their heads ; for the greatest part of which 
 they must, otherwise, from time to time, have 
 recourse to books ; or, where those are not at 
 hand be disappouited ; how much soever it may 
 be to their discredit or prejudice. 1 need not 
 inform those who have the education of youth, 
 whether in schot)ls, or universities, how much 
 something of this nature would expedite the pro- 
 gress of their pupils, and show them to advan- 
 tage ; furnish bt times with a satisfactory cer- 
 tainty, reachness, and e.\actness, in things, of 
 which Masters themselves, and men of reading, 
 have generally but an imperfect and confused 
 remembrance. I shall only add (to obviate an 
 objection, diat may naturally otFer itself to such 
 as are unacquainted with things of this nature) 
 that how diificult and forbidding soever the jar- 
 gon of this art may appear; nothing will stick 
 
 * We have preserveil Mr. Lowe's ortliography throiyjli- 
 
 Mlt. 
 
 I I 3
 
 366 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 more effectually in the memory, when once 
 familiarisd by frequent repetition so as to flow 
 
 into the mind without reflexion. N. B. The 
 
 accents denote the first syllable of a tiactyl. 
 
 " SOLOMON LOWE." 
 
 Directions for the better learning to remember 
 figures or numbers exprest by Letters. 
 
 a e i o u au oi ei ou y 
 1234567 8 9 
 bdtflspkn z 
 
 g 100. th 1,000. m 1.000,000. 
 
 r denotes fractions, as follows : yVo \: ,iro | : 
 d^eriS \: ,rag,01. 
 
 Arithm et ical Characters. 
 -f and: — less: X multiplied-j'nfo: -— divided- 
 
 by : zz is, gives. 
 
 The Division of the' old Roman AS, viz. any Integer) 
 or Whole. 
 
 Uuica, Sext. QuS Triens. Quinc. Sena. Sept. Bes, 
 Dodra Dext. Deu. 
 
 AS, parts 
 
 12 
 
 Seniissis 
 
 6 
 
 Deunx 
 
 11 
 
 Quuicunx 
 
 5 
 
 Dextans 
 
 10 
 
 Triens 
 
 4 
 
 Dodrans 
 
 9 
 
 Quadrans 
 
 3 
 
 Bessis 
 
 8 
 
 Sextans 
 
 2 
 
 Septunx 
 
 7 
 
 Uncia 
 
 1
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SC? 
 
 COINS. 
 Coins reducd to Farthings. 
 
 1 E.]' Sh-o/i. Cr-e/j/.] N-/</3. Ange-oAri-. M-dufy. 
 
 Gui-bzi/k. Cdr-bdzo. ivic-beg. 
 
 2 H. Ger-/] Be-//. Sh-fl&r. *IMan-A7/;)*. f TdUdeith 
 
 fril] Sh-aplt'.. Tal-?//H dusth. 
 
 3 G. LejVjf ^/^fflu. Dtchal-a,j3rt/. 6b-w,j'fl«]*Dr-»6. 
 
 4- Stat6r-«</o. 
 
 4 R. T,oipuruth. § As-f,rflr] Ses-p,i7f. \.al,r&. 
 Den-ii. Sp-o)/.] Auroipu. 
 
 ^ Drachm] H?b-is. Att M. Alex-oid — 
 I Min] Att-?/^. Itnl-ekeiz. 
 I Tal.] Atl-barikth. Biihtifafh.] Att-7bauth 
 ^^ \\ fig- Bab-?/H (iinisth. R-aki/tk. 
 . !_/ 1 Stater (sold) Att-;?o«7 Cys-Phll-Alex- 
 
 ^ ■ C As\veiuhdOuiKes-r,'</,U-C-5oM3 :e;fouzi 
 
 \ a ; lip : -tire ; leis. 
 
 MONEY. 
 
 Sums of Money, or Money of Aceownt. 
 
 y(E) Pemi/. (6r-as. Vonnd-onsy. (G) Tal. 
 
 ^ Min. X.gi-gz=:ubss. ^Ant-syzzg. 
 ,. \ Y^Mih-oizTninns. Pt-az— czii. Syr-alzzpoil. Ty- 
 
 ^ riaii-fiz^/i?/^. 
 
 C(R) Sesterce ib-ath, duo, biui numnii 
 
 ^ ^ • t6-a»J, tluo, bina, 
 
 ( — stertia ; or inillia sestertiuni, above by 
 
 ^ > the adverbs, as foUows : 
 
 C Bis sestertiuni, or bis ; understanding millia 
 ^ > centum (or centena). 
 
 6 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 
 jT.ginea raina, talentum (lin.) 5. Alexanilrina 
 ^nichma, *; stater, 4. Angel, 1. Aniiocbicama.
 
 368 PRIXCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 tal. 5. yVs, 4. §. Attica drachma, *, raina, *, sta- 
 ter, 4 ; taieiituni, |. Aiu-eus denarius, 4. Buhy- 
 /owitfl mill. tal. I . Bckalj, 2. Carolus, 1. Croesius 
 stater, |. Crown,!, Cyzicenus stat«^r, 4. Darcius 
 stater, I . Denarius, 4. Dichakos, 3. Drachma 3. 
 Gerali C. Groat '^, 5. Guinea, 1. Hebraica drach- 
 ma,'*. JacoLu-.y 1. Italica mina,*. Lepton, 3. Ma- 
 neh, 2 Maik, 1. Mhur,''\5. Noble, 1. Obolus, 3. 
 Pennu", 5. Piiilippicus stater, 4.. . Pound, 5. Pto- 
 lemaica min. tal. 6. Piomanum talentum, 4.. Ses- 
 teriinm, 7, Sestertius, 4. Shekel, 2. Shilling, 1. 
 Sportuia, 4. Stater, 3. Si/ria min. tal. 6. Talen- 
 tum'', 2, 5. Teruncius, 4. Ti/ria min. tal. 6. Vic- 
 toriatus, 4. 
 
 6 Synonifms and Equivalents. 
 .?ils, as. Assarium, as. Attica minormina — antlo- 
 chica. Attica m(!JGrmirio=:tyr'rd. Bi<;,atus, denarius. 
 Centussis, 100 asses. Chalcos, | dichalchos. De- 
 ctissis", 10 asses. Didrachmon, 2 drachmie. Dio- 
 bolon, 2 oboli. Dupondius , 2 asses. Euhoca mi- 
 »« — antiochia. Hemiobolon, h obolus. Laureat, 
 carolus. Libella, as. Libra (or libra pondo) =z mina 
 attica. Mna, mina, Nomissis, 9 asses. Nununus, 
 sestertius. Obolus, \ noble. Octussis, 8 asses. Pen- 
 tad rachmcu, 5 drae!iiiia\ Pondo, v. libra. Qua- 
 drans, \ as, \ noble. Quadrigiitus, denarius. Qua- 
 drussis^, 4 asses. Quinarius, victoriatus. Quin- 
 quessis'^, 5 asses. 7?Aorf/crza>ginea. Send>ella, se- 
 milibella. Semiiibella, h libella. Semunicu, h uncia. 
 Sescuiicia, 1 h uncia. Sextans ^, -5 as. Sextula'^, ~ 
 luicia. Solidus, aureus. Tctradrachnion, 4 drach- 
 ma;. Tetrobolon, 4 oboii. Tressis, 3 asses. Tri- 
 cessis, 30 ?isses. Tridrachmon, 3 drachma\ Tri- 
 ei}s '■, ^ as. Triobolon, 3 oboli. Vigessis, 20 asses, 
 Uncia % tt as. 
 
 1 N. B. The several coins, measures, and wiighls, being 
 reducd to'the lowest denominations, tlie memorial versei 
 answer all the purposes of the largest tables : (1) The dif-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S69 
 
 t'erence of any Wo terms beinj? known by subtraction • : 
 and (2) How many of any make one of another, by divi- 
 sion *. e.j?. (a) What is the difference between a Shilling 
 
 and a Shekel? Answ. (Sh-ahz) 110 — (Sh-ofcJ 48=: 62 q. 
 i. e. S 2 : 3 : '2 — S 1 ; — S 1 : 3 : 2, the shekel more than 
 the shilling. ( b) How many Spans make a Fathom / Answ. 
 Fath'OJd) 72 -f- (Span) 9 zi 8. Accordingly, if it be 
 (askd. What is n fathom '/ (and Jo of any other) the answer 
 may be made, the same way, in ajiy of the prior denomina- 
 tions : e. g. 24 palms, or 6 feet, or 4 cubits, or 2 yards, or 
 1 I- pace, &c. 
 
 ^ Any whole was called AS, and 1 twelfth of it Uncia 
 [whence our terms of ounces for weight, and inches for 
 leHgth]. The several numbers of those unciae (i.s tween 1 
 
 and 12) were denoraiuated, in order, as follows iu 
 
 text: viz. Se^Ltans (i.e. i) 3 Quadran<4 (i) 3, &c. and 
 
 express their manner of reckoning Interest of nior.ey : tlais 
 usiircB asses [centesimae] iwas 1 per mon'h [12 per year] 
 per cent, (suppose aurei, or pounds : deunces, ll twelfths 
 per month, and so on to unciaria, 1 twelfth per mouth [1 
 per year] e. g. 20d. per month, 30s. per year. 
 
 3 Of the three apartments distinKuisht by brackets, ia 
 the 1st are Brass- or Copper- ; 2d, SilTcr-; 3d, Gold-coins'. 
 
 NB. (1) Sh-ofe (as appears by the Abbreviatures ex- 
 
 plaind underneath, a)id by the key above) sis;nifies Shilling 
 48: i. e. a shilling is 48 farthings 5 and so of the rest, (2) 
 y {the memorial letter) may be pronouncd wee or ici, to 
 distinguish it from i: e. g. Cr-e/y, as if it were Cr-efwi. 
 
 4 i. e. in the year (LVi'W Conditte) from the building of 
 
 tlie city of Rome, 190. e,foitz ; i. e. U. C. 490, when the 
 
 Punic war had exhausted the treasury, it weighd but 2. and 
 «o of the rest. 
 
 .5 i. e. the iEginean mina was (ubss) 5656 q : (g) 100 
 of which made the j^gincan talent, and so of the rest. 
 
 6 N. B. In these lists — those in Italic are moneys of ac- 
 count, the rest, coins.- The Figures and Marks refer to the 
 corresponding memorial verses. 
 
 (c) N.B. There are also Coind Half-guineas, Seven-shil- 
 ling pieces, Half-crowns, Three-pences, Two-pences,Half- 
 pennies ; and such as are distinguisht by a superior <:. 
 
 MEASURES. 
 
 Cubic Measures reduced to Pints. 
 
 f Quar-d. *GzU\ R-af6. Ear-eld. Ti-(wiNE) 
 I its. li-uzf. P-fluj»6. E-athei. T-ethbau.
 
 rl' 
 
 570 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ^ Firk-hoid, dsf.^ Kil aM*, b<7^(BEER & ALE) 
 ^ Bat'hdeik, Mus. Hog-alad, hups, 
 Ve-bsr Bii-^o. Str-aek. Cooia-dus (dry) Se- 
 ube. Ch-etzo. V^e-ithpi^. \^d-lady. 
 ( (liq.) C-,nrei. L-iro. Cab-?. Haz (h) Seah-rfy. 
 
 4 1 Bath *Y- H6m-«MrM {-uid. 
 
 \ Cnh-,durm!. G6m-,vraz. Se-boi (dry) Ba-/tf. 
 
 5 ^ Le-dlat/. Hbmer-laf. 
 Coch-jj-^tfy- Ch-i'miz. Myst,}-ok (g) Conch-,rqf. 
 
 Oxyba-,rri- Wetr-m. 
 Cocb-,rady. Choen &re. Mtdim-^S (DRY) Cy- 
 Ox-Coty-Xest as the Roman. 
 rQnait ,r6. Se-ff,r/. C6-p. Ur-e^-»v/ (r) QuS- 
 ^ ) dr-w/y, Cul^-bafp. D. Cy. Ace. Hem. 
 q^\Lig~,rok. Cy-ra*/. Acet-jr^^i' H^ra(DRY)in,rg.. 
 I. Sti-a,ru. t Mod-«s,r€. 
 V *GalloN contains inches (dry) doid,r6'^i 
 ^^^ ^ (beer) -<>Ar6 : (wiiie) eta^. 
 
 S tPoTTLE Quarts (dr-) / (liquid)-e — f MoDI- 
 l Pints (liquid)-</n (dry) bau,ro. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 A(ctabulum(lin.)9, 8. Barrel,!. Bath, 4. Bush- 
 el, 3. Butt, 1. Cab, 4, Caph, 4. Ciicme, 6. Chau- 
 drcn, 3. Choenix, 7. Cochlearion, 6. Concha, 6. 
 Congius, 8. Coomb, 3. Culcus, 8. Cyathus, 9. 
 Firkin, 2. Gallon,], Gonier, 5. Hemina,9. Hin, 4. 
 Homer, 4, 5. Hosjshead, 1, 2. Kilderkin, 2. Last, 3. 
 Letech, 5. Lii^ula, 9, 8. Log, 4. Medimnus, 7. 
 IMetietes, 6. Modius, 9, 1 1 . Mystron, 6. Oxyba- 
 phon, 7. Peck, 3. Pottle, 11. Puncheon,!. Qua- 
 drantal, 8. Quart, !. RundUt, 1. Seah, 4, 5. 
 Seam, 3. Sextarius, 8, 9. Strike, 3. Tierce, 1. 
 Tun, 1. Urn J, 8. Wey, 3. 
 
 Si/noni/?.ns and Equivalents. 
 
 Amphora, (piadrantal- Amphoreus,metretes. Ca- 
 <lus, uietietes. Cutnock, coomb. Chos, congius. 
 Coron, homer. CotUe, hcmina. E|)hah, bath. Lin- 
 jjula, ligiila. Omer, homer. Oxybaphcn, acetabu-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 371 
 
 luiti. Pipe, butt. Quarter, seam. Qu^rtarius, J sex- 
 tarius. Semiraoiius, h mrWu^. Xiv.tei, sextarius. 
 
 1 i. e. A Firkin (1) of Boer 72 pints. (2) of Ale=i64 
 . pints, and so of the rest. 
 
 2 By aet of parliament, in 1697, the gallon contains only 
 268 -^ inches. 
 
 3 By experiment, made in 1688, it was found to contain 
 only 224 inches. 
 
 Long Measures reducd to Inches. ' 
 
 /-Nail-rf,ro. Pal-f. Han-5. Spa-n. ¥oot-ad. 
 J Ciihi-bei. E(fl)e/>(eng)o/. 
 ^ S Y-is. Pa-*y. ¥atb-pe. Ko-bouk. Furl-oindy. 
 ^ V Mt-sitsi/. Le-miles3. 
 
 fH. Pal-/. Sp-flrf. C-ef. Y-ous. EzMf. Ar-and. 
 
 L Schoen-flniiy. Stci nai^g-. M-o?/sf/t. 
 
 fG. Dor/. LYch-//z. Orthab. Sp ad.Vygm-ak. 
 
 L Pv-rfz. 0-nfl«. St-«aM^. M-oiskj/z. 
 
 fR. Unc-ry,W. Pal-/". Pe-6^-. Palm-dy, Cuo-e/. 
 
 I Gra-A:y. Pass-Ary. Stti-byth. 
 Proportions. 
 
 f. f Line-be. Bar-i, Digit, Inch (Heb. Gk. Rom.) 
 
 I nad: ,pul6 : peldu^. [M- -eizt/t. 
 
 f Foot — Eng-«^A. — G rek visy/?. — ' Rom (coss) 
 ' \ naup {^t) oupti(y^s)oukau. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 Arabian pole, 3. Barley-corn 6. Cubit::i:pygem, 
 pygon, pechus 1, 3, 5. Digit, 6. Doronzirpalm, 4. 
 Ell (flemish, english) 1. Ezekiel's reed, 3. Fathom, 
 2,3. Foot— pousnpes 1,5, 7. Furlongrr stadium 
 2, 3, 4, 5. Gradus, 5. Haml, 1. League, 3. 
 Liehas, 4. Line, G. Mile — \nilion — miliare 2, <fcc. 
 Nail 1. Orguia, 4. Ortli:)d6n)ii, 4. Pacenpassus 
 2,5. Palm — dor(m I, 3, J. Palmipes, 5. Passusr: 
 pace, 5. Pes = foot, 5. Pygme, 4. Pygon, 4. Rod, 
 2. Sehajnus, 3. Span — spithame 1,3, 4. Spithame 
 :z:spau, 4. Stadium— furlong 4, 5. Uncia, 5. Yard, 2.
 
 372 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Synonyms and Equivalents. 
 
 Aramah, cubit. Aulos, furlong. Chebal, schoe- 
 nus. Cubit (lesser) pygme (greater)pechys. Dactylo- 
 dochme, doron. Diaulos, 2 stadia. Dochme, doron. 
 Gomed, span. Kaneli, Ezekiel's reed. Measuring- 
 rod, schcen us. Miliare,-on: mile. Palaeste, doron. 
 Pathil, schoenus. Pechys, cubit. Perch, rod. Pole, 
 rod. Pollex, uncia. Pous, pes. Tophach, palm. 
 Ulna, cubitus, Zereth, span. 
 
 1 N. B. The Digit is sometimes divided into 4 grains ; 
 the Line into 6 points. 
 
 2 N. B. J[ Sabbath day's journey is reckoned to be 730 
 paces : 6 ot which made the Parasang,, 48 a Day's journef, 
 
 3 i. e. The proportion of the Roman foot to the English 
 
 (divided into 1000 parts) is here exprest, as found ou 
 
 tiie monument of Cossutius on that of Statilius on a 
 
 congius of Vespasian. 
 
 Square Measures reducd to Square Feet. 
 
 ^ E. Yar-M. Pace-rfw. Pble-6j9e",r5. Robd uzkouz. 
 ^ Acrii-otusy. 
 
 ^ G. Plethron azasf. Aroura, the half: but 
 
 1^ ^Egyptian *itdaun. 
 
 f R. Juger-fS'OM^y. CW-tisaii. \6-nilf. (mtn) 
 ■^ A-fbkel (qu) at fau2. 
 
 Abbreviatures expiaind. 
 
 Actus minimus, quadratus, 3. Clima, 3. Jugerum* 
 3, Versus, 3. Yard, 1. 
 
 MULTIPLICATION TABLE. 
 
 \ 
 
 P-oi,07t. V-e'\,us. P-ou,«i. K-ei,w 
 
 Jrom^ 
 by \2 ^ rF-ad 
 
 o\,on. v-€i,us. r-ou,«i. Jv-ei,w\ 
 K-<)u,pe. N-ou,ei«. \7 ^-T 
 
 Ai\,fei. L-ad,sy. S-ad,oirf. P. f =49 
 2ii\,ko, K-adjOM^yt/, N-ad,aze'i.-'
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S73 
 
 NUMERICAL LETTERS. 
 
 'In Nuniprals] A less number, afirre, Abates^ ; 
 Tj J «/fcr, Eucreases 
 
 I 
 
 \-b. V-M. X-az. l^vz. C-azy. .D ui/z, 
 M (ciD ^) ath ; b«*nce (cciod) byth, 
 f\^-h. "^-az p eg-'— 113 Lu''' — from-M^by V^l^*^ 
 
 3„ J to OUZy^ [CCCI303 
 
 4- ' I Mth by the Units^ : but oftiier by ^7i^, pre- 
 
 ^ fixing the numbers ^ \azyth. 
 
 r»-b, t-az. p-ag*. r-au. (y) koppft-ny (t«'<) 
 5p J sanpi-ojiy;: ^. « (« a a) ^r]/~ 
 6 ' I 1-6, n-/?. k-iiz. Hag', x-ath. U-azth. n-mul- 
 
 ^ tiplies others iuscrib'd m't ^°. 
 
 1 e. g. IV 4, IX 9, XL 40, XC 90. 
 
 2 e. f?. VI 6, XIV 14, XIX 19, XXIX 29 
 
 «♦ 11, :a> 12 : «p 101, 2^ 102 ,« ll, f« lOl, &c. 
 
 3 Fomid, in current writing, from M : pait whereof, 
 united, (viz, la) became D 500. heiioe i3j 3000, looo 50000. 
 
 4 i, e.U nits, tens, hundreds, begin from the Ip,tter.s here 
 specified ; and are to be reckoned on, in order, from them, 
 e.g. « I, ^ 2, y 3, &c. 1 10, K 20, X 30, &c. f 100, <t 200 &c ' 
 
 5 Instead of n\ being the ineffable name of Jehovah. 
 
 6 e. g. n 500, O 600, t 700, &c. 
 
 7 Before tiie letters expressive of hundreds ; as, ")7"7J^ 
 1534 ; very seldom otherwise ; yj^ 1070. 
 
 8 e. g. JD'^^^i^ 2000, D''3bN.T 3000, Xy^Vh 30000. 
 &c. 
 
 9 The various figures and names of these r.imierical cha- 
 racters, sec in my Table of Greek characters. 
 
 10 e. g. A (10) inscribed in n (5) is l^^l (50 j 
 
 PRACTICE. 
 
 1. IfowM the sought /«/o Price', or its factors' ; 
 or by Alicjuot parts^. and by the Aliquots of 
 Fractions of Sought (if any) divide Price^. 
 
 ?. What'H One '^? the Price 'j?y Commodity 7^; but, 
 if too large, by its factors o, 
 
 K »
 
 374 
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 1 i. e. In qiiesfcioHS, where the comlitional term is l : as, 
 when we say, " If one cost so omcb, what will so much 
 cost? 
 
 2 i. e. Multiply the question-^term, or thing sought, into 
 
 the price &c. e. g. Jf one costs 10s. Wliat will 20 cost? 
 
 &c. Answ. 20 (the thing sought) X 10 (the price):£200s. 
 i. e. 101. 
 
 3 viz. when more commodious. e. g. J[f one cost 
 
 12 I 6, what will 14 ? Answ. The factors of 14 being 2x7; 
 say 2 x 12 I 6=r25s : then 7 X 25s.— 175s. i. e. 8l. 15s. 
 
 N.B. If thcmultipljcator be not resolvable into factors, 
 take those that tome nearest it, and add the price for the 
 odd one, or multiply it by what the factors want of the 
 multiplicator. 
 
 4 Divide it by the JSi'cti pa*** of the llenonunation, in 
 which you would have the answer. — e. g. ^one cost 12 | 6, 
 what will 14? Answ. 10s. being the | of ll. and 2 | 6 (which 
 makes up the 12 | 6) the 1 of 10s : say 2 in 14rz7l. then, 
 4 in 7 (the quotient of 14 by 2)— 1 ; and there remains 31. 
 which, in the next inferior dcnomiiiation (viz. Shillings) 
 is 60, then 4 in 60::^15s- 
 
 14 pds. pks. i&c. 
 10 2 « 7 - 
 
 1 15 
 
 2 5 > 1 
 6 4 M . 
 
 S 12:6 L8:15 
 5 As in the following example 
 C qr. lb 
 84 3 11 
 ll. sl.n2ls 
 
 Sl2:6 L8:l,^ 
 
 d6k 
 
 4i 
 
 84 
 168 
 
 42 
 2S 
 
 1 
 
 at 1 
 qr %\ 
 
 lb 7i 
 4, 
 
 s d 
 
 1 10 
 
 - 10 11 
 
 - 5 5 
 
 - 1 4 
 
 - - 9 
 
 q3. Ibll.sl8:6 
 
 3q. lllb. 18 6 - 
 aliq. of fract. pr. of fract. 
 
 In all.. 1852:6 The answer ; which, being 
 halv'd f 92 : 12 : 6 ; the price of C 84 : 
 gives- I qrS : lb 11. 
 6. i.e. In sums, "wherein the Question-term is 1 ; as when 
 we say, " If so much cost so mucli, WhuVll one cost?" 
 
 7 e.g. If 12 cost 10 I 6, \\hat will 1? Answer, 12 in 
 10 I 6 I cannot have: bnt 12 in 10 X 12 (to reduce it to
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 375 
 
 per»cc)£=: 1204-6=126: then 12 ijH26r=10d. and 6 remains ; 
 whick multipli«d into 4 (to reduce it to farthings) is 24 : 
 then 1'2 in 'i4zi2 q. 
 
 rt« f in s 10 : 6 : - I or, by the fiictoni of 
 
 *'*"^ \12 - 10 ii , 1^, yi2, 
 2x6, 
 5 examp 
 Tin s 
 
 I t 
 
 2 X 6, or 3 >^ 4 ; as k) th« following : 
 a The for«goiog example wiU stand 
 10 : 6 : - 
 Tims ■( 2 5 3- 
 10 2 
 So tke answer is found more easily than by dividing by 12 : 
 much more so it will be, when that number is higher. 
 
 in 
 
 slO :6 
 
 . 
 
 2 
 
 3 6 
 
 . 
 
 4 
 
 - 10 
 
 2 
 
 RULE OF THRE£. 
 
 All Questions in if answerd (I) by one stating (2) 
 the same way. 
 
 (1) Conditional in one line: and, opposite, the 
 terras Corresponding : 
 
 (2) -DfiND i» the -Ducing of one into -DucM of the 
 other; the Rest-So R *. 
 
 N.B. No-Duc'd: the faeit of one liue divide by 
 that of the other =. 
 
 1 i. e. The prnducing a terms of one line multiplied into 
 the prodwc'd '' o/ the other, give the diviDENO ; and the rest 
 of the terms multiplied together, give the diviSoR: the 
 
 Quotient falls to the blank*^ . (a) Producing terms are 
 
 such as jointly produce any effect, e. g. whatever is consi- 
 derd as a cause, with rhe adjuncts of time, distance, mea- 
 
 ture, Sfc, (b) Frodntring terms are such as arc connected 
 
 with the ethers under the character of |). ice, pwchase, pro- 
 duce, gain, loss, interest, advantage, value or quantity of 
 
 work, Ifc. (c) e. g. At the rate of 6 per cent; per ann. 
 
 what is the interest of 9001. for 16 months? Answ. The 
 terms being stated, as they offer (without any other regard 
 than Which are conditional, and Which imply the question) 
 ThtB: 
 
 Interest Principal time 
 61. lOul. 12 m. 
 
 SOO 18 
 
 •r in any other order agreeable to the directions in the rule, 
 say " 6 (the produced term of one line) H 1 8 H 200 (th«
 
 376 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 producing terms of the other)7Z2l6oo (for the dividend) : 
 And (the rest) loo X I2rz:)200 (for the divisor). Then 
 2l60o-;-l-2OOr::,iy, the answer ; viz. isl. 
 
 2 i. e. It there be no pioduc'd term (as generally happens 
 in the single rule of three inverse) divide thejacit, &c.— — - 
 e. g. How much stuff, yard-broad, will line 10 yards of 
 cloth, yard-and-quarter broad ? The terms being stated 
 thus : 
 
 broad 
 4 qrs 
 5 
 
 long 
 10 yard. 
 
 say 5 X 10~50 
 
 and 50 -7- 4cn2 2-4th 
 
 i.e. 12 yards and 2-4 or i. 
 
 SUBTRACTION 
 
 May be more comniodiously performed by Addition; 
 as in the next article. 
 
 TABULATING. 
 
 To nmltiply and divide by Addition only, 
 
 1. Twice-double-MuItipIicand facits t every multi> 
 
 plicator. i gives the f. of . 
 
 2. Tabulate Divisor: Quote next digit-under: Sub- 
 
 tract by Addition. 
 
 I.Tn theMuLTiPLiCATiON sum(j) 
 the facits of the multiplicand twice 
 doubled, are, as they stand agamst 
 the digits 2 and 4. T hen, To mul- 
 tiply the mult'plicand into 8 
 
 (the last figure of the multiplicator) 
 double the facit of the digit 4— — 
 into 6 (the 2d figure, &c.) add 
 the facit of 4 to that of 2 (n:6) 
 
 into 7 (the next figure, &c.) 
 
 add together the facits of i, 2, 4 
 (—7) placing each of them, as in 
 the common method of multipli- 
 cation. 
 
 2. In thcDivisiov-sum (II) (I) 
 Tabulate the divisor, as in the ex- 
 ample, viz. against the digit 2, 
 by adding the divisor to itself; 
 against 3, by adding together the 
 
 Multipli-caTid cator 
 98765 >0 768 
 197530 (1) 
 395060 
 
 790120 
 592590 
 691355 
 
 (II) 
 
 b 75851520-r-768 
 S- 673794 1536 
 1^ 5898 2304 
 1 43. 3072 
 Quotient (III) 38 iO 
 98765-=-968 4608 
 1929 1936 5376 
 Quotient: 102 6144 
 —6912 
 
 Q 
 1 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 a 
 
 9
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. S77 
 
 tomls of i and l ; against 4, by adding the total of S to 
 itself, or that of 3 to that of 1 ; and, in like manner, in the 
 rest, by adding together the totals of any two or more 
 digits, equal to the digit whose total is sou§ht. Then, (2) 
 Quote (or, for the quotient, take) the digit against the total 
 next less, or under the first corresponding figures of the di- 
 vidend, viz. 7565. Then, instead of subtracting, according 
 to the common method, the facit of the divisor by 9 (viz. 
 6912) from (7585) the corresponding figures of the divi- 
 dend (3) Subtract by addition, and say [not, 2 from 5, and 
 there remains 3 j but 2, and (so much as will make 5, viz.) 
 3 is 5: then 1, and (as much as will make 8, viz.) 7 is 8 ; 
 then 9, and [what will make 15 (since 9 cannot be taken 
 from ,5) viz.] 6 is 15 *, then 1, that I borrow, and 6 is 7 ; 
 
 and so on. In tlie DivisiON-sum (III) it appears 
 
 that All the tabulating necessary to find the quotient, 
 
 is only to double the divisor : for, the total next less than 
 (the 1st dividend) 987, is 968; therefore quote 1 : then 
 (the 2d dividend) 195 has no total less; therefore quote O: 
 then the next total less than (the 3d dividend) 1965, is (the 
 
 Qd total, viz.) J936; therefore quote 2 And, in like 
 
 manner, may be tabulated any sum, by steps, as there shall 
 be occasion. 
 
 (a) N. B. 15, being the last sound m the mouth of the 
 operator, does more readily and certainly lemind him of 
 what he borrowd, than in the common way of subtraction j 
 which is no small advantage to this method. 
 
 WEIGHTS. 
 
 Troy Weight, for Gold, Silver, Jewels, Grains, 
 and Liquors. 
 
 Monyers redttcd to Blanks. 
 
 1 MON. Perit.</-Droit-oA:y. Mtte-a&f^wdy. Grain- 
 
 dizozy. 
 
 Goldsmiths and Apothecaries Weight reducd to 
 Grains. 
 
 2 (Gold,) CSr-i) 1. Pen-d6(P6.) Scrup-rfy. DriiiB- 
 
 auz. Onuce-oky. Vb-loisy. 
 
 K K 3
 
 378 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OP 
 
 Averdupois Weight, for Baser-metals, Bread, 
 Mercery, Grocery, S^c, 
 
 Wool, reducd to Pounds. 
 
 5 Clove-oi. Stone-fto. Ti)d-ek. Weigh&etU Sack- 
 tauf. hast-Jisei. 
 
 Other Things. > 
 
 4 Pound-ounce-fl*. Hun-p6unds-fl6e, hun-Fother« 
 
 dn-are: Tun-ex. 
 
 Hebrew Weights, reducd to Grains. 
 
 5 Zur2i-lf. Bek-azeii Sh^k-Uei 2. Man-^beizy. TSl- 
 
 amnyth. 
 
 Greek and Roman Weights. 
 
 „ C Lens, kurcihe. Lept-awreA:. Chalch-<y,7'g. Sil, "1 ^j 
 
 \ t,r'6k. Ob ou-trek. J 
 
 {Script-akftraf. Dr2L-lf,ouraf. — Sext-oid,aurp. "I 
 S\ci\'azn,erp. i 
 
 {Duell-bol,uroi. — — \]nc-Jip,roi. — -— Libra- 1 
 
 Proportions. 
 
 9 Grains English-fti/jre make French-a/«,Dutch- 
 apou, 
 
 10 Ounce has grains Avgr-o/ei, Troy^/oMZ^; as 
 
 eiy to oil *. 
 
 11 Pound Aver-heavier than Troy by 2 ounces, 4 
 
 drams, and 2 scruples. 
 
 Abbreviatures explaind. 
 
 Bokali, 5. Carat, 2;ChaIchos, 6. Drachma, 7. 
 Duella, 8. Hundred-weight. 4. Lepton, 6. Maneh, 
 5. Obolus, 6". Penny-weight, 2. Pound, 2. Scrip- 
 tulum, 7. Scruple, 2. Sextula, 7. Shekel, 5. Sr- 
 cilicus, 7. Siliqua, 6. Talent, 5. Uncia, S. Zu- 
 zaii, 5.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. ^79 
 
 Sy7ionyms. 
 
 Gramma, scruple. Keration, siliqua. Lens, grain. 
 Litra, libra. Quintal, hundred-weight. Sitarion, 
 grain. 
 
 1 N. B. The Grains, us'd in weighing Diamonds, are some- 
 what lighter than those us'd in gold, &c 
 
 2 i. e. 218, according to Bp. Cumberland : i6s, according 
 to father Mersenne. 
 
 3 So that the averdupois-ounce is less by -iS grains than 
 the troy ounce; which amounts to near a I2th part of the 
 whole, 
 
 4 i. e. 73 ounces-troy make 80 ounces-averdupois. 
 
 MARCH, 
 
 TTie 1st Day, to find on what Day of the Week 
 it happens. 
 
 1 The year, more 2 and even-4th, divide by 7 • 
 
 [given 
 
 2 By what remains (fdrO sat. 1 sund. and-so-on) it is 
 
 E. G. Ann. Dom. 26 + 2 -f- 6 (its even 4th) rr 34 -f- 7, 
 remains 6 : i.e. friday; accounting Saturday 0, Sunday 1, 
 
 monday i, &c. Before Christ, reckon Backward ; viz, 
 
 Sunday I, Saturdays, and so on to monday 0, e.g. Bef. 
 Ch. 7 + 2-1-1 (its even 4th) rr 1 o -r- 7, remains 3; i.e. 
 friday.— —Of the other months to find the 1st day, and con- 
 sequently what day of the week any day is ; V, Signs, 
 
 MONTHS, 
 
 The Number of Days in each, with the Days oj 
 the Nones and Ides. 
 
 Ap Sg NO .Tune-tc ^ : Mar Ma Jiil Oc, NO-/>, ij)-al " 
 in the Rest, l..at ^.
 
 380 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 1 February, it is well known, has 28 (iii the leap-years 
 29) the rest 3i. 
 
 a i. e. The Nones are on the 7th day, the Ides on the 15 • 
 in these 4 months. 
 
 3 i. e. The Nones are on the 5th, the Ides on the l3th : in 
 the rest. 
 
 MOON. 
 
 €i/ele and Epact. 
 Golden'% remainder of year-more- 1, divided by 19 ^ 
 Epact's the cycle iirto ab : above iz by iz, the re- 
 mainder 2. 
 
 Change and Age. 
 
 New's the remainder of month-from-march and 
 
 epact, less iz, auz^ . 
 Ap. Se. No. Jun, less en For Jan. Mar. 0. 
 
 Feb. Apr. 1 add. 
 Full's 1 5 days from the diaaige — Waining, east ; 
 
 Growing, west is enlightend ^. 
 
 Rising and Setting. 
 
 At Sun-set, sets New, rises Full ; and, each day, 
 
 minutes nb more. 
 Shining (in Waining) Subtract (in Enereasing) Add 
 
 to Sun-rise,-set. 
 
 Southing and Tides, 
 Southing's the age into ok, by 60 : from al, the 
 
 excess talve ^. 
 High-water at London-bridge : two hours and a half 
 
 after Southing ^. 
 
 1 e.g. 1737 -f 1 = 17"8 -f- 19t= 19: remainder 0, for 
 the cycle, or Golden number, 
 
 1 c. g. 9 (the cycle) X l l=:99-f-30 (as being above 30) 
 n 9 : remainder 9 for the epact. 
 
 3 e.g. May 20 (1737) What is the moon's age? .\nsw. 
 3 (the number of the month from march, inclusively) + 9 
 (the epact) zz 12 — 10— 18 : the day of the new mocn.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 381 
 
 when it is said to change. So the moon, on the 20th of may, 
 is 2 days old. 
 
 4 i. e. The Horns are tumd, in Decreasing (from the 
 Full) West-ward ; in Encreasing (from the New) East- 
 ward. 
 
 5 e.g. April 15 (l737) When comes the moon to the 
 meridian ? Answ. The moon's age is 26 : the excess above 
 (al) 15, is U. Then 11 »< 48 =z 528 -r- 60 zz 8 h. 48 m. 
 
 for the Southing. For the readier working, the rule 
 
 may be thus exprest : " Age into 4, hy 5 ; into 12 the re- 
 mainder gives minutes." e.g. II X 4 rz: 44 -7-5 rz 8 h : 
 remainder 4X1 2zz48 m. 
 
 6 e.g. Apr. 15 (i7'57) the moon Souths at 8 h. 48 m. 
 Then 9 h 48 m.+2 h.30 m,=:il h. 18 m. (N. B.) If the 
 amounts to more than 12; the excess shows the hour. 
 
 THE 12 SIGNS 
 
 or Portions of the Zodiac, nam'd from Constella- 
 tions once in them : their Names, Characters, 
 and corresponding Months ; with a Key to\flnd 
 the Sun's Place on any Dayi ; and on what day 
 of the Week the \st Day of any Month hap- 
 pens '. 
 
 1 Ar 
 
 ma 
 
 ni iP' 
 
 <y Aries 
 
 2 Taur 
 
 apr 
 
 ouf 
 
 ^ Taurus 
 
 3 G6ml 
 
 may 
 
 k s 
 
 n Gemini 
 
 4 Cance 
 
 jun 
 
 p e 
 
 So Cancer 
 
 5 L6 
 
 J61 
 
 P t' 
 
 SI Leo 
 
 6 V 
 
 au 
 
 P P] 
 
 W|i Virgo 
 
 7 Lib 
 
 se 
 
 p \ 
 
 tct Libra 
 
 8 So 
 
 oc 
 
 s ll 
 
 iTi Scorpio 
 
 9 S(? 
 
 no 
 
 p a 
 
 f Sagittarius 
 
 10 Cit] 
 
 de 
 
 k t 
 
 Ttf" Capricornus 
 
 11 Aqut? 
 
 ja 
 
 n s 
 
 ^ Aquarius 
 
 12 Pi3c6 
 
 feb 
 
 bad 
 
 K Pisces 
 
 1 The method is this: To the day of the month (-f- 1 1 
 for the old style) add the number signified by the numerals 
 n, ou, &c. the Sun ( — 30, if above 30) is in the degree 
 «f the sign corresponding to the day of the month. E. G.
 
 38^ PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Feb. 10 +11 (for the old style) + 11 (for the numeral la) 
 —32—30=zi°o{ H. 
 
 2 Thus : Froia the day on which March 1st happens (V. 
 March)- for any other month, count forward so many days 
 as are signified by the numerals a, f, &c. E. G. Mar. 1st, 
 1737, was tuesday : therefore Apr. 1st [counting (f) 4 on- 
 wards, tuesday being one] is friday : and, consequently, the 
 8th, 15th, aad, 29th, are fridays; whence may be known 
 the rest. [N. B. Jan. and Feb. arc reckond from Mar. of 
 the preceding year. 
 
 SUN, 
 
 f TKe Time of its rising each Day. 
 1 Jan-o \ 7 Febr-ei. 6 Mar-by. 5 Apr-oM. M-asi. 
 4 Jfil-p. 5 Aug-«f . 6 Sept-flrf. 7 O .. be. 8 N-tt/f. 
 t JuN-d«, the Longest, t j^ ^.-^-.^the Shortest ei boi. 
 
 For the intermediate Days. 
 Sought, into 60, by All, gives Min. fewer 1st Vme, 
 more 2d ^. 
 
 The Time of its Setting, each Month, &c. 
 Setting's the complemeut of rising to 12 ; aiMl, dou- 
 bled, the day gives *. 
 
 Cycle and Dominical Letter. 
 Cycles the remainder of year-more-9 by ek ^ : if 0, 
 
 ek^. 
 ek cycle's A ; fy, B ; and so on ^ ; e'ery 4th lus 2 ^ 
 
 (next 
 after these ads : dE, au G, a-y B, bo I>, <^i F, 
 
 de A, dau C> and 
 Former is us'd till Yeh-do, in Leap-years; and, 
 after, the Letter. 
 
 Tojind tlie Sun's Place m the Zodiac, V. Signi. 
 1. i. e. On Jan. 4, the Sun rises at 8. 
 «. i. e. On Jan. 41, New style (which i$ the LongtU day) 
 the Sun rises at 3 h. 43'*
 
 ▲ KTIflClAL MEMORY. 383 
 
 9. L e. The day sought (reckond from the day of the Sun's 
 rising) multiplied into 60, and divided by the number of 
 All the days between the day of the Sun's rising (specified) in 
 any month, and ibe day of its lising in the next ; gives the 
 Minutes /eu^er (or, to be subtracted from the hour speci- 
 fied) in the 1st line ; more (or, to be added) in the <id line, 
 
 e.g. Apr. 13, 1 would know when the Sunrises. By 
 
 5 Apr-ou I find that the day sought (reckond from the day 
 of the Sun's rising, viz. the 9th) is 4 [for 9+4:^ 13]. 
 Then 4 x 60 3: 240 : and 240 -f- 36 (the number of All the 
 days from 5 in Apr. ou to 4 M-as : i. e. from 9, the day the Sun 
 rises at 5 in April ; to 16, the day the Sun rises at 4 in May) 
 ~6' [and 24-36th i. e. by reduction] 40" : — 5 h, (the day it 
 rises on the 9th of April) rr 4 h. 53', 20", then, therefore 
 the sun rises on that day, viz. Apr. 13. 
 
 4 Thus, Dec. 21, New stile, the sun rises at sh. 17 m. 
 tfie complement q/its rising to 12 is 3 h. 43' [far 8 h. 17 m. 
 — 1 2 h. z: 3 h. 43 m.]. The sun therefore sets at 3 h. 43 m. 
 and this, doubled, gives the length of the day, viz. 7 h. 26 m. 
 shorter by 9 h. 8'. than the longest ; which (by the same 
 calculation) will be found to be 16 h. 34'. 
 
 5 e. g. 1737 + 9= 1746 -f- 28 iz: 62 the number of 
 revolutions since Christ) remainder )o, for the number of 
 the cycle, 
 
 6 i. e. If there be no remainder, it will be (e/fc) the 26th, 
 or last year of the cycle. 
 
 7 i. e. The dominical letter answering to the year of the 
 cycle 28 is.,^; to 27, Bi and so on (backwards) to G, the 
 7th and last : after which returns A, B, &c. 
 
 8 e. g. Every 4th (or Leap year ») has 2 dominical let- 
 ters: the latter of which is us'd after Keb. 24, the interca- 
 lary day ; which is therefore denoted by the same letter as 
 
 the 23d. N. B. For the readier finding the dominical 
 
 letter answering to any number of the cycle, I have given 
 (in parenthesis) those of every third : thus Caei F) F an- 
 swering to 18 (one of the 3ds there specified), 17 (the 
 next 4th, reckoning backwards) will be G A ; 16, B; 15, 
 C; &c. 
 
 (a) For the readier finding Leap-year, the rule is this : 
 " Year-sought divide by 4 ; what's left will he, for leap-year, 
 0; for past, I. i, or 3." e.g. 1737 -i- 4 :;=: 434= remain- 
 der 1 , for 1 St after leap-year.
 
 384 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Roman Manner of Dating, 
 
 (1) Kal Non. Id. (2) Pridie. (3) Tert. quart: (nb) 
 
 The day sought subtiact from 
 One more than Ide-None-days ; Two more than lh6 
 
 month's, for th6 Kalends. 
 
 I. i. e,) For the days on ^vhich the Kalends, Nones, Ides 
 of any month happen (V. Months; write (e. g.) Kal. Dec. 
 on the lialends of decen?,ber, viz. the Jst day of December. 
 (2) On the day preceding each of them, write (e. g,) Pridie 
 Kal, Dec. i. e. pridie kalendas decembris, on the day before 
 the kalends of derember, viz, the 30th of november. (3) 
 For the days backward, write Tertio, Quarto, ^-c. i, e. on the 
 3, 4th, &c. 
 
 II. To find any of the days, e. g, (i) lOth of decem- 
 
 ber. What, in the Roman style ? Answ. JO — 14 (One more 
 than the days the ides hufpen cnj ~ 4. i. e. 4to id. dec. 
 Again (2) 4to id. dec. What, in the English style? Answ. 
 
 4 — 14 IT 10. i. e. the ipth of december (l) 20th of 
 
 november: Say 20 — 32 {Two more than the numhcr of th* 
 days in the month) — 12. i.e. i2mo. kal. dec, (2) 12mo< 
 kal. dec. say 12 — 32 — 20.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 385 
 
 EPOCHAS. 
 Their Commencement in the Julian period. 
 
 • S 2" ? ;2 2* £:>■ 2* 2- ? 8 8 S- "^ vS * 55.^ ?^ o "^ 
 
 _ . g ^ ^ ^ g_ -.-.., I 
 
 
 L L
 
 386 PRINCIPAL SYSTEM OF 
 
 To find 
 I The year of the Julian period corresponding to 
 
 \ any year in any Mra. 
 
 Any year of any Mm by the corresponding 
 year of the Julian period. 
 
 Jul for Jfter ad d Comm-les s- 1 -for 
 
 Afore take from Comm. 
 
 ^. ( ^R^ After, Comm-less-1 take far Corr — 
 
 "'''. I but Afore, Corr. from Comim. 
 
 
 1. IVhat year of the Julian Period is the year 1737 (1) 
 
 before Christ? (2) after Christ? Answ. (i) 1737 
 
 (before Christ)— 4714 (the year of the cowTnencement of 
 he Christian aera in the Julian period) rr: 2977. (2) 1737 
 tafter Christ) -{■ 4713 (the commencement iess-i) rr 6450, 
 Che year of the Julian period. 
 *■ 2. JVhat year of the Christian ^ra is the year of the 
 
 Julian period (1) 2977 ? (2) 6450? Answ. (1) 2977 
 
 (the year of the Julian period corresponding to the year of 
 the aera sought) — 4714 the commencement of the Christian 
 sera) iz 1737. (2) 6450 the corresponding year) — 4713 
 (the co>n»»enceraent-less-l) ^: 1737. 
 
 * For the Number of Years from the Creation to the 
 Birth of Christ. 
 
 The Christian vulgar xra commences in 
 
 the year of the world 4004, jan 1. [according to 
 
 Helvicus, Isaacson, &c. 3.94S] The Jews 
 
 place the creation of the world, Later by 242 years, 
 
 viz. in 37()2, oct. 7. The Greek historians, 
 
 on the authority of the septuagint, Sooner by about 
 1490, or 1500 years, viz. the ecclesiastical, in 
 5494 ; the civil, in 5509.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SS7 
 
 FESTIVALS, 
 
 * Holy-daps, Feasts^ ff«. 
 
 IMMOVEABLE. 
 
 Christ. 
 Nat-de,rfM \ Circ-]a,&. Epiph-ja,s. Ldmm-au,ft. 
 HoRood-se,6o. Transf-au,*. 
 
 Maty. 
 Ann-m^r,e!. Pur-feb,€. Nat-se,^. Vis-jul,e. Conc- 
 de,A:. Ass-au,a/. 
 
 Saints. 
 AJl-ntiv,a. And-nov,J2. Bap-jun-f/". Bamaby-jun,c&. 
 Barth-aug,^. George-apr,ef. Jame9-jul,rfM. Inn6- 
 
 c^nt-dee,rfet. 
 John-dec,c?o/. Luke-o,ak. Mtak-^pn,du. Marti- 
 
 sio\emb.,ad. 
 Mdtt-se,da. Faul-jan-du. Pet-jun,</oM. Phil 
 
 Jaco-raay,fl. 
 Sim Jud-o,eA-. Ste-de,<7fl«. Tho-dec,«?a. Valentine- 
 feb,«/. 
 
 Royal Family, 1737. 
 CoR-o.Ja. PFoCLAJun.rtft. BoRN,King-o,f^ ; seit. 
 
 Quecn-mar,fl • seid. 
 W^les-)a,fy ; pyp. -cess-n,oA:. AiAOr-o,de : p^n. 
 
 Ame-nia,?2 : pab. 
 C!ar-ma,/z: pat. Will-apr,a/ : peb. Mar-fe,efe : 
 pnt. Loui-d,/* : pef. 
 
 Terms, as in 1737- 
 
 Terms hold weeks al : days Hilar-eJ. East ep. 
 Tr'm-dy, Mich-tau. 
 
 BiL from jaii-rf/ to feh-6e MiCH from 6c-do to 
 
 nov-^i-. 
 
 East, w^d-e after,begins : ends, 6fter ascension, 
 mond-fl. 
 
 Trin, frtday ^fter, begins ; and ends 3d Wednes- 
 day after. 
 
 Vac. holds weeks tot : days Hilar-oi*. East-op. Tr- 
 ab$. ' Mich-t^;.
 
 388 
 
 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Quarterly. 
 
 Lady-raar,e/, Midsura-jun-^. Mich-sep,«?OM. Chri- 
 dec,<2/. 
 
 State Holidays. 
 
 Fire-sep,e. Poud-no,^, Mi.xt-yA,ty. Restor-may,rfoM. 
 Revo-feb,flf. 
 
 MOVEABLE. 
 
 1 Before and after Easter, 2 
 
 f Sept-sf ^. Sex-Ms. Shrove-on. Qua;/)?. Lent-o*. 
 I Vk\-p. Maund-i. Good-Fri-rf. 
 Easter's the first Sunday after first Full-moon 
 after March-rfia. 
 C Low-oi -. R6ga-^M. Asc-in. Whits-on. Trin- 
 \ lau. KA-eta. 
 
 EMBER-rf«i/«. We Fri Sat, after Qua Whit Ho 
 Rood \AiiCi-dee,at. 
 
 EASTER TABLE 3. 
 
 Paschal full-moons for the Golden-numbers, with 
 the Hebdomadal Letters. 
 
 A 
 M 
 A 
 A 
 M 
 A 
 M 
 
 I 
 
 el 
 bi 
 
 e 
 ed 
 by 
 
 iz 
 
 8 A 
 
 9 A 
 10 M 
 
 11 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 
 A 
 A 
 M 
 A 
 
 bei 
 
 oi 
 
 eoi 
 
 bu 
 
 f 
 
 eo 
 be 
 
 15 A 
 
 16 M 
 
 17 A w a 
 
 18 M -eou d 
 
 19 A -boi h 
 
 a g 
 ea c 
 
 Use of the Table. 
 Sum from Hebdom to Domin (of the year sought) 
 add to the Month's day. ^ 
 
 Synonyms, S(C. 
 Ash Wednesday, 1st day of lent. Candlemas, pu- 
 rification of the virgin M. Crucifixion, good-fiiday. 
 Holy-thursday, mauuday. Holy-week, last of lent. 
 John the Baptist, midsummer. Parasceue, good-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMOnV. 38^1 
 
 friday. Passion-week, last of lent. Pentecost, 
 •Whitsuntide, wliitsontide. Processioning-day, as- 
 cension day. Quinquagesima, shrove-sunday. 
 Slior-(Sliur-)thurs-day, maunday-tliursday. Twelfth- 
 day, epiphany. 
 
 1 i. e^ The nativity of Christ is on dec, 25. and so of the 
 rest. 
 
 2 i. e. ^p'ejBtuasresima-sunday is (st) 63 days before 
 
 Easter [70 before the octave of easter] £,o2i; sunday is 
 
 (oi) 7 days after Easter, and so of the rest. 
 
 3 The Easter-lahle consists of 5 verses, each ending at a 
 period mark ; and may be read thus : " One-aid, two-melg, 
 ^hTte-iH^'i e, (four Ac*, hve medd." dtrc. — Its Lse is to find 
 Easter-sunday for ever. V. n. 4. 
 
 4 e. g. A. D. 1/37, the golden number is 9, the dominical 
 letter B. then, against 9 (in the table) the hebdomadal letter 
 is F. from thence to the dominical B. are (gab) 3 : which 
 added to apr. 7 (the day of the month, in the table) gives 
 
 ap. 10, for easter-sunday. So A. D. 1736, golden-number 
 
 8, 1st dominical-letter C : then from C Qn the table) to C 
 (dominie.) 7 -\- apr. 18 n apr. 2^. 
 
 In the following verses (which contain as raucli, 
 1 think, as is necessary to charge the memory with 
 by way of foundation) I have given the most general 
 divisions of the several parts of the terraqueous 
 globe ; beginning, in each, with the most northerly 
 parts, and, in descending southwanls, proceed (to 
 the right) from west to east : so that children, with 
 a few hints and occasional helps, may be able to 
 find them, by themselves ; and thereby tix them 
 better in their memory ; after which they will easily 
 get the verses by heart, and be well prepared to 
 considt the gazetteer, or to go through any system, 
 with pleasure, to good advantage. 
 
 L L 3
 
 S90. PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 LAND. 
 
 Continents, Isles, Peninsulas, Isthmus, Capes, 
 Mountains. 
 
 CONTINENTS. 
 
 Europe, Africa, Asia, and America. 
 AF (8) Bar (fez mor a tun tripo biiic) Bi (dar) 
 
 Egy (alex cair) 
 Zaar (zu) Ne (tomb) Nubi (dang) Gui (ma why be 
 
 lo cang) Ethi (mon eaf ) 
 AM (23) Green Brit Wa La Can Acad Eng Jers 
 
 Pen Mary Virg Car 
 Geor Kent. Flor (ang pens) Mex (uad mi ta ju 
 
 chi gaut hon ver) 4 
 
 Firm (pa ca mar venez and gra po com dari) Per 
 
 (quite liira chare) 
 Am : Rrast (sal seba vin) Chil ( j^) Para (guai tucu 
 
 plat) Mag 7_ 
 
 AS (5) Tar (S sib che' thi) Tdrk (tn na curd sy di 
 
 ar) Pe (der isp gomb) 
 Ind (mog ag beng : vis go bi ni^l : pe to si co) Chi 
 
 pek nank 
 EUR (IS) ^ox-htrg. Swede-s^ocA:. (Scot-e<f'w. Ire- 
 
 dublin. Yj'london) 
 Den-C(5p. Hoi amst. Fland-Jrii**. Gt-vien. Vo-tvu. 
 
 Russ-petre : France-par. 
 ^witz-basil. Hung-presb. Port-lisb. Spa.\n-mad. Ital- 
 
 ro. Tu-constant. 
 
 AFRICA. 
 Barbary comprehends the kingdoms of Fez, Mo- 
 rocco, Algiers, Tunis, Tripoli, Barca. Bildulgerid: 
 Daara. Egypt: (ch. cit.) Alexandria, Cairo. Zaa- 
 ra: (ch. prov.) Zuenziga. Negroland: Tombute. 
 Nubia: Dangola. Guinea: Malaguette, Whydaw, 
 Benin, Loango, Congo, Angola. Ethiopia : Mone- 
 mugi, Monomotapa, CafFraria. 
 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Greenland, New-Britain, Neiv-Wales, Labrador,
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. SQl 
 
 Canada, Acadia or Nova Scotia, Ntw-Englandf 
 New Jersey, Pensylmnia, Maryland, Virginia, Ca- 
 rolina, Georgia, Kentucky. Florida (ch. towns) 
 St. Augustine, Pensacola. Mexico: (ch. prov.) 
 Guadaiajarra, Mechuacan, Tabasco, Jucatau, 
 Chiapa, Guatim^la, Honduras, Ver^gua. Terra- 
 Firma: Panama, Carthagena, St. Martha, Vene- 
 zuela, Andalusia, Granada, Popayan, Comana, 
 Darien. Peru : Quito, Lima, Los-Charcos. Atna- 
 zonia. Brazil: (ch. cit.) St. Salvador, St. Sebas- 
 tian, St. Vincent. Chili : St. Jago. Paraguay : 
 (ch. prov.) Guaira, Tucuman, Rio-de-la-PIata. Terra- 
 Magellanica. 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 Tartary : (ch. prov.) Astracban, Siberia, Chen- 
 yang, Thibet. Turkey: THrcomania, Natolia, 
 Curdistan, Syria including Palestine, Diarbec, Ey- 
 raco-Arabic. Persia: (ch. cit.) Derbent, Ispahan, 
 Gombroon. India: (ch. prov.) empire of the Great 
 Mogul (Agra, Bengal) Visiapour, Golconda, Bisna- 
 gur, Malabar, Pegu, Tonquin, Siam, ;^Cochinchina. 
 China: (ch. cit.) Pekin, Nankin. 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 Norway : (ch. cit.) Bergen. Sweden : Stock- 
 holm. Scotland: Edinburgh. Ireland: Dublin. 
 England: London. Denmark : Copenhagen. Hol- 
 land: Amsterdam. Flanders: Brussels. Ger- 
 many: Vienna. Poland: Warsaw. Russia: Pe- 
 tersburgh. France: Paris. Switzerland: Basil. 
 Hungary : Presburg. Portugal : Lisbon. Spain : 
 Madrid. Italy : Rome. Turkey: Constantinople. 
 
 Capes, lsla7ids, Penitisulas, and Mountains. 
 CAPES : La Li St-e/j^. Fi W-spain. Bla Ve Good-ajn. 
 C6m-malal'. Hoin-fueg.
 
 .392 PEINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 ISLES: 1^-den. Kz-pb. SaSicCuCy-med. Ma Ca- 
 
 b(/rb. He-gui. Madefk. 
 Maid Ceyl Sum Bo Su Jav Phi Mo Ladr-m</. Newf- 
 
 la. So-soufh-seas. 
 Bei-Jlo. BaCii Jam Hi Ric, Carib(antne mo barb) 
 
 mex. Fue^-mao;. 
 PEN : Jii-de. Mo-gre. Vie-tart, Afri. C^mb. Malac- 
 
 ind. Me\-amer-mrrth. 
 MOUNT: CheVi-scof. Vyr-spain. Alps-^f. Cauca- 
 
 tdrt, Ap-dlavh- n-mn. 
 
 CAPES. 
 
 Land's-eml, Lizard, Start-point (of) England. 
 Finisterre, St. Vincent's, Spain. Blanco, Verd, 
 Good-Hope, Africa, Comorin, Malabar. Horn, 
 Fuego. 
 
 ISLES. 
 
 Zealand (in) Denmark. Azores (west of) Por- 
 tugal. Sardinia, Sicily, Candia, Cyprus (in tbe) 
 Mediterranean. Madeiras, Canaries (against) Bar- 
 bary. St. Helena, Gvinea. Madagascar, Ethio- 
 pia. Maldives, Ceylon, Sumatra, Borneo, Sunda, 
 Java, Phillippines, Moluccas, Ladrones, East- 
 Indies. Newfoundland, Labrador. Society-Isles 
 (in the) South-Seas. Bermudas (against)"^ Florida. 
 Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, Hispaniola, Porto-Rico : 
 Caribbces (Antigua, Nevis, Montserrat, Barbadoes, 
 Mexico. Fuego, Terra-Magellanica. 
 
 PENINSULAS. 
 
 Jutland (in) Denmark. Morea, Greece. Precop. 
 Tartar}/. Africa. Canibaya, Malacca, East- 
 Indies. Mexico, Korth^America. 
 
 MOUNTAINS. 
 
 Cheviot (between) Scotland and England. Py- 
 renees, Spain and France. Alps, Italy and France. 
 Caucasus (in) Tartan/. "Apalachian, Norlh-Ame-
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 393 
 
 WATER. 
 Oceans, Seas, Gulphs, Straits, Rivers, and Lakes. 
 
 OCEANS : Hyp. Ethi. East. Alt-West. Paci-South- 
 
 del Zur. Ice. 
 SEAS: hdde-Suiede. Chan-eng.Medeu,afr. Black 
 
 eu,as. Casp-tartar. 
 GULFS: ho Fistvtde. Ven-itdl. Red-arab. Pers. 
 
 Ben^. Baff Hu-north-am. 
 STRAITS: Sound-bait. Gi-med. Ilel-6/a. Ba-rerf. 
 
 Sun-in. Hiid-bu. Da-baff. Mag. 
 LAKES : Lad O-russ. Ne Lo scot. Ge Lu-switz, 
 
 haha-pers. Bo-ne. Var-Jirm. 
 RIV. \tS-ca. Dan-bla. Rhiger. Rh Eb Nil-wie T. 
 
 'Eu-pers. Ga-6e. 'Mis-mex. 
 
 OCEANS. 
 
 Hyperborean or northern. Ethiopian. Eastern, 
 Atlantic or western. Pacific or south, or mare del 
 Zur. Icy near the South Pole. 
 
 SEAS. 
 
 Baltic, east of Denmark and Sweden. Channel, 
 south east of England. Mediterranean, between 
 Europe and Africa and part of Asia. Black sea, 
 between part of Europe and Asia. Caspian, in Great 
 Tartar^. 
 
 GULFS. 
 
 Of Bothnia and of Finland, in Sweden. Of Ve- 
 nice, east of . talj/. Red-sea, between Arabia and 
 Africa. Persian Gulf. Bay of Bengal in Asia. 
 Batfin's and Hudson's Bays in North America. 
 
 STRAITS. 
 
 Sound (of the) Baltic. Gibraltar, Mediterra- 
 nean, Hellespont, Black-sea. Babehnandel, Red- 
 sea. Sunda, Indian-ocean. Hudson's, Button's- 
 hay. Davis's, Bajffin'a-baj/. Magellan, South 
 Amei'ica,
 
 394 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 LAKES. 
 
 Ladoga and Onega, western part of Russia. 
 Loch-Ness and Lomond (in) Scotland. Lakes of 
 Geneva and Lucern, Switzerland. Babacombar, 
 Persia. Bornou, Negroland. Parime, Terra 
 Firma. 
 
 RIVERS. 
 
 Volga (falls into the) Caspian-sea. Danube* 
 Black-sea. Rhine, German-ocean. Rhone, Ebro» 
 Nile, Mediterranean. Tigris, Euphrates, Persian- 
 gulf. Ganges, bay of Bengal. Missisippi, bay of 
 Mexico. 
 
 A more particular Account 
 
 of the several coimtries of Europe may be exhibi- 
 ted, so as to give a precise idea of the situation of 
 each sub-division, after the manner of the following 
 specimen : in which (beside what was proposed in 
 general, note 1.) such as are contiguous South- 
 ward, are joind ; as in weLa- : such as are conti- 
 guous Westward, are hyphend ; as in Che-De- &c. 
 
 ENGLAND. 
 
 Its Forty Counties. 
 Nor cum-dur : weLa-york ; che-de-not-linc : shrop" 
 
 sta-le-rut norf : 
 Her-wo-wa-northa : Bed-hunt-camb-suff : niourgl- 
 
 6xfo-buck-hert-ess. 
 Som-wilt-berk-middlesex : com~dev-dors-hdmp- 
 
 surrey-kentSuss. 
 
 FIRST MERIDIANS. 
 
 On either Side cf Teneriffe. 
 (East) London-Gs (West) Fer-rf. Jag-s. Nicol-o^. 
 Coxyo-boi. Bras-6oM.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 3^5 
 
 Abbreviatures. 
 Ferro. St. Jago. St. Nicholas, coast of Brasil. 
 
 The Dutch placed the first Meridian at Teneriffe ; th« 
 French, since 1634, at Ferro, two degrees w«t of Teneriffe: 
 others variously, as in the memorial verse. In most of the 
 French maps and those copied from them two degrees must 
 be allow d on such as ate calculated on the Dutch plan to 
 make them correspond ; as for example — Hamburgh is there 
 said to be lone. 29 deg. 90 m. E. consequently in the French 
 maps it will be found in 31 deg. 20 ra. and in similar manner 
 are all the rest. Many modern geographers usually now 
 calculate the first Meridian from the capital city of the state 
 in which each resides : the English reckon from the Royal 
 Observatory at Greenwich near London ; the North Ameri- 
 cans from Philadelphia, situated 75 deg. 8 m. W. from Lon- 
 don ; and several of the French from Paris 2 deg. 20 m. E. 
 of London. 
 
 BIBLE. 
 
 The several Books of if, with the Time of their 
 writing. 
 
 OLD TESTAMENT. 
 
 Its 39 Books. 
 
 Elih-jSb ; a/>/_y ^ Mo-pent : bog. Josh: boli/.Sdiu- 
 
 ju-ki : baz)/. 
 Dav: bi/li/. Sal-pro-can-ecc : ath. M6rd-e : toz. 
 
 E'z-chr: ety. Neh: eg. 
 
 Prophets. 
 
 Jon: kse. Jo: eig. Am: peip. Hose; oieil. Is: 
 
 p&uy. Nail : puk. 
 Mic ; put. Jer: sta. Zeph : dutz. Haba : syn.'EjZi', 
 
 loul. Oh-AAx-lkoi. 
 Daniel: uU. Hag: Uz, Zechari: udx. Malachi ; 
 
 touoi.
 
 396 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT. 
 
 Its 27 Books. 
 
 Matt/fl.2 MdLX-ot. Thes-let. ?e-!o. Gal Cor 
 
 R6ma-/oi. Luke-sa. 
 Phil Col Eph^s Phile Janie-*e. Heb Act-si. Timothy 
 
 Tit-SM. 
 Tim Peter-aup. Jude-pa. Revel-ow*. John-rnA.- — 
 
 ' dot in iau. 
 
 1 i. e. Elih\i is most probably supposed to be the author 
 of the book of job, about 17 30 years before the birth of 
 Christ. So, Moses, the author of the p«itateuch, flourished 
 
 in the year before Christ 1400. And so of the rest 
 
 N. B Ezra, is thought by the Jewish doctors to have writ the 
 chronicles [the 36th chapter of Genesis, the last of Joshua 
 and Jeremiah ; and to have revised and settled the cannon of 
 the old testament.] 
 
 2 i. e. Mntlhew writ his gospel about the year of our Lord 
 41. And so of the rest. 
 
 3 i. c. 27 books (from the year 41 to 97) in 36 years. 
 
 ENGLAND 
 
 Its Kings, since the Conquest, with the Commence- 
 ment of their Reigns. 
 
 Will Conq-sau,^ Ruf-koi. Hen ist-ag. Steph-6i7. 
 
 He sec-bt(f. 
 Rich ist-Je/n. JoHN-fln«. HfiNSd-rfcs. Edward 
 
 1 st-doid. 
 Ed 2<i-t> p, 3dtep. Ri sec-ipp. Hen Uh-toun, 
 
 5th Jut. 
 6th fed. Fd ^thfaub, 5th, RY 3d feU. He 7th-/«7, 
 
 Sthlyn. 
 Ed 6t\\-l6p. M AB.Y -lat. Els luk, Jame Ist-sj/t, Cii 
 
 ist Sf^. 
 
 Car 2d 6wi. jAMEse-«e^/. Will MA-wm. Ann- 
 pyd. Geopaf, pep.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 397 
 
 I i. e. WiHiam the coTt^ueror began his reign (accounting 
 
 the year to begin January i) A. D. 1066 N. B. 1000 is 
 
 omitted throughout this list. 
 
 MONARCHIES. 
 
 The grand or universal ones, their Rise, Fall, 
 and Continuance. 
 
 ASS : Nrn(A.M><5'/>dA-. Sar-frf^ (BAB-j/an, Pers- 
 
 t/ruboi, Grec iV/-T- 
 Cass-ma-gre. Lys thrac-he-bos. Ptolem a6-lib-a- 
 
 pal-sy. Seleue as.) 
 BOM : iu\-ini/'d, }ov-otat -f- East, West : taken 
 
 C6n-loze, Rom-otun : 
 A'Iar(A.D)-o62, Atti-/.?. Gkns/ul. Od-ops. Tlieod- 
 
 oni. Tot-lop. 
 
 i. e. The Assyrian monarchy begun in Ninus (A. M.) 
 
 1748, and ended with As^araddinu^ in 3^35; being swallowd 
 up by the BABylonian, which ended i,with Nabonadius) in 
 3419, (when Cyrus reignd over all Asia) so the kins^dom 
 was translated to the PEBsians: from whom (by the con- 
 quest of Darius Codomannus) in 3617, Alexander translated 
 it to the GnEcians : after whose death, in 3(i-25, it was (-j-) 
 divided (alter the confusion of a few years) among four of 
 his followers. Cassdinder had wacedon and ^rfce : Lysi- 
 machus had thrace, with those parts of Asia that border on 
 the /lellespont and the /'Oiphorus : Ptolemy had irgypt, libya, 
 arabia, palciUne, and ctrloiyf'a: ■Se/ei/nis, all the rest of 
 as\a. The ►RoMan monarchy begun %vith Ju.l'i\js Cae- 
 sar, in 3902; and ended in Jovian in 4313: after whose 
 death it was (-f-) divided into the Eastern, and IVestcxn em- 
 pires : the former of which ended by the taking of C'an- 
 stantinoplc (under Constantine I'alseologus) in 5402 ; the 
 latter by the taking of Romt (under Honorius) in 43f>9; 
 A. D. 410; hy Alanc, king of the Goths: after whom it 
 was overrun and ravagd by Alli\d, king of the Huns, in 4jl ; 
 by Gen^eric, the Vandal, in 455; by Of/oacer, king of the 
 Heruli, in 476; by Theudouc, king ot the Ostrogoths, ia 
 493; by Talilas, the Ostrogoth, in 547. 
 
 M M
 
 398 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 WAR. 
 Bodies of Soldiers, 
 
 R] Decbi/. Cen-az7/. Man-eg. Turm-ig". Cohor-dug, 
 
 hegi-auth. Ph-eith. 
 E] Comp uz,ag. Si[\idid-ag,eg. B-dlgfCig. Brigad- 
 
 ath,hag. V\t^-ig,auth. 
 
 1. The Roman L,eg-iow consisted of (at a medium) 6000 
 men : though the nuniber was different, at different times, 
 from 3o to 6666. And, in proportion, the other bodies, 
 viz. Deairia, 10. Centuria, lOO. Manipulus, 200. Turma^ 
 300. Cohors, 600. Phalanx, 8000. 
 
 2. An English Regiment is. from 300 to 1000 men. 
 And, in propor ion, the other bodies, viz. Company, 5o- 
 100. Squadron, 100-200. Battalion, 500-800. Brigade^ 
 1000-1100. 
 
 Natural ^fjtlo^ojifjp* 
 
 PHYSICS. 
 
 ANNUITIES. 
 
 TTie Value, for several Ages of Life. 
 
 K-hz,dei ^ Az-b',fo. '£.z-hf,pei. lzb^,pe. Oz-uz,iip. 
 
 0\-n,oub. 
 \]z-ou,€b. \]\-k,nb. Auz oi,^y. 'Aul-du,lo. Oizl,id. 
 
 1. i. e- for (A) 1 year of age, the value of an annuity is 
 ^a,det) lo,'28 years purcliase. And so of the rest. V. Hal- 
 iey, ap. Lowthorp, vol 3. p. 669. 
 
 ARKS. 
 
 Of Noah, and of the Covenant Testimony, their 
 Dimensions in Cubits. 
 
 (Gov) L-e,re. V>v-A,re. Da, re. (Noah) L-ig. Br-wx. 
 D-Jz ; for Biids-f«-, Qn-ag.
 
 ARTII^ICIAL MEMORY. 399 
 
 i. e. The Ark of the Covenant was a sort of Chest in 
 
 length, fireadth. Depth, 2|: 1^: l^. of Noah was a 
 
 sort of Ship, 300 : 50 : 30 : sufficient to hold (with food, 
 &c.) all kinds of Birds (viz.) JOo . Quadrupeds, lOO. V. Gen. 
 6. 15. Exod. 25. 10. 
 
 ATMOSPHERE. 
 
 Its He'f^ht, Weight, Elasticity, SfC. 
 
 Atmosphere (HiGU rai(es-o2 ') on a foot-square 
 
 presses emuz pounds ; 
 On 13 feet (for a man) tuns-a/: when least, tun fl,re 
 
 less 2 ; 
 Weighing as l to (water) eig to mercury) 
 
 azth eig ^. 
 C6mprest, on Earth, to atpaun * ; by Art, (JO times 
 
 more, to kesboz. 
 
 1 As appears by a calculation, made by M. de la Hire, from 
 the crepuscula. 
 
 2 As appears by calculations made from the Torricellian 
 experiments. V. Jurin, ap Varen. 1. 6. ly. 7. 
 
 3 i. e. The weight of air compard to that of water, is as 1 
 to 800, &c. V. Hauksbee's exper. 
 
 4 i. e. The common air we breathe, near the surface of the 
 earth, is comprest, by the bare weight of the incumbent at- 
 mosphere, into a 13769th part of the space it would take-up, 
 were it at liberty. V. Boyle, ap. Wallis. hydrost. 13 Philos. 
 trans, n. 181. 
 
 DIVISIBILITY. 
 
 Of Matter, actually great. 
 
 By great Effluvia, in along time, bodies I6se but 
 
 a small weight ^ 
 Cnndle, an inch, convdxted to Light gives 
 
 parts a nonillion. ♦
 
 400 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS O? 
 
 1 As is evident in perfumes, &c. 
 
 2 At which rate there must fly out of it, as it burns, in 
 the second of a minute, 418,660,0OO,000,0OO,000,0OO,OOO, 
 000,000,000,000,000,000,000 particles : vastly more than a 
 looo times a looo millions the number of sands the whele 
 earth can contain; reckoning lo inches to 1 foot, and that 
 100 sands are equal to i inch. V. Nieuwent. rel. phil. vol. S. 
 p. 858. 
 
 DUCTILITY. 
 
 Of Bodies, veHy great* 
 
 Microscopical Spiders ^ spin at-a-time, at least, 
 
 threads-aw^A. 
 Glass may be drawn ^ as a web, and knit to the 4th 
 
 6f a line space \ 
 Gold, on Silver-wire, is drawn * to the p^rt of an 
 
 iiK'h-bom, 
 
 , 1 i. e. Such are not visible but b7 a microscope. 
 
 2 ** As fine as a spider's web :" but not long enough to he 
 woven. 
 
 3 i. e. So, that the space in the middle of the knot shall net 
 exceed one 4th of a line, or one 48th of an inch. 
 
 4 " To the 14-niillionth part of an inch, in thinness :" and 
 yet is so perfect a cover to the silver, that there is not an. 
 aperture to admit alcohol of wine (the subtilest fluid in n** 
 ture) nor even light itself. Reaumur. 
 
 EVAPORATION 
 
 Fram Water, its Quantity. ^ 
 
 FooT-squSre, by h6at, in a day, evaporates h^lf of a 
 
 wine pint ^. 
 So, Medi tuns-udky'm ^ ; near a third more than's 
 
 brought by tlie rivers ^. 
 
 \ According to experiments made by Dr. Halley, ap. 
 Miscell. curios, vol. 1. To which it may be added, that the 
 winds do sometimes carry-ofFmore than rises by heat.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 401 
 
 2 Estimating the il/editerranean at 40 degrees long, and 4 
 broad. 
 
 3 V. Rivers, and, consequently, from the whole watery 
 surface abundantly enough to furnish all the dews, rains, 
 springs, rivers. Sec. that are convey'd into the ocean. 
 
 MAN. 
 
 JLife, Marriage, Parts, Perspiration. 
 
 LirE, out of dg, but — at Aii, so * — at Asji/ — at 
 
 Es, bit — at /*, bau 
 He at Os, dz at Us,au & at Aus, i — 
 
 at Ois, a. 
 Mark, a in uzf-: bir-/^ (to bur as a,au to a *) 
 
 males-6o to fern at ^. 
 BoNEs-e«/. MuscLEs-/f7i. TEETU-/rf Blood 
 
 as ag to aauy ^. 
 Beats, iu an hour, times-o^/t ; and an ounce, at a 
 
 time, is discharged "^ : 
 .52 feet in a minute; as sept-og- to 1 \n th6 ex- 
 tremes ^. 
 Perspire through pores ( belth-\\\\txtoi by one 
 
 grain of sand may be coverd) 
 5 parts of 8 (a day's food) from hours 5, after meals, 
 
 to the 12th, 3'^ 
 
 1 i. e. Of the children born, out of loo, there are living, 
 at 6 years of age, but 64. And so of the rest. V. Halley, 
 ap. Lowthorp. vol. 3. p. 699. N. B. On observa- 
 tions of this nature, drawn from the bills of mortality, is 
 computed the value of annuities for different ages of life. V. 
 Annuities. 
 
 2 1. e. 1 in 104 Marry. King. 
 
 3. i. e. Marriages, one with another, do each produce 4 
 births. Derham. 
 
 4 i.e. Births to Burials arc as 1, 6 to 1. Derham. 
 
 5 i. e. Males, born, to Females, are as 14 to 13. Graunt. 
 
 6 i.e. In a body, weighing 1 69 pound, loo thereof are 
 Blood; understanding thereby not only the fluid containd in 
 the veins and arteries ; but also that in the lymphae-ducts, 
 nerves, and the other vessels, secreted from it, and returnd 
 into it, Keil. 
 
 M M 3
 
 408 PRINCIPAL SYSTIWS OP 
 
 7 i. c. 250 pounds in an hour , at the rate of the whole 
 mass, in 24 minutes. 
 
 s i. e. The blood is driven out of the heart into the great 
 artery with a velocity, which would carry it 52 feet in a 
 minute : a velocity to that of its motion in the remotest 
 branches, as loo septillions [7th period] to 1. 
 
 9 Within 5 hours after eating, there is perspird about 1 
 pound; from the I2th to the 1 6th scarce half-a-oound. Sane- 
 tori us. 
 
 RIVERS. 
 The Quantity of their Waters. 
 
 At Kirngston-bridge, Thames (yards Broad-ae-, 
 
 Dee}W) 2 mile an hour Runs ^ : 
 tuns-em igih in a day ; rh e ti po ni do niest nieper 
 
 akdoim 2. 
 
 1. In a day, 48 miles, 84,480 yards; which multiplied by 
 (3 times 100, the profile of water at the bridge, viz.) 
 906 yards, gives 25,344,000 cubic yards of water, i. e. 
 20,300,090 tuns. 
 
 2 The most considerable rivers that fall into the Meditbr- 
 FANEAH sea, are the Rhone, Ebro, Tiler, Po, Danube, Nile, 
 Don,Niester, Nieper, Each of these is supposed to carry-down 
 10 times as much water as the Thames (not that any of 
 Owto is so great ; but so to allow for the other lesser rivers 
 that fell into that sea). Now the water of the Thames 
 tciftg computed, as above, at about 20,300,000 tuns ; the 3 
 rivers aforesaid will amount, each, to 209,000,000 ; in »B, 
 i,827,«oo,ooot«'ns. V. Evapofation.
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 405 
 
 Solomon Lowe was a schoolmaster at 
 Hammersmith, and author of the following 
 works. — I. The Protestant Family Piece, or, a 
 pictme of Popery, 8°. 17 16. — II. KOINA 
 KAINHS : an appendix to Grammar, contain- 
 ing Rhetoric and Prosody, with directions for 
 Composing, Construing, Parsing, Writing ele* 
 gantly, and gaining a Copia of Thoughts and 
 Words. To which are added, very short, plain, 
 and comprehensive rudiments of the French and 
 Greek Tongues, 8^ 1719.-111. A Specimen 
 of a Latin Grammar, 8". 1722. — IV. A Gram- 
 mar of the Latin Tongue, with appendix and 
 notes, 8°. 1724. — V. Italian Rudiments, 8". 
 1728.— VI. Latin Rudiments, 8°. 1729.— VII. 
 The Occasional Critique; containing, (1.) On 
 the Dean of Rochester's Latin Grammar. (2.) 
 On Dr. Busby's Latin Grammar, as improved 
 by his successors. (3.) On Education, etc. (4.) 
 A Proposal of a new scheme of Grammar, 
 8°. 1736* — VIII. English Grammar reformed, 
 8". 1737.— IX. Rhetoric delineated, 8°. 1737. 
 Of the following publications we have not 
 been enabled to ascertain the dates. — I. An easy 
 method of initiating Children in the Latin 
 
 • These tracts were published separately under dif- 
 ferent titles and afterwards reprinted with the title of 
 the Occasional Critique. No. 4, the last, was entitled 
 ^\}Z Mi^tsmt, etc. and publislied in 1732.
 
 404 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS OF 
 
 Tongue, 8°. — II. A New System of English 
 Examples to Latin Syntax, 8°. — III. A Voca- 
 bulary Latin and English. — IV. Sententia pue- 
 riles, Latin and English. — V. English Exam- 
 ples to Latin Syntax. — VI. A Construing Book 
 and Supplement, — VII. Greek Characters and 
 Abbreviations, in a Table. 
 
 QQ. Dan. Geo. 3IorhoJii Polyhistor 
 Literarius Philosophicus et Prac' 
 ticus, cum accessionihus virorum 
 clarissimorum J oh. Frickii et J oh. 
 Molleri Flenshurg. [Edit. Quart.] 
 2 t07n. 4°. Luhecce, 1747. 
 
 In this work there are two ingenious disserta- 
 tions, 1. De Arte Liil/iana similibusque inven- 
 tis. '2. D^ Memoria subsidiis. To these w€ 
 confess some obligations ; although Morhof, 
 from unavoidable circumstances, was not con- 
 sulted till most of the collections were made for 
 this account of the systems of Artificial Me- 
 mory. 
 
 Daniel George Morhof, was born at 
 Wismar, in the Dutchy of Mecklenburgh, in the 
 year 1639. He studied at Stettin and Rostock, 
 and visited Holland and Oxford ; and in lG65, 
 was invited by the Duke of Holstein to become 
 Professor of Poetry, Eloquence, and History, 
 and Librarian in the University of Kiel, H«
 
 ARTIFICIAL MEMORY. 405 
 
 died in I69I. His principal work is the Poly- 
 histor, a complete storehouse of miscellaDeous 
 literature. 
 
 67. Cartas Eruditas y CuriosaSy por D. 
 Fr, B. J. Feyjdo, 4°. 5 torn. Ma- 
 drid, 1781. 
 
 In this work* there is a dissertation on reme- 
 dies for the memory, and one on the Art of Me- 
 mory, in which several books on the subject are 
 named. In another essay, the principles of the 
 art are stated to consist in particular places and 
 images, and a sphere or globe is divided into va*" 
 rious compartments. In the tenth section of this 
 essay, Feyjoo speaks of remembering certain 
 words by the means of images, and, in the eleventh 
 section, illustrates the application of the art to 
 poetry, by two examples taken from a treatise 
 on Artificial Memory, by Count de Nolegar, 
 which may be seen in another part of this work.-l* 
 
 Benedict Jerom Feyjoo was a Spanish 
 Benedictine, and attempted by his writings and 
 example to correct and reform the vitiated no- 
 tions of his countrymen. His Theatro CriticOj 
 in 9 vols, and the Cartas Eruditas, in 5 vols. 
 4**. are works of considerable merit. Feyjoo 
 censures, with great freedom and spirit, the igno- 
 
 • Tom. I. pp. 200—228. t See p. 165.
 
 4C6 PRINCIPAL SYSTEMS, ETC. 
 
 ranee aud licentiousness of the clergy, and ex- 
 poses the futility of pilgrimages, pretended mi- 
 racles, and superistitious exorcisms. Tbis con- 
 duct rendered him obnoxious to the pains and 
 penalties of the church, and Feyjoo was, with 
 difficulty, saved from the horrors of the Inqui- 
 sition. He died in 1765. 
 
 We have not been enabled to procure the date 
 of the following books ; the titles, therefore, 
 could not be inserted in regular order. 
 
 1. Anacardina a la Arte de Memoria. 
 
 2. Joh. Aguilera de Arte Memories. 
 
 3. Epiphaniide Muirans, Ars Memoria ad- 
 mirabilis, omnium nescientium excedens captum. 
 
 4. Franc. Conti de Arte Memoria, 
 
 5. Hieronj/mus Megiserus de Arte Memoria. 
 
 6. Aharo Ferreija de Vera, Trattaio de JVJc- 
 moria artijiciosa.
 
 INSTANCES 
 
 OF THE 
 
 EXTRAORDINARY POWERS 
 
 OF 
 
 Statural iMemorp* 
 
 CHROKOLOGICALLV ARRANGED. 
 
 B.C. 
 
 115 TIoRTENSius, the celebrated Roman 
 Orator, and contemporary of Cicero, was aided 
 by uncomujon powers of memory. He was able 
 to repeat a whole oration in the words he had 
 previously conceived it, without committing it to 
 writing ; and to go through all the arguments of 
 an opponent in their proper order. As a proof 
 of the degree in which he possessed this faculty, 
 it is said that he once attended a whole day at a 
 public sale, and at the end of it, recited, iu 
 regular order, the names of all the buyers, the 
 articles sold, and their prices, with perfect ex- 
 actness.
 
 408 INSTANCES OF 
 
 65. A. D. — Seneca. "Age (says Seneca) 
 has done me many injuries, and deprived me of 
 many things I once had : it hath dulled the sight 
 of my eyes, blunted the sense of my hearing, and 
 slackened my nerves. Amongst the rest 1 have 
 mentioned before is the memory, a thing that is 
 the most tender and frail of all parts of the soul, 
 and which is first sensible to the assaults of age : 
 that heretofore this did so flourish in me, as not 
 only served me for use, but might even pass for 
 a miracle I cannot deny ; for I could repeat two 
 thousand names in the same order as they were 
 spoken, and when as many as were scholars 
 to my master, brought each of them several 
 verses to him, so that the number of them 
 amounted to more than two hundred, beginning 
 at the last, I could recite them orderly unto the 
 first : nor was my memory only apt to receive 
 such things as I would commit to it, but was 
 also a faithful preserver of all that I had entrusted 
 it with." 
 
 980. A. D.— AvicENNA, or Ebn-Sina, an 
 Arabian philosopher and physician, was born at 
 Arsena, near Bocchara, and possessed a ready 
 genius, and a wonderful memory. At the age 
 of ten he made great progress in the languages, 
 and could repeat the Koran by heart. He read 
 over the books of Aristotle's Metaphysics forty 
 times ; and by this means so fixed them in his
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 409 
 
 memory, that he could repeat them with fa- 
 cihty. 
 
 1484. A. D. — Joseph Scaliger. The works 
 of Homer, (says Waiiley) are his Iliads and Odys- 
 8eys, the former consist of twenty- four books, and 
 so also the latter. His Iliads have in it thirty-one 
 thousand six hundred and seventy verses, and I 
 suppose his Odysseys have no less ; and yet it is 
 said of Joseph Scaliger, that in one-and-twenty 
 days he committed alt Homer to his memory. 
 
 1522. A. D. — Bishop Jewel had naturally 
 a very strong meiwory, which he greatly improved 
 by art ; so that he could readily repeat any thing 
 that he had written after once reading it. His 
 own sermons w ere chiefly extempore from heads 
 which he had penned down, and on which he 
 used to meditate while the bell was ringing to 
 summon the congregation to church. He is said 
 to have taught his method of artificial memory 
 to his old tutor, Dr. Parkhnrst, while they 
 were at Zurich ; who in the space of 28 days, 
 with only one hour's application on each day, 
 learned all the 28 chapters of St. Matthew's 
 Gospel so perfectly, that he could readily repeat 
 the whole, or any particular verse, knowing at 
 the same time what went before, or what fol- 
 lowed after, any verse that was mentioned to 
 him. 
 
 So firm was the memory of Bishop Jewel 
 
 N N
 
 410 INSTANCES OF 
 
 that he used to say, if he were to deliver a pre- 
 meditated speech before a thousand auditors, 
 shouting or fighting all the while, they would not 
 put him out. John Hooper, Bishop of Glou- 
 cester, who was burnt in the reign of Queen 
 Mary, once, to try him, wrote about forty 
 Welsh and Irish words. Mr. Jewel going a 
 little while aside and recollecting them in his 
 memory, and reading them twice or thrice over, 
 said them by heart, backward and forward, ex- 
 actly in the same order in which they were set 
 down. And, at another time, he did the same 
 by ten lines of Erasmus* paraphrase in English; 
 the words of which being read sometimes con- 
 fusedly without order, and sometimes in order 
 by the Lord Keeper Bacon, Mr. Jewel thinking 
 ' awhile on them, presently repeated them again. 
 
 1547- A. D. — Lipsius, an eminent philoso- 
 pher and critic, born at Isch, near Brussels, was 
 remarkable for the extent of his memory. He 
 remembered th« whole history of Tacitus, and 
 pledged himself to recite word for wordy any 
 passage that might be required. So confident 
 was he of having this book fixed in his memory, 
 that he allowed a person to stand by him with a 
 dagger, and to pUmge it into his body if he did 
 not repeat, faitlifully, the words of the author. 
 
 1585. A. D. — MuRET ill his Varite Lectiones 
 has the following anecdote. In Padua, near
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 411 
 
 unto me, dwelt a young man of Corsica, of good 
 birth, and sent thither to study the civil law ; in 
 the study of which he had spent some years with 
 that diligence and attention, that there was now 
 raised amongst us a great opinion of his learning. 
 He came almost every day to my house, and there 
 went a report, that he attained to an art of me- 
 mory, by assistance of which he was able to 
 perform that which another could not believe 
 unless he beheld it ; when I heard this, I had a 
 desire to behold these wonderful things, as one 
 not very credulous of such matters as come by 
 hearsay. I therefore desired him to give me 
 some such kind of instance of his art as he should 
 think fit. He told me he would do it when I 
 pleased. " Immediately, then," said I ; and 
 when he refused not, all we who were present 
 went into the next room; there did I dictate 
 Latin, Greek, and barbarous names, some signi- 
 ficant, others not ; so many, and so different, 
 having not the least dependance one upon the 
 other, that I was weary with dictating, and the 
 boy with writing what I dictated, and all the rest 
 with hearing, and expectation of the issue. 
 When we were thus diversely wearied, he alone 
 called for more. But I myself said it was fit to 
 observe some measure : and that I should be 
 abundantly satisfied if he could but recite me the 
 one half of those 1 had caused already to be set
 
 412 INSTANCES OF 
 
 down. He fixing his e^es upon the ground 
 (with great expectation on our part,) after a short 
 pause oegaii to speak. In brief, to our amaze- 
 ment, he repeated ali we had written in the very 
 same order they were set down, without scarce 
 a stop or any hesitation : and then beginning at 
 the last, recited them all backwards to the first ; 
 then so as that he would name only the first, 
 third, fifth, and in that order repeat all ; and in- 
 deed in what order we pleased, without the least 
 error. Afterwards, when I was more familiar 
 with him (having often tried him, and yet never 
 found him speaking otherwise than the truth,) he 
 told me once, and certainly he was no boaster,^ 
 that he could repeat in that manner thirty-six 
 thousand names, and which was yet the most 
 strange, things stuck in his memory, that he 
 would say, with little trouble, he could repeat 
 any thing he had entrusted within a y«ar after. 
 For my own part, I made trial of him after 
 many days, and found he said true. He taught 
 Franciscus Molinus, a young patrician of Venice^ 
 and who had but a weak memory, in the com- 
 pass of but seven days, wherein he had learned 
 of him to repeat five hundred names with ease, 
 and in what order he pleased. 
 
 1649. A. D. — Famianus Stbada, in his 
 first book of academical prolttsions, speaking of 
 Frauciscus Suarez, says, J* he hath so strong
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 413 
 
 a memory, that he hath St. Augustine (the most 
 copious and various of the fathers) ready by 
 heart, allegin<; every where, as occasion presents 
 itself, fully and failhfully his sentences, and, 
 which is very strange, his words ; nay, if he be 
 demanded any thing touching any passage in 
 any of his volumes (which of themselves are al- 
 most enough to till a library,) I myself have seen 
 him instantly showing and pointing with his finger 
 to the place and page in which he disputed of 
 that matter. 
 
 1661. A. D. — Dr. Thomas Fuller, the 
 author of the Worthies of England, had so great 
 a memory, (says Wanley) that he could name in 
 order all the signs on both sides the way from the 
 beginning of Pater-noster-Row at Ave-Maria- 
 Lane, to the bottom of Cheapside to Stocks- 
 Market* And that he could dictate to five 
 several writers at the same time, un as many 
 different subjects. This gentleman making a 
 visit to a committee of sequestrators sitting at 
 Waltham in Essex, they soon fell into a dis- 
 course and commendation of his great memory ; 
 
 * The site of Stock-Market is now occiipiod by the 
 Mansion-House, and many other adjacent buiUiings. The 
 celebrated Heidegger it is said, could name all the signs 
 from the Exchange to St. James's, on one side the street, 
 after walking once to obsei-\'e them. 
 N N .S
 
 414 INSTANCES OF 
 
 to which Mr. Fuller replied, " 'Tis true, gen- 
 tlemen, that fame has given me the report of a 
 memorist, and if you please I will give you an 
 experiment of it." They all accepted the mo- 
 tion, and told him they sh uuld look upon it as an 
 obligation, laid aside the business before them, 
 and prayed him to begin. " Gentlemen, (says 
 he) I will give you an instance of my good me- 
 mory in that particular. Your worships have 
 thought fit to sequester an honest poor but cava- 
 lier parson, my neighbour, from his living, and 
 committed him to prison ; he has a great charge 
 of children, and his circumstances are but indif- 
 ferent, if you please to release him out of prison, 
 and restore him to his living, I will never forget 
 the kindness while I live." 'Tis said the jest 
 had such an influence upon the committee, that 
 they immediately released and restored the poor 
 clergyman. 
 
 1676. A. D. — ^HuMPHRY Burton, of Co- 
 ventry, at the age of eighty-three, could (says 
 Wanley) by the strength and firmness of his me- 
 mory, give the sum of any chapter in the New 
 Testament, and of the chapters in divers books 
 of the Old Testament, in a Latin distich, with 
 as much readiness, and as little hesitation, as if 
 he had directly read them out of a book. I my- 
 self have frequently put him to the trial ; wherein, 
 though I have observed no order, but named
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 416 
 
 here a chapter at the beginning, then one to- 
 wards the end, then again returned to the mid- 
 dle, and so on purpose prevented any assistance 
 lie might have from an orderly succession and 
 dependance ; yet could I no sooner name the 
 chapter and book whereof I desired the account, 
 but he was ready with liis distich. 
 
 1684. A. D.— Dr. Wallis. In the Phi- 
 losophical Transactions for the years 1686-7,* 
 Dr. Wallis gives an account of his j>erforming 
 arithmetical operations in great numbers, by 
 night in the dark ; and conceives that we can 
 use our memory with greater advantage at this 
 time, that we can by day, when our thoughts 
 are diverted by sights and noises. " Having had 
 the curiosity (says Dr. Wallis) heretofore to try, 
 how the strength of memory would suffice me, 
 to perform some arithmetical operations (as Mul- 
 tiplication, Division, Extraction of Roots, etc.) 
 without the assistance of pen and ink, or ought 
 equivalent thereunto ; and finding it to succeed 
 well, (for instance) in extracting the square Root 
 from numbers of 8, 10, 12, or more places : I 
 proceeded to try it (with success) in numbers of 
 20, 30, 40 places. But was not curious to keep 
 memorials of the particular numbers which I had 
 $0 considered, (as being but a curiosity, and not of 
 
 • Vol. xr. p. U69.
 
 4l6 INSTANCES OF 
 
 farther use,) till there happened an occasional 
 discourse of it with a forraigner ( J ohaimes 
 Georgius Pehhover, Regio-Montanus Borus- 
 sus) who coming to see the University was 
 pleased, as divers other forraigners often do) to 
 give me a visit: Feb. 18, I6f" at a time when I 
 was afflicted with a tedious and severe quartan 
 ague, (which held me for a whole year from 
 about Michaelmas then last past, till about the 
 same time in the year following;) which caused 
 me to pass my nights with little or no sleep. 
 
 " He was desirous I would tell him some of 
 those numbers which I had so considered. Which 
 at the present, for the reason but now mentioned) 
 1 could not do ; save only that, on Dec. 22, l669, 
 I had (by night in the dark) extracted the square 
 root of 3 (with ciphers adjoined) contained to the 
 twentieth place of decimal fractions : finding it 
 to be : 
 
 1. 73205,08075,68877,y9353,/cre. 
 
 Which is the square root of o, with forty ciphers 
 adjoined ; 
 
 3,00000. 00000. 00000. OOOOO. 00000. 00000. 00000. 00000- 
 
 (which I had chanced to write down, because 
 7 3 is a surd which I might after have occasion 
 to make use of) but added, that I could at plea- 
 sure perform the like at any time." 
 
 1714. A. D — Antonio MAor.iABECHi 
 was born at Florence, Oct. 2<), 1633. Such
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 417 
 
 wsa the poverty of his parents, that they thought 
 themselves happy in getting him into the service 
 of a man who sold herbs and fruit. Here he 
 took every opportunity, though he could not tell 
 one letter from another, to pore on the leaves of 
 some old books that served for waste paper, de- 
 claring that he loved it of all things. A neigh- 
 bouring bookseller, who observed this, took him 
 into his service. Young Magliabechi soon 
 learned to read ; and his inclination for reading 
 became his ruling passion ; and a prodigious 
 memory his distinguished talent. He read every 
 book that came into his hands, and retained not 
 only the sense of what he read, but often all the 
 words, and the very manner of spelling, if sin- 
 gular. To make trial of the force of his me- 
 mory, a gentleman lent him a manuscript he was 
 going to print. Some time after it was returned, 
 the gentleman came to him, with a melancholy 
 face, and pretended it was lost. Magliabechi 
 being requested to recollect what he remembered 
 of it, wrote the whole without missing a word, 
 or varying the spelling. He was consulted by 
 all the learned who proposed to write on any 
 subject. If a priest, for instance, was going to 
 compose a panegyric on a saint, Magliabechi 
 would tell him every author, to the number of 
 an hundred sometimes, who had said any thing 
 of that saint, naming the book and the page, and
 
 418 INSTANCES Of 
 
 the very words. He did this so often, and so 
 readily, that he came at last to be looked upon 
 as an oracle; and Cosmo III. Grand Duke of 
 Florence, made him his librarian, the most suit- 
 able office to Magliabechi's genius. In the latter 
 part of his life, when a book came into his 
 hands, he would read the title-page all over, dip 
 here and there in the preface, dedication, and 
 prefatory advertisements, if there were any ; and 
 then cast his eyes on each of the divisions, sec- 
 tions, or chapters. After this, he could tell at 
 any time what the book contained. 
 
 " Though Magliabechi must have lived a very 
 sedentary life, yet he attained to the age of 81. 
 He died July 14, 1714, in the midst of the pub- 
 lic applause, after enjoying, during all the latter 
 part of his life, such an affluence as very few 
 persons have ever procured by their knowledge or 
 learning. By his will he left a very line library 
 collected by himself, for the use of the public, 
 with a fund to maintain it ; and the overplus of 
 the fund to the poor. It had been usual for 
 every author and printer to make him a present 
 of a copy of every thing they published. 
 
 " Though he was not an ecclesiastic, he would 
 never marry. He was quite slovenly in his 
 dress. He received his friends, and those who 
 came to consult him on any point of literature, 
 in a civil and obliging manner; though in gene- 
 ral he had almost the air of a savage, and even
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 419 
 
 affected it ; together with a cynical or contemp- 
 tuous smile. In his maimer of living, he affect- 
 ed the character of Diogenes : three hard eggs, 
 and a draught or two of water, were his u»ual 
 repast. When any one went to see him, they 
 most usually found him lolling in a sort of fixt 
 wooden cradle in the middle of his study, with a 
 multitude of books, some thrown in heaps, and 
 others scattered about the floor, all around him ; 
 and this his cradle or bed, was attached to the 
 nearest pile of books by a number of cobwebs. 
 At their entrance he commonly used to call out 
 to them, ' Not to hurt his spiders.'*" 
 
 1748. A. D. — William Lyon. In the 
 Getitleman's Magazine for the year 1752,t there 
 is the following singular anecdote. " William 
 Jjyon, a strolling player, who performed at the 
 theatre at Edinburgh, and who was excellent in 
 the part of Gibby, the Highlander, gave a sur- 
 prising instance of memory. One evening, over 
 his bottle, he wagtr'd a crown bowl of punch, 
 (a liquor of which he was very fond,) that next 
 morning at the rehearsal, he would repeat a 
 Daily yJdvertiser from beginning to end. At 
 the rehearsal, his opponent n minded him of the 
 wager, imaginmg as he was drunk the night 
 before, that he must certainly have forgot it, and 
 
 . * Spence's Paralkl of Hill and Magliabechi. 
 t Vol. xxii. p. 411.
 
 420 INSTANCES or 
 
 rallied him on his ridiculous bragging of his me- 
 mory. Jjifon pulled out the paper, desired him 
 to look at it, and be judge himself whether he 
 did or did not win his wager. Notwithstanding 
 the unconnected matter of the paragraphs — the 
 variety of atJvertisements — and the general chaos 
 which goes to the composition of a newspaper, 
 he repeated it from beginning to end, without the 
 least hesitation or mistake. Lyon died about 
 four years ago at Edinburgh, where he had 
 played with great success."* 
 
 1751. A. D. — Jedediah Buxton. A 
 con espondent in the Gentleman's Magazine for 
 February 1751,-i- gives the following account of 
 this extraordinary man. *' It is necessary to 
 premise first that he is no scholar, not being able 
 to scrawl his own name ; and secondly that his 
 attainments are of his own pure industry, for that 
 he never had further help towards them, than his 
 learning the multiplication table in his youth ; 
 yet without the assistance of pen, ink, or chalk, 
 or any other mark, he will nmltiply 5 or 6 figures 
 by as many, or divide as large sums off hand, in a 
 very short time, sooner than the most concise of 
 your arithmeticians pretend to. 
 
 * '< We have heard of this performance (says the editor) 
 many years since, when th ■ Daily Advertiser, thongh larger 
 than other papers, was not so large and crowded as it has 
 been of late." t Vol. xxi. p. 61.
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 421 
 
 " I met with him by accident last summer, 
 and after hearing of his performances, I first 
 proposed to him the following random question : 
 In a body whose 3 sides are 23 1457S9 yards, 
 5641733 yards, and 54965 yards, how many cu- 
 bical glhs of an inch ? After once naming the 
 several figures distinctly one after another, in or- 
 der to assure himself of the several dimensions 
 and fix them in his mind, without more ado he 
 fell to work amidst more than a 100 of his fellow 
 labourers, and after leaving him about 5 hours, 
 on some necessary concerns (in which time I 
 calculated it with the pen) at my return, he told 
 me he was ready : Upon which taking out my 
 pocket-book and pencil, to note down his answer, 
 he asked me which end 1 would begin at, for he 
 would direct me either way. I chose the regular 
 method, and to my great suprize, found that in 
 a line of 28 figures, he made no hesitation nor 
 the least mistake. Many such questions did 
 several other people give him, which he never 
 failed to answer truly ; yea he often corrected 
 those who wrought with the pen. What is more 
 astonishing than this, he would suflTer two people 
 to propose different questions, one immediately 
 after the other, and give each their respective 
 answers, without the least confusion. So reten- 
 tive is his memory, that he will repeat his an- 
 swers a month or two afterwards if you ask him. 
 o o
 
 422. INSTANCES O ^ 
 
 " He will stride over a piece of land or a field, 
 and tell you the contents of it almost as exact as 
 if you measured it by the chain. Some years 
 ago he measured in this manner the whole lord- 
 ship of Elmion, of some thousand acres, be- 
 longing to Sir John Rhodes, and brought him 
 the contents, not only in acres, roods, and 
 perches, but even in square inches ; after this, 
 for his own amusement, he reduced them into 
 square hairs-breadths, computing (I think) 48 to 
 each side of the inch, which produced such an 
 incomprehensible number, that instead of enter- 
 taining the mind w ith any sort of pleasure, serves 
 more to amaze and distract it. 
 
 " Millions, millions upon millions, tribes, 
 cramps, and so on, (for in this manner he enu- 
 merates his long series of numbers) are as plain 
 and familiar to him, as pounds, shillings, and 
 pence ; I may say more familiar, for he has sel- 
 dom more than a week's wages before hand. Jt 
 was but the other day, he set himself a voluntary 
 question, to calculate how much one farthing 
 doubled 140 times would amount to. This he 
 desired me to set down in 39 places of pounds, 
 and an odd 2s. Sd. When I asked him if he 
 could multiply this immense sum into itself, he 
 said he would undertake it, and the odd fraction 
 likewise if I pleased; but I dismissed him with 
 the whole numbers, and shall not be more amaz-
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 425 
 
 ed at his bringing a true answer, than I have 
 been already at lii^ surprising performances, 
 some of which have cost him many days study ; 
 but be the work long or short it is all one to him, 
 because he reassumes the operation in the morn- 
 ing at the same place he left it over night, and 
 so continues till he has finished it. If at any 
 time you find an error in his answer, he will 
 overhaul, as he terms it, and find out his mistake 
 himself, rather than be convicted by your pen." 
 
 Another correspondent in the same Magazine 
 for August 1751,* affords some farther informa- 
 tion concerning Buxton. He says, " I perceive 
 he has a good notion of the square, oblong, 
 triangle, and circle. The first question I pro- 
 posed was as follows : admit a field 423 yards 
 long, and 383 wide, what was the area ? After I 
 had read the figures to him distinctly, he gave 
 me the true product, viz, 1 62009 yards, in t\vo 
 minutes, for I observed by my watch how long 
 every operation took him. 1 then asked him 
 how many acres the aforesaid field measured ? In 
 1 1 minutes he told me 33 acres, I rood, 35 
 perches, 20 yards, and a quarter just. I then 
 proposed to him, how many barley corns would 
 reach 8 miles P In a minute and half he answered 
 1520640 barley corns. He is the slowest in 
 
 • Vol. xxi. p. 347.
 
 424 INSTANCES OF 
 
 finding the area of a circle, but yet he finds it 
 very near the truth, though he don't use the ma- 
 thematical rules. Allowing the distance between 
 York and London to be 204 miles, J asked him 
 how many times a coach-wheel turned round in 
 that distance, allowing the wheel's circumference 
 to be six yards? In 13 minutes he answered 
 59840 times. The next proposition was, a tub 
 or bin 346 inches long, 256 inches wide, 94 
 inches deep, how many gallons liquid measure 
 and what corn will it hold ? Answer, 3,454,464 
 solid inches, or 1,768,685,568 half quarters of 
 solid inches, making 12,249,872 gallons liquid 
 measure, or 12249 gallons, 3 quarts, and 34f 
 inches; or it will hold 191 quarters, 3 bushels, 
 3 quarterns, a half quartern, and 34^ inches re- 
 mainder. 
 
 " Again, suppose a canal was to be dug 426 
 feet long, 203 wide, and 2 feet deep, how many 
 cubical yards of earth to be removed ? After 
 pausing a quarter of an hour he answered, 10373 
 yards 24 feet. He will talk with you freely 
 whilst he is doing his questions, it being na 
 molestation or hindrance to him, but enough to 
 confound a penn)an. His memory is so great, 
 that he can leave off and reassume the operation 
 again, at a week, month, or at several months 
 end; he calls his figures all by their proper 
 names, and is very ready at naming them either
 
 NATURAL UEMORY. 4S5 
 
 backwards or forwards. From May, 17, 10 h. 
 A. D. 1725, he told me he was drunk (to make 
 use of his expression) with reckoning by his me- 
 naory till June \Q, following, and then slept 
 somidly seven hours, but will never attem' t so 
 much reckoning again, for fear of falling into the 
 same dilemma. I suppose what he means by 
 his being drunk, was his being so much stupified 
 with thought, a5 rendered him incapable ol busi- 
 ness ; when it may well be said neque pes, 7iegue 
 mens satis suum officiumfacit, 
 
 " But, to proceed further with this uncommon 
 man, 1 was led by curiosity to know what ques- 
 tion it was that caused his drunkenness ; to which 
 he replied, in answering the following question. 
 In 202,680,000,360 miles, and each mile reck- 
 oned to be cubical, how many barley-corns, 
 vetches, peas, wheat, oats, rye, beans, lintels, and 
 how many hairs, each an inch long, would fill 
 that space, reckoning 48 hairs in breadth to an 
 inch on the flat, as he found ihem to be so. I 
 shall here subjoin his table of measures, which 
 he founded on experiment. 
 
 200 Bailfy corns 
 
 300 Wlieat corns 
 
 51'^ Rye corns 
 
 180 Oats 
 40 Peas )>are contained io one 
 
 25 Beans [ solid inch. 
 
 80 Vetclies 
 
 iOO Lintels 
 2304 Hairs 1 inch long 
 
 o o3
 
 •426 INSTANCES OF 
 
 From which he calculated the following result : 
 
 14 thousand, 9'3 mill. 420 thous. 936 quarters, 
 
 1 bushel, 1 peck, 1 quartern, 3 pints, and 5 and 
 
 a quarter solid inches of one sort of grain, are 
 
 contained in one solid mile; or 5 thousand, 431 
 
 mill. 776 thousand yards in a cubical mile, being 
 
 254 millions of millions, 358 thousand, 6I mill. 
 
 and 56 thousand inches in a cubical mile ; and if 
 
 every hair be an inch long, and 2304 hairs a 
 
 cubical inch, then 586 thousand, 40 millions of 
 
 millions, 972 thousand, 673 millions, and 24 
 
 thousand, will fill the space of a cubical mile : 
 
 but if a hair be no longer than it is broad, he 
 
 then found that there would be 28 tribes, 129- 
 
 thousand, 966 millions of millions, 688 thousand, 
 
 305 millions, and 152 thousand hairs, to fill the 
 
 space of a cubical mile. 
 
 " As we are come to that notation where he 
 
 introduces the word tribe, it will be proper to 
 
 set down that prolix number, arising from 140 
 
 nails, doubled at a farthing a nail, viz. 
 
 725.958,238,096,074,907,868,531,656,993,638,851,106;.2s.8d* 
 
 which he reads thus : 
 
 725 Tribes of tribes, 
 
 958 Thous. of mill, of mill, of tribe 
 
 238 Millions of millions of tribes, 
 
 096 Thousand millions of tribes, 
 
 074 Millions of tribes, 
 
 907 Thousand tribes, 
 
 868 Tribes,,
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 427 
 
 531 Thousand millions of millions, 
 
 656 Millions of millions, 
 
 993 Thousand millions, 
 
 638 Millions, 
 
 851 Thousands, 
 
 106 Pounds, 2 shillings, and 8 pence. 
 
 For the truth of which I leave those gentlemen 
 that have leisure and curiosity to try it. 
 
 " I shall only mention one thing more with 
 respect to this man's memory, and it shall be in 
 squaring the above number. Now you see he is 
 to nuiltiply 39^ figures by 39 figures, and all by 
 the strength of his memory, without having re- 
 course to human assistance, or pen, ink, and 
 paper. What a prodigious task must this be to 
 be operated by the head only, which he certainly 
 did and after two months and a half, he brings the 
 following answer, omitting the odd 2s. 8d, which 
 he reads thus : 
 
 527 Tribes of tribes of cramps, 
 
 015 Thous. mill, of mill. trib. of cramps, 
 
 363 Mill, of mill, tribes of cramps, 
 
 459 Thous. mill, tribes of cramps, 
 
 557 Mill, of tribes of cramps, 
 
 385 Thousand tribes of cramps, 
 
 673 Tribes of cramps, 
 
 733 Thous, mill, of mill, of cramps, 
 
 542 Million of miiiions of cramps, 
 
 638 Tliousand millions of cramps , 
 
 591 Millions of cramps, 
 
 721 Thousand cramps, 
 
 213 Cramps.
 
 428 INSTANCES OF 
 
 298 Tribes of tribes, 
 
 966 Thous. mi. of mill, of tribes, 
 
 079 Millions of mill, of tribes, 
 
 307 Thousand millions of tribes, 
 
 524 Millions of tribes, 
 
 904 Thousand tribes, 
 
 381 Trities, 
 
 389 Thousand millions of millions, 
 
 499 Million of millions 
 
 251 Thousands of millions, 
 
 637 Millions, 
 
 423 Thousands, 
 
 £36 Pounds. 
 
 Further particulars res{>ecting Jedediah, of an 
 interesting nature, are found in the Gentleman's 
 Magazine for December, 1753.* This corres- 
 pondent observes, " I accidentally met him one 
 afternoon last week, and was not much above 
 two hours in his company. Tn the first half 
 hour, several persons being present, some tri- 
 fling things were started and talked of; but as 
 he was very desirous that I should propose some 
 higher questions to him, I complied, and the 
 company were all witnesses of his prodigious 
 readmess in answering the following questions. 
 
 ♦' QUESTION I. 
 
 " In a field 351 yards long, and 261 yards wide, how 
 many acres ? 
 
 " After 11 minutes, he answered — 18 acres, 
 3 roods, IS perches, and 14 remained. 
 
 • Vol. xxiii. p. 557.
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 429 
 
 " QUESTION II. 
 
 " Suppose sound moves ll-iS feet in one second of time, 
 how long then, after the firing of one of the cannons at 
 Retford, may the same be heard at Haughton Park, taking 
 the distance at five miles ? 
 
 " After about a quarter of an hour he told 
 me — in 23 seconds, 7 thirds, and 6 remained. 
 
 " QUESTION III. 
 " Admit I set 3584 brocoli plants in rows, 4 feet asun- 
 der, and the plants 7 feet apart, in a rectangular plot of 
 ground, how much land will these plants take up ? 
 
 " [n near half an hour he said— 2 acres, I 
 rood, 8 perches and half. 
 
 " QUESTION IV. 
 " What dimensions must I give my joiner to make me 
 a cubical corn bin, that shall hold me just a quarter of 
 malt, Winchester measure ? 
 
 " This question exercised all his faculties, and 
 he declared it was the hardest he ever proposed ; 
 by this I perceived he had never engaged himself 
 about the cube root : however, though so diffi- 
 cult it appeared to him, he was very desirous to 
 answer it, before it was too late in the evening, 
 and after some time, he said to himself there 
 were nooks in it, hut he would sift them out: 
 he never regarded our talking, but sat as one 
 heedless of every thing about him, except his 
 pot of beer, which he took notice of. I gave 
 him no hints, help, or assistance, but left it en- 
 tirely to him, as I did the others, nor had he any 
 thing in his hand to make any marks (which I
 
 430 
 
 INSTANCES OF 
 
 must repeat, because he makes all his computa- 
 tions by his memory) after about an hour he 
 told me, it would be a little more than £5| 
 inches on a side, and 26 inches would be too 
 much, all which is very true and very exact. 
 
 " 1 shall here subjoin an account he gave me 
 of the quantity of ale or strong beer that he has 
 drank on free cost, since he was 12 years of age, 
 and the gentlemen's names where ; and, as the 
 account was a little particular, I asked him hue 
 and illuc after 1 had committed it to paper, and 
 he answered each demand as set down, at the 
 houses of the following noblemen and gentle- 
 
 men : 
 
 Duke of Kingston 
 Duke of Norfolk 
 Duke of Leeds 
 Duke of Devonshire 
 Xady Oxford 
 G. Heathcote, Esq. 
 Sir G. Savile, Bart. 
 J. Tho/uliagh, Esq. 
 Sir L. Filkington, Bart. 
 John Bnstowe, Esq. 
 "W. ViUareal, Esq. 
 Sir 11. Hnnlock, Bart, 
 — — Burton, Esq. 
 
 White, Esq. 
 
 Dr. Burne 
 
 Mr. Hocks 
 
 Mr. West 
 
 Mr. Vesey 
 
 Rev. Mr. Hartshorn 
 
 Mr. Flint 
 
 Clarke, Esq. 
 
 Hallows, Esq. 
 
 Sir J. Jenkinson, Bart. 
 
 Mr. Huncock 
 
 Mr. Hall 
 
 Mr. E. Sharpe of Elkesly 
 
 Mr. Jh. Sharpe 
 
 Rev. Mr. Boawre 
 
 Mr. Willets 
 
 Mr. Maj-or of Chesterfield 
 
 Pints. 
 
 
 rinU. 
 
 S130 
 
 Rev. Mr. Pegge 
 
 10 
 
 £66 
 
 Mr. Richardson 
 
 7 
 
 232 
 
 Mr. Raynes 
 
 30 
 
 to 
 
 Mr. Stevens 
 
 5 
 
 280 
 
 Mr. Far 
 
 I 
 
 160 
 
 Mr. Greenwood 
 
 TT 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Shaw 
 
 S 
 
 20 
 
 Mr. Barker 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 Mr. Sisson 
 
 1« 
 
 92 
 
 Mr. Bfajor 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 Mr. Brigs 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 Mr. Pilkington 
 
 j3 
 
 4 
 
 Mr. J. Brigs 
 
 4 
 
 1 , 
 
 Mr. Beestings 
 
 U 
 
 5 
 
 Gathering for his dead 
 
 cow 72 
 
 S251 
 
 Rev. Mr. Hewet 
 
 8 
 
 SOI 
 
 Col.Chndwick 
 
 3 
 
 16 
 
 Mr. HaUhead 
 
 15 
 
 19 
 
 Mr. Wright 
 
 40 
 
 317 
 
 At Elniton Manor 
 
 300 
 
 SO 
 
 Mr. Sherwin 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 Mr. Carteret 
 
 16 
 
 I 
 
 Mr. Lane 
 
 <e 
 
 54 
 
 Mr. Whitehouse 
 
 3 
 
 63 
 
 Mr. R. Parkin 
 
 40 
 
 5 
 
 Mr.R. Greenwood 
 
 64 
 
 16 
 
 Mr. Ih. Clarke 
 
 40 
 
 n 
 
 Mr. Bulliv<int 
 
 t 
 
 n 
 
 Mr. Fadley 
 
 H 
 
 d 2 
 
 At my own housr 
 
 1*
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 431 
 
 " The whole amounts to 5116 pints, or winds, 
 38 he terras them, because he never uses above 
 one wind to a pint, or two to a quart." 
 
 In the Gentleman's Magazine for June, 
 1754,* there is a portrait of Jedediah, in the 
 forty-ninth year of his age, with this motto from 
 Virgil, * Numeros Memini.'-f The editor of 
 this Magazine having received many communi- 
 cations questioning the authenticity of the cir- 
 cumstances already related of Buxton, gave re- 
 peated assurances of the certainty of the facts, 
 and appealed to the known integrity of the gen- 
 tlemen by whom they were communicated; and, 
 as an additional testimony inserted a sketch of 
 
 • Vol. xiv. p. 251. 
 
 t In addition to this portrait there have been various 
 others engraven at different times. (1.) A small etching, 
 (at. 57, 1764,) by Miss Hartley, 1764. (2.) A whole 
 length — an etching in large 4°. by Holme. (3.) A ditto, 
 in mezzot. J. Spilsbnry. (4.) A ditto, an etching, 4°. by 
 Topham, 1770. {Bromley.)
 
 432 INSTANCES OF 
 
 the life of this extraordinary man. " With this 
 print* (says the editor) it was greatly to be wished 
 
 that some account of his life could be given : 
 but the life of laborious poverty is necessarily 
 uniform and obscure : the history of one day 
 would almost include the events of all. Time, 
 
 • The portrait of Jedcdiah from which the above wood- 
 cut is taken.
 
 NATURAL MKMOIIY. 433 
 
 ith respect to Buxton, changed nothing but his 
 age, nor did the seasons vary his employment, 
 except that in winter he used a ^/iai/, and in 
 •ummer a li/ig hook. 
 
 " The grandfather of Jedediah, John Buxton, 
 was vicar of Elmeton, in Derbyshire, and his 
 father, William Buxton, was school-master of 
 the same parish ; but Jedediah, notwithstanding 
 the profession of his father, is extremely illite«> 
 rate, having by whatever accident, been so 
 much neglected in his youth as never to have 
 been taught to write : how he came first to 
 know the relative proportions of numbers, and 
 their progressive denominations, he docs not re- 
 member ; but to this he has applied the whole 
 force of his mind, and upon this his attention is 
 constantly fixed, so that he frequently takes no 
 cognizance of external objects, and when he 
 does it is only with respect to their numbers : 
 the same attention of his mind appears as well 
 by what he hears as by what he sees. If any 
 space of time is mentioned, he will soon after 
 say, that it is so many minutes, and if any dis- 
 tance of way, he will assign the number of 
 hair's breadths, without any cjuestiou having; 
 been usked, or any calculatioji expected by the 
 conapany. 
 
 " By this method he has greatly increased the 
 power of his nienjory, with respect to figures, 
 P V
 
 434 INSTANCES OF 
 
 and stored up several common products in his 
 mind, to whicli he can have immediate recourse, 
 as the number of minutes in a year, of hs^ir's 
 breadths in a nnle, and many others. When he 
 once comprehends a question, which is not 
 without difficulty and time, he begins to work 
 with amazing facility, and will leave a long 
 question half wrought, and, at the end of se- 
 veral months, resume it, beginnhig where he 
 < left off, and proceeding regularly till it is com- 
 pleted. 
 
 " His memory would certainly, have been 
 equally retentive, with respect to other objects, 
 if he had attended to odier objects with equal 
 diligence ; but his perpetual application to fi- 
 gures has prevented the smallest acquisition of 
 any other knowledge, and his mind seems to 
 have retained fewer ideas than that of a boy of 
 ten years old, in the same class of life. He 
 has been sometimes asked, on his return from 
 church, whether he remembered the ^ text, or 
 any pari of the sermon, but it never appeared 
 that he brought away one sentence : his mind, 
 upon a closer examination, being found to have 
 been busied, even during divine service in its 
 favourite operation, either dividing some time or 
 some sjjace into the smallest known parts, or 
 resolving some question that had been given him 
 as a test of his abilities. His power of abstrac-
 
 NARTUAL MEMORY. 435 
 
 tion is so great that no noise interrupts hinni ; 
 and, if he is asked any question, he immediately 
 replies, and returns again to his calculation, 
 without any confusion, or the loss of more time 
 than his answer required. His method of work- 
 ing is peculiar to himself, and by no means the 
 shortest or the clearest, as will appear by the 
 following example : 
 
 " He was required to mutiply 456 by 378, 
 which he had completed as soon as a person in 
 company had produced the product in the com- 
 mon way ; and upon being requested to work it 
 audibly, that his method might be known, he 
 multiplied 456 first by 5, which produced 2280, 
 which he again multiplied by 20, and found the 
 product 45600, which was the multiplicand mul- 
 tiplied by 100; this product he again multiplied 
 by S, which produced 136800, which was the 
 sum of the multiplicand multiplied by 300 ; it 
 remained therefore to multiply it by 78, which 
 he eflfected, by multiplying 2280 (the product 
 of the multiplicand multiplied by 5) by 15 ; 5 
 times 15 being 75 ; this product being 34200, 
 he added to the 136800, which was the multi- 
 plicand multiplied by 300, and this produced 
 171000, which was 375 times 456 ; to complete 
 this operation therefore, he multiplied 456 by 3, 
 which produced 1368, and having added this
 
 436 NATURAL MEMORY. 
 
 number to 171000, he found the product of 45t6 
 multiplied by 378 to be 172368. 
 
 " Thus it appears that his arithmetic is per- 
 fectly his own, and that he is so little acquainted 
 with the common rules as to multiply 456 first 
 by 5, and the product by 20, to find what sum . 
 it would produce multiplied by 100, whereas if 
 he had added two noughts to the figures, he 
 would have obtained it at once. 
 
 " The only objects of Jedediah's curiosity, ex- 
 cept figures, were the king and royal family, and 
 his desire to see them was so strong, that, in the 
 beginning of the spring, he walked to London 
 on purpose, but at last returned disappointed, 
 the king having just removed to Kensington as 
 Jedediah came into London. He was however 
 introduced to the Royal Society, whom he called 
 the volk of the Siety Court : the gentlemen 
 who were present asked him several questions in 
 arithmetic, to prove his abilities, and dismissed 
 him with a handsome gratuity. 
 
 " During his residence in London he was car- 
 ried to see King Richard IIL performed at 
 Drury-laue playhouse, and it was expected ei- 
 ther that the novelty and the splendour of the 
 show would have fixed him in astonishment, or 
 kept Tiis imagination in a continual hurry ; or 
 that his passions would, in some degree have 
 been touched by the power of action, if he had
 
 NATURAL MEMOKY. 437 
 
 not perfectly understood the dialogue ; but Jede- 
 diah's mind was employed in the playhouse just 
 as it was employed at church. During the 
 dance he fixed his attention upon the numb'-r of 
 steps ; he declared after a fine piece of music, 
 that the innumerable sounds produced by the in- 
 struments had perplexed him beyond measure, 
 and he attended even to Mr. Garrick only to 
 coinU the zoords that he uttered; in which, he 
 says, he perfectly succeeded. 
 
 " Jedediah is now safely returned to the place 
 of his birth, where, if his enjoyments are few, 
 his wishes do not seem to be more : he applies 
 to his labour, by which he subsists with cheer- 
 fulness ; he regrets nothing that he left behind 
 him in London, and it is still his opinion, that 
 a slice of rusty bacon atfords the most delicious 
 repast."* 
 
 1312. A. D. — Zerah CoLBURN. Theap- 
 pearance of this young American, and rival of 
 Jedediah Buxton, having excited considerable at- 
 tention, we shall present our readers with the fol- 
 lowing interesting narrative, as drawn up by the 
 ingenious and well known calculator, Mr. Fi< an- 
 cis Baily. 
 
 • Jedediah died about the your 1774, aged 70, aqd left 
 several children, none of whom have inherited the rare ta- 
 lents of their father.
 
 438 INSTANCES OF 
 
 " London, Jug. 20, 1812. 
 
 *' The attention of the philosophical world has 
 been lately attracted by the most singular phaeno- 
 menon in the history of the human mind that 
 perhaps ever existed. It is the case of a child, 
 under eight ^eats of age, who, without any pre- 
 vious knowledge of the common rules of arith- 
 metic, or even of the use and power of the Ara- 
 bic numerals, and without having given any par- 
 ticular attention to the subject, possesses (as if 
 by intuition) the singular faculty of solving a 
 great variety of arithmetical questions by the mere 
 operation of the mind, and without the usual 
 assistance of any visible symbol or contrivance. 
 
 ''Thenanieof this child is Zera Colburn, who 
 was born at Cabut (a town lying at the head of 
 Onion river, in Vermont, in the United States 
 of America,) on the 1st of September 1804. 
 About two years ago (August ISIO) although 
 at that time not six ifenrs of age, \\e first began to 
 show those wonderful powers of calculation 
 which.have since so much attracted the attention 
 and excited tiie astonishment of every person 
 who has witnessed his extraordinary abilities. 
 The discovery was made by accident. His fa- 
 ther, who had not given him any other instruc- 
 tion than such as was to be obtained at a small 
 school established in that unfrequented and re- 
 mote part of tlie country, (and which did not
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 439 
 
 include either writing or ciphering,) was much 
 surprised one day to hear him repeating the 
 products of several numbers. Struck with 
 amazement at the circumstance, he proposed a 
 variety of arithmetical questions to him, all of 
 which the child solved with remarkable facility 
 and correctness. The news of this infant pro- 
 digy soon circulated through the neighbourhood; 
 and many persons came from distant parts to 
 witness so singular a circumstance. The father, 
 encouraged by the unanimous opinion of all 
 w!io came to see him, was induced to undertake, 
 with this child, the tour of the United States. 
 They were every where received with the most 
 flattering expressions ; and in the several towns 
 which they visited, various plans were suggested 
 to educate and bring up the child, free from all 
 expense to his family. Yielding, however, to 
 the pressing solicitations of his friends, and 
 nrged by the most respectable and powerful re- 
 commendations, as well as by a view to his son's 
 more complete education, the father has brought 
 the child to this coiftitry, where they arrived on 
 the ICth of May last : and the inhabitants of this 
 metropolis have for the last three months had an 
 opportunity of seeing and examining this wonder- 
 ful phiCnomcnon,* and of verifying the reports 
 that have been circulated respecting him. 
 
 • At the Exhibition Rooms, Spring Gardens.
 
 440 INSTANCES OF 
 
 " Many persons of the first eminence for their 
 knowledge in mathematics, and well known for 
 their philosophical inquiries, have made a point 
 of seeing and conversing with his extraordinary 
 powers. It is correctly true, as stated of him, that 
 — * He will not only determine, with the greatest 
 facility and dispatch, the exact number oi minutes 
 or seconds in any given period of time; but will 
 also solve any other question of a similar kind. 
 He will tell the exact product arising from the 
 multiplication of any number, consisting of two, 
 three, or fOur figures, by any other number consist- 
 ing of the like number of figures. Or, any number, 
 consisting of six, or seven places of figures, being ' 
 proposed, he will determine, with equal expedi- 
 tion and ease, all x\\e factors of which it is com- 
 posed. Tiiis .singular faculty consequently ex- 
 tends not only to the raising of powers, but also 
 to the extraction of the square and cube roots of 
 the number proposed ; and likewise to the means 
 of determining whether it be aprime number (or 
 a number incapable of division by any other num- 
 ber) ; for which case there does not exist, at pre- 
 sent, any general rule among mathematicians.' 
 All these, and a variety of other questions con- 
 nected therewith, are answered by this child with 
 such promptness and accuracy (and in the midst 
 of his Juvenile pursuits) as to astonish every per- 
 son who has visited him.
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 441 
 
 " At a meeting of his friends which was held 
 for the purpose of concerting the best method of 
 promoting the views of the father, tiiis child un- 
 dertook, and completely succeeded in, raising 
 the number 8 progressively up to the sixteenth 
 power ! ! ! and in naming the last result, viz. 
 28 1,474,976,7 10,65(5 he was right in every figure. 
 He was then tried as to other numbers, consist- 
 ing of one figure ; all of which he raised (by ac- 
 tual multiplication and not by memory) as high 
 as the tenth power, with so much facility and 
 dispatch that the person appointed to take down 
 the results, was obliged to enjoin him not to be 
 so rapid i With respect to numbers consisting of 
 two figures, he would raise some of them to the 
 sixth, seventh, 2^^d eighth power; but not always 
 with equal facility: for the larger the products 
 became, the more difHculthe found it to proceed. 
 He was asked the square root of 106929, and 
 before the number could be written down, he 
 immediately answered 327. He was then re- 
 quired to name the cube root of 268,336,125, 
 and with equal facility and promptness he re- 
 plied 645. Various other questions of a similar 
 nature, respecting the roots and powers of very 
 high numbers, were proposed by several of the 
 gentlemen present, to all of which he answer- 
 ed in a similar manner. One of the party re- 
 quested him to name the yac^o/\s which produced
 
 442 INSTANCES OF 
 
 the number 247483, which he immediately did 
 by mentioning the two numbers 941 and 263; 
 which indeed are the only two numbers that will 
 produce it. Another of them proposed 171395, 
 and he named the following factors as the only 
 ones that would produce it ; viz 5 < 34279, 
 7 X 24485, 59 X 2905, 83 X 2065, 35 X 4897, 
 295 X 58 ] , and 413x415. He yvhs then asked 
 to give the factors of 36083 ; but he immediately 
 replied that it had none, which in fact was the 
 case, as 36083 is a prime number. Other num- 
 bers were indiscriminately proposed to him, and 
 he always succeeded in giving the correct factors, 
 except in the case of prime nun)bers, which he 
 discovered almost ais soon as proposed. One of 
 the gentlemen asked him how miiny minutes 
 there were in forty eight years ; and before the 
 question could be written down he replied 
 25,228,800 ; and instantly added, that the number 
 of seconds in the same pt riod was 1,5 1 3,7'28,000. 
 Various questions of the like kind were put to 
 him ; and to all of them he answered with nearly 
 equal facility and promptitude ; so as to asto- 
 nish every one present, and to excite a desire 
 that so extraordinary a faculty siiould (if possible) 
 be rendered more extensive and useful. 
 
 ** It was the wish of the gentlemc nt present 
 to oblani a knowledge of the method by which 
 the child was enabled to answer, with so much
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 44 
 
 facility and correctness, the questions thus put to 
 him : but to all their inquiries upon this subject 
 (and he was closely e^iamincd upon this point) he 
 was unable to give them any information. He 
 positively declared (and every observation that 
 was made seemed to justify the assertion) that he 
 did not know Aorc; the answers came into his 
 mind. In the act of multiplying two numbers 
 together, and in the raising of powers, it was evi- 
 dent (not only from the motion of his lips, but 
 also from some singular facts which will be here- 
 after mentioned,) that some operation was going 
 forward in his mind; yet that operation could 
 not (from the rcadujess with which the answers 
 were furnished) be at all allied to the usual mode 
 of proceeding with such subjects Tand moreover, 
 he is entirely ignorant of the common rules of 
 arithmetic, atid cannot perform, upon paper, a 
 simple sum in multiplication or division. But, 
 in ihe extraction of roots and in mentioning the 
 factors of high numbers it does not appear that 
 any operation can take place ; since he \\ill give 
 the answer immedi at ehj, or in u very few seconds, 
 where it would require, according to the ordi- 
 nary method of solution, a very difficult and la- 
 borious calculation: and nvoreover, tlie know- 
 ledge of a prime number cannot be obtained by 
 any known rule.
 
 4i4 •' INSTANCliS OX- 
 
 *i It has been already observed, that it was 
 evident, from some singular facts, that the child 
 operated by certain rules known only to him- 
 self. This discovery was made in one or two 
 instances, when he had been closely pressed 
 upon that point. In one case he was asked 
 to tell the square of 4395; he at first hesi- 
 tated, fearful that lie should not be able 
 . to answer it correctly ; but when he applied 
 himself to it he said it was ]9?3lG,025. On 
 being questioned as to the cause of his hesitation, 
 he replied that he did not like to iiiultiply four 
 figures by four figures ; but, said he, * 1 found 
 
 * out another way; I multiplied 293 by 293, and 
 
 * llien multiplied this product twice by the num- 
 ' ber 15; which produced the sanie result.' On 
 another occasion, his highness the Duke of 
 Gloucester asked him the product of 21,734 
 multiplied by o43 ; he immediately replied 
 11,801,502: but, upon son»e remark being 
 made on the subject, the child said that he had, 
 in his own mind, multiplied ()5302 by 181. 
 Now, although in the first instance it must be 
 evident to every mathematician that 4395 is 
 equal to 393 X 15,(aod consequently that (4395) 
 ®=(«93)"x (15)^ ^nd further that in the se- 
 cond case 543 is equal to 181x3, and conse- 
 quently that 21734x(l3l xS)=(21734X3x
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 445 
 
 181 ; yet, it is not the less remarkable that this 
 combination should be immediately perceived by 
 the child, and we cannot the less adu)ire his in- 
 genuity in thus seizing histantly the easiest me- 
 thod of solving the question proposed to him. 
 
 " It must be evident, from whaihas here been 
 stated, that the singular faculty which this child 
 possesses is nit altogether dependent upon his 
 memory. In the multiplication of numbers and 
 in the raising of powers, he is doubtless consi- 
 derably assisted by that remarkable quality of the 
 mind : and in this respect he might be considered 
 as bearing some resemblance (if the difference of 
 age did not prevent the justness of the compa- 
 rison) to the celebrated Jedediah Buxton, and 
 other persons of similar note. But, in the ex- 
 traction of the roots of numbers, and in deter- 
 mining their factors (if any), it is clear, to all 
 those who have witnessed the astonishing quick- 
 ness and accuracy of this child, that the memory 
 has little or nothing to do with the process. 
 And in this particular pohit consists the remark- 
 able difference between the present and all for- 
 mer instances of an apparently similar kind. 
 
 '* It has been recorded as an astonishing effort 
 of memory that the celebrated Euler (who, in 
 the science of analysis, might vie even with New- 
 ton himself,) could remember the first six pow- 
 ers of every number under 100. This, probably, 
 9 9
 
 446 INSTANCES OF 
 
 must be taken with some restrictious : but, if true 
 to the fullest extent, it is not move astonishing 
 than the efforts of this child; with this additional 
 circumstance in favour t)f the latter, that he is 
 capable of veryfying, in a very few seconds, 
 every figure which he may have occasion for. It 
 has been further remarked by the biographer of 
 that eminent mathematician, that * he perceived, 
 
 * almost at a simple glance, the factors of which 
 *■ his formulae were composed ; the particular 
 
 * system of factors belonging to the question un- 
 
 * der consideration : the various artifices by 
 
 * which that system may be simplified and redu- 
 
 * ced ; and the relation of the several factors to 
 
 * ihe conditions of the hypothesis. His expert- 
 ^ ness in this particular probably resulted, in a 
 f great measure, from the ease with which he 
 
 * performed mathematical investigations hy head. 
 
 * He had always accustomed himself to that ex- 
 
 * ercise ; and, having practised it with assiduity, 
 
 * (even before the loss of sight, which afterwards 
 
 * rendered it a matter of necessity,) he is an in- 
 
 * stance to what an astonishing degree it may be 
 ' acquired, and how much it improves the intel- 
 
 * lectual powers. No other discipline is so ef- 
 
 * ft ctual in strengthening the faculty of attention : 
 
 * it gives a facility of apprehension, an accuracy 
 
 * and steadiness to the conceptions ; and (what is 
 ' a still more valuable acquisition) it habituates
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 447 
 
 * the mind to arrangement in its reasonings and 
 
 * reflections.' 
 
 " It is not iijtended to draw a comparison be- 
 tween the humble, though astonishing, efforts of 
 this infant-prodigy and the gigantic powers of that 
 illustrious character to whom a reference has 
 just been made : yet we may be permitted to 
 hope and expect that those wonderful talents, 
 which are so conspicuous at this early age, may 
 by a suitable education be considerably improved 
 and extended: and that some netv light will even- 
 tually be thrown upon those subjects, for the elu- 
 cidation of which his mind appears to be pecu- 
 liarly formed by nature, since he enters into the 
 world with all those powers and faculties which 
 are not even attainable by the most eminent at a 
 more advanced period of life. Every mathemati- 
 cian must be aware of the important advantages 
 which have sometimes been derived from the 
 most simple and trifling circumstances ; the full 
 effect of which has not always been evident at 
 first sight. To mention one singular instance of 
 this kind. The very simple improvement of ex- 
 pressing the powers and roots of quantities by 
 means of indices, introduced a new and general 
 arithmetic of exponents : and this algorithm of 
 powers led the way to the invention of I ga- 
 rithms, by means of which, all arithmetical com- 
 jiutatioas are so much facilitated and abridged.
 
 448 INSTANCES OF 
 
 Perhaps this child possesses a knowledge of some 
 more important properties connected with this 
 subject; and although he is incapable at present 
 of giving any satisfactory account of the state of 
 his mind, or of comnumicating to others the 
 knowledge which it is so evident he doe& possess, 
 yet there is every reason to believe that, wher) 
 his mind is more cultivated and his ideas more 
 expanded, he will be able not only to divulge the 
 mode by which he at present operates, but also 
 point out some new sources of information on 
 this interesting subject, 
 
 " The case is certainly one of great novelty 
 and importance : and every literary character and 
 every friend to science must be anxious to see 
 the experiment fairly tried, as to the effect which 
 a suitable education may produce on a mind 
 constituted as his appears to be. With this view 
 a number of gentlemen have taken the child un- 
 der their patronage, and have formed themselves 
 into a committee foi the purpose of superintend- 
 ing his education. Application has been made 
 to a gentleman of science, well known for his 
 mathematical abilities, who has consented to 
 take the child under his immediate tuition : the 
 committee therefore propose to withdraw him, 
 for the present, from public exhibition, in order 
 that he may fully devote himself to his studies. 
 But whether they shall be able wholly to accom
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 449 
 
 plish the object they have in view, will depend 
 upon the assistance which they may receive from 
 the public."* 
 
 Since this statement was printed, we have been 
 favoured with some further account of this ex- 
 traordinary child, which details an examination 
 by Mr. Hase, the chief cashier of the Bank 
 of England. The authenticity of this narrative 
 may be relied on. 
 
 Zerah Colhurn was introduced to Mr. Hase 
 at the Bank accompanied by his father. The 
 first question required the cube root of 
 949,862,087 ; he answered in about one minute, 
 983, which is correct ; the next question was 
 the cube of 478 ; in less than two minutes 
 he said it was, 109,215,352. The third ques- 
 tion was to give the product of the two factors 
 4973 and 3587 ; in about four minutes he stated 
 a product wrong in two figures, namely 17,836,45 1 
 then 17,828,481 : on being told that he was not 
 correct, after a lapse of two minutes more he sta- 
 ted the right product, 1 7,838, 151. He was then 
 asked what two factors of four figures each 
 would give 42,173,703 ; he hesitated for some 
 time, and appeared unable to answer it ; his fa- 
 ther then requested Mr. H. to mention one of the 
 factors, which he did, namely, 8937, in about 
 
 • Mr. BoNNYCASTLE, we understand, is the gentleman 
 to whom the tuition ofZeraii Col burn is to be entrusted.
 
 450 INSTANCES OF 
 
 three minutes he named the other correctly, 
 4719. The last question was to name two fac- 
 tors, one of four, the other of three figures, which 
 would produce 1 ,734,433 ; he appeared unable 
 to do this, saying, they were prime numbers, but 
 his father persisted that he would solve the ques- 
 tion; he, however, found the difficulty insur- 
 mountable. His father then asked Mr. H. the 
 first number of the jfac^or of three figures, which 
 was named, viz. 7 ; still he could not accomplish 
 it, then the second figure, 3, was told him ; still 
 he failed, but when he was made acquainted with 
 the last figure, 9> to the great astonishment of 
 Mr. H. he immediately called out that the other 
 factor was "2347, which is correct. 
 
 Since the above accounthas been collected, we 
 regret to find that this interesting youth is again 
 exhibited to the public ; the money collected for his 
 education, we suppose, not being found sufficient 
 for the purpose. If his parents intend to appro- 
 priate the sum gained by exhibiting him, in aid 
 of the above fund, we heartily wish them success, 
 and cannot, perhaps, do them a more essential 
 service than by inserting the following notice, 
 which appeared in the Chronicle of the 17th 
 Dec. 18 12
 
 NATURAL MEMORY. 451 
 
 " SliNGULAR PHENOMENON. 
 
 " To be seen at Wigle}''s Exhibition Rooms, 
 Spring Gardens, a child only eight years of age, 
 who, without any previous knowledge of the 
 common rules of arithmetic, possesses the power 
 of solving arithmetical questions by the intuition 
 of his mind alone. He will instantly tell the 
 number of minutes and seconds in any given time 
 — multiply any two, three, or four figures by any 
 others — find all the fractions in any number of 
 six or seven places of figures — extract square 
 and cube roots in the midst of his juvenile pur- 
 suits. Many eminent mathematicians, and other 
 learned persons have witnessed his extraordinary 
 powers with astonishment. — Admission daily 
 from 12 till 4 o'clock, and from 8 to 9. One 
 shilling each person." 
 
 THE END. 
 
 J. Fawcett, Printer, 
 Mtwcastle Street, Loudon.
 
 Books printed for Sherwood, Neeli/, and Jones. 
 BAUSSETS LIFE OF FENELON. 
 
 In Two Volumes, 8vo. embellished with an elegant Portrait, 
 price 185. boards, 
 
 1. THE LIFE OF FENELON, Archbishop of 
 Carabrai ; compiled, from Original Manuscripts, by M. L. F. 
 De Bausset, formerly Bishop of Alais, Sec, Translated 
 from the French, 
 
 BY WILLIAM MUDFORD. 
 
 ''The utmost gentleness of manners, a temper which 
 nothing could disturb, perfect ingenuousness, eminent at- 
 tainments, a sublime genious, exalted virtue, and elevated 
 piety, created the singular interest which belonged to Fe- 
 nelon when livi ;g, and which still surrounds his memory. 
 
 " The work before us will highly gratify all who delight 
 to contemplate extraordiuary worth and excellence ; and, 
 indeed, in interest and beneficial tendency, how few per- 
 formances approach it!" — Monthly Review, March, 1811. 
 
 2. THE CHARACTERS AND PROPERTIES 
 OF TRUE CHARITY DISPLAYED, from the French 
 of Fenelon. One large Volume, 12mo. 4s, 6d. boards. 
 
 3. FENELON'S PIOUS REFLECTIONS, for 
 
 ev ry Day in the Month, Twelfth Edition, Price'ls. or 
 utatly bound in English Morocco, gs, ; in calf, 2s. 6d. ; 
 Morocco, 3s. 6d. 
 
 " This excellent little manual is too well known to the 
 public to require on our part any additional recommenda- 
 tion ; and tlie Memoirs of the amiable Fenelon, prefixed to 
 this edition, form a considerable improveraeut."~CrJ(ic«{ 
 Review. 
 
 As a companion to the above, (the same size S^ price,) 
 
 4. FENELON'S PIOUS THOUGHTS, con- 
 ceraing the Knowledge and Love of God. To which are 
 subjoined, Directions for a Holy Life, and the attaining 
 Christian Perfection ; also, the Closet Companion, or • 
 Course of Short Prayers for every Day in the Week. <n 
 
 / V
 
 ^^»?*- University of California 
 
 ^SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 i£Cu)9i| 
 
 •sno 
 
 1S)| 
 
 ^<?Aiiviian-# <rii]ONvsoi^^ 

 
 <0/^.^ -s^lllBRARY^^ 
 
 
 •i^"^ ^^AavjiaiH^ 
 
 v^lOSANCEl% 
 
 
 "^J713DNVS01^^^ %a3AINrt-3V^ 
 
 .\MElNIVERy/A. 
 
 ^lOSANCEtfj;> 
 
 -< 
 
 A 000 065 316 2 
 
 >s^>M-UBRARYQ^. 
 
 ^^SOJITVJJO'^ %0illV3JO'^ 
 
 ^lOSANCEl^y. ^OFCA11FO% 
 
 ,^0FCAIIF0% 
 
 DC 
 
 
 ^^Aavaaiii^^ 
 
 ^^AHvaani^'^ 
 
 YQ/v -..^lllBRARYac. 
 
 JO^ '^.i/OJIlVJJO'^ 
 
 ?i 
 
 
 ^WEUNIVER5/A 
 
 o 
 <ril33NYS01^ 
 
 3% ^OFCAIIFC^ .\WEUNIVER5//) 
 
 ^Til^DNVSOl^^' 
 
 vvlOS-ANCElfj-^ 
 o 
 
 '^/sajAiNnjwv' 
 
 ^lOSANCElfj^ 
 o 
 
 "^dMiNn-awv^